Golf R 2023 Owners Manual

Download as pdf or txt
Download as pdf or txt
You are on page 1of 364

Owner's Manual

Golf GTI, Golf R


Edition 11/2022
United States version
Teile-Nr.: 5H0012723SH
Print status: 19.08.2022
English USA: 2022.11
V1, R1, USA, en_US

Vehicle-specific information can be entered below:

Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)

Vehicle information

Engine output (kW)

Engine code

Transmission code

Paint number

Recommended engine oil

PR number Vehicle service type

Notes

Delivery inspection was performed on: Date of delivery/first approval (whichever occurs first):

Volkswagen dealer stamp Volkswagen dealer stamp

1
Fig. 1

Volkswagen AG works constantly to improve all of its products. Due to ongoing vehicle development, changes in design, equipment, and technology are possible at
any time. The information regarding equipment, appearance, performance, dimensions, weights, fuel consumption, standards, and functions of the vehicle is the
information that was available at the time of the editorial deadline for this manual. Some of the equipment and functions may not be available until later or may be
available only in certain countries. Contact your local authorized Volkswagen dealer or authorized Volkswagen Service Facility for more information.

The vehicle shown may be equipped with optional equipment for an additional price and is only offered in certain markets. An authorized Volkswagen dealer can
inform you about differences in your particular country. Subject to change. No legal obligations or commitments may be derived from the information, illustrations,
and descriptions in this manual.

No reprint, reproduction, or translation of this Manual is permitted, even in excerpts, without the express written consent of Volkswagen AG.

Volkswagen AG expressly reserves all rights under applicable copyright law. Subject to change.

© 2022 Volkswagen AG

2
We thank you for buying a Volkswagen vehicle
This Volkswagen vehicle is equipped with advanced technology incorporating a number of convenience features for you to enjoy in your daily driving.

Please carefully read and follow the information in this Owner's Manual. It will help you to become more familiar with your vehicle and to be able to
recognize and avoid hazardous situations for you and others.

If you have questions about your vehicle or if you believe that the manual is not complete, please contact your authorized Volkswagen dealer or your authorized
Volkswagen Service Facility. Authorized Volkswagen dealers and authorized Volkswagen Service Facilities always welcome your questions, suggestions, and
constructive criticism.

We hope you enjoy driving your vehicle and we wish you safe and pleasant motoring.

WARNING

Follow the important safety instructions about using child restraint systems in the front passenger seat ⇒ Introduction

3
About this Owner's Manual
This Owner's Manual is valid for all models and versions of your Volkswagen model and model year. The Owner's Manual describes all equipment and models
without indicating special equipment or model versions. This may include descriptions of equipment that your vehicle may not have or that may only be available in
some countries.

You can find details of your actual vehicle equipment in your sales documentation or by contacting an authorized Volkswagen dealer or authorized Volkswagen
Service Facility. Volkswagen recommends contacting an authorized Volkswagen dealer or authorized Volkswagen Service Facility.

This Owner's Manual describes a passenger vehicle.

All information in this Owner's Manual was correct at the time of printing. Due to continuous vehicle development, there may be differences between your vehicle
and the information in this Owner's Manual. No legal commitment can be derived from the information, illustrations, or descriptions in this manual.

Due to legal and technical requirements, the vehicle may be provided with different Owner's Manual variants depending on the country.

Printed Owner's Manual

The printed Owner's Manual describes the range of functions of the vehicle at the time of release. Additions and amendments to the Owner's Manual may also be
added in the form of supplements.

An alphabetically ordered keyword index as well as a list of abbreviations that explains technical abbreviations and designations are included to assist with
orientation and understanding of the printed manual.

Make sure that the printed documents are in the vehicle if you wish to sell or lend the car. Volkswagen also recommends resetting the Infotainment system to its
factory settings in order to delete all personal data.

4
Explanations
Brief definitions are placed in front of some sections in a different color to summarize the topic in question. Detailed information about the systems and equipment
along with their properties, conditions, and system limitations is included in the associated sections.

The following section explains phrasings and terms found in the Owner's Manual to help understanding.

Directions

Directions (left, right, front, back) are in reference to the driving direction unless noted otherwise.

Units and speeds

The display in miles instead of kilometers or mph instead of km/h is determined by the versions of the instrument cluster and Infotainment system that are installed,
which varies depending on the country where the vehicle is sold.

Illustrations

Illustrations are only for orientation and are simply used to provide a visual display of descriptions and instructions. The illustrations may differ from your vehicle.

This Owner's Manual was created for left-hand drive vehicles. For vehicles with right-hand drive steering , controls are sometimes arranged differently from what is
shown in the illustrations or described in the text.

Form of address

To improve readability, plural pronouns are used here to refer to a singular subject of any gender. This applies to all genders equally. The use of abbreviations are
for editorial purposes and do not contain any evaluation.

Terms used and their meanings:


Sunroof The term "power sunroof" is used as a synonym for all variants of the tilting and sliding panoramic sunroof depending on the vehicle equipment.

Authorized Volkswagen dealer or authorized Volkswagen Service Facility Authorized Volkswagen dealer or authorized Volkswagen Service Facility refers to
workshops with instructed or trained personnel that specialize in servicing passenger vehicles. A qualified professional can be an authorized
Volkswagen dealer or authorized Volkswagen Service Facility or an independent workshop.

Authorized Volkswagen dealer or authorized Volkswagen Service Facility Authorized Volkswagen dealer or authorized Volkswagen Service Facility refers to
workshops that have a contractual relationship with Volkswagen. This contractual relationship means that they have access to more information as well
as a direct line of communication to the manufacturer.

Contact an authorized Volkswagen dealer or authorized Volkswagen Service Facility In some situations, it is necessary for you to drive your vehicle to an
authorized Volkswagen dealer or authorized Volkswagen Service Facility so that it can be checked.

Contact an authorized Volkswagen dealer or authorized Volkswagen Service Facility for assistance If it is no longer possible to continue driving your
vehicle, it is necessary to have it checked directly where it is by a professional. A decision regarding whether the vehicle can continue to be driven
following inspection or whether it needs to be towed must then be made depending on the circumstances.

5
Explanation of symbols
Indicates a reference to a section within a chapter containing important information and safety warnings that should always be
heeded.

The arrow indicates the end of a section.

This symbol indicates situations where the vehicle must be stopped as quickly as possible.

The symbol means “Trademark” and indicates a recognized but not (yet) officially registered trademark. However, the absence of this
TM
symbol does not constitute a waiver of any rights associated with intellectual property.

This symbol indicates a registered trademark. However, the absence of this symbol does not constitute a waiver of any rights associated
with intellectual property.


Symbols of this type refer to warnings in the same section or on the specified page, pointing out possible risks that can cause accidents

and personal injuries and how to help prevent them.

⇒ Cross-reference to a warning of potential property damage, in the same section or on the specified page.

DANGER

DANGER indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, will result in death or serious injury.

WARNING

WARNING indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in death or serious injury.

CAUTION

CAUTION indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in minor or moderate injury.

NOTICE

NOTICE is used to address practices not related to physical injury, but related to damage to the vehicle.

Texts with this symbol contain information about the environment and how you can help to protect it.

Texts with this symbol contain supplementary information.

6
Vehicle overviews
View from the front

Fig. 2 Overview of vehicle from the front.

Door handles ⇒ Doors and central locking button

Headlights ⇒ Exterior lighting

Sensors for assistance systems ⇒ Exterior care and cleaning

Behind a cover: mount for towing eye ⇒ Towing

Behind the Volkswagen emblem: radar sensor for assistance systems ⇒ Exterior care and cleaning

Opening lever for the hood ⇒ Opening and closing the hood

Windshield:

With VIN ⇒ Technical data

With windshield wipers ⇒ Operating the windshield wiper lever

With camera for assistance systems in the interior rearview mirror area ⇒ Exterior care and cleaning

With rain/light sensor in the interior rearview mirror area ⇒ Rain/light sensor, ⇒ Exterior care and cleaning

Rear view

7
Fig. 3 Rear vehicle overview.

Roof antenna ⇒ Infotainment system and aerials

High-mounted brake light

Rear window:

With rear window defroster ⇒ Rear window defroster

With rear window wiper ⇒ Operating the windshield wiper lever

With window antenna ⇒ Infotainment system and aerials

Volkswagen emblem for opening the trunk lid ⇒ Trunk lid

Parking systems camera area ⇒ Rear View Camera , ⇒ Exterior care and cleaning

Number plate light ⇒ Exterior lighting

Behind a cover: mount for towing eye ⇒ Towing

Behind the bumper: radar sensor for assistance systems ⇒ Exterior care and cleaning

Sensors for assistance systems ⇒ Exterior care and cleaning

Mounting points for the vehicle jack ⇒ Wheel change

Taillights ⇒ Exterior lighting

Fuel filler flap ⇒ Fuel types and refueling

Outside mirrors ⇒ Outside mirrors

with Lane Change System (Side Assist) display ⇒ Lane Change System

with exit warning system indicator ⇒ Exit warning system

Driver door

8
Fig. 4 Driver door: Controls.

Door handle

Central locking button to lock and unlock the vehicle ⇒ Central locking button

Central locking indicator light ⇒ Indicator light in the driver's door

Knob for outside mirror positions and functions ⇒ Outside mirrors

Buttons for operating the power windows ⇒ Opening and closing the windows

Button for deactivating the power window buttons in the rear doors ⇒ Opening and closing the windows

Hood release lever ⇒ Opening and closing the hood

Storage compartment

With cup holder

With storage option for a reflective vest ⇒ Emergency equipment

Driver side

9
Fig. 5 Driver’s side overview.

Vents ⇒ Air distribution and blower speed

Control panel:

For light functions ⇒ Headlights

For window heating and ventilation ⇒ Rear window defroster, ⇒ Air distribution and blower speed

Turn signal and high beam lever ⇒ Switching the turn signals on and off , ⇒ Switching the high beam headlights on and off

With switch and buttons for driver assistance systems ⇒ Driver assistance systems

Multi-function steering wheel controls:

For driver assistance systems ⇒ Driver assistance systems

For menu selection ⇒ Operating the Volkswagen Digital Cockpit

For accepting telephone calls

For audio, navigation , ⇒ Infotainment system, ⇒ Navigation

For adjusting the volume

For voice operation activation (may not function depending on the equipment) ⇒ Voice control

In order to switch between the current and previous menus ⇒ Operating the Volkswagen Digital Cockpit

Horn

Instrument cluster ⇒ Overview of Volkswagen Digital Cockpit

With warning and indicator lights ⇒ Symbols in the instrument cluster

Windshield wiper/washer lever ⇒ Window wipers

With buttons for menu operation ⇒ Operating the Volkswagen Digital Cockpit

Controls:

For setting the temperature of the air conditioning system ⇒ Heating and air conditioning system

For adjusting the volume


10
Infotainment system ⇒ Infotainment system

Controls:

For the air conditioning system ⇒ Heating and air conditioning system

For Driving Mode Selection ⇒ Driving Mode Selection

Controls:

For driver assistance systems ⇒ Driver assistance systems

Button for switching the emergency flashers on or off ⇒ In case of an emergency

For parking and maneuvering assist systems ⇒ Parking and maneuvering

Pedals ⇒ Information on the pedals

Installation location of driver’s front airbag ⇒ Airbag system

Lever for adjusting the steering wheel position ⇒ Steering wheel

Bottom section of the center console

Fig. 6 Overview of the lower section of the center console in vehicles with a DSG automated transmission.

11
Fig. 7 Overview of the lower section of the center console for vehicles with manual transmission.

Button to start and stop the engine (Keyless Start) ⇒ Starter button

USB sockets with charge function for external device rechargeable batteries (depending on the vehicle equipment) ⇒ Wired and wireless connections,
⇒ Charging Options for Mobile Devices

Storage compartment with function for wireless charging according to QI standard ⇒ Charging Options for Mobile Devices

Lever or knob:

For DSG® automated transmission ⇒ Automatic transmission

or manual transmission ⇒ Manual transmission

Electronic parking brake ⇒ Electronic parking brake

Storage compartment with cup holder

Center armrest with storage compartment

Parking lock P in vehicles with DSG ® automated transmission ⇒ Automatic transmission: Selecting a position

Passenger’s side

12
Fig. 8 Passenger's side: instrument panel overview

Installation location of the front passenger’s airbag in the instrument panel ⇒ Airbag system

Adjustable vent ⇒ Air distribution and blower speed

Glove compartment with handle

Controls in the headliner


Symbol Meaning

Buttons for interior/reading lights ⇒ Interior/reading lights, ambient lighting .

Sunroof switch ⇒ Sunroof.

Buttons for Emergency Call, Information Call and Roadside Assistance Call ⇒ Information Call,
Roadside Assistance Call and Emergency Call Service.

13
Driver information
Symbols in the instrument cluster
The warning and indicator lights can turn on individually or in combination with each other and indicate warnings, malfunctions and certain functions. Some warning
and indicator lights come on when you switch the ignition on and must turn off after some time.

Indicator lights that turn on in the light switch are described in the “Lights” chapter ⇒ Switching the lights on and off .

WARNING

Failure to respond to illuminated warning lights and messages may result in a vehicle breakdown, accidents and serious injuries or death.

Never ignore illuminated warning lights and messages.

Stop the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so.

Do not continue driving!

Central warning light ⇒ Priority 1 warning message

Fasten safety belt ⇒ Fasten seat belts reminder and seat belt safety indicator

Electronic parking brake switched on ⇒ Electronic parking brake

Holding force of the electronic parking brake too low ⇒ The holding force is too low for the current situation

Do not continue driving!

Brake system malfunction ⇒ Brake system malfunction

Do not continue driving!

Electromechanical brake booster failed ⇒ Electromechanical brake servo failure

Do not continue driving!

Brake fluid level too low ⇒ Brake fluid level

Check brake system ⇒ Brake pad wear indicator

Take over steering and be ready to brake. ⇒ Introduction

Do not continue driving!

Engine oil level too low ⇒ Engine oil level very low

Do not continue to drive!

Engine oil pressure too low ⇒ Engine oil pressure too low

Do not continue to drive!

Engine coolant system malfunction ⇒ Engine coolant

Do not continue driving!

Steering malfunction ⇒ Steering malfunction

Do not continue driving!

Engine control malfunction ⇒ Engine control malfunction, ⇒ The engine no longer starts automatically

Do not continue driving!

12 V energy supply malfunction ⇒ 12-volt power supply

Collision warning ⇒ Warning levels and braking support

14
Take over the steering immediately ⇒ Take over the steering immediately

Do not continue to drive!

Transmission overheating ⇒ Transmission overheating

Central warning light ⇒ Priority 2 warning message , ⇒ The brake is too hot

Airbag or safety belt pretensioner system deactivated with diagnostic equipment ⇒ Airbag system or safety belt pretensioners

deactivated with diagnostic device

Airbag system or safety belt pretensioner malfunction ⇒ Airbag system or safety belt pretensioners malfunction

Front passenger's front airbag deactivated ⇒ Front passenger's front airbag switched off

Front passenger’s airbag enabled ⇒ Front passenger's front airbag enabled

Emergency Call Service limited ⇒ Emergency Call Service limited

Emergency Call Service malfunctioning ⇒ Emergency Call Service malfunction

Electronic parking brake malfunction ⇒ Electronic parking brake malfunction

Brake too hot ⇒ The brake is too hot

Comes on: Electronic Stability Control (ESC) malfunction ⇒ ESC malfunction

Flashes: Electronic Stability Control (ESC) or Anti-slip regulation (ASR) in operation ⇒ Electronic Stability Control (ESC)

ESC Sport switched on ⇒ ESC Sport

Electronic Stabilization Control (ESC) switched off ⇒ ESC Off

Anti-Slip Regulation (ASR) switched off ⇒ ASR

Anti-Lock Braking System (ABS) malfunction ⇒ ABS failure or malfunction

Engine oil system malfunction ⇒ Engine oil system malfunction

Engine oil level too low ⇒ Engine oil level too low

Engine oil level too high ⇒ Engine oil level too high

Engine oil system malfunction ⇒ Engine oil system malfunction

Tank almost empty ⇒ Fuel tank almost empty

Semi-automated driving assistance (Travel Assist) not available ⇒ Travel Assist is not available or is not functioning as expected

Tank cap not closed ⇒ Fuel tank cap open

Driving light failure ⇒ Exterior lighting malfunction

15
Rain/light sensor malfunction ⇒ Rain/light sensor malfunction , ⇒ Rain/light sensor malfunction

Windshield wiper malfunction ⇒ Windshield wiper malfunction

Washer fluid level too low ⇒ Washer fluid level too low

Steering malfunction ⇒ Steering malfunction

Do not continue to drive!

Tire pressure low ⇒ Tire pressure low

Do not continue to drive!

Tire pressure monitoring system malfunction ⇒ Tire Pressure Monitoring System malfunction

Engine control is malfunctioning ⇒ Engine control malfunction

Autonomous Emergency Braking (Front Assist) not available ⇒ Autonomous Emergency Braking

Autonomous Emergency Braking (Front Assist) switched off ⇒ Using Front Assist

Adaptive cruise control (ACC) not available ⇒ ACC is not available

Emergency Assist not available ⇒ Semi-automatic vehicle control in a medical emergency

Lane Keeping System (Lane Assist) not available ⇒ Lane Assist not available

Semi-automatic vehicle control in a medical emergency (Emergency Assist) is functioning ⇒ Driving with Emergency Assist

Lane Assist in control ⇒ Driving with Lane Assist

Side Assist malfunction ⇒ Side Assist malfunction

Rear Traffic Alert malfunction ⇒ Rear Traffic Alert

Rear Traffic Alert brakes ⇒ Rear Traffic Alert

Exhaust system malfunction ⇒ Exhaust-related malfunction

Particulate filter clogged with soot ⇒ Particulate filter clogged with soot

Engine speed limited ⇒ Engine speed limited

12-volt power supply malfunction ⇒ 12-volt power supply

Transmission malfunction ⇒ Clutch “slips”, ⇒ Transmission overheating

Adaptive chassis control (DCC) malfunction ⇒ Adaptive chassis control malfunction

All-wheel drive (4MOTION) ⇒ Malfunction in the all-wheel drive

Vehicle key not in vehicle ⇒ Valid vehicle key cannot be detected

Press the brake pedal. ⇒ The engine is not starting

16
Turn signals ⇒ Turn signal indicator light

Lane Assist active ⇒ Driving with Lane Assist

Semi-automated driving assistance (Travel Assist) active ⇒ Introduction

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) regulates, no vehicle driving ahead is detected ⇒ Switching ACC on and off

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) regulates, vehicle driving ahead is detected ⇒ Switching ACC on and off

High beams or headlight flasher ⇒ Switching the high beam headlights on and off

Outside temperature is below +39 °F (+4 °C) ⇒ Volkswagen Digital Cockpit information displays

Start/Stop system active ⇒ Start-stop system

Start/Stop system not available ⇒ Start-stop system

Economical driving condition ⇒ Fuel-efficient driving

Service due ⇒ Service interval display

Semi-automated driving assistance (Travel Assist) active, Adaptive Cruise Control active, adaptive lane guidance inactive ⇒

Introduction

High beam control active ⇒ Switching on high beam control

Take over the steering ⇒ Take over the steering

Autonomous Emergency Braking (Front Assist) starts ⇒ Autonomous Emergency Braking starts

Distance warning ⇒ Warning levels and braking support

Eco driving mode ⇒ Driving mode properties

Comfort driving mode ⇒ Driving mode properties

Individual driving mode ⇒ Driving mode properties

Sport driving mode ⇒ Driving mode properties

Mobile phone connected via Bluetooth® ⇒ Volkswagen Digital Cockpit information displays

Drift driving mode ⇒ Driving mode properties

Race driving mode ⇒ Driving mode properties

Special driving mode ⇒ Driving mode properties

Mobile phone battery charge level ⇒ Volkswagen Digital Cockpit information displays

Note about information in the Owner's Manual ⇒ Note about information in the Owner's Manual

17
Warning and information texts
The status of some functions inside the vehicle and vehicle components are checked when the ignition is switched on or while driving. Malfunctions are indicated by
red and yellow warning symbols in the instrument cluster display and may also be signaled audibly in some cases. The appearance of texts and symbols may vary
depending on the instrument cluster version.

Any malfunctions currently occurring can also be manually called up. To do this, open the Vehicle status or Vehicle menu ⇒ Vehicle settings menu.

Priority 1 warning message

The red central warning light flashes or comes on, in some cases together with warning tones or additional symbols. Do not continue driving! There is a hazard.
Check the malfunction. Contact an authorized Volkswagen dealer or authorized Volkswagen Service Facility immediately for assistance.

Priority 2 warning message

The yellow central warning light flashes or comes on, in some cases together with warning tones or additional symbols. Malfunctions or insufficient operating fluids
can cause vehicle damage and vehicle malfunctions. Check the malfunction as soon as possible. Immediately contact an authorized Volkswagen dealer or
authorized Volkswagen Service Facility to have the system checked. Volkswagen recommends contacting an authorized Volkswagen dealer or authorized
Volkswagen Service Facility.

Note about information in the Owner's Manual

You can find more information about the existing warning message in the Owner's Manual.

Informational text

Information about various processes in the vehicle.

If there are multiple warning messages, the symbols will appear consecutively for several seconds. The symbols will appear until the malfunction is corrected.

If warning messages about​ malfunctions appear when the ignition is switched on, settings or information displays may not appear as described. If the
malfunction persists, contact a suitably qualified professional. Volkswagen recommends contacting an authorized Volkswagen dealer or authorized Volkswagen
Service Facility.

Introduction to the instrument cluster


The vehicle is equipped with a Volkswagen Digital Cockpit. The instrument cluster shows essential information, such as speed.

In addition, the following functions, among others, are available depending on the equipment:

Various menus, such as for the driver assistance systems.

Status displays for the driver assistance systems.

Display messages.

Warning and indicator lights.

Information about economy and range.

Content can be individually adapted and settings can be changed in the menus.

WARNING

Operating the Volkswagen Digital Cockpit and Infotainment system can distract you from traffic. If the driver is distracted while driving, accidents and serious or
fatal injuries can occur.

Always drive attentively and responsibly.

Never operate the instrument cluster while driving.

Only adjust any settings in the instrument cluster or Infotainment system when the vehicle is stationary.

WARNING

If there is a serious fault in the instrument cluster, the display may be turned off. The warning light may also come on here. No further warnings can be
displayed. This may result in vehicle breakdowns while driving, accidents and serious or fatal injuries.

Safely stop the vehicle.

See an authorized Volkswagen dealer or authorized Volkswagen Service Facility for assistance.

After starting the engine when the 12 V vehicle battery is severely drained or when it has been replaced or jump-started, the system settings, e.g. personal
convenience settings and programming, and user profiles may be changed or erased. Check and correct the settings after the 12 V vehicle battery is sufficiently
recharged.

18
Digital Instrument cluster
Overview of Volkswagen Digital Cockpit
The Digital Cockpit is a digital instrument cluster with a high-resolution TFT color display. By selecting different secondary displays, other displays can be shown in
addition to the standard dials, such as the tachometer. The term “Volkswagen Digital Cockpit” is also used to refer to the digital instrument cluster in the following.

Fig. 9 Digital instrument cluster in the instrument panel (general example).

Secondary displays.

Pop-ups: Situation-related messages, e.g. navigation information.

Main display area.

Secondary displays.

Digital speed display.

Currently engaged gear or selector lever level.

Operating the Volkswagen Digital Cockpit

19
Fig. 10 Right side of the multi-function steering wheel: Operating the Volkswagen Digital Cockpit (variant 1).

20
Fig. 11 Right side of the multi-function steering wheel: Operating the Volkswagen Digital Cockpit (variant 2).

Menus cannot be accessed when a priority 1 warning message is displayed → page , Warning and information texts. You can confirm and hide some messages
using the button on the multi-function steering wheel fig. 10, fig. 11.

Views in the display


1. Press the button to switch the main display ⇒ Overview of Volkswagen Digital Cockpit.

The following views can be shown in the display area:

Summary Before starting and after switching off the engine: Display with information about the vehicle status, e.g. total mileage.

Classic Display of dials.

Navigation Navigation map and route guidance information.

Driver assistance systems Display of the active driver assistance systems.

Special Depending on vehicle equipment, it may be possible to display alternative displays here, e.g. sport displays.

Selecting secondary displays


1. Select the right or left secondary display area using the or buttons.

2. Select the preferred secondary display using the and arrow buttons.

3. Confirm your selection with the button.

Showing and Hiding the Secondary Displays


Press and hold the button.

Configuring secondary displays

You can configure the secondary displays to select which secondary displays are available in the secondary display area:

1. Select the right or left secondary display area using the or buttons.

2. Use the arrow buttons and to navigate to and select the Settings menu.

3. Press the button to apply changes.

21
A check mark indicates that the respective secondary display is activated.

4. To return to the menu selection, press the or button.


The secondary displays can be configured or hidden independently of each other.

Navigation map in the digital instrument cluster

Depending on the vehicle equipment, the digital instrument cluster may display a detailed navigation map.

The size of the navigation map can be adjusted continuously. To select the desired map size, proceed as follows:

1. To open the Navigation display area, press the button.

2. Press the or arrow buttons on the multi-function steering wheel to zoom in or out.

3. Press and hold the button on the multi-function steering wheel to show or hide the secondary displays.

If warning messages about​ malfunctions appear when the ignition is switched on, settings or information displays may not appear as described. If the
malfunction persists, contact a suitably qualified professional. Volkswagen recommends contacting an authorized Volkswagen dealer or authorized Volkswagen
Service Facility.

WARNING

Operating the instrument cluster and the Infotainment system can distract from traffic. If the driver is distracted while driving, accidents and serious or fatal
injuries can occur.

Always drive attentively and responsibly.

Never operate the instrument cluster while driving.

Only adjust any settings in the instrument cluster or Infotainment system when the vehicle is stationary.

Volkswagen Digital Cockpit information displays


Possible displays in the main display area of the digital instrument cluster
The main displays depend on the vehicle equipment and may show different information ⇒ Overview of Volkswagen Digital Cockpit:

Outside temperature display.

Time and date.

Driver assistance systems ⇒ Driver assistance systems .

Gear recommendation ⇒ Gear recommendation.

Open doors, hood and trunk lid.

Speed warning for winter tires.

Radiator fan run-on.

Engine code ().

Infotainment system and navigation information.

Range ⇒ Digital fuel gauge.

Service interval display.

Depending on the vehicle equipment: Status display for Active Cylinder Management (ACT ) ⇒ Eco tips.

Detected road sign from the traffic sign recognition.

Fuel-efficient driving .

Selector lever position for automatic transmission.

Warning and information texts.

Warning and indicator lights.

Outside temperature display

When outside temperatures are colder than approximately +4 °C (+39 °F), a snowflake symbol also appears on the outside temperature display . This symbol
remains on until the outside temperature rises above +6 °C (+43 °F).

In the following situations, the temperature displayed may be higher than the actual outside temperature due to heat radiating from the engine:

When the vehicle is stationary

When the driving speed is very low

The measurement range is from -45 °C (-49 °F) to +76 °C (+169 °F)

22
WARNING

Roads may be icy at low outside temperatures, even above the freezing point. On icy roads, there is an increased risk of accident. This could result in serious or
fatal injuries.

If the symbol appears in the instrument cluster display, drive with particular care.

Always adapt your speed and driving style to the visibility, weather, road and traffic conditions.

Never rely solely on the outside temperature display.

Gear recommendation

A recommendation to select a fuel-saving gear may be displayed while driving ⇒ Gear recommendation.

Open doors, hood and trunk lid

If, after unlocking the vehicle and while driving, any doors and/or the hood or trunk lid are open, this is displayed in the Volkswagen Digital Cockpit and an audible
signal may also sound.

Speed warning for winter tires

If the set maximum speed is exceeded, this will be shown in the digital instrument cluster.

Settings for the speed warning can be adjusted in the vehicle settings in the Infotainment system ⇒ Vehicle settings menu.

Radiator fan run-on

This indicator appears after the engine has been switched off, if the radiator fan continues to run.

The radiator fan may continue running due to:

Exhaust gas post-treatment, through particulate filter regeneration, for example.

Active brake cooling after descent.

Dissipation of engine heat after high load, e.g. trailer mode.

Engine code
1. Open the service menu ⇒ Service menu.

2. Select the Engine code menu item.

Fuel-efficient driving

If the vehicle is driving in a fuel-efficient manner, this will be indicated while driving .

Selector lever position for automatic transmission

The selector lever position and, depending on the driving mode, the gear that is engaged, are shown on the selector lever and in the digital instrument cluster. The
gear shift pattern is displayed when the brake or the selector lever in the instrument cluster is actuated ⇒ Automatic transmission: Selecting a position .

Possible secondary displays in the Volkswagen Digital Cockpit


In the secondary display area of the digital instrument cluster, other views can be configured and displayed via a configuration menu, depending on the vehicle
equipment ⇒ Overview of Volkswagen Digital Cockpit:

Operating temperatures.

Time and date.

Driving data menus, e.g. Travel time/distance driven.

Compass display.

Charge pressure.

Output.

Torque splitter.

Navigation information.

Phone information.

Destination information.

Operating temperatures

Depending on the vehicle equipment, the following operating temperatures may be displayed:

Engine oil.

Engine coolant.

23
Transmission.

Compass display

If the Compass secondary display is activated, the direction in which you are currently driving is shown as a blue arrow with a depiction of the vehicle and a
compass.

Torque splitter

In the Torque splitter secondary display, the current torque for each wheel is displayed.

Navigation information

When route guidance is activated, the Navigation instruction auxiliary display shows the direction of travel as an arrow.

The submenu lists your home address and a list of your most recent destinations. Route guidance can be started with the button ⇒ Navigation.

Phone

If the Phone secondary display is activated and a cell phone is connected via Bluetooth, the Bluetooth symbol will be displayed in the Volkswagen Digital Cockpit
display. The symbol also indicates the charge level of the mobile device.

In the submenu, a list of the most recent phone calls is shown and you have the option to call the displayed contacts back.

Destination information

When route guidance is activated, the Destination information secondary display shows the predicted journey time and distance from the destination in km or miles.

Some displays in the Volkswagen Digital Cockpit may be hidden due to events that occur suddenly, e.g. incoming phone calls.

Depending on the equipment, some settings and displays may also appear in the Infotainment system.

Tachometer
The start of the red area on the tachometer indicates the maximum permissible engine speed for all gears when the engine is run in and at operating temperature.

Before reaching the red area, shift to the next highest gear, select the selector lever position D/S or take your foot off the accelerator pedal.

NOTICE

A heavy engine load, especially when the engine is cold, can lead to engine damage.

Avoid high engine speeds, full acceleration and heavy engine loads when the engine is cold.

To prevent engine damage, the tachometer indicator may only be in the red area of the scale briefly.

Shifting up early helps save fuel and reduce operating noises.

Fuel gauge
Digital fuel gauge

Fig. 12 Fuel gauge on the Volkswagen Digital Cockpit (general example).

WARNING

If the fuel level is too low, this can result in an irregular fuel supply and “sputtering” or stalling of the engine, particularly when going uphill or downhill. This can
cause breakdowns in road traffic, accidents and serious or fatal injuries. The steering, all driver assistance systems and braking assistance systems will not
work if the engine cuts out due to fuel shortage or irregular fuel supply.

Make sure that the fuel tank is always sufficiently filled.

Always refill the fuel tank once it reaches a fill level of 1/4.
24
NOTICE

Irregular fuel supply can result in misfiring and unburnt fuel entering the exhaust system.

Never drive with a completely empty fuel tank.

The small arrow next to the fuel pump symbol on the fuel gauge indicates which side of the vehicle the fuel filler flap is on.

Troubleshooting
Fuel tank almost empty

The yellow indicator light turns on. The reserve supply (red marking ) is being used.

1. Refuel at the next opportunity.

Fuel tank cap open

The yellow indicator light turns on.

1. Close the fuel tank cap.

Engine coolant temperature gauge


Digital coolant temperature gauge
Depending on the vehicle equipment, the coolant temperature may be displayed in the Operating temperatures secondary display.

If the warning light flashes, the coolant temperature is too high or the coolant level is too low ⇒ Troubleshooting.

Head-up display (HUD)

Fig. 13 In the driver's field of vision: sample indicators on the head-up display.

The head-up display projects selected


information displays or warning
messages from assist systems or from
the Infotainment system in the visual
range of drivers.

Switching the head-up display on and off

The head-up display (HUD) fig. 13 can be switched on and off using the vehicle settings in the Infotainment system.

Height adjustment

To individually adapt the angle of view, set the head-up display in the corresponding menu on the instrument cluster or in the vehicle settings of the Infotainment
system:

1. Setting the optimal seat position.

2. Set your preferred position and inclination of the head-up display with the function keys or the buttons on the multi-function steering wheel.

The rotation can also be adjusted in the vehicle settings of the Infotainment system.

Settings in the Infotainment system

Additional settings for the head-up display can be adjusted in the Vehicle menu in the Infotainment system.

1. In the Vehicle menu, select the Inner view.

2. Tap the Head-up display function key.

25
The following setting options are available:

Setting the display brightness and the color scheme of the head-up display.

Selection of the display contents for the head-up display, e.g. driver assist system or Infotainment system displays.

Alternative head-up display colors in poor weather conditions, e.g. snow.

Some display contents cannot be hidden, such as warning messages.

The brightness of the display reduces automatically as the ambient brightness decreases. The basic brightness is set together with the instrument illumination
⇒ Instrument and switch illumination.

Reflections are possible due to unfavorable sunlight.

Sunglasses with polarization filters can negatively influence the readability.

The optimal readability of the head-up display depends on the position of the seat and the height adjustment of the head-up display.

Driving data menu


The driving data menu shows driving and consumption data, such as the driving duration or kilometers driven. Multiple driving data displays are available in the
auxiliary display area ⇒ Digital Instrument cluster, ⇒ Volkswagen Digital Cockpit information displays.

Depending on the vehicle equipment, various driving data can be displayed. The displayed driving data is dependent on the current driving style, the vehicle status,
e.g. particle filter regeneration, and the current driving situation, e.g. city traffic. The driving data is determined as an average value over sections of different
distances and the currently displayed value may therefore differ from the actual average value.

Since start memory


If the trip is interrupted for more than two hours, the memory is erased.

Since refuel memory


Display and memory of the collective driving and consumption data. The memory is erased when the vehicle is refueled.

Extended period memory


The memory stores driving statistics for up to 4166 days of driving time or 99999.9 km (mi) distance driven. If one of these maximum thresholds is met, the memory
is erased.

Reset driving data menus


1. Press the or button.

2. Select the corresponding driving data menu in the configuration menu with the and arrow buttons.

An arrow behind the entry in the configuration menu indicates a submenu.

3. In the submenu, select Reset data and confirm by pressing the button.

If you would like to know how many kilometers are driven in the course of a day, reset the Long-term memory before you start driving and read it again at the
end of the day.

WARNING

If the driver is distracted while driving, accidents and serious injuries can occur. Operating the instrument cluster and the Infotainment system can distract from
traffic.

Always drive attentively and responsibly.

Never operate the instrument cluster while driving.

Only adjust any settings in the instrument cluster or Infotainment system when the vehicle is stationary.

Service
Service menu
Depending on the equipment, settings can be applied in the service menu.

Opening the Service Menu


1. Select the Travel time/distance driven information profile in the secondary display.

2. Press and hold the or button on the multi-function steering wheel for approximately six seconds.

3. Use the and arrow buttons to navigate the menu.

Resetting the service interval display

26
1. Select Service menu.

2. Follow the instructions in the instrument cluster display.

Resetting the oil change service


1. Select Reset oil change service menu.

2. Follow the instructions in the instrument cluster display.

Engine code
1. Select Engine code menu.

The engine code is shown on the instrument cluster display.

Setting the time


1. Select Time menu.

2. Set the time with the and arrow buttons.

Displaying copyright information


1. Select the Copyright menu to access the copyright information.

Service interval display


Displays about service events appear in the Volkswagen Digital Cockpit and in the Infotainment system. There are different versions of the Volkswagen Digital
Cockpit and Infotainment system; therefore, the appearances of the displays may vary.

Service appointments at Volkswagen are divided into oil change services and inspections. The service interval display informs the driver about the next service
appointment which includes an engine oil change and about the next inspection.

The service intervals are specified for vehicles with the fixed oil change service interval.

Intervals are determined individually on vehicles with the flexible oil change service interval. Oil change services only need to be performed if the vehicle requires it.
The specific operating conditions and the personal driving style are also taken into consideration. The service early warning message is first displayed 30 days prior
to the calculated oil change service due date. The displayed remaining distance to be traveled is always rounded to 100 km (miles) and the remaining time is
rounded to whole days.

Service notification

If an oil change service or an inspection service is due in the near future, a service notification will be displayed when the ignition is switched on.

The specified mileage or time is the distance or time until the next service can be completed.

Service event

When an oil change service or an inspection service is due, a chime will sound when switching on the ignition and you can then see a wrench symbol for a few
seconds in the instrument cluster display together with one of the following displays:

Inspection now!

Oil change now!

Oil change service and inspection now!

Checking a service due date

When the ignition is on, the engine is off, and the vehicle is stationary, the current service due date can be viewed at any time:

1. Tap the Vehicle function key.

2. Select the Status menu item and tap the Service function key to display the service information.

The service due date can also be checked via the service menu ⇒ Service menu.

Resetting the service interval display

If the service interval display was not reset after the oil change service or inspection service, the display can be reset as follows:

The service interval display can only be reset through the service menu ⇒ Service menu.

Do not reset the service interval display between service intervals or incorrect information will be displayed.

If the oil change service interval was manually reset, the service interval display then also switches to a fixed service interval, even on vehicles with the flexible oil
change service interval.

The service message disappears automatically after a few seconds when the engine is running or when the button on the multi-function steering wheel
is pressed.

If the 12 V vehicle battery in a vehicle with the flexible service interval has been disconnected for an extended period, the time for the next oil change service
cannot be calculated. Therefore, the service interval displays may show incorrect calculations. If this is the case, follow the maximum permissible maintenance
intervals.

27
Time and date
Setting the time and date in the Infotainment system
1. Tap the Settings function key ⇒ Vehicle settings menu.

2. Select the Time and date menu item to set the time and date.

3. Select time source:

Automatic.

Manual.
The time and date are only displayed in the Infotainment system.

Setting the time in the Volkswagen Digital Cockpit


1. Open the service menu ⇒ Service menu.

2. Select the Time menu.

3. Set the time with the and arrow buttons.

Sport displays
Lap timer in the instrument cluster
The lap timer offers the option to
measure and save the individual lap
times on a race course manually in the
vehicle as well as compare these times
to the best times previously recorded.

Depending on the equipment, the lap timer can be displayed in the instrument cluster.

The following main menus can be displayed:

Lap timer.

Lap (with current lap specification).

Statistics.

Switching between menus


1. Press the or button on the multi-function steering wheel.

For example, the following list will show the layout of the menus in the instrument cluster display. The actual scope of the menus and the names of individual menu
items depend on the instrument cluster version and the vehicle electronics.

Menu displays and functions


Lap timer menu:

Start The time measurement of a lap is started.

Since start The time measurement begins when the vehicle begins to drive. If it is already moving, the time measurement starts when the vehicle comes to a
stop in the meantime.

Statistics An overview of the laps previously recorded is displayed.

Lap menu:

Stop The active time measurement is paused. The lap is not finished.

Resume The paused time measurement is resumed.

Split time A split time is displayed for approximately five seconds. The active time measurement continues to run simultaneously.

New lap The time of the current lap is stopped and a new lap is started. The time for the finished lap is transferred to the statistics.

Cancel lap The time measurement is stopped and discarded. The current lap will not be recorded in the statistics.

End The time measurement is finished. The lap will be recorded in the statistics.

Statistics menu:

Back The display switches back to the previous menu.

Reset All saved statistics data is reset.

The previously driven lap times are displayed in the Statistics menu. If the maximum lap number of 99 laps or the maximum total duration of 99 hours, 59 minutes
and 59 seconds is reached, a new time measurement can be started before the statistics are reset.

28
WARNING

If the driver is distracted, accidents and serious injuries can occur. Operating the lap timer can distract you from traffic.

Only adjust lap timer presets and open the statistics when the vehicle is stationary.

Only operate the lap timer while driving if the driving situation is easy to control and monitor.

Exit menu
You can adjust the settings of some
functions in the exit menu before
leaving the vehicle. The exit menu will
be displayed in the Infotainment system
when you switch off the ignition.

The entries shown depend on the vehicle equipment and may only be available under certain conditions. The adjustable functions include, for example:

Hide
The exit menu is automatically hidden when you leave the vehicle. The exit menu will also be hidden after a short time, depending on the vehicle equipment.

1. To hide the exit menu manually, tap .

Settings
You can adjust the order of the entries shown.

1. Tap .

2. Reorder entries as required.

3. Tap again.

Vehicle settings menu


You can switch individual functions and
systems on and off and adjust settings
in the vehicle settings menu in the
Infotainment system.

Opening the Vehicle settings Menu


1. Switch the ignition on.

2. If necessary, switch on the Infotainment system.

3. Tap the Vehicle function key.

4. Depending on the equipment: Tap the Vehicle menu item and choose between the Interior and Exterior function keys.

Or: select the menu item.

5. Open the preferred item from the submenus and set as desired.

System settings and vehicle information display

Depending on the version, information can be displayed or settings set in the Vehicle settings menu:

Depending on the vehicle equipment: 3D vehicle view (Interior or Exterior).

Depending on vehicle equipment: Performance monitor.

Depending on vehicle equipment: Lap timer.

Driving Data.

Vehicle status.

After starting the engine when the 12 V vehicle battery is severely drained or has been replaced or jump-started, system settings, e.g. personal convenience
settings and programming, may be adjusted or deleted. Check and correct the settings after the 12 V vehicle battery is sufficiently recharged.

WARNING

If the driver is distracted, accidents and serious injuries can occur. Operating the Infotainment system can distract you from traffic.

Always drive attentively and responsibly.

Adjust settings in the Infotainment system only when the vehicle is stationary.

Driver Alert System


Introduction

29
Fig. 14 Driver Alert System symbol on the instrument cluster display.

The Driver Alert System tells you if your


driving behavior suggests that you are
tired.

At the beginning of your journey, the Driver Alert System observes your driving behavior and uses this observation to assess how tired you are. It continually
compares its initial assessment with your current driving behavior. If the system detects that you are tired, it issues an audible warning, as well as visually alerting
you by displaying a symbol and accompanying message on the instrument cluster display fig. 14. The message will remain on the instrument cluster display for
approximately five seconds, and will be repeated once if necessary. The system saves the message that was most recently issued.

When is it active?

Your driving behavior will only be evaluated when you are traveling at speeds of more than approximately 60 km/h (approximately 37 mph), up to approximately
200 km/h (approximately 125 mph).

WARNING

The Driver Alert System is not a replacement for the driver's attention and works only within the system limitations. This means that the Driver Alert System
cannot detect tiredness in the driver in all situations, and may not react, may react late or may react in a way that is undesired. There is a risk of accidents and
serious or fatal injuries.

Always stay attentive and do not rely solely on the system. It is always your responsibility to make sure that you are fit to drive.

Observe the system limitations ⇒ Limits of the Driver Alert System .

Never drive a vehicle when tired.

On longer journeys, take regular breaks and make sure that you feel adequately rested before setting off again.

Pay attention to indicators in the instrument cluster display and respond to the prompts accordingly.

The Driver Alert System is designed exclusively for driving on highways and good road surfaces.

In the event of a malfunction, have the system checked by suitably qualified professionals. Volkswagen recommends contacting an authorized Volkswagen
dealer or authorized Volkswagen Service Facility.

Limits of the Driver Alert System


Please read the introductory information and heed the Warnings and Notice ⇒ Introduction.
The Driver Alert System has certain limitations. The following conditions may limit the effectiveness of the Driver Alert System or prevent it from working at all:

Speeds of less than approximately 60 km/h (approximately 37 mph).

Speeds of over approximately 200 km/h (approximately 125 mph).

Winding roads.

Poor road surfaces.

Inclement weather.

Construction sites.

Sporty driving.

If you are very distracted.

Momentary dozing:

Please note that the system is not configured to issue an immediate warning in the event that you doze off momentarily.

The Driver Alert System will be reset in the following situations:

When the ignition has been switched off.

When you have taken off your safety belt and opened the driver door.

30
When the vehicle is stationary for more than approximately 15 minutes.

On long, slow journeys when traveling at less than approximately 60 km/h (approximately 37 mph), the system automatically resets its assessment of how tired you
are. If you then start driving faster, it will start assessing your driving behavior once again.

Operating the Driver Alert System


Please read the introductory information and heed the Warnings and Notice ⇒ Introduction.

Hiding a message

The message in the instrument cluster display can be hidden as follows:

1. Press the button on the multi-function steering wheel.

Switching on and off

You can switch the Driver Alert System on and off using the Assistance menu in the Infotainment system. Upon starting the engine, the Driver Alert System is always
activated ⇒ Vehicle settings menu.

Dynamic Road Sign Display


Introduction
The Dynamic Road Sign Display detects
standard road signs using a camera in
the interior rearview mirror base and
informs the driver of detected speed
limits and passing restrictions. Within
the system limits, the system also
displays an additional sign to indicate
special restrictions. The system may
also continue to display the valid speed
limit on roads without signs.

The traffic signs recorded by the Dynamic Road Sign Display are shown in the display of the Volkswagen Digital Cockpit. Depending on the Infotainment system
installed in the vehicle, the road signs may also be displayed there.

Depending on the vehicle equipment, a display may also appear in the head-up display (HUD).

Dynamic Road Sign Display is always active when the ignition is started.

Road sign display

Fig. 15 In the instrument cluster display: Example of detected speed limits.

After checking and evaluating the information from the camera, the Infotainment system, and the current vehicle data, the Dynamic Road Sign Display function
displays up to two valid traffic signs and a generic additional sign fig. 15:

1st position: The traffic sign that currently applies is shown on the left side of the display, for example a speed limit of 20 mph (35 km/h).

2nd position: Another road sign can be displayed in the second position, such as a passing restriction.

Additional signs: A recognized additional sign is displayed above the applicable traffic sign. Depending on the system, a generic additional sign is displayed
instead of the actually recognized additional sign. The applicable traffic sign in the display of the instrument cluster is supplemented by the generic
additional sign.

WARNING

The Dynamic Road Sign Display is not a replacement for the driver's attention and works only within the system limitations. Consequently, the Dynamic Road
Sign Display cannot detect all road signs and may not react, or may react with a delay, or may react in a way that is not desired. Driving recommendations and
road signs displayed in the Dynamic Road Sign Display may differ from the actual traffic situation.

Observe the system limitations ⇒ Limits of the Dynamic Road Sign Display .

Always stay attentive and do not rely solely on the system. The driver is always responsible for control of the vehicle.

Traffic signs on the roads and traffic regulations must always take precedence over driving recommendations and displays from the Dynamic Road Sign
Display function.
31
Always adapt your speed and driving style to the visibility, weather, road and traffic conditions.

Limits of the Dynamic Road Sign Display


Please read the introductory information and heed the Warnings and Notice ⇒ Introduction.

Error messages
No road signs available. The system is in the initialization phase.
Or: the vehicle has not detected any road signs.

Error: Dynamic Road Sign Display. System malfunction. If the malfunction persists, contact a suitably qualified professional. Volkswagen recommends
contacting an authorized Volkswagen dealer or authorized Volkswagen Service Facility.

Speed Alert currently not available. The speed alert from the Dynamic Road Sign Display is malfunctioning. If the malfunction persists, contact a suitably
qualified professional. Volkswagen recommends contacting an authorized Volkswagen dealer or authorized Volkswagen Service Facility.

Dynamic Road Sign Display: Clean windshield! The windshield is dirty in the area around the camera or weather conditions are interfering with the camera
view. Clean the windshield.

Dynamic Road Sign Display is currently limited. Data is not being transmitted by the Infotainment system. Check that valid map data is loaded in the
Infotainment system.
Or: the vehicle is located in an area that is not detected on the map stored in the Infotainment system.

No data available. The Dynamic Road Sign Display function is not supported in the country where the vehicle is currently being operated.

Functional limitations

The Dynamic Road Sign Display is subject to system limitations. The following conditions may cause the Dynamic Road Sign Display function to be limited or to not
operate at all:

High ambient temperature or long exposure to direct sunlight.

Poor visibility, such as in snow.

Glare, for example from oncoming traffic or the sun

High speeds

If the camera is obstructed or dirty

If road signs are outside of the camera’s visual field

If road signs are partially or completely covered, for example by trees, snow, dirt, or other vehicles.

If road signs are not in the standard format

If there are damaged or bent road signs

If there are variable traffic signs on overhead signs (variable display of road signs with LED s or other lighting).

If there is outdated map material in the Infotainment system

If there are stickers on vehicles that indicate road signs, such speed limits on commercial vehicles

Operating the Dynamic Road Sign Display


Please read the introductory information and heed the Warnings and Notice ⇒ Introduction.

Speed warning

If the Dynamic Road Sign Display function detects that a valid speed limit is being exceeded, it may warn the driver audibly or visually with a message in the
instrument cluster display.

The speed warning can be set or completely deactivated in the Infotainment system in the Assistance systems menu ⇒ Vehicle settings menu. The speed warning
can be set to a value of 0 km/h (0 mph), 5 km/h (3 mph) or 10 km/h (5 mph) above the maximum permissible speed.

32
Safety
General information
Driving preparations and driving safety
Observe the following points before and during every trip, for your own safety and for the safety of your passengers and others on the road ⇒ :

Make sure the vehicle lighting and turn signals are functioning correctly.

Check the tire pressure and fuel level ⇒ Checking the tire pressure , ⇒ Fuel gauge.

Check the washer fluid level ⇒ Washer fluid.

Ensure that the windows are clear and provide good visibility ⇒ Exterior care and cleaning.

The air intake for the engine must not be blocked. The engine must not be covered with covers or insulation ⇒ Safety precautions for working in the engine
compartment.

Secure all objects and luggage in the storage compartments and the luggage compartment ⇒ Transporting.

It must be possible to press the pedals without interference.

Secure children with child restraint systems that are appropriate for their weight and height ⇒ Transporting children safely.

Adjust the front seats, head restraints, and mirrors according to the size of the occupants ⇒ Seating position, ⇒ Mirrors.

Wear shoes that give your feet good grip for operating the pedals.

The floormat in the driver side footwell must be kept clear from the pedal area and be secured.

Assume the correct seating position before driving and remain that way while driving. This also applies to all passengers ⇒ Seating position.

Fasten the safety belt correctly before you begin driving and keep it fastened while driving. This also applies to all passengers ⇒ Safety belts.

The number of passengers must not exceed the number of seats and safety belts.

Never drive when impaired, for example by medication, alcohol, or drugs.

Never allow yourself to be distracted from traffic, such as by adjusting settings, by opening menus, by passengers, or by phone calls.

Always adapt your speed and driving style to the current visual, weather, road, and traffic conditions.

Follow driving rules and posted speed limits.

Take regular breaks on long trips. You should take a break at least every two hours.

Secure animals in the vehicle restraint systems that are appropriate for their weight and size.

Driving in other countries


Some countries have special safety standards and regulations that differ from the vehicle configuration. Volkswagen recommends that you inform yourself about
legal regulations and about the following points from an authorized Volkswagen dealer or authorized Volkswagen Service Facility before driving in other countries.
Volkswagen recommends contacting an authorized Volkswagen dealer or authorized Volkswagen Service Facility.

Do technical modifications need to be made to the vehicle before driving in other countries, such as covering or adjusting the headlights?

Are the tools, diagnostic equipment, and replacement parts that are needed for maintenance and repair work available?

Is there an authorized Volkswagen dealer or authorized Volkswagen Service Facility in the country where you will be driving?

Are fluids that meet Volkswagen specifications available in the country where you will be driving ⇒ Operating fluids and operating equipment ?

Will the navigation function in the factory-installed Infotainment system work with the existing navigation data in the country where you will be driving?

Are special tires needed in the country where you will be driving?

Is a fire extinguisher required in the country where you will be driving?

What are the requirements for a safety vest?

Is fuel with sufficient quality available ⇒ Fuel and emissions control system ?

Checks when refueling


Only perform work on the engine and in the engine compartment if you are familiar with the necessary steps and the general safety precautions, and if the correct
operating equipment, fluids, and suitable tools are available ⇒ Safety precautions for working in the engine compartment ! Have all work performed by suitably
qualified professionals. Volkswagen recommends contacting an authorized Volkswagen dealer or authorized Volkswagen Service Facility. Make sure that the
following items are checked regularly:

Washer fluid level ⇒ Washer fluid.

Engine oil level ⇒ Engine oil.

Engine coolant level ⇒ Engine coolant.

Brake fluid level ⇒ Brake fluid specifications.

Tire inflation pressure ⇒ Checking the tire pressure .

33
Vehicle lighting ⇒ Headlights which is necessary for traffic safety:

Information on changing bulbs ⇒ Exterior lighting.

DANGER

Read and heed the important safety instructions for the front passenger's front airbag ⇒ Safety notes on using child restraints.

WARNING

Alcohol, drugs, medication, and prescription narcotics can considerably impair perception, reaction times, and driving safety, which can result in loss of vehicle
control. This can cause accidents and serious or fatal injuries.

Do not drive under the influence of alcohol, drugs, medication or prescription narcotics.

WARNING

Not paying attention to road traffic can cause accidents and serious or fatal injuries.

Always comply with the applicable driving regulations and speed limits and think ahead while driving.

Take regular breaks on long drives. You should take a break at least every two hours.

NOTICE

Volkswagen is not responsible for damage to the vehicle caused by substandard fuel, insufficient maintenance, or unsuitable replacement parts.

Volkswagen recommends the use of Volkswagen original parts or Volkswagen original accessories, which you can acquire from an authorized
Volkswagen dealer or authorized Volkswagen Service Facility.

Having the vehicle serviced regularly not only maintains the value of the vehicle, but also contributes to operational safety and roadworthiness. Therefore, have
maintenance procedures performed according to Volkswagen instructions. Under extreme operating conditions, some work may need to be performed before the
next service is due. Extreme operating conditions can include frequent stop-and-go driving or driving in areas with a lot of dust in the air. For further information,
contact an authorized Volkswagen dealer or authorized Volkswagen Service Facility. Volkswagen recommends contacting an authorized Volkswagen dealer or
authorized Volkswagen Service Facility.

Seating position
Introduction
Number of seats

The vehicle has a total of five seats: two seats in the front and three seats in the back.

Every seat is equipped with a safety belt.

WARNING

Sitting incorrectly in the vehicle can increase the risk of serious or fatal injuries during sudden driving or braking maneuvers, in the event of a collision or
accident, and if the airbags are deployed.

Before the vehicle starts to move, all vehicle occupants must always be in the correct seating position and maintain it while driving. Safety belts must
also be fastened and remain fastened.

The number of persons in the vehicle must not exceed the number of seats with safety belts.

Always secure children in the vehicle with an approved and suitable child restraint system according to the child's body size and weight ⇒ Transporting
children safely and ⇒ Airbag system.

Always keep feet in the footwell while driving. For example, never rest feet on the seat or on the instrument panel and never hold feet out of the window.
Otherwise, if the airbag and the safety belt deploy, they could increase the risk of injury in the event of an accident instead of providing protection.

Risk of injury due to an incorrect seating position


Please read the introductory information and heed the Warnings and Notice ⇒ Introduction.
The risk of serious or fatal injuries will increase if safety belts are not worn or are incorrectly fastened. Safety belts can only achieve the optimum protection if they
are routed correctly. An incorrect seating position significantly impairs the protective function of the safety belt. This could result in serious or fatal injuries. The risk of
serious or fatal injuries increases even more if a deployed airbag strikes a passenger who is sitting in an incorrect seating position. The driver is responsible for all
vehicle occupants and especially for children who are being transported in the vehicle.

The following list includes examples of seating positions that could be dangerous for all vehicle occupants.

34
The following points always apply when the vehicle is in motion:
Never stand inside the vehicle.

Never stand on the seats.

Never kneel on the seats.

Never tilt your seat backrest too far back.

Never lean against the instrument panel.

Never lay down in the seats in the vehicle interior or on the rear bench seat.

Never sit only on the front section of the seat.

Never sit sideways on the seat.

Never lean against the window.

Never place your feet out of the window.

Never place your feet on the instrument panel.

Never place your feet on the seat cushion or on the seat backrest.

Never ride in the footwell.

Never sit on the armrests.

Never drive or ride in a seat without fastening your safety belt.

Never ride in the trunk.

WARNING

Incorrect seating positions in the vehicle increase the risk of serious or fatal injuries in the event of an accident or sudden driving and braking maneuvers,
especially if the airbags are deployed and exert force on a vehicle occupant who is not sitting correctly.

All vehicle occupants must always sit in the correct seating position and have their own safety belts correctly fastened while driving.

Correct seating position


Please read the introductory information and heed the Warnings and Notice ⇒ Introduction.

Fig. 16 General example: correct distance between the driver and the steering wheel, correct safety belt routing and correct head restraint adjustment.

The correct seating positions for the driver and passengers are specified in the information that follows. The safety belt and airbags only provide the optimum
protection when vehicle occupants are seated in a correct seating position.

If you have a physical impairment that prevents you from sitting correctly on the driver seat with a correctly worn safety belt and reaching the pedals, special
modifications to your vehicle may be necessary. For information on possible changes to your vehicle, contact an authorized Volkswagen dealer or authorized
Volkswagen Service Facility qualified for this. Volkswagen recommends contacting an authorized Volkswagen dealer or authorized Volkswagen Service Facility.
Alternatively, contact the Volkswagen Customer CARE Center at +00 (1) 800 822 8987.

For your safety and to reduce the risk of injuries in the event of a sudden braking maneuver or accident, Volkswagen recommends the following seating positions:

The following applies to all vehicle occupants:


Adjust the head restraint so that the upper edge of the head restraint is in line with the upper portion of the head as much as possible, but not lower than eye
level. Position the back of the head as close as possible to the head restraint fig. 16.

For shorter individuals, slide the head restraint all the way downward, even if the head is then below the upper edge of the head restraint.

For taller individuals, move the head restraint upward all the way.

35
Keep both feet in the footwell while driving.

Adjust and fasten the safety belts correctly ⇒ Safety belts.

The following additional points apply to the driver:


Adjust the forward/back position of the driver seat so that you can press the pedals while your legs are slightly bent and there is at least 10 cm (around
4 inches) of space between the instrument panel and your knees fig. 16.

Adjust the driver seat so that the top point of the steering wheel can be reached.

Position the seat backrest in an upright position, so that your back rests completely on the seat backrest.

Adjust the steering wheel so that the distance between the steering wheel and your chest is at least 25 cm (around 10 inches) fig. 16 and you can hold the
steering wheel firmly at the sides with both hands and your elbows slightly bent.

When adjusted, the steering wheel must always face your chest and not be directed toward your face.

In vehicles with head restraints that can be moved forward or back, position the head restraint so that it is as close as possible to the back of the head.

Always keep both feet in the footwell to keep control of the vehicle at all times.

The following additional points apply to the front passenger:


In vehicles with head restraints that can be moved forward or back, position the head restraint so that it is as close as possible to the back of the head.

Position the seat backrest in an upright position, so that your back rests completely on the seat backrest.

Move the front passenger seat back as far as possible so that the airbag can provide optimum protection if it deploys.

Safety belts
Introduction
Check the condition of all of the safety belts regularly. If there is damage to the belt fabric, the belt connections, the automatic safety belt retractor or the buckle,
have the affected safety belt replaced immediately by suitably qualified professionals ⇒ . The authorized Volkswagen dealer or authorized Volkswagen Service
Facility must use the correct parts for the vehicle, equipment and model year. Volkswagen recommends contacting an authorized Volkswagen dealer or authorized
Volkswagen Service Facility.

WARNING

The risk of serious and fatal injuries increases if the safety belts are not worn or are worn incorrectly.

Safety belts are the most effective way to reduce the risk of serious and fatal injuries in a collision. Before every trip, vehicle occupants must therefore
seat themselves correctly, fasten the safety belt that belongs to the seat they are using, and keep it fastened while the vehicle is in motion. This applies to
all passengers and at all times, including during city driving.

Secure only one person with a safety belt.

Secure children in the vehicle with a child restraint that is appropriate for their weight and height and with the safety belt used correctly ⇒ Transporting
children safely.

Never allow children or infants to ride on anyone's lap and never strap children or infants to another person with the same safety belt.

Only ever insert and latch the buckle tongue in the belt buckle for the corresponding seat. Using a buckle from another seat reduces the protection
provided by the safety belt and can cause serious injuries.

Do not wear extremely bulky, loose clothing in the vehicle, such as a coat over a sports jacket, because this could impair the fit and function of the safety
belt.

WARNING

If the belt webbing or other parts of the safety belts are damaged, the safety belts could tear during a collision or sudden braking maneuver and cause serious or
fatal injuries.

Never damage the safety belts by trapping them or chafing them on sharp edges.

Have damaged safety belts replaced immediately with new safety belts that are approved for the vehicle by Volkswagen. Safety belts that are stretched
during a collision must be replaced by an authorized Volkswagen dealer or authorized Volkswagen Service Facility. Volkswagen recommends contacting
an authorized Volkswagen dealer or authorized Volkswagen Service Facility. It may be necessary to replace them even if there is no visible damage.
Check the safety belts' anchorage points as well.

Never try to repair, modify, or remove the safety belts yourself. Have all repairs to safety belts, safety belt retractors, and buckle components performed
only by an authorized Volkswagen dealer or authorized Volkswagen Service Facility. Volkswagen recommends contacting an authorized Volkswagen
dealer or authorized Volkswagen Service Facility.

Fasten seat belts reminder and seat belt safety indicator


Please read the introductory information and heed the Warnings and Notice ⇒ Introduction.
36
Fig. 17 In the instrument cluster display: warning light.

The driver or front passenger has not fastened their safety belt. Fasten all safety belts.

When the ignition is switched on, several warning and indicator lamps light up temporarily as a function check. They then turn off after a few seconds.

A chime also sounds.

When the ignition is switched on, the red warning light comes on for six seconds. A chime also sounds for up to six seconds if the driver safety belt is not
fastened. The chime ends when the driver fastens their safety belt. The warning lamps and chime go off when the driver and front passenger have fastened their
safety belts.

If the driver and front passenger do not both fasten their safety belts within 10 seconds after the warning chime has ended and the vehicle is driving at a speed
above approx. 25 km/h (approx. 15 mph), the chime sounds again for approx. 6 seconds, then stops for approx. 24 seconds, and then sounds again for approx. 6
seconds. The same happens if one of the safety belts is released while driving. The red warning light comes on. A warning chime also sounds for up to two
minutes at 24-second intervals. The chime does not sound at speeds below approx. 8 km/h (approx. 5 mph).

When the ignition is switched on, the red warning light comes on until the driver and front passenger have both fastened their safety belts.

WARNING

The risk of serious and fatal injuries increases if the safety belts are not worn or are worn incorrectly.

Fasten the safety belts and use them correctly to ensure that they provide optimum protection.

Using safety belts


Please read the introductory information and heed the Warnings and Notice ⇒ Introduction.

Checklist
Using safety belts ⇒ :

Check the condition of all of the safety belts regularly.

Keep safety belts clean.

Always keep foreign objects and fluids far away from the safety belt, the safety belt buckle, and the slot in the safety belt buckle.

Do not pinch or damage the safety belt and/or belt buckle, for example closing it in a door.

Never remove, modify, or repair the safety belt and belt fastening elements.

Always fasten the safety belt correctly before you begin driving and keep it fastened while driving.

Twisted safety belt

If the safety belt is difficult to pull out of the belt guide, the safety belt may have been pulled out too quickly when positioning the belt and may have become twisted
within the side trim panel:

1. Slowly and carefully pull the safety belt out completely by the belt buckle.

2. Untwist any twisted sections of the safety belt and guide the belt back slowly by hand.

If you cannot untwist the safety belt, fasten the safety belt anyway. The twist must not be in a section of the belt that rests directly on the body. Go to an authorized
Volkswagen dealer or authorized Volkswagen Service Facility immediately to have the belt untwisted. Volkswagen recommends contacting an authorized
Volkswagen dealer or authorized Volkswagen Service Facility.

Lockable safety belt

The safety belts on the rear seats and the safety belt on the front passenger seat are lockable and have an emergency locking function. With the locking function,
you can adjust the safety belt so that a child restraint is properly installed ⇒ Securing a child restraint with a safety belt .

37
Safety belts may only be locked for certain child restraint systems ⇒ Child restraints – overview .

An activated locking mechanism must be released when a vehicle occupant fastens their safety belt. To release the locking mechanism, push the red button in the
belt buckle and guide the belt back fully by hand.

WARNING

Incorrect handling of the safety belts increases the risk of severe or fatal injuries.

Check the safety belts and associated components regularly to ensure they function correctly.

Never attempt to repair safety belts. Have damaged safety belts replaced.

Always keep the safety belts clean.

Never damage the safety belts by trapping them or chafing them on sharp edges.

Always keep the belt buckle and insertion guide for the belt buckle free of foreign objects and fluids.

Fastening and unfastening the safety belts


Please read the introductory information and heed the Warnings and Notice ⇒ Introduction.
Safety belts that are fastened correctly hold vehicle occupants in the correct position during braking maneuvers or in a collision, in order to provide the maximum
protection ⇒ .

Fastening the safety belt

Fig. 18 Inserting the buckle tongue into the safety belt buckle.

Always fasten the safety belts before driving.

1. Adjust the front seat and head restraint correctly ⇒ Seating position.

2. Have the rear seat backrest locked into place in an upright position ⇒ .

3. Grab the belt and pull it evenly over the chest and pelvis. Do not twist the belt while doing this ⇒ .

4. Insert the buckle tongue securely in the safety belt buckle for that seat fig. 18.

5. Pull on the safety belt to make sure the buckle tongue is latched correctly in the safety belt buckle.

Unfastening the safety belt

38
Fig. 19 Releasing the buckle tongue from the safety belt buckle.

Only unfasten the safety belt while the vehicle is stationary ⇒ .

1. Press the red button in the safety belt buckle fig. 19.

The buckle tongue will pop out.

2. Guide the belt back by hand so that the belt rolls up easily, the belt does not twist, and the trim panel is not damaged.

WARNING

Incorrect safety belt positioning or unfastening the safety belt while the vehicle is in motion can lead to serious or fatal injuries in the event of an accident or
braking maneuver.

Place the backrest in an upright position and position your safety belt correctly for your size to maximize the protective function of the safety belt.

Never unfasten the safety belt while the vehicle is in motion.

Safety belt positioning


Please read the introductory information and heed the Warnings and Notice ⇒ Introduction.
Safety belts only offer the optimum protection during a collision and reduce the risk of serious injury or death if they are fastened and positioned correctly. The
correct safety belt position also holds the vehicle occupant in place so that the airbags can provide their maximum protection if they deploy. Therefore, all vehicle
occupants should always fasten their own safety belts and make sure they are positioned correctly fig. 20.

An incorrect seating position can cause severe or fatal injuries ⇒ Seating position.

Correct safety belt positioning

39
Fig. 20 Correct safety belt positioning and correct head restraint adjustment.

The shoulder belt section of the safety belt must always be positioned over the center of the shoulder and never across the neck, above the arm, under the
arm, or behind the back.

The lap section of the safety belt must always lie across the lap and never over the stomach.

The safety belt must always rest flat and securely on the body. Retighten the belt if necessary.

Correct safety belt positioning for pregnant women

Fig. 21 Correct safety belt positioning for pregnant women.

For pregnant women, the safety belt must rest evenly across the chest and as low and flat as possible on the lap, so that no pressure is applied to the lower
abdomen. This should be done throughout the entire pregnancy fig. 21.

Adjusting the safety belt position to body size

The belt positioning can be adjusted with the following equipment:

Belt height adjusters for the front seats ⇒ Safety belt height adjuster.

Height-adjustable front seats ⇒ Seating position.

WARNING

Incorrect safety belt positioning can cause serious injuries in the event of an accident or during sudden braking or driving maneuvers.

Ensure your safety belt is positioned correctly.

Place the backrest in an upright position and position your safety belt correctly for your size to maximize the protective function of the safety belt.

Place the shoulder portion of the safety belt over the center of your shoulder, and never under your arm or across your neck.

Lay the safety belt flat and securely on the upper part of the body and pelvis. Retighten the belt if necessary.

Ensure the lap section of the safety belt lies across your lap and never over your stomach.

Throughout your pregnancy, ensure the safety belt rests evenly across your chest and as low and flat as possible on your lap. This will prevent pressure
40
being applied to your lower abdomen.

Do not twist the safety belt while wearing it.

Never hold the safety belt away from the body with your hand.

Do not guide the safety belt over hard or breakable objects, such as eyeglasses, pens, or keys.

Do not modify how the safety belt is routed using belt clips, retaining loops, or similar objects.

Persons who cannot achieve the optimum belt routing due to physical conditions should contact an authorized Volkswagen dealer or authorized Volkswagen
Service Facility about possible special modifications that can be used to achieve the best possible protection with the safety belt and airbags. Volkswagen
recommends contacting an authorized Volkswagen dealer or authorized Volkswagen Service Facility.

Safety belt height adjuster


Please read the introductory information and heed the Warnings and Notice ⇒ Introduction.

Fig. 22 Next to the front seats: safety belt height adjuster.

You can use the safety belt height adjuster to adjust the safety belt routing in the shoulder area according to your individual body size, so that the safety belt can be
correctly fastened:

1. Push down and hold the safety belt height adjustment button in the direction of the arrows fig. 22.

2. Slide the safety belt height adjuster upward or downward until the safety belt lies over the center of the shoulder ⇒ Safety belt positioning.

3. Release the safety belt height adjustment button.

4. Pull hard on the safety belt to check that the safety belt height adjuster is engaged.

WARNING

Changing the safety belt height while driving may cause serious or fatal injuries.

Never adjust the safety belt height while driving.

Automatic safety belt retractor, safety belt pretensioner, safety belt load limiter
Please read the introductory information and heed the Warnings and Notice ⇒ Introduction.
The vehicle seat belts are part of the vehicle safety concept ⇒ Airbag system. The vehicle safety concept has the following key functions:

Automatic safety belt retractor

Every safety belt is equipped with an automatic safety belt retractor on the shoulder belt section. If the safety belt is pulled slowly or while driving normally, the
shoulder belt will be able to move freely. The automatic safety belt retractor blocks the safety belt from moving if the safety belt is pulled out quickly, for example
during sudden braking maneuvers, when driving on hills, when driving around curves and when accelerating.

Safety belt pretensioners

The safety belts for the vehicle occupants in the front seats and in the outer seats in the rear of the vehicle have safety belt pretensioners.

Safety belt pretensioners are activated by sensors and tighten the safety belts in the event of severe front-on, side and rear collisions or if the vehicle rolls over. If
the safety belt is loose, it retracts. This can reduce the forward movement of the vehicle occupants and movement of the vehicle occupants in the direction of the
collision. The safety belt pretensioner works together with the airbag system. The safety belt pretensioner is only activated during a rollover accident if the Side
41
Curtain Protection® airbags are deployed.

Fine dust may appear if airbags deploy. This is completely normal and does not indicate a fire in the vehicle.

WARNING

The safety belt pretensioners only provide protection for one deployment. If the safety belt pretensioners deploy, the system must be replaced.

Have deployed safety belt pretensioners and affected system components replaced immediately with new parts that are approved by Volkswagen for the
vehicle.

Only have suitably qualified professionals make repairs or modifications to a vehicle. Authorized Volkswagen dealers and authorized Volkswagen Service
Facilities have the required tools, diagnostic devices, repair information, and qualified personnel. Volkswagen recommends contacting an authorized
Volkswagen dealer or authorized Volkswagen Service Facility.

Never install safety belt pretensioner components removed from scrap vehicles or from recycling.

Never modify any components of the safety belt pretensioners.

Safety belt load limiter

Safety belt load limiters reduce the force placed on the body by the safety belts during a collision.
When disposing of the vehicle or of individual system components, all safety precautions must be observed. An authorized Volkswagen dealer or authorized
Volkswagen Service Facility will be familiar with these provisions ⇒ Safety belt pretensioner servicing and disposal . Volkswagen recommends contacting an
authorized Volkswagen dealer or authorized Volkswagen Service Facility.

Safety belt pretensioner servicing and disposal


Please read the introductory information and heed the Warnings and Notice ⇒ Introduction.
When working on safety belt pretensioners, as well as when removing and installing other vehicle components as part of repair work, the safety belts can become
damaged without you noticing. This may cause the safety belt pretensioner to function incorrectly or prevent it from functioning in the event of an accident.

The instructions must be followed so that the effectiveness of the safety belt pretensioner is not impaired and removed components do not cause injuries and
environmental pollution. An authorized Volkswagen dealer or authorized Volkswagen Service Facility will be familiar with these provisions. Volkswagen recommends
contacting an authorized Volkswagen dealer or authorized Volkswagen Service Facility.

WARNING

Repairs that you perform yourself or that are performed incorrectly on the safety belts, automatic safety belt retractors, and safety belt pretensioners can
increase the risk of severe or fatal injuries. The safety belt pretensioner may not deploy when it should, or it may deploy unexpectedly.

Never perform repairs, adjustments, or removal and installation of components of the safety belt pretensioners or safety belts yourself. Only have these
procedures performed by suitably qualified professionals ⇒ Accessories, replacement parts, repairs, and modifications . Volkswagen recommends
contacting an authorized Volkswagen dealer or authorized Volkswagen Service Facility.

Safety belts, safety belt pretensioners and automatic safety belt retractors cannot be repaired. These components must be replaced.

Some parts of the vehicle, such as the airbag module and safety belt pretensioners, may contain perchlorate. Special handling may be necessary. For further
information, visit https://dtsc.ca.gov/perchlorate.

Airbag system
Introduction
The vehicle is equipped with a front airbag for the driver and one for the front passenger. The front airbags can offer additional protection for the chest and head of
the driver and front passenger as long as the seat, the safety belt, the head restraint, and the steering wheel are adjusted and used correctly. Airbags are only
designed to offer supplementary protection. Airbags are not a replacement for safety belts. Safety belts must always be worn, even if the front seats are fitted with
front airbags.

WARNING

Never rely only on the airbag system for protection.

Even when an airbag deploys, it only offers supplementary protection.

The airbag system provides optimum protection when the safety belt is worn correctly and it reduces the risk of injury ⇒ Safety belts.

Before every trip, everyone in the vehicle must seat themselves correctly, fasten the safety belt that belongs to the seat they are using, and keep it
fastened while the vehicle is in motion. This applies to all passengers and at all times, including during city driving.

WARNING

42
Sitting too close to the steering wheel or the instrument panel reduces the effectiveness of the airbags and increases the risk of injury in the event of a collision.

Adjust the driver seat so that there is a distance of at least 10 inches (25 cm) between your chest and the center of the steering wheel.

Adjust the front passenger seat so that there is the greatest possible distance between the front passenger and the instrument panel.

If body characteristics mean that this is not possible, see an authorized Volkswagen dealer or authorized Volkswagen Service Facility to have special
modifications made. Volkswagen recommends contacting an authorized Volkswagen dealer or authorized Volkswagen Service Facility.

If you have not fastened your safety belt correctly, if you lean forwards, sit sideways or are in any way seated outside the intended sitting position, the
risk of you being injured is far higher.

Make sure that your safety belt is fastened correctly to reduce the risk of injury if an airbag deploys.

When using a rear-facing child restraint on the front passenger’s seat, the risk of life-threatening or fatal injuries in the event of a collision increases for
the child. Never use rear-facing child restraints on the front passenger’s seat.

Make sure that children under 12 years of age always sit on a rear seat. Children that are not correctly strapped in can suffer serious or even fatal injuries
if the airbag deploys.

Secure children in the vehicle with a child restraint that is appropriate for their weight and height and with the safety belt used correctly.

Adjust the front seats correctly.

Never drive with the backrest angled too far back or forward.

Position the seat backrest in an upright position, so that your back rests completely on the seat backrest.

Always keep feet in the footwell while driving. For example, never rest feet on the seat or on the instrument panel and never hold feet out of the window.
Otherwise, if the airbag and the safety belt deploy, they could increase the risk of injury in the event of an accident instead of providing protection.

WARNING

The risk of injury if the airbag deploys increases if there are objects located between vehicle occupants and the airbag deployment zone. These objects could
change the deployment zone of the airbag or could strike the vehicle occupants.

Never hold objects in your hands or on your lap while driving.

Never transport objects on the front passenger's seat. During sudden braking or driving maneuvers, the objects could move into the airbag deployment
zone and then be thrown through the vehicle interior if the airbag deploys.

There should be no people, animals, or objects between the occupants of the front seats or outer rear seats and the airbag deployment zone. Make sure
that child and adult passengers also follow these instructions.

WARNING

The airbag system only provides protection for one deployment. If the airbags deploy, the system must be replaced.

Have deployed airbags and affected system components replaced immediately with new parts approved by Volkswagen for the vehicle.

Only have suitably qualified professionals make repairs or modifications to a vehicle. Suitably qualified professionals have the required tools, diagnostic
devices, repair information, and qualified personnel. Volkswagen recommends contacting an authorized Volkswagen dealer or authorized Volkswagen
Service Facility.

Never install airbag components removed from scrap vehicles or from recycling.

Never modify any components of the airbag system.

WARNING

Fine dust and water vapor can develop when the airbags deploy. This is normal and does not indicate a fire in the vehicle.

The fine dust can irritate the skin and mucous membranes in the eyes and can cause breathing problems, particularly for individuals who have asthma or
other respiratory conditions. To reduce the risk of breathing problems, exit the vehicle or open the windows or doors for fresh air.

If you come into contact with the dust, wash your hands and face with mild soap and water before eating anything.

Do not allow the dust to come into contact with your eyes or any open wounds.

Flush your eyes with water if dust enters them.

WARNING

Cleaners that contain solvents can make the surface of the airbag module porous. Plastic pieces that come loose could cause serious injuries in the event of a
collision with airbag deployment.

Never treat the instrument panel and the surface of the airbag modules with cleaners that contain solvents.
43
Advanced Airbag System
Please read the introductory information and heed the Warnings and Notice ⇒ Introduction.
Read and follow the introductory information and safety precautions ⇒ Safety notes on using child restraints.

An active passenger’s front airbag presents serious dangers for a child ⇒ . For this reason, all children under the age of twelve must be secured in the rear
seats while the vehicle is in motion.

The Advanced Airbag System, together with the side and Side Curtain Protection® airbags, is checked every time the ignition is switched on. The yellow airbag
indicator light comes on briefly and turns off after several seconds.

Features of the Advanced Airbag System:

Front passenger's front airbag in the instrument panel

Yellow indicator light in the instrument cluster display.

Yellow PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator light .

Yellow PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator light .

If the status of the indicator light is one of the following, the Advanced Airbag System must be checked by an authorized Volkswagen dealer or
authorized Volkswagen Service Facility:
The indicator light does not come on for several seconds when the ignition is switched on.

The indicator light stays on after the ignition is switched on.

The indicator light comes on or flashes again after it is turned off.

The indicator light comes on while driving.

Advanced Airbag System, small children, child restraints and children on the front passenger seat

The Advanced Airbag System in your vehicle has been certified and complies with the regulations of the United States Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard
(FMVSS) 208 and the Canada Motor Vehicle Safety Standard (CMVSS) 208 at the time of vehicle manufacture. In accordance with the requirements, the system on
the passenger's side has been designed to “inhibit” deployment for small children of up to 12 months of age and “low-risk deployment” for children of between three
and six years of age.

The airbag on the passenger's side is a potential danger for children when it is deployed. The front passenger seat is not the safest seat for a child in a forward-
facing child restraint and is a very dangerous seat for a child or small child in a backward-facing child restraint.

The Advanced Airbag System has a capacitive detection system in the seat cushion of the front passenger seat which detects whether a baby, small child or child is
in a child restraint on the front passenger seat.

The capacitive detective detection system measures the electrical capacity of a child, the child restraint and a child's blanket on the front passenger seat.

The electrical capacity of a child restraint depends on the child restraint type. Together with the average capacity values of small children and one-year-old children,
the capacity values of all child restraints specified in accordance with FMVSS 213 and CMVSS 213 are stored in the Advanced Airbag System control module.
These are compared with the values detected. Only use child restraints that are specified according to these standards and have been approved by the child
restraint manufacturer for use with airbag systems. The U.S. National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) has published a list of certified child restraint
models for use with the Advanced Airbag System in accordance with FMVSS 208.

Only install child restraints on the front passenger seat under exceptional circumstances. Carefully read all of the information about child restraints and the
Advanced Airbag System beforehand and follow all instructions and warnings. Make sure that the system has correctly detected the child restraint on the front
passenger seat and the front passenger's front air bag has been switched off. The yellow PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator light will come on.

DANGER

The front passenger seat of a vehicle is a potential danger to children (even for advanced airbags). In the event that front passenger seat air bags are deployed,
children who are completely unsecured in an unsecured child restraint or in a rear-facing child restraint on the front passenger seat will suffer serious or fatal
injuries.

Even if your vehicle is equipped with an Advanced Airbag System, make sure that children (particularly children younger than 12 years of age) are
always transported in such a way that they are secured to the rear seats according to their age and size.

Indicator light for front passenger’s front airbag


Please read the introductory information and heed the Warnings and Notice ⇒ Introduction.

44
Fig. 23 In the roof console: indicator light (general example) for the switched off front passenger's front airbag.

Fig. 24 In the roof console: Indicator light (general example) for the activated front passenger's front airbag.

The yellow PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator light fig. 23 comes on as soon as the Advanced Airbag System has deactivated the front passenger airbag.

The yellow PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator light fig. 24 comes on as soon as the Advanced Airbag System has activated the front passenger airbag.

If the yellow PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator light malfunctions, the yellow indicator light appears in the instrument cluster to indicate a malfunction. A
faulty indicator light does not affect the function of the front passenger's front airbag, but the yellow PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator light can no longer be
used to display the status of the front passenger's front airbag. Get professional assistance immediately to have the system checked. Volkswagen recommends
contacting an authorized Volkswagen dealer or authorized Volkswagen Service Facility.

The yellow PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator light blinks for around five seconds in the following situations:

The capacitive passenger detection system detects that the front passenger seat is not occupied.

The capacitive passenger detection system detects a child restraint according to FMVSS 208 or CMVSS 208 ⇒ Airbag system.

The yellow PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator light blinks for around five seconds when the capacitive passenger detection system has detected an adult
occupying the seat. The yellow PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator light then lights up for about 60 seconds and goes out.

Ensure that the status of the airbag (on or off) is shown correctly by the indicator light according to the load on the seat.

The yellow PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator light must come on when the ignition is switched on and an infant carrier or child restraint is installed on the
front passenger seat and the measured capacity is less than or equal to the capacity of an average one-year old child in a child restraint system as per FMVSS 208.

If the front passenger seat is not occupied, the front passenger's front airbag is also deactivated and the indicator light remains on.

Never install a rear-facing child restraint on the front passenger seat. The safest place for a child restraint is on the rear seat.

Under these conditions, the yellow PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator light must come on permanently whenever the ignition is on. If this is not the case, stop
the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so and follow these instructions:

Switch the ignition off for at least 4 seconds and then on again.
45
Remove the child restraint from the front passenger seat and install it again according to the manufacturer's instructions. When doing so, ensure that the child
restraint is installed correctly.

Ensure that the safety belt has been guided around the child restraint correctly and that it is secure.

Ensure that there are no electronic devices on the front passenger seat.

Ensure that the safety belt and belt buckle are working correctly and not blocked.

Ensure that no seat heating or similar systems have been retrofitted.

Ensure that there are no damp objects on the front passenger seat.

If the yellow PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator light still does not come on, remove the child restraint immediately and install it on the rear seat. Visit an
authorized Volkswagen dealer or authorized Volkswagen Service Facility as soon as possible to have the airbag system checked. Volkswagen recommends
contacting an authorized Volkswagen dealer or authorized Volkswagen Service Facility.

The yellow PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator light must not come on if the front passenger seat is occupied by an adult. However, if this is the case, stop the
vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so and ensure the following:

Ensure that the passenger is sitting in the middle of the seat and that the backrest is upright.

Ensure that the belt is correctly positioned and tight.

Ensure that there are no other objects on the seat cushion, such as blankets or booster seats, that could affect the system's ability to detect a passenger.

If the yellow PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator light is still permanently on, the passenger must move to the rear seat. Visit an authorized Volkswagen dealer
or authorized Volkswagen Service Facility as soon as possible to have the airbag system checked. Volkswagen recommends contacting an authorized Volkswagen
dealer or authorized Volkswagen Service Facility.

If the status of the Advanced Airbag System changes when you are driving, the relevant yellow indicator light blinks for around five seconds. Stop the vehicle as
soon as it is safe to do so and follow the instructions specified here.

If the system recognizes an unoccupied front passenger seat or child restraint according to FMVSS 208 or CMVSS 208, the front passenger airbag remains
deactivated and the yellow PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator light comes on permanently. If the front passenger seat is unoccupied and the passenger's
safety belt is fastened, the yellow PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator light also comes on permanently.

If the front passenger seat is occupied by an adult, the front passenger airbag is activated and the yellow PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator light blinks for
around five seconds when the capacitive passenger detection system has detected an adult occupying the seat. The yellow PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator light
then lights up for about 60 seconds and goes out.

Troubleshooting
Please read the introductory information and heed the Warnings and Notice ⇒ Introduction.

Airbag system or safety belt pretensioners malfunction

The yellow indicator light stays on. There may also be a message in the instrument cluster display.

A malfunction has been detected in at least one of the airbags or safety belt pretensioners.

1. Visit an authorized Volkswagen dealer or authorized Volkswagen Service Facility and have the airbag system and safety belt pretensioners checked.
Volkswagen recommends contacting an authorized Volkswagen dealer or authorized Volkswagen Service Facility.

Airbag system or safety belt pretensioners deactivated with diagnostic device

After the ignition is switched on, the yellow indicator light turns on for about four seconds and then blinks for about twelve seconds. There may also be a message in
the instrument cluster display.

At least one airbag or safety belt pretensioner has been switched off by a diagnostic device.

1. Have a suitably qualified professional check whether the airbag system or safety belt pretensioners need to remain switched off. Volkswagen recommends
contacting an authorized Volkswagen dealer or authorized Volkswagen Service Facility.

Front passenger's front airbag switched off

The yellow indicator light stays on.

The front passenger's front airbag is switched off.

1. Check whether the front passenger's front airbag has to be switched off.

2. If the front passenger's front airbag is incorrectly switched off, there may be a malfunction in the airbag system. Contact an authorized Volkswagen dealer or
authorized Volkswagen Service Facility. Volkswagen recommends contacting an authorized Volkswagen dealer or authorized Volkswagen Service Facility.

Front passenger's front airbag enabled

The yellow indicator light blinks for about five seconds when the capacitive passenger detection system has detected an adult occupying the seat. The yellow
indicator light then lights up for about 60 seconds and goes out.

46
The front passenger's front airbag is switched on.

1. Ensure that the correct status of the airbag (on or off) is shown by the indicator light according to the load on the seat.

Airbag description and function


Please read the introductory information and heed the Warnings and Notice ⇒ Introduction.
The airbag can protect vehicle occupants in a collision by reducing the movement of vehicle occupants in the direction of the impact during frontal and side
collisions.

The airbag is filled by a gas generator when it deploys. When this occurs, the airbag covers open and the airbags unfold with great force into their deployment
zones within milliseconds. When vehicle occupants who are wearing safety belts sink into the airbags, the gas contained in the airbags is released in order to
cushion the individuals and slow their movement. This can reduce the risk of serious and fatal injuries. The airbag cannot always prevent other injuries, such as
swelling, bruises, burns, and abrasions. Heat from friction can develop when the airbag deploys.

Airbags do not provide any protection for arms and the lower part of the body.

The most important factors for triggering airbag deployment are the type of collision, the angle of impact, the vehicle speed, and the characteristics of the object with
which the vehicle is colliding. Therefore, the airbags will not deploy in all situations where there is visible vehicle damage.

The deployment of the airbag system depends on the vehicle deceleration rate resulting from the impact, which is detected by an electronic control module. If the
deceleration rate is below the minimum value programmed into the control module, then the airbags will not be deployed even though there may be significant
vehicle damage. The extent of vehicle damage, the repair costs, or even the absence of vehicle damage in a collision are not indicators of whether the airbag should
have deployed or not. Because situations can vary greatly among different collisions, it is not possible to define a range of vehicle speeds and reference values.
Therefore, it is not possible to cover every conceivable type of impact and impact angle that could trigger airbag deployment. Among other things, important factors
for airbag deployment include the characteristics of the object with which the vehicle collides (hard or soft), the angle of impact, and the vehicle speed.

Airbags are only a supplement to the three-point safety belts in some collisions when the deceleration of the vehicle is great enough to trigger airbag deployment.
Airbags can only deploy once, and only under certain conditions. The safety belts are always there to provide protection in situations where the airbags do not
deploy or if they have already deployed — for example, this may be the case if the vehicle collides with another vehicle or is hit by another vehicle after the initial
impact.

The airbag system is part of the entire passive vehicle safety concept. The airbag system can only provide the best possible protection when it works in conjunction
with safety belts that are fastened correctly and a correct seating position ⇒ Seating position, ⇒ Safety belts.

Components of the vehicle safety concept

The vehicle safety concept is comprised of the following safety features in the vehicle that reduces the risk of serious and fatal injuries. Depending on vehicle
equipment, some equipment may not be installed in the vehicle or may not be available in some countries.

Optimized safety belts in all seating positions.

Safety belt pretensioners for the driver and front passenger.

Belt tension limiter for the driver and front passenger and for the outer rear seats.

Belt height adjusters for the front seats.

Red warning light .

Front airbags for the driver and front passenger.

Advanced Airbag System for the driver and front passenger.

Capacitive passenger detection system for the front passenger's airbag.

Side airbags for the driver and front passenger.

Side Curtain Protection® for outer seats.

Yellow airbag indicator light .

Yellow PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator light in the roof console.

Yellow PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator light in the roof console.

Control modules and sensors.

Safety-optimized and height-adjustable head restraints.

Adjustable steering column.

Anchorage points for child restraints on the rear seats.

Anchorage points for the top tether strap for child restraints.

How the components of the Advanced Airbag System work together:

On the passenger's side, regardless of whether the safety belt is being used or not, the front passenger's front airbag is switched off if the electrical capacity
measured on the front passenger seat by the capacitive passenger detection system is smaller than the value saved in the control module. The front passenger's
front airbag is also switched off if the measured capacity corresponds to the value for an infant of around one year old in a child restraint certified in accordance with
the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 208.

The indicator light for the front passenger's front airbag lights up continuously to tell you that the Advanced Airbag System on the front passenger side has been

47
deactivated.

Situations where front airbags, side airbags or Side Curtain Protection® airbags do not deploy:
If the ignition is switched off in a collision.

Deceleration measured at the vehicle front end during the collision is too low for the control module.

In minor side collisions.

The dynamics measured by the control module during a rollover are too low.

In rear collisions.

If the collision speed is lower than the required reference value in the control module.

Components of the Advanced Airbag System


Please read the introductory information and heed the Warnings and Notice ⇒ Introduction.
The following components are essential parts of the Advanced Airbag System:

Capacitive passenger detection system in the front passenger seat.

Optimized safety belts with safety belt pretensioners and safety belt load limiters.

Front airbags for the driver and front passenger.

Airbag indicator light .

PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator light

PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator light

Control modules and sensors.

WARNING

Airbags and safety belt pretensioners that do not function properly can cause serious or fatal injuries in the event of an accident.

If the airbag indicator light turns on, have the system inspected by an authorized Volkswagen dealer or authorized Volkswagen Service Facility as soon
as possible. Volkswagen recommends contacting an authorized Volkswagen dealer or authorized Volkswagen Service Facility.

Only use original Volkswagen replacement parts and have the installation performed by authorized specialists only.

Never use used or recycled airbags or parts in the Advanced Airbag System. Only use new parts.

WARNING

Damage to the front passenger seat may affect the function of the Advanced Airbag System and cause severe or fatal injuries.

Have damaged components in the front passenger seat and the capacitive detection system replaced by authorized specialists as soon as possible.

Never remove the front passenger seat or components of the front passenger seat, such as seat surfaces, wires, lines or seat covers.

Never damage the seat covers or the seat surface of the front passenger seat.

Never use protective covers or seat surfaces on the front passenger seat as these affect the capacitive detection system.

Never transport electronic or electrical objects on or under the front passenger seat as these affect the capacitive detection system.

Never use protective covers, cushions or similar items on the front passenger seat as these affect the capacitive detection system.

Never install seat heating on the front passenger seat.

Never replace the seat cover on the front passenger seat.

WARNING

If the front passenger seat becomes wet or damp, this can cause the Advanced Airbag System to malfunction.

Allow the seat to dry as soon as possible and check it for damage.

Front airbags
Please read the introductory information and heed the Warnings and Notice ⇒ Introduction.

48
Fig. 25 Installation location and deployment zone of the driver’s front airbag.

Fig. 26 Installation location and deployment zone of the front passenger’s front airbag.

As a supplement to the safety belts, the front airbag system offers additional protection for the head and chest regions of the driver and front passenger during frontal
collisions with higher impact severity. In certain head-on collisions, the Side Curtain Protection® airbags will also deploy on both sides.

Always maintain as much distance as possible to the front airbag ⇒ Seating position. This allows the front airbags to expand completely during collisions and thus
provide maximum protection.

The front airbag for the driver is located in the steering wheel fig. 25 and the front airbag for the front passenger is located in the instrument panel fig. 26. The
airbag installation locations are marked with the lettering “AIRBAG”.

The area outlined in red defines where the front airbags will deploy (deployment zone). Therefore, never place or attach objects in these areas ⇒ . The
attachments mounted at the factory will not be affected by the deployed driver’s and front passenger’s front airbag.

The front airbags do not deploy in the following situations:


In case of crashes when the ignition is switched off.

In side-on collisions.

In case of a rear-end collision.

If the vehicle rolls over.

If the impact speed is too low.

The front passenger’s front airbags do not deploy in the following situations:
If the front passenger seat is not occupied.

If the passenger seat recognition system recognizes that the front passenger seat is unoccupied and the PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator light comes
49
on.

DANGER

An airbag deploys within a few milliseconds and at a very high speed.

Always keep the deployment zones of the front airbags clear.

Never attach objects to the covers or in the deployment zone of the airbag module, such as cup holders or phone holders.

There should be no people, animals, or objects between the occupants of the front seats and the airbag deployment zone. Make sure that children and
passengers also follow this guideline.

Do not attach any objects, such as mobile navigation systems, to the windshield above the front airbag on the passenger's side.

Do not tape over or cover the steering wheel airbag module or the surface of the instrument panel in the deployment zone of the front passenger's front
airbag, or modify them in any other way.

WARNING

The front airbags expand in front of the steering wheel fig. 25 and the instrument panel fig. 26.

Always hold the steering wheel with both hands on the sides of the outer edge, in the nine o'clock and three o'clock position.

Adjust the driver seat so that there is a distance of at least 10 inches (25 cm) between your chest and the center of the steering wheel. If body
characteristics mean that this is not possible, you must contact an authorized Volkswagen dealer or authorized Volkswagen Service Facility. Volkswagen
recommends contacting an authorized Volkswagen dealer or authorized Volkswagen Service Facility.

Adjust the front passenger seat so that there is the greatest possible distance between the front passenger and the instrument panel.

Side airbags
Please read the introductory information and heed the Warnings and Notice ⇒ Introduction.

Fig. 27 In the vehicle interior on the left-hand side: Side airbag deployment zone.

50
Fig. 28 On the side of the front seat: Side airbag installation location and deployment zone

The installation locations of the side airbags are marked with the word “AIRBAG”.

The area outlined in red defines where the side airbags will deploy (deployment zones) fig. 28, fig. 27. Therefore, never place or attach objects in these areas ⇒
.

In the event of a side impact collision, the side airbags reduce the risk of injury to the vehicle occupants on the side of impact. The Side Curtain Protection® airbags
will deploy on both sides.

WARNING

An airbag deploys within a few milliseconds and at a very high speed.

Always keep the deployment zones of side airbags clear.

Only hang lightweight clothing from the garment hooks in the vehicle. Never store heavy or sharp-edged objects in pockets.

Do not attach any accessories to the doors.

Only use seat covers or protective covers that are specifically approved for use in your vehicle. Otherwise, the side airbag may not expand when
deployed.

WARNING

Incorrect handling and use of the driver’s and front passenger’s seat can inhibit the side airbags from functioning correctly and cause serious injuries.

Never remove the front seats from the vehicle or modify parts of them.

If too much force is applied to the seat backrest bolsters, the side airbags may not deploy correctly, deploy unexpectedly, or not deploy at all.

Have any damage to the seat covers or the seam in the side airbag module areas repaired immediately by suitably qualified professionals. Volkswagen
recommends contacting an authorized Volkswagen dealer or authorized Volkswagen Service Facility.

Side Curtain Protection


Please read the introductory information and heed the Warnings and Notice ⇒ Introduction.

Fig. 29 On the left side of the vehicle: installation location and deployment zone of the Side Curtain Protection®.

Side Curtain Protection® airbags are located on the driver's and passenger's side in the vehicle interior above the doors fig. 29.
51
The installation locations of the Side Curtain Protection® are marked with the word “AIRBAG”.

The area outlined in red defines where the Side Curtain Protection® airbags will deploy (deployment zone) fig. 29. Therefore, never place or attach objects in this
area ⇒ .

In side collisions and certain head-on collisions, the Side Curtain Protection® airbags will also deploy on both sides.

Side Curtain Protection® airbags offer the “ejection mitigation” function, which protects the vehicle occupants and body parts from being completely or partially
ejected from the vehicle in the event of a side impact collision or if the vehicle rolls over.

The Side Curtain Protection® airbags reduce the risk of injury to vehicle occupants in the front and outer rear seats during a side collision and certain head-on
collisions.

Side Curtain Protection® airbags are composed of the following components:


Control module and sensors.

Side Curtain Protection airbags.

Airbag indicator light ⇒ Indicator light for front passenger’s front airbag .

The Side Curtain Protection® airbags do not deploy in the following situations:
In case of crashes when the ignition is switched off.

In certain side collisions with a low force that does not trigger the sensor.

In case of a rear-end collision.

In the case of certain head-on collisions.

In certain rollovers with a low momentum that do not trigger the sensor.

If the impact speed is too low.

WARNING

An airbag deploys within a few milliseconds and at a very high speed.

Always keep the Side Curtain Protection® airbag deployment zones clear.

Never attach objects to the cover or within the Side Curtain Protection® airbag deployment zone.

There should be no people, animals, or objects between the occupants of the front seats or outer rear seats and the airbag deployment zone. Make sure
that children and passengers also follow this guideline.

Only hang lightweight clothing from the garment hooks in the vehicle. Never store heavy or sharp-edged objects in pockets.

Do not attach any accessories to the doors.

Do not attach any sunshades to the side windows that are not specifically approved for use in the vehicle.

Only pivot sunshades toward the side windows if no objects such as pens or garage door openers are attached to the visor.

Transporting children safely


Introduction
The physical principles in the event of an accident also apply to children. However, due to their size and other factors, they face a greater risk of injury.

Children and babies must therefore always be transported in child restraint systems that are designed for their age, size, weight and body structure. In the USA and
Canada, the use of tested and certified child restraint systems is required by law.

In the case of head-on collisions at speeds of between 30 and 55 km/h (approx. 20–35 mph), a small child weighing 6 kg (13 lbs) will be subjected to forces of more
than 20 times their body weight. This means that the child's effective weight will suddenly increase to up to 120 kg (260 lbs). Under such conditions, only a child
restraint used in accordance with regulations can reduce the risk of injury. However, a child restraint which is not used in accordance with regulations may further
increase the risk of injury!

All children (particularly children under 12 years of age) should always be transported on the rear seats in appropriate child restraint systems. However, if you must
use a child restraint on the front passenger seat in exceptional circumstances, always follow all the information and warnings available at ⇒ Introduction.

You can find more information on this subject at:

National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) (USA):


http://www.safercar.gov
Transport Canada Information Centre (Kanada):
http://www.tc.gc.ca
Read and follow the instructions from the child seat manufacturer to ensure that the seat is appropriate for your child. Also be sure to read and follow all the
information and warnings on child restraint systems in this manual!

WARNING

52
In the event of an accident, people sitting on the front passenger seat (particularly children and small children) may suffer severe or fatal injuries if there is not
sufficient distance between them and the airbag, if it is deployed (even with the Advanced Airbag System)!

The safest place for children is on the rear seats.

A suitable child restraint that is installed on the rear seat in accordance with regulations provides the highest level of protection for children and small
children in most accidents.

Even though the Advanced Airbag System is designed to detect child restraint systems on the front passenger seat and to switch off the front passenger's
front airbag, it is not possible to guarantee that the system will perform correctly under all circumstances and over the vehicle's service life.

In compliance with the “low risk” option for children of 3–6 years of age according to the U.S. Federal Standard, the Advanced Airbag System may be
deployed if the electrical capacity of a typical one-year-old child combined with a child restraint system on the front passenger seat is exceeded and the
criteria for deployment of the Advanced Airbag System are met.

WARNING

Accident statistics have shown that the rear seats offer greater safety than the front seats for children in general.

Always transport children under 12 years of age on the rear seats.

A child who is not secured or is not secured properly can be injured through sliding around in the vehicle interior or through being ejected from the vehicle
during a sudden maneuver or collision. Secure children in the vehicle with a child restraint that is appropriate for their weight and height and with the
safety belt used correctly ⇒ Transporting children safely.

A child who is not secured or not properly secured is exposed to an increased risk of injury or death through collision with an airbag. Make sure that
children are not within the deployment zone of the airbag.

A child restraint system corresponding to body weight and body size that is installed and used on the rear seats offers maximum protection for infants and
small children in most accident situations.

Child restraints – overview


Please read the introductory information and heed the Warnings and Notice ⇒ Introduction.
All children (particularly small children and infants) must be transported in child restraints suitable for them. These child restraints must always be installed correctly.
The information in the following table will help you to find the suitable child restraint for your child.

Child restraint type Use

Birth–12 months old: A child of up to 12 months of age must always be transported in a rear-facing
child restraint. There are different types of these:
Rear-facing child restraint – Rear-facing child restraints for infants only.
– Convertible and multi-purpose child restraints with greater weight and size restrictions for transporting
your child in the rear-facing position for longer periods of time.

1 – 3 years old: Transport your child in a rear-facing child restraint for as long as possible until they
Rear-facing child restraint before transitioning to the
have reached the weight and size restrictions. After your child has reached the weight and size
forward-facing child restraint
restrictions, you can transport them in a forward-facing child restraint with the appropriate safety belts.

4 – 7 years old: Transport your child in a forward-facing child restraint for as long as possible until they
Forward facing child restraints have reached the weight and size restrictions. After your child has reached the weight and size
restrictions, you can transport them in a booster seat but only on the rear seats.

7 – 12 years old: Transport your child using a booster seat until they have grown enough to sit on the
Booster seat seats with a safety belt without a booster seat. The safety belt must be routed correctly ⇒ Safety belt
positioning. You should continue to transport your child on the rear seats.

Child restraints can be fastened either with a three-point safety belt or with an ISOFIX/lower LATCH fastening system. Many child restraints also require the use of
top tether systems. Depending on countries and federal states, the use of Top Tether may even be required by law.

How to determine whether a child restraint is installed correctly


The child restraint lies flush against the seat cushion and the backrest unless the child restraint manufacturer allows a gap between the seat and child restraint.

The overhang of the child restraint on the seat cushion is not longer than 20% of the child restraint. Always follow the instructions for the permitted child
restraint overhangs.

You should always position the child restraint centrally on the seat.

The clearance of the child restraint forward and sideways is no greater than approximately 2.5 cm (1 inch).

The child restraint must not rest on the belt buckles of the seats. These could be damaged as a result.

When installing multiple child restraints, they must not block each other and must be free-standing and remain accessible.

53
The child restraint has been secured correctly using the three-point safety belt or ISOFIX/lower LATCH anchorage point. The top tether system of the child
restraint has also been used correctly as specified by the manufacturer.

DANGER

Not using the child restraint, using it incorrectly or using the wrong child restraint increases the risk of severe or fatal injuries in the event of a collision or an
accident.

Children sitting on the front seats may suffer severe or fatal injuries in the event of airbag deployment (even if advanced airbags are used).

Children in a rear-facing child restraint on the front passenger seat may suffer severe or fatal injuries in the event of airbag deployment.

Always install child restraints on the rear seats.

If, in exceptional circumstances, you nevertheless install a child restraint on the front passenger seat and the yellow
PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator light does not come on and stay on, remove the seat immediately and have the airbag system checked by an
authorized Volkswagen dealer or authorized Volkswagen Service Facility. Volkswagen recommends contacting an authorized Volkswagen dealer or
authorized Volkswagen Service Facility.

WARNING

If the airbag is deployed, a child restraint on the front passenger seat may collide with the airbag and the child in the child restraint may suffer severe or even
fatal injuries (even if advanced airbags are used). If, in exceptional circumstances, you nevertheless install a child restraint on the front passenger seat, observe
the following points:

Forward-facing child restraints may be situated in the deployment zone of a front passenger's front airbag and may result in severe or fatal injuries if the
airbag is deployed. Always ensure that the child restraint in use has been approved by the manufacturer for use on the front passenger seat.

Read and always follow the child seat manufacturer's instructions.

Never install a child restraint without a top tether safety belt if this is required by the manufacturer or by law.

Never position a forward-facing child restraint directly on the instrument panel.

Adjust the seat belt adjuster so that the seat can be installed correctly.

Position the front passenger seat as high as possible and move it as far back as possible in order to obtain the largest possible distance to the instrument
panel.

Make sure that the upper anchorage of the safety belt is behind the child restraint to ensure that the safety belt is routed correctly.

Make sue that the backrest is in the upright position.

WARNING

Any unused safety belts on the rear seats are a danger to your child when transported in a child restraint on the rear seats. By playing with the safety belts, the
child may get tangled up and this could result in severe or fatal injuries.

Always secure unused safety belts to the rear seat. You can do this by putting them around the head restraints which are furthest away from the installed
child restraint and secure the safety belt.

NOTICE

Make sure not to activate the lockable belt system when you secure the safety belts that are not being used.

Make sure that the belt is not damaged when installing the child restraint with the safety belt, particularly if you are using the lockable belt system.

Safety notes on using child restraints


Please read the introductory information and heed the Warnings and Notice ⇒ Introduction.

54
Fig. 30 Never allow children or infants to travel on your lap.

The correct use of child restraints significantly reduces the risk of injury in the event of an accident or collision!

All children, in particular children under the age of 12, must always travel in suitable child restraints on the rear seat.

Only use child restraints that are suitable for the height and weight of the child.

ISOFIX/lower LATCH anchorage points can be used to secure child restraints on the seats without using the vehicle's safety belts. If you do want to install a child
restraint using the safety belts instead of ISOFIX/lower LATCH anchorage points, please follow all instructions given by the child restraint manufacturer for guiding
the belt around the child restraint and securing the child in the child restraint. Ensure that the child restraint cannot move forward or sideways by more than 2.5 cm
(1 inch) after installation.

When installing a child restraint with the safety belt, you must activate the lockable belt system.

Never activate the lockable belt system when installing a booster seat or if a child is traveling without a child restraint.

Once the child restraint is correctly installed, the settings for that seat must no longer be changed. If the seat settings have been changed, the installation of the
child restraint must be checked and, if necessary, adjusted.

If a child restraint is installed on a seat, functions such as the massage function ⇒ Massage feature or seat heating ⇒ Seat heating and seat ventilation must not be
used on that seat.

Important additional information for installing child restraints on the front passenger seat

If, under exceptional circumstances, you need to install a child restraint on the front passenger seat, read and follow all warnings and instructions here ⇒
Introduction.

You can find additional information on the selection and use of child restraints here:

Transport Canada Information CentreTel.: 1-800-333-0371Tel.: 1-613-998-8616 (Ottawa)http://www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety


National Highway Traffic Safety AdministrationTel.: 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153)http://www.nhtsa.govhttp://www.safercar.gov
National SAFE KIDS CampaignTel.: 1-202-662-0600http://www.safekids.org
SafetyBeltSafe U.S.A.Tel.: 1-800-745-SAFE or 1-800-745-7233 (English)Tel.: 1-800-747-SANO or 1-800-747-7266 (Spanish)http://www.carseat.org
Volkswagen Customer CARETel.: 1-800-822-8987

DANGER

The use of rear-facing child restraints or infant carriers on the front passenger seat can cause severe or fatal injuries.

Always install rear-facing child restraints or infant carriers on the rear seat.

WARNING

Transporting children without a child restraint or with an unsuitable child restraint, or incorrectly installing a child restraint, increases the risk of severe or fatal
injuries in the event of an accident or collision.

Only use child restraints that are suitable for the child and that comply with the regulations set out by FMVSS 210 (CMVSS 213 in Canada).

Only use child restraints that sit on the seat cushion of the vehicle.

When installing the child restraint, follow the instructions given by the manufacturer of the child restraint.

Always observe all legal requirements regarding the installation and use of child restraints.

55
Children under 145 cm (around 4 ft, 9 in) may only be secured and transported in the vehicle with an appropriate child restraint.

Only one child must be allowed to travel in a child restraint.

Never drive with children, toddlers or babies on the driver's or a passenger's lap.

WARNING

Forward-facing child restraints on the front passenger seat may collide with the airbag if it is triggered, which can lead to severe or fatal injuries.

Always install child restraints on the rear seat.

Securing systems
Please read the introductory information and heed the Warnings and Notice ⇒ Introduction.
Different securing systems are used for safe installation of child restraints depending on the country.

Only use the securing systems described here to secure child restraints in the vehicle.

Overview of securing systems


ISOFIX/lower LATCH anchorage points: ISOFIX/lower LATCH anchorage points are attachment systems for quick and secure attachment of child restraints
in the vehicle. Attachment using ISOFIX/lower LATCH anchorage points creates a fixed connection between the child restraint and the vehicle.

The child restraint can have two fixed or flexible attachment arms. The attachment arms snap into the ISOFIX/lower LATCH anchorage points that are located
between the seat cushion and the rear seat backrest ⇒ Fastening a Child Restraint with ISOFIX or Lower LATCH Anchorage Point . Reinforce the attachment using
the ISOFIX/lower LATCH anchorage points by attaching with a top tether safety belt or a support bracket, if necessary.

Three-point safety belt : Child restraints can be fastened with a three-point safety belt ⇒ Securing a child restraint with a safety belt .

Additional fasteners:

Top Tether: the upper belt is guided over the rear seat backrest and secured to the anchorage point on the rear side of the rear seats using a hook ⇒ Securing
the child restraint with the upper strap (top tether). Top tether anchorages are labeled with an anchor symbol.

Support base: some child restraints are supported with a support base on the vehicle floor. The support base reduces the risk of the child restraint tipping
forward in the event of a collision. Only use child restraints with a support foot on the front passenger seat and the outer seats in the second row of seats ⇒
.

WARNING

Incorrect use of the support base can cause severe or fatal injuries.

Make sure the support base is installed correctly and securely.

Fastening a Child Restraint with ISOFIX or Lower LATCH Anchorage Point


Please read the introductory information and heed the Warnings and Notice ⇒ Introduction.

Installing child restraints with ISOFIX/lower LATCH anchorage point

Fig. 31 On the outer seats in the rear bench seat: Designation of the ISOFIX/lower LATCH anchorage points for child restraints.

56
Fig. 32 General example: fitting a child restraint with attachment arms.

The installation location of the ISOFIX/lower LATCH anchorage points is indicated by a symbol fig. 31.

1. Pay attention to and follow the information → page , Safety notes on using child restraints.

2. If necessary, fold down the protective caps of the ISOFIX/lower LATCH anchorage points.

3. Push the attachment arms of the child restraint in the direction of the arrow onto the ISOFIX/lower LATCH anchorage points fig. 32. The child restraint must
engage securely and audibly.

4. Pull on both sides of the child restraint to check that the child restraint is securely locked in place.

If the child restraint is equipped with a support foot, this support foot must be positioned securely on the vehicle floor.

Securing the child restraint with the upper strap (top tether)
Please read the introductory information and heed the Warnings and Notice ⇒ Introduction.

Fig. 33 On the rear side of the rear bench seat: Top tether anchorages for the top tether safety belt.

57
Fig. 34 On the rear side of the rear bench seat: attached top tether safety belt.

Top tether safety belts reduce the forward movement of the child restraint during an accident. This reduces the risk of a head injury to the child.

The anchorages suitable for top tether are labeled with a symbol and may have the label “TOP TETHER” fig. 33. Fasten the top tether safety belt only to the top
tether anchorages designed for this purpose.

Fastening the top tether safety belt


1. Pay attention to and follow the information → page , Safety notes on using child restraints.

2. Prepare the top tether safety belt on the child restraint according to the child restraint manufacturer instructions ⇒ .

3. If necessary, remove the luggage compartment cover and screen separator.

4. Place the child restraint in the center of the vehicle seat cushion and fasten it securely according to the child restraint manufacturer instructions.

5. If necessary, move the rear seat backrest of the vehicle seat to an upright position and adjust to the backrest of the child restraint.

6. Locate the top tether anchorage for the respective seat fig. 33.

7. If necessary, push the head restraint upwards and guide the top tether safety belt of the child restraint to the rear under the head restraint.

Applies to child restraints with a V-shaped top tether safety belt: Check that the top tether safety belt is taut on the seat and is not redirected by the bars of the
head restraint.

8. Guide the top tether safety belt of the child restraint back over the seat.

9. Hook the top tether safety belt into the appropriate anchorage marked with “top tether” fig. 34.

10. Pull on the top tether safety belt.

11. Check that the hook of the top tether safety belt is closed.

12. Tighten the top tether safety belt according to the child restraint manufacturer instructions ⇒ .

13. If necessary, guide the head restraint back into the starting position.

WARNING

Fastening the child restraint incorrectly increases the risk of serious and fatal injuries during an accident.

Always follow the child restraint manufacturer instructions for fastening the child restraint in the vehicle.

Never fasten a child restraint without the top tether safety belt if the use of a top tether safety belt is prescribed by the child restraint manufacturer or
legally required for the child restraint.

For example, the use of a top tether safety belt in conjunction with a forward-facing child restraint is legally required in Canada.

Improper fastening of the top tether safety belt can lead to serious injuries during an accident. The top tether anchorages are only approved for correctly
installed child restraints.

Always only fasten a top tether safety belt of a child restraint to a top tether anchorage.

Never fasten a child restraint top tether safety belt to a tie-down.

Never fasten a safety belt or another belt of the child restraint to a top tether anchorage.

Never fasten luggage or other objects to a top tether anchorage.

58
Releasing the top tether safety belt
1. Release the top tether safety belt according to the child restraint manufacturer instructions.

2. Release the catch on the hook and release the top tether safety belt from the top tether anchorage.

Securing a child restraint with a safety belt


Please read the introductory information and heed the Warnings and Notice ⇒ Introduction.

Locking the safety belt

If a child restraint is fastened with a safety belt, the safety belt must be locked. Note the instructions provided by the child restraint manufacturer.

If a safety belt is locked, the belt cannot unwind. A locked safety belt prevents the safety belt being released during the journey, which can mean that the child
restraint is no longer sufficiently secured.

1. Pay attention to and follow the information → page , Safety notes on using child restraints.

2. If available, adjust the height of the safety belt so that the belt webbing runs naturally along the child restraint without any sharp bends in the webbing.

3. Install the child restraint according to the guide from the child restraint manufacturer and ensure that the safety belt meant for the seat is used.

4. Insert the buckle tongue into the belt buckle belonging to the corresponding seat, until the buckle tongue latches into place.

5. Check that the safety belt is not twisted.

6. Check that the lap section of the safety belt is taut.

7. Completely pull out the shoulder belt section of the safety belt and then let it gently roll up.

While the safety belt is being rolled up, a clicking sound can be heard. Once the safety belt is locked, it cannot be further pulled out.

8. Press the child restraint into the seat and let the safety belt roll up further. If necessary, return the shoulder belt section of the safety belt to the automatic safety
belt retractor by hand.

9. Pull the belt guide of the child restraint.

Check that the child restraint cannot move further than 2.5 cm (approx. 1 inch).

Releasing the locked safety belt

The lockable safety belt may only be used to fasten certain child restraint systems in the vehicle. An activated locking mechanism must be released when a vehicle
occupant fastens their safety belt.

1. Release the safety belt from the belt buckle.

2. Remove the child restraint according to the instructions from the child restraint manufacturer.

3. Press the red button in the belt buckle and guide the safety belt back fully by hand.

The safety belt is no longer locked.

Keep any safety belts that are not being used out of the reach of children

Fig. 35 Keep any safety belts that are not being used away from children.

Secure any safety belts not being used to prevent a child from playing with the safety belt and getting caught in it. The procedure for securing a safety belt that is not
being used depends on the seating position.

To secure a safety belt that is not being used for one of the outer seats:

59
1. Position the safety belt around the head restraint of the center seating position fig. 35.

2. Make sure that the safety belt is out of range of any children so that children cannot touch it or play with it.

3. Make sure that the safety belt is not blocking the lower anchors.

If the anchor points are blocked, this may mean that you cannot install the child restraint properly in the anchor points.

4. Do not activate the lockable safety belt.

Otherwise, it is very difficult to retract the safety belt into its normal position. You should not hear any clicking noises when the safety belt is retracted.

To secure a safety belt that is not being used for the middle seat:

1. Insert the safety belt buckle tongue into the belt buckle for that seat fig. 35.

2. Pull the shoulder strap on the safety belt out fully to activate the lockable safety belt. You should hear a clicking noise when the safety belt is rolled up again.

3. Let the safety belt roll up fully. Pull the safety belt to make sure that the lockable safety belt is activated and the safety belt is properly fastened and tightened so
that the child cannot get hold of the belt or play with it.

If a child is secured on a seat in the second row, adjust the position in front of the child restraint to ensure that the child has enough space. For example, adjust the
front passenger seat to the size of the child and the child directly behind them. Always pay attention to the correct seating position ⇒ Seating position.

if no child restraints are needed, move all the safety belts back into their normal storage positions so that the safety belts are available for normal use.

Installing on the center seating position

When installing a child restraint on the center seating position, it is especially important to install correctly because this seating position is narrower than both of the
outer seats. If the child restraint is wider than the seat surface, the belt buckle of the adjacent seating position may be covered and could then be damaged. When
installing child seats, always ensure that all belt buckles are easily accessible.

If nothing else is specified by the child restraint manufacturer, the child restraint must rest close against the backrest and seat surface and must not overlap seat
surfaces.

The child restraint must be installed straight and centered on the seating position, and it must not be able to move more than 2.5 cm (approx. 1 inch).

The child restraint must not rest on the belt buckles.

When installing multiple child restraints, the child restraints must not become caught on one another.

In some cases, even if a child restraint is installed correctly on the center seating position, it may cover the belt buckles and could then damage them and make the
belt buckles unusable. This can occur if the child restraint slides on the seat surface while driving. Therefore, check the position of the child restraint regularly to
ensure that the belt buckles are neither covered nor damaged.

WARNING

A child that is in a child restraint that has been secured with the anchor points or with a safety belt may play with any unused safety belts on the rear seat and get
tangled up, which could result in serious or even fatal injuries.

Always keep any safety belts for the rear seats that are not being used out of the reach of children.

Securing a booster seat with a safety belt


Please read the introductory information and heed the Warnings and Notice ⇒ Introduction.

Fig. 36 Correctly fastened child on a booster seat.

60
Children between the ages of around 8 and 12 are best protected when they travel on a booster seat that is suitable for their age and height.

The safety belts of the vehicle generally only fit children 145 cm (approx. 4 ft, 9 in) tall or taller. Booster seats ensure that children under this height can be correctly
fastened using the safety belt.

Never activate the lockable belt system when securing a child with a booster seat.

The upper area of the belt must always be positioned on the child's shoulder. Ensure that the belt does not rest on the child's face or neck.

The lap belt must always run across the child's lap. It must never run across the child's stomach.

Children over 145 cm (approx. 4 ft, 9 in) tall can generally be fastened with the safety belt. Pay attention to the information at ⇒ Safety belt positioning.

Your child no longer needs a booster seat if they are taller than 145 cm (approx. 4 ft, 9 in) and the following conditions are met:

The child can sit with their back fully against the backrest.

The child's knees bend over the edge of the seat.

The child's feet sit fully flat on the vehicle floor.

The child can comfortably stay in this position for the entire journey.

Children aged 12 or under must always travel on a rear seat.

WARNING

Not using a booster seat or incorrectly using a booster seat or safety belt can cause severe or fatal injuries in the event of an accident or collision.

Always observe all instructions regarding the installation and use of child restraints and booster seats.

If, under exceptional circumstances, you need to install a booster seat on the front passenger seat, ensure that the PASSENGER AIR BAG
indicator light turns on and remains on.

In case of an emergency
Securing yourself and the vehicle
Follow all legal regulations regarding securing a vehicle during a breakdown. For example, in many countries you must switch on the emergency flashers and wear
a reflective vest ⇒ Emergency equipment .

Checklist
For your own safety and the safety of your passengers, follow the points below in the order they are given ⇒ :

1. Park your vehicle a safe distance from traffic and on suitable ground. Observe all important information on parking when doing so ⇒ , ⇒ Parking.

2. Switch on the emergency flashers ⇒ Bottom section of the center console .

3. Have all vehicle occupants exit the vehicle on the side facing away from traffic and move to a safe area, such as behind a guard rail. Follow the local regulations
regarding wearing a reflective vest.

4. Set up the warning triangle to warn others on the road about the vehicle.

5. Observe the safety instructions → page , Safety precautions for working in the engine compartment .

6. If necessary, contact an authorized Volkswagen dealer or authorized Volkswagen Service Facility for assistance. Volkswagen recommends contacting the
Volkswagen emergency assistance service.

When the emergency flashers are switched on, for example while towing the vehicle, you can indicate any turns or lane changes using the turn signal lever. The
emergency flashers will stop temporarily.

Read and observe the important information about towing ⇒ Introduction.

Switch on the emergency flashers in the following situations, for example:


To warn traffic behind your vehicle if the traffic ahead slows suddenly or you reach the end of a traffic jam.

If there has been an accident.

If the vehicle malfunctions.

When towing the vehicle.

Always follow the applicable local requirements for use of the emergency flashers.

If the emergency flashers do not work, others on the road must be informed about the stalled vehicle in some other way that meets the applicable legal regulations.

WARNING

A stalled vehicle increases the risk of a crash that could cause injury to you, your vehicle occupants, or others on the road.

Stop the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so.

Park the vehicle a safe distance from moving traffic.

61
Switch on the emergency flashers.

Never leave any persons, particularly children or people requiring assistance, in the vehicle. This is especially true when the doors are locked. Individuals
locked in the vehicle could be exposed to very high or very low temperatures.

WARNING

Failing to heed this checklist that is provided for your own safety can cause accidents and serious injuries.

Always follow the activities in the checklist and follow the general safety precautions.

WARNING

Exhaust system components will become very hot. This can result in fires and serious injuries.

Never park the vehicle in such a way so that any exhaust system components could come into contact with flammable materials under the vehicle such
as dry grass or fuel.

NOTICE

When pushing the vehicle by hand, do not press on the taillights, the rear spoiler, or large pieces of sheet metal. Doing so could cause vehicle damage and the
rear spoiler may detach.

The 12 V vehicle battery will drain if the emergency flashers remain on for a long period of time, even if the ignition is switched off.

Depending on vehicle equipment, the brake lights may blink quickly if you brake hard while driving at speeds above approx. 50 mph (approx. 80 km/h) or
brake the vehicle to a complete stop. This is done to warn traffic behind your vehicle. If the braking continues, the emergency flashers will switch on automatically
when the vehicle speed is below approx. 6 mph (approx. 10 km/h). The emergency flashers will switch off automatically when you accelerate.

Emergency equipment
First aid kit

Depending on the vehicle equipment and country of use, the first aid kit may be in a storage compartment, in a holder in the luggage compartment, under the
luggage compartment floor, or in the vehicle interior.

The first aid kit must meet the legal regulations.

Note the expiration date of the contents.

Replace contents after use, if necessary, and put the first aid kit securely back into place.

Warning triangle

Fig. 37 In the trunk lid: Holder for the warning triangle.

Depending on the country and the vehicle equipment, the warning triangle may be located in the trunk lid fig. 37.

1. With the trunk lid open, hold the sleeve of the warning triangle by the recess and turn it 90° towards the front of the vehicle.

62
2. Remove the sleeve through the opening.

3. After use, store the warning triangle back in the sleeve and insert the sleeve back into the holder.

The warning triangle must meet the legal regulations.

Reflective vest

Depending on the vehicle equipment and country of use, the safety vest may be in a storage compartment in the front door trim panel or in the glove compartment
⇒ Driver door, ⇒ Passenger’s side.

The reflective vest must meet the legal regulations.

Fire extinguisher

Depending on the vehicle equipment and country of use, a fire extinguisher may be located in a holder in the footwell under the front passenger seat.

The fire extinguisher must meet the legal regulations, always be ready to operate, and be checked regularly – see inspection seal on the fire extinguisher.

WARNING

Objects that are loose or secured incorrectly can be thrown around the vehicle interior during sudden driving or braking maneuvers or in a collision and cause
serious injuries.

Always position the first aid kit, warning triangle and fire extinguisher securely in the holders provided in the vehicle.

Store the reflective vest in a storage compartment so that it is easy to access.

Information Call, Roadside Assistance Call and Emergency Call Service

Fig. 38 Located on the roof console: Emergency Call Service button (behind a button cover) and indicator light.

Fig. 39 Located on the roof console: Emergency Call Service button.

63
Fig. 40 In the overhead console: Controls for the information call and roadside assistance call.

Information call.

Roadside assistance call.

The control in the roof console fig. 38, fig. 39, fig. 40 can be used for voice services, depending on the vehicle equipment and country of use. The required
connection is produced by a control module installed by the manufacturer.
Note the additional information on VW Car-Net® ⇒ ®.

Indicator lights for the Emergency Call Service

An indicator light fig. 38 (arrow) for voice and data transmission services is located in the control panel. The indicator light comes on in different colors and light
patterns depending on the vehicle operating status of the Emergency Call Service:

The indicator light does not light up: The vehicle is offline and has no connectivity. The red indicator light comes on and remains on: system error. The
Emergency Call Service is limited or not available. The green indicator light lights up: Displays the availability of mobile radio signal. Does not display whether
VW Car-Net services have been purchased and are active, except for the Emergency Call Service. The indicator light blinks green: there is a call in progress.

Information call
With an information call, a call can be made to the VW Car-Net call center for questions regarding VW Car-Net services.

The contact person will communicate in the language of the country in which the vehicle was registered with VW Car-Net, or in the language of the country for
which the vehicle was produced.

Roadside assistance call


If you break down, you can contact an authorized Volkswagen dealer or authorized Volkswagen Service Facility for assistance with the roadside assistance
call.

Some vehicle data, e.g. its current location, is transferred in parallel to the voice call.

The contact person will communicate in the language of the country in which the vehicle was registered with VW Car-Net, or in the language of the country for
which the vehicle was produced.

Emergency Call Service


Using the Emergency Call Service, assistance can be organized as quickly as possible in dangerous situations.

The Emergency Call Service is only available if a corresponding license is acquired.

If the Emergency Call Service is triggered, a call to the VW Car-Net call center will be made.

If an emergency call is triggered manually or by a collision with airbag deployment or safety belt pretensioner deployment, data that is relevant to the
emergency call, such as the vehicle's current location, is automatically transmitted ⇒ Customer information.

The contact partner will communicate in the language that is set in the vehicle's Infotainment system. If this language is not available at the current emergency
call location, English will be used.

WARNING

The following conditions may restrict or prevent a manual or automatic emergency call:

The emergency call location is in an area with no cell phone and satellite reception, or insufficient reception.

You are in a location where there is sufficient mobile phone and satellite reception, but the telecommunications provider's mobile communications
network is unavailable.

64
The Emergency Call Service is not permitted by law in some countries.

VW Car-Net has not been activated.

No valid license for the use of the Emergency Call Service has been acquired or the license has expired.

The vehicle components required for manual or automatic emergency calls are damaged or do not have sufficient power.

The vehicle's ignition is not switched on.

Triggering an emergency call manually


1. If fitted, press on the button cover briefly and fold the cover downward.

2. Press the emergency call button fig. 39 until the green indicator light starts to flash.

The emergency call is triggered and a voice call to the VW Car-Net call center is established.

If you pressed the emergency call button by mistake, cancel the emergency call immediately:

1. Press the emergency call button again until the indicator light remains green.

Automatic emergency call

The automatic emergency call is only triggered when the ignition is on.

A call will automatically be made to the VW Car-Net call center immediately after the airbags or safety belt pretensioners deploy. The automatic emergency call
cannot be stopped by pressing the emergency call button fig. 39.

If questions from the VW Car-Net call center remain unanswered, rescue operations will automatically start.

Integrated battery

The integrated battery ensures that the Emergency Call Service will still be available for some time if the 12 V vehicle battery is disconnected or faulty.

If the integrated battery is drained or faulty, a message indicating this will be displayed in the instrument cluster. If this message is shown, immediately consult an
authorized Volkswagen dealer or authorized Volkswagen Service Facility and have the integrated battery replaced. Volkswagen recommends contacting an
authorized Volkswagen dealer or authorized Volkswagen Service Facility.
Have the integrated battery checked, and if necessary, replaced by an authorized Volkswagen dealer or authorized Volkswagen Service Facility after
approximately three years. Volkswagen recommends contacting an authorized Volkswagen dealer or authorized Volkswagen Service Facility.

Data transmission

The available data will be sent to the VW Car-Net call center during an emergency call to determine what rescue measures are needed.

The data regarding the location of the vehicle is continuously overwritten, so that only the ten most recent saved locations as required for the Emergency Call
Service to function are available. The vehicle cannot be tracked on a continuous basis.

The emergency call data is only processed to ensure the proper function of the Emergency Call Service.

The following data will be sent:

The current vehicle position at the time the emergency call was triggered

Nine other vehicle positions shortly before the emergency call was triggered (from the route driven, a few km (around 2 miles)).

Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)

Type of vehicle drive.

Vehicle model

Trigger type (automatic or manual)

Call type.

Direction in which the vehicle was moving at the time the emergency call was triggered.

Accident severity.

Accident direction.

Time of impact

Reliability of the positioning data

Data set version.

Counter of the data sets transmitted per call

Calculated number of passengers.

Language selected in the Infotainment system.

Optional data ID.


The Emergency Call Service function may be limited by any after-market Infotainment systems that are installed.

65
Troubleshooting
Emergency Call Service malfunction

The red indicator light in the emergency call button comes on and remains on . The message Error: Emergency call function. Service vehicle may also be
displayed in the instrument cluster.

There is a system error with the Emergency Call Service. You may not be able to make an emergency call.

1. Contact an authorized Volkswagen dealer or authorized Volkswagen Service Facility immediately and have the fault rectified. Volkswagen recommends
contacting an authorized Volkswagen dealer or authorized Volkswagen Service Facility.

Emergency Call Service limited

The red indicator light in the emergency call button comes on and remains on . The message Emergency call function limited. Service vehicle may also be
displayed in the instrument cluster.

The Emergency Call Service function has restricted availability. For example, you cannot make a voice call to the VW Car-Net® call center.

1. Contact an authorized Volkswagen dealer or authorized Volkswagen Service Facility immediately and have the fault rectified. Volkswagen recommends
contacting an authorized Volkswagen dealer or authorized Volkswagen Service Facility.

Controls are responding differently than expected

Moisture, dirt and grease may limit the functioning of the controls.

1. Always keep the control panels clean and dry.

66
Opening and Closing
Vehicle key
Vehicle key functions

Fig. 41 Vehicle key.

Unlock the vehicle. All turn signals will flash twice.

Unlock the trunk lid separately. All turn signals will flash twice. To do this, briefly press and hold the button.

Lock the vehicle. All turn signals will flash once.

Indicator light: Will blink when a button is pressed if all doors and the trunk lid are closed.

WARNING

If you leave vehicle keys unattended in the vehicle, children or unauthorized people could lock the doors and/or the trunk lid, start the engine, or switch on the
ignition and thereby activate electrical equipment, such as the power windows. This can cause accidents and serious or fatal injuries.

Always take all vehicle keys with you when leaving the vehicle.

WARNING

If you leave children, people requiring assistance or animals unattended in the vehicle, they may accidentally set the vehicle in motion or be subjected to very
high or low temperatures. There is a risk of accidents and serious or fatal injuries.

Never leave children, people requiring assistance or animals unattended in the vehicle.

NOTICE

External influences may limit the functionality of the remote control vehicle key and damage it.

Protect the vehicle key from moisture and strong impacts.

Regular use of comfort systems and other usage patterns shorten the service life of the button cell in the vehicle key.

Emergency key

67
Fig. 42 Vehicle key: releasing the emergency key.

Briefly press the release button. The key ring will fold open.

Press the release button and pull out the emergency key in the direction of the arrow.

Emergency key.

There is an emergency key located in the vehicle key that can be used to manually unlock and lock the vehicle fig. 42.

Possible functions:

Unlock and lock the vehicle manually.

Switch the childproof lock on and off ⇒ Child safety lock .

Replacing the button cell battery


Volkswagen recommends having the button cell changed by suitably qualified professionals. Volkswagen recommends contacting an authorized Volkswagen dealer
or authorized Volkswagen Service Facility ⇒ .

Fig. 43 Remote control vehicle key: opening the battery compartment cover.

Emergency key.

Lever out the cover.

68
Fig. 44 Vehicle key: replacing the button cell battery

1. Remove the emergency key fig. 43 , ⇒ Emergency key .

2. Insert the spare key in the slot, push it in the direction of the arrow and lever out the cover fig. 43.

3. Lift the button cell battery out of the battery compartment fig. 44 , ⇒ .

4. Press the new button cell battery into the battery compartment.

5. Press the cover onto the housing fig. 44 , ⇒ .

6. Store the emergency key ⇒ Emergency key .

7. Dispose of drained battery in a way that will not harm the environment.

DANGER

If button cell batteries are swallowed or enter the windpipe, serious or fatal injuries will occur within a very short time due to choking or internal burns.

Seek medical assistance immediately if you suspect that a button cell battery has been swallowed.

Always keep the remote control and key fob with button cell batteries out of the reach of children.

NOTICE

If the button cell battery is replaced incorrectly or a battery is unsuitable, it can damage the vehicle key.

Only replace a drained battery with a new battery of the same voltage, size, and specification.

Make sure the battery is facing in the right direction when inserting it.

If the battery cover cannot be closed, do not use the remote control.

The type of batteries used in the remote control of your vehicle key can contain perchlorate. This requires special handling. Observe all legal requirements
regarding the handling and disposal of these batteries ⇒ Disposal of old batteries and electronic devices . Volkswagen recommends having this service carried
out for you by suitably qualified professionals. Volkswagen recommends contacting an authorized Volkswagen dealer or authorized Volkswagen Service
Facility.

Synchronizing a vehicle key


If the vehicle cannot be unlocked or locked using the vehicle key, synchronize the vehicle key or replace the button cell battery ⇒ Replacing the button cell battery

Synchronizing a vehicle key


1. Stand next to the vehicle.

2. Press the button on the vehicle key twice, quickly.

Or:

1. Remove the emergency key ⇒ Emergency key .

2. If necessary, remove the cap from the driver's door handle ⇒ Locking the front passenger door and rear doors in an emergency .

3. Press the button on the vehicle key.

4. Unlock the vehicle using the emergency key.

5. Open the driver door.

69
If the vehicle is equipped with an anti-theft alarm system, the alarm will be triggered immediately ⇒ Anti-theft alarm system .

6. Switch the ignition on.

To switch on the ignition, an emergency start must be performed. ⇒ Troubleshooting.

This completes the synchronization.

Troubleshooting
Vehicle cannot be locked or unlocked

Remote control is disrupted by objects, poor weather conditions or transmitters on the same frequency band close to the vehicle (e.g. cell phones), as well as by a
drained button cell.

The central locking switches off briefly to protect it from overloading.

1. Close the driver door.

Or: Synchronize the vehicle key ⇒ Synchronizing a vehicle key .

Or: Change the battery cell in the vehicle key ⇒ Replacing the button cell battery .

The indicator light is not blinking

If the indicator light in the vehicle key does not blink when you press one of the buttons, then the button cell battery in the vehicle key must be replaced.

You can get an additional or replacement vehicle key from an authorized Volkswagen dealer or authorized Volkswagen Service Facility.

“Keyless Access” with push-button start


Introduction
Keyless Access makes it possible to unlock and lock the vehicle without actively using the key. A valid vehicle key must be present within the vicinity of the vehicle to
use this function.

Unlocking or locking using Keyless Access

Fig. 45 Keyless Access: sensor range.

70
Fig. 46 In door handle: sensors.

Sensor surface on the inside of the door handle.

Sensor surface on the outside of the door handle.

Configuring Keyless Access

The behavior of Keyless Access can be set in the Vehicle menu in the Infotainment system.

If the Keyless Access function is deactivated, it may be subject to functional limitations.

Unlocking the vehicle


1. Touch the sensor fig. 46 on the inside of the door handle.

All turn signals will flash twice.

If the sensor is touched twice, the entire vehicle will be unlocked.

Automatically unlocking the vehicle

The vehicle can be unlocked automatically. To do so, the function must be activated in the Infotainment system and the vehicle key must be within the sensor range
of the vehicle.

If the vehicle key is detected within the range of any of the sensors fig. 45, the vehicle is then unlocked. All turn signals will flash twice.

If the vehicle is not unlocked for a long period of time, the function is automatically deactivated. The function is reactivated the next time the vehicle is locked.

If single door unlocking is activated in the settings for the central locking in the Infotainment system, this may restrict automatic unlocking.

Locking the vehicle


1. Park the vehicle.

2. Touch the sensor fig. 46 on the outside of the door handle.

All turn signals will flash once.

The unlock function is deactivated for several seconds so that you can check if the vehicle locked correctly.

Unlocking the trunk lid

If the vehicle is locked and a vehicle key is within the trunk lid sensor range, the trunk lid will unlock automatically when opened. After closing, the trunk lid will lock
again.

Please note: If Central locking for all doors and Keyless Access unlocking upon approach are activated in the Infotainment system, the vehicle remains unlocked
after opening and closing the trunk lid. The vehicle must be actively locked.

Deactivating Keyless Access temporarily

You can temporarily deactivate the Keyless Access with push-button start unlocking function to prevent the vehicle from being unlocked and started by unauthorized
people.

1. Lock the vehicle with the button on the vehicle key.

2. Within five seconds of locking the vehicle, touch the sensor on the outside of the door handle once fig. 46 . Do not grasp the door handle during this
process.

Keyless Access is now temporarily deactivated.

3. To check that it has actually been deactivated, wait at least 10 seconds and then pull on the door handle.

The door should not open.

The next time the vehicle is unlocked, you must use the vehicle key. Keyless Access will be reactivated the next time the vehicle is unlocked.

71
Deactivating Keyless Access permanently

You can also permanently deactivate Keyless Access in the Infotainment system to prevent the vehicle from being unlocked and started by unauthorized people.

Troubleshooting
If Keyless Access is not working

The sensor function may be impaired if the sensor is dirty.

1. Clean the sensors.

If all turn signals flash four times

The vehicle key that was last used is still in the vehicle.

1. Remove the key and lock the vehicle.

Automatic sensor deactivation


The sensors will deactivate automatically under the following conditions:

If the vehicle is not unlocked or locked for a long period of time

If a sensor is triggered too frequently

Reactivating the sensor pads:

1. Unlock the vehicle using the button on the vehicle key.

Valid vehicle key cannot be detected

The yellow indicator light turns on. A message will also appear in the instrument cluster display.

The vehicle key is no longer in the vehicle or within range of the sensors.

1. Do not switch the ignition off.

2. Bring the vehicle key back into the vehicle or within range of the sensors.

If the problem persists, contact an authorized Volkswagen dealer or authorized Volkswagen Service Facility. Volkswagen recommends contacting an authorized
Volkswagen dealer or authorized Volkswagen Service Facility.

NOTICE

Strong streams of water or vapor could activate the sensors in the door handles if a valid vehicle key is located near the vehicle. This may cause the windows to
open and moisture may enter the vehicle interior. This could lead to damage to the vehicle interior.

Never direct the jet of a high pressure cleaner or a steam jet directly towards the sensors in the door handles.

If at least one window is open and the sensors in one door handle are permanently activated, then all windows will close.

If the message Keyless faulty. appears in the instrument cluster display, there may be a malfunction in the Keyless Access system. Contact an authorized
Volkswagen dealer or authorized Volkswagen Service Facility. Volkswagen recommends contacting an authorized Volkswagen dealer or authorized Volkswagen
Service Facility.

The Keyless Access with push-button start may not function correctly if another signal, e.g. from a cell phone in the immediate vicinity, interferes with the
vehicle key or if the vehicle key is covered by an object, such as a metal case. If there is no vehicle key in the vehicle or the key is not detected, a relevant
message will appear in the instrument cluster display.

Doors and central locking button


Introduction
The doors can be manually locked and in some cases unlocked, for example if the vehicle key or the central locking system is malfunctioning.

The central locking system allows you to unlock and lock all doors, the trunk lid, and the fuel filler flap from one location.

The vehicle can be locked when the ignition has been switched off or if the driver has exited the vehicle when the engine is stopped.

An image in the instrument cluster display indicates if one or more doors have not opened or closed correctly.

Do not continue driving!

1. Safely park the vehicle, if necessary.

2. Open the respective door and close it again.

The image is also displayed when the ignition is switched off, and it turns off several seconds after the doors are closed and the vehicle has been locked.

WARNING

72
If a door is not closed correctly, it can open suddenly while driving and cause serious or fatal injuries.

Stop immediately and close the door.

When closing the door, make sure it engages securely and completely. When closed, the door must be flush with the areas of the vehicle body that are
around the door.

WARNING

When the door is being held open by the door arrester, it may close by itself in high winds or on inclines, which can cause serious injuries.

Always hold the door handle firmly when opening and closing the door.

WARNING

Opening and closing the doors and trunk lid without due care can be dangerous and result in serious injuries.

Do not open or close the doors and trunk lid if anyone is in the way.

WARNING

The central locking system locks all the doors. In case of an emergency or accident, locked doors can make it more difficult for first responders to access the
vehicle interior. When the vehicle is locked from the outside, the doors and power windows cannot be opened from the inside. There is a risk of serious or fatal
injuries.

Never leave children, people requiring assistance or animals unattended in the vehicle.

WARNING

All doors can be locked from the inside using the central locking button. Otherwise, children, people requiring assistance or animals could be locked inside the
vehicle. In an emergency, they may not be able to exit the vehicle without assistance or help themselves. Otherwise, they may be subjected to very high or low
temperatures. There is a risk of serious or fatal injuries.

Never leave children, people requiring assistance or animals unattended in the vehicle.

NOTICE

Removing caps without due care may result in damage to the vehicle.

When using the emergency locking or emergency unlocking feature, remove and reinstall the parts carefully and correctly.

When the vehicle is locked from the inside, it reduces the risk of opening the doors unintentionally and of unauthorized people entering the vehicle.

Indicator light in the driver's door


Please read the introductory information and heed the Warnings and Notice ⇒ and Introduction.
The indicator light for the central locking system is located in the driver's door.

The indicator light shows the status of the central locking system for around 30 seconds after the vehicle is locked.

The red LED light blinks at short intervals for around 2 seconds.

The status of the central locking system is then displayed for around 28 seconds:

Vehicles without SAFELOCK


If the red LED light blinks at long intervals, the vehicle is locked.

After around 30 seconds, the LED light blinks at slow intervals.

Special conditions

If the red LED light comes on continuously, there is a fault in the central locking system or the anti-theft alarm system.

Automatic locking and unlocking


Please read the introductory information and heed the Warnings and Notice ⇒ and Introduction.
Depending on how your vehicle is equipped, settings for the central locking can be configured in the Vehicle settings menu in the Infotainment system.

Automatic locking (Auto Lock)

73
The vehicle locks automatically at speeds of about 15 km/h (9 mph) or higher. If the vehicle is locked, the indicator light will turn yellow in the central locking
button.

Automatic unlocking (Auto Unlock)

If one of the following conditions apply, all doors and the trunk lid will unlock automatically:

In vehicles with an automatic transmission: the parking lock is engaged and the ignition is switched off.

Or: if the door handle has been pulled. This applies at speeds up to 15 km/h (9 mph).

Or: if airbags have deployed during a collision.

The Auto Unlock function makes it possible for first responders to access the inside of the vehicle.

Central locking button


Please read the introductory information and heed the Warnings and Notice ⇒ and Introduction.

Fig. 47 In the driver's door: Central locking button (general example).

Central locking button.

– Unlock the vehicle.

– Lock the vehicle.

The central locking button functions both when the ignition is on or off, but only when all the doors are closed.

If the vehicle is locked from the outside using the vehicle key, the central locking buttons will be disabled.

If the vehicle is locked from the inside using the central locking button, then:

The indicator light in the button will turn yellow if all doors are closed and locked.

The anti-theft alarm system will not be activated ⇒ Anti-theft alarm system .

The doors can be opened from the inside by pulling the door handle. The indicator light in the button turns off. The unopened doors and the trunk lid will remain
locked and cannot be opened from the outside.

Locking the front passenger door and rear doors in an emergency


Please read the introductory information and heed the Warnings and Notice ⇒ and Introduction.

74
Fig. 48 In the front edge of the rear right-hand door: vehicle emergency lock for using the emergency key (general example).

The front passenger door and the rear doors can each be locked manually.

The anti-theft alarm system is not activated when this happens ⇒ Anti-theft alarm system .

1. Open the door.

2. Remove the rubber seal in the front of the door.

3. Insert the emergency key in the vertical slot and turn it inwards fig. 48.

4. Reattach the rubber seal.

5. Check that the door is locked.

6. Have the vehicle checked immediately by a suitably qualified professional. Volkswagen recommends contacting an authorized Volkswagen dealer or authorized
Volkswagen Service Facility.

If a door is locked manually, it will unlock again when the vehicle is unlocked or if that door is opened from the inside.
Doors can be unlocked and opened from the inside by pulling the door handle.

Child safety lock


Please read the introductory information and heed the Warnings and Notice ⇒ and Introduction.

Fig. 49 Child safety lock: left rear door, right rear door.

Child safety lock is switched off.

Child safety lock is switched on.

The child safety locks are located on the inner door panels of the rear doors.
75
The child safety lock reduces the risk of the rear doors being opened from the inside ⇒ .

When the child safety lock is switched on, the door can only be opened from the outside.

Switching the child safety lock on or off


1. Unlock the vehicle the open the respective rear door.

2. Bring the slot into the corresponding position fig. 49.

WARNING

When the child safety lock is switched on, that door cannot be opened from the inside. This can result in people locking themselves inside the vehicle. In an
emergency, they may not be able to exit the vehicle without assistance or help themselves.

Never leave children or people requiring assistance unattended in the vehicle when the doors are locked.

WARNING

If you leave children, people requiring assistance or animals unattended in the vehicle, they may be subjected to very high or low temperatures. There is a risk of
serious or fatal injuries.

Never leave children, people requiring assistance or animals unattended in the vehicle.

Troubleshooting
Please read the introductory information and heed the Warnings and Notice ⇒ and Introduction.

If the indicator light does not turn off

The red LED in the vehicle door flashes briefly and then stays on.

There is a malfunction in the locking system.

1. Contact a suitably qualified professional. Volkswagen recommends contacting an authorized Volkswagen dealer or authorized Volkswagen Service Facility.

If the turn signals are not flashing

The turn signals are not blinking as confirmation when locking the vehicle:

1. Check whether all of the doors and the trunk lid and engine hood are closed.

2. Close any doors and trunk lid or engine hood that are not closed.

If the vehicle is locking automatically

The vehicle will lock again automatically after approximately 45 seconds if one of the following conditions apply:

The vehicle was unlocked, but not opened

The ignition was not switched on

The trunk lid was not opened.

Locking with a second vehicle key

For vehicles with Keyless Access with push-button start: If a second vehicle key is used to lock the vehicle from outside, the vehicle key inside the vehicle is
immediately disabled so that it cannot be used to start the engine; it is still possible to perform an emergency start, however.

1. To enable the vehicle key inside the vehicle so that it can be used to start the engine as usual, press the button on the remote control vehicle key inside the
vehicle

Locking the vehicle after an airbag deploys

The entire vehicle unlocks when an airbag deploys in a collision. Depending on the severity of the damage, it may be possible to lock the vehicle as follows after the
collision:

1. Switch the ignition off.

2. Open the driver door and shut it again.

3. Lock the vehicle.

NOTICE

Strong streams of water or vapor could activate the sensors in the door handles if a valid vehicle key is located near the vehicle. This may cause the windows to
open and moisture may enter the vehicle interior. This could lead to damage to the vehicle interior.

Never direct the jet of a high pressure cleaner or a steam jet directly towards the sensors in the door handles.

76
It may not be possible to unlock or lock the vehicle using Keyless Access if the 12 V vehicle battery or button cell battery in the vehicle is weak or drained. The
vehicle can be manually unlocked or locked.

If there is no valid vehicle key in the vehicle or one is not detected, a message will appear in the instrument cluster display. This can occur if another signal
interferes with the remote control vehicle key or if the remote control vehicle key is covered by an object, such as a metal case.

Anti-theft alarm system


The vehicle may be equipped with an anti-theft alarm system.

The anti-theft alarm system monitors the doors, the hood, and the trunk lid.

The anti-theft alarm system is automatically activated when you lock the vehicle.

If an attempt is made to access the vehicle without using the appropriate vehicle key, this triggers the anti-theft alarm system, which emits audible and visual
warning signals for up to five minutes.

When is the alarm triggered?


If a door that was unlocked manually using the vehicle key is opened.

If the hood is opened.

If the trunk lid is opened.

If the ignition is switched on with an invalid vehicle key.

If the diagnostic connection is used when the anti-theft alarm system is active.

Switching off the alarm


1. Unlock the vehicle with the unlock button on the vehicle key.

2. Grasp the door handle ⇒ “Keyless Access” with push-button start .

3. Switch the ignition on.

The anti-theft alarm system will not work correctly if the 12 V vehicle battery is weak or drained.

Disconnecting the 12 V vehicle battery may set off the anti-theft alarm system.

Trunk lid
Introduction
The trunk lid is unlocked and locked together with the doors.

On vehicles with Keyless Access, the trunk lid is automatically unlocked when opening ⇒ “Keyless Access” with push-button start .

If individual door opening or the opening of one side of doors is activated in the Infotainment system settings for opening and closing, you must press the button
on the remote control vehicle key twice to unlock the trunk lid.

On vehicles with Keyless Access you must press the sensor on the inside of the driver's or front passenger's door handle twice to do this.

WARNING

Uncontrolled or unintentional release: opening and closing the trunk lid can cause accidents and serious injuries.

Do not open or close the trunk lid if anyone is in the way.

Always keep the trunk lid closed while driving.

Close and lock the trunk lid and all doors when the vehicle is not in use.

Check that, when closed, the trunk lid is flush with the areas of the vehicle body around it.

WARNING

Depending on the season, the temperature inside the vehicle could become very high or low, which can lead to serious injuries, illness or death, especially for
very young children.

Make sure that no one remains in the vehicle.

Never let children play in or on the vehicle unattended, especially when the trunk lid is open. Children could enter the luggage compartment, close the lid,
and then lock themselves in.

WARNING

The vehicle may not always detect when the trunk lid is not latched if a cargo rack that is carrying cargo is mounted on the trunk lid. If the trunk lid is not latched,

77
it may open suddenly while driving. This may cause serious injuries.

Check that, when closed, the trunk lid is flush with the areas of the vehicle body around it.

WARNING

If there is a heavy load of snow or cargo on the trunk lid, the additional weight may cause the lid to lower, which can result in serious injuries.

Never open the trunk lid if there is a heavy load of snow or cargo such as a cargo rack on it.

Remove the snow or cargo before opening the trunk lid.

If necessary, support the trunk lid or remove the cargo and/or snow before opening the trunk lid.

WARNING

Closing the trunk lid incorrectly may lead to the rear window shattering and cause serious injuries.

Do not push the trunk lid closed with your hand on the rear window.

NOTICE

Using the opening mechanism incorrectly may damage the component and could prevent the trunk lid from closing.

Never attach or secure cargo on the opening mechanism.

NOTICE

Using the rear window wiper incorrectly may damage the component and result in it breaking off.

Never attach or secure cargo to the rear window wiper.

NOTICE

Using the rear spoiler incorrectly may damage the component and result in it breaking off.

Never attach or secure cargo to the rear spoiler.

Opening and closing the trunk lid


Please read the introductory information and heed the Warnings and Notice ⇒ and Introduction.

Fig. 50 In the opened trunk lid: recessed grips for pulling the lid shut.

Opening the trunk lid


1. Press the or button on the vehicle key.

2. Press on the top of the Volkswagen emblem and raise the trunk lid.

Closing the trunk lid


1. Pull the trunk lid downward firmly using the recessed grip in the interior trim fig. 50 until it latches shut in the lock ⇒ .

The trunk lid will also lock when the doors are locked.

78
An image in the instrument cluster display indicates if the trunk lid has not opened or closed correctly.

The trunk lid locks automatically while driving.

WARNING

Closing the trunk lid incorrectly or carelessly may lead to serious injuries.

When opening the trunk lid, take care to pull it all the way up.

When closing the trunk lid, make sure your hands are not within the closing range of the lid.

If the trunk lid is not opened within several minutes after unlocking, it will lock again automatically.

Mechanically unlocking the trunk lid using the emergency release


Please read the introductory information and heed the Warnings and Notice ⇒ and Introduction.

Fig. 51 In the luggage compartment: Service opening in the trunk lid.

Mechanically unlocking the trunk lid using the emergency release


1. Insert a suitable object into the service opening in the trunk lid and push the release lever in the direction of the arrow fig. 51.

Troubleshooting
Please read the introductory information and heed the Warnings and Notice ⇒ and Introduction.

If the trunk lid will not open or close


Check if the trunk lid is being blocked by an object.

The trunk lid can be moved by hand. It is necessary to use more force when doing this.

If the trunk lid is operated too frequently within a short period of time, then the lid motor will automatically switch off to reduce the risk of overheating. Until the lid
motor has cooled down, the trunk lid can be opened and closed by hand using extra force.

If the 12-volt vehicle battery or fuse is disconnected or malfunctioning, the trunk lid must be closed by hand.

If all turn signals flash four times

The vehicle key that was last used is still in the vehicle.

1. Remove the key and lock the vehicle.

If the trunk lid is difficult to move

The mechanism for opening the trunk lid may not always work automatically when the outside temperatures are around the freezing point.

1. Guide the trunk lid farther upward by hand.

Windows
Opening and closing the windows

79
Fig. 52 In the driver door: Power window buttons.

Opening the window: press the switch.


Closing the window: pull the switch.

Deactivating the power window buttons in the rear doors: press the switch.
This button is only located in the driver door.

The windows can still be opened or closed using the switches in the doors for a brief period after the ignition has been switched off, as long as the driver’s or front
passenger door is not opened.

One-touch opening and closing function

The one-touch opening and closing function allows the windows to be completely opened or closed. To use this feature, do not hold the window switch up or down.

To start the one-touch closing function, pull the window switch upward briefly to the second level.

To start the one-touch opening function, press the window switch downward briefly to the second level.

To stop the one-touch opening or closing function, pull or press the switch for that window again.

Convenience opening and closing

Opening
The windows can be opened from outside the vehicle using the vehicle key when the ignition is switched off.

1. Press and hold the unlock button on the vehicle key.

2. To stop the function, release the unlock button.

Closing
1. On vehicles with Keyless Access with push-button start: press the sensor surface or locking button on the door handle for a few seconds, until the windows are
closed ⇒ “Keyless Access” with push-button start . The vehicle key must be nearby to use this feature.

When all of the windows and the power sunroof are closed, the turn signals will blink once as a confirmation.

2. To stop the function, remove your finger from the sensor or switch.

You can select the convenience opening settings in the Vehicle settings menu in the Infotainment system.

WARNING

Careless or unintended use of the power windows can cause serious injuries.

Do not open or close the power windows if anyone is in the way.

Always take all vehicle keys with you when leaving the vehicle.

Note that the windows can still be opened or closed using the door buttons for a brief period after the ignition has been switched off, as long as the driver's
or front passenger door is not opened.

When driving with children seated on the rear bench seat, always disable the rear power windows so that the windows cannot be opened or closed.

WARNING

If the vehicle is locked, the windows can no longer be opened and will prevent people from escaping from the vehicle interior. In an emergency, this could cause
serious or fatal injuries.

Never leave children or people requiring assistance unattended in the vehicle when the vehicle is locked.

80
NOTICE

If the windows are open, precipitation can enter the vehicle and soak the interior equipment, which could restrict the function of the controls or damage them.

Close all windows if there is precipitation.

If the power windows are malfunctioning, the one-touch opening and closing function and the pinch protection may not function correctly. Contact a suitably
qualified professional. Volkswagen recommends contacting an authorized Volkswagen dealer or authorized Volkswagen Service Facility.

Convenience opening and closing only functions if the one-touch opening and closing function is activated for all the power windows.

Power window pinch protection


The power window pinch protection can reduce the risk of being pinched and injured when the windows are closing.

If the window cannot close due to resistance or an obstacle, then the window will reopen immediately ⇒ .

1. Check why the window did not close.

2. Try again to close the window.

If the window will not close again, then the pinch protection will be disabled for several seconds.

If the window still cannot close, then the window will stop at the place where it meets resistance. If you press the switch again within several seconds, the window
will close without pinch protection ⇒ .

Closing windows without pinch protection


1. Try to close the windows again within a few seconds by holding the switch. This will disable the pinch protection.

If the closing process takes longer than several seconds, then pinch protection will be enabled again. If there is resistance to the window moving or an obstacle
is blocking the window, then the window will reopen automatically.

2. If the window still cannot close, then contact a suitably qualified professional. Volkswagen recommends contacting an authorized Volkswagen dealer or
authorized Volkswagen Service Facility.

WARNING

Closing the window when pinch protection is disabled can result in serious injuries.

Always be careful when closing the windows.

Do not close windows if anyone is in the way.

Note that the pinch protection does not prevent fingers or body parts from being trapped against the window frame.

Pinch protection also occurs when using the convenience closing function with the vehicle key.

Troubleshooting
One-touch up/down feature

If the 12 V vehicle battery is disconnected or drained when the windows are not completely closed, then the one-touch up/down feature will not work. It must be
reprogrammed using the following steps:

1. Switch the ignition on.

2. Close all windows and doors.

3. Pull the switch for the desired window and hold it in that position for several seconds.

4. Release the switch, then pull it upward again and hold it.

The one-touch up and down features will then be fully functional.

The automatic power windows can be reprogrammed individually, or multiple windows can be reprogrammed at the same time.

Controls are responding differently than expected

Moisture, dirt and grease may limit the functioning of the controls.

1. Always keep the control panels clean and dry.

Sunroof
Opening and closing the tilting and sliding panoramic sunroof
The term “sunroof” is used as a synonym for the panoramic sliding/tilting sunroof.

81
Fig. 53 In the headliner: Control for the tilting and sliding panoramic sunroof.

Open or close the tilting and sliding panoramic sunroof.

Tilt the tilting and sliding panoramic sunroof, close the tilting and sliding panoramic sunroof or stop the automatic process.

The control can be operated in two ways: Swiping and tapping.

Swipe: Fully or partially open and close the roof.

Tap: Fully or partially tilt, open or close the roof.

You can stop the automatic process by tapping the control again.

Opening the power sunroof


Automatic process: swipe back on the control fig. 53.

Manual process: swipe back on the control and hold.

Closing the power sunroof


Automatic process: swipe forward on the control fig. 53.

Manual process: swipe forward on the control and hold.

Tilting the power sunroof


1. Automatic process: Briefly tap the center of the button fig. 53.

Tilting the tilting and sliding panoramic sunroof is only possible when the roof is closed. If necessary, close the roof beforehand.

Closing the power sunroof when tilted


1. Automatic process: swipe forward on the control fig. 53.

Or: briefly tap the center of the button fig. 53.

Stopping the automatic opening or closing process


1. Tap the button again fig. 53.

WARNING

Careless or unintended use of the power sunroof may cause serious or fatal injuries.

Do not open or close the power sunroof if anyone is in its path.

Note that the power sunroof can still be opened or closed for a brief period after the ignition has been switched off, as long as the driver's or front
passenger door has not been opened.

WARNING

If you leave vehicle keys unattended in the vehicle, children or unauthorized people may lock the vehicle, start the engine, switch on the ignition or activate the
power sunroof. This can cause accidents and serious or fatal injuries.

Always take all vehicle keys with you when leaving the vehicle.

82
CAUTION

Depending on the vehicle equipment, the tilted position of the tilting and sliding panoramic sunroof may change automatically above a certain speed to reduce
wind noise. When it moves, the tilting and sliding panoramic sunroof can cause damage and injuries.

Always ensure that no body parts or objects are within the opening range of the power sunroof.

NOTICE

Opening or tilting the power sunroof when there is precipitation, particularly snow and ice, may cause damage to the vehicle interior and the electrical system.

Remove snow and ice from the vehicle roof before using the power sunroof in winter temperatures.

Always close the power sunroof before leaving the vehicle and when there is precipitation.

NOTICE

If you use a power sunroof with a roof rack mounted, the power sunroof may be damaged.

Keep the power sunroof closed when using a roof rack.

Remove leaves and other loose objects from the sunroof guide rails regularly, either by hand or with a vacuum cleaner.

The pinch protection will not function correctly if the sunroof is malfunctioning. Contact a suitably qualified professional. Volkswagen recommends contacting
an authorized Volkswagen dealer or authorized Volkswagen Service Facility

Tilting and sliding panoramic sunroof convenience opening and closing


Convenience opening and closing

The sunroof can be opened and closed from outside the vehicle using the vehicle key.

Does not apply to the US or Canada: Press and hold the unlock or lock button on the vehicle key. The sunroof will be tilted or closed.

For vehicles with Keyless Access with push-button start: Hold your finger on the unlock sensor in the door handle for several seconds until the tilting and sliding
panoramic sunroof is closed ⇒ Unlocking or locking using Keyless Access .

Remove your finger from the unlock or lock button to stop the function.

When using the convenience closing function, all windows in the doors and the sunroof will be closed. When all of the windows and the power sunroof are closed,
the turn signals will blink once as a confirmation.

Settings for the sunroof can be adjusted in the vehicle settings in the Infotainment system.

Sunroof pinch protection


The pinch protection reduces the risk of pinching injuries ⇒ . If the sunroof is obstructed while it is closing, it will open again automatically.

1. Check why the sunroof is not closing.

2. Try again to close the sunroof.

3. If the sunroof is still not able to close, close the sunroof without pinch protection.

Closing the sunroof without pinch protection


1. Try again to close the sunroof.

2. If the power sunroof still cannot be closed, swipe forward over the function key within 5 seconds and hold until the power sunroof is completely closed
⇒ Opening and closing the tilting and sliding panoramic sunroof .

3. If the power sunroof still cannot close, then contact a suitably qualified professional. Volkswagen recommends contacting an authorized Volkswagen dealer or
authorized Volkswagen Service Facility.

If you release the button during the closing process, the power sunroof will open again automatically.

WARNING

Closing the power sunroof without pinch protection may result in serious or fatal injuries.

Always be careful when closing the power sunroof.

Do not close the power sunroof if anyone is in its way, especially if it is closing without pinch protection.

Note that the pinch protection does not prevent fingers or body parts from being trapped against the roof frame.

83
Pinch protection also occurs when convenience closing the windows and sunroof with the vehicle key.

Troubleshooting
If the sunroof is not closing
The sunroof only works when the ignition is on. The sunroof can still be opened or closed for a brief period after the ignition has been switched off, as long as
the driver’s or front passenger's door has not been opened.

If it is not possible to close the sunroof using the power controls, the sunroof must be closed manually. Some vehicle components must be removed in order to
close the sunroof manually. Contact an authorized Volkswagen dealer or authorized Volkswagen Service Facility. Volkswagen recommends contacting an
authorized Volkswagen dealer or authorized Volkswagen Service Facility.

Controls are responding differently than expected

Moisture, dirt and grease may limit the functioning of the controls.

1. Always keep the control panels clean and dry.

84
Steering wheel
Adjusting the steering wheel position

Fig. 54 Under the steering wheel in the steering column trim panel: lever to adjust the steering wheel position manually (general example).

Fig. 55 On the steering wheel: nine o’clock and three o’clock position.

Only adjust the steering wheel before driving or while the vehicle is stationary ⇒ .

1. Tilt the lever fig. 54 downward.

2. Adjust the steering wheel so that it can be firmly held at the outer edge with both hands at the nine o’clock and three o’clock position fig. 55.

85
3. Press the lever all the way up until it locks flush with the steering column trim panel ⇒ .

WARNING

Incorrect use of the steering wheel adjuster and an incorrect steering wheel adjustment could cause serious or fatal injuries.

Always push the lever fig. 54 upward into its locked position after adjusting so that you do not change the steering wheel position unintentionally while
driving.

Never adjust the steering wheel while driving. If you find the steering wheel must be adjusted while driving, stop the vehicle safely and adjust the steering
wheel correctly.

The steering wheel must always face toward the chest and never toward the face. Otherwise, the protective function of the driver’s front airbag may be
limited in the event of an accident.

To reduce the risk of injuries if the driver's front airbag deploys, always hold the outer edge of the steering wheel firmly with both hands in the nine o'clock
and three o'clock position fig. 55.

Never hold the steering wheel in the twelve o'clock position or in any other way, such as holding the center of the steering wheel. Otherwise, the arms,
hands, and head could be seriously injured if the driver’s front airbag deploys.

86
Seats and head restraints
Front seats
Introduction
The following information describes the various options for adjusting the front seats. Always make sure the seats are adjusted to the correct position ⇒
Introduction.

WARNING

Driving in an incorrect seating position due to seats being adjusted incorrectly may cause serious injuries.

Adjust the front seats according to the correct seating position each time before driving and make sure all passengers have their safety belts fastened
correctly.

Move the front passenger seat all the way back.

WARNING

Adjusting the seats incorrectly can cause accidents and serious injuries.

Only adjust the seats when the vehicle is stationary. Otherwise, the position of the seats could change unexpectedly while driving and you could lose
control of the vehicle. You could also put yourself in an incorrect seating position.

Only adjust the height, angle, and forward/back position of the front seats when there is no one within the seat’s range of movement.

Do not restrict the movement of the seats by placing objects within their range of movement.

The adjusting and locking areas of the seats must not be dirty.

WARNING

Using seat covers or protective covers incorrectly can result in unintentionally operating the seat adjusters, and the front seats could move unexpectedly while
driving. This could cause you to lose control of the vehicle. This can cause accidents and injuries. The electrical components in the front seats could also be
damaged.

Never install or secure seat covers and protective covers on the electrical controls.

Only use seat covers or protective covers that are specifically approved for use in your vehicle.

WARNING

Lighters in the vehicle can become damaged or ignite unintentionally. This can cause severe burns and vehicle damage.

Before adjusting any seat, always make sure that there are no cigarette lighters near the moving parts of the seat.

NOTICE

Objects with sharp edges can damage the seats.

Never touch the seats with sharp-edged objects. Sharp-edged objects, such as zippers, rivets on clothing, or belts, can cause surface damage. Open
hook and loop fasteners can also cause damage.

Manually adjusting front seats


Please read the introductory information and heed the Warnings and Notice ⇒ and Introduction.
The information that follows describes all possible controls. Depending on the seat version, the number of controls may vary.

The controls on the front passenger seat are a mirror image of those for the driver seat.

87
Fig. 56 On the driver seat: Controls.

Operate the lever to adjust the lumbar support.

To adjust the backrest, turn the handwheel with nothing resting on the backrest.

If necessary, move the lever upward or downward multiple times to adjust the height of the seat.

Pull or push the lever several times if necessary to adjust the seat cushion angle.

Lift the grip to move the seat cushion forward or backward.

Pull the lever to slide the front seat forward or backward. The front seat must lock into place after the lever is released.

1) This only applies to the inner side of the seat in vehicles with four doors.

Adjusting power front seats


Please read the introductory information and heed the Warnings and Notice ⇒ and Introduction.
The electric controls differ depending on the country and vehicle equipment and may vary according to the seat design.

The controls on the front passenger seat are a mirror image of those for the driver seat.

A seat may have both manual and power controls.

Fig. 57 Switch on the driver seat: Adjusting the front seat forward/back, the height and angle of the seat surface, and the front seat backrest.

Press the switch in the direction of the arrow:

Slide the seat forward or backward.

88
Adjust the angle of the seat surface.

Adjust the height of the seat.

Adjust the angle of the backrest.

Fig. 58 Switch on the driver seat: Adjusting the lumbar support.

Press the switch in the direction you would like the lumbar support to move.

Move the curvature of the lumbar support forward.

Move the curvature of the lumbar support backward.

Raise the curvature of the lumbar support.

Move the curvature of the lumbar support down.

WARNING

Careless or unintended use of the power front seats can cause serious injuries.

The power front seats can also be adjusted when the ignition is switched off. Never leave children or people requiring assistance in the vehicle.

In case of an emergency, interrupt the power adjustment by pressing another switch.

NOTICE

Incorrect usage may damage the electric components in the front seats.

Do not kneel on the front seats and do not otherwise concentrate pressure on specific points of the seat cushion and backrest.

If the 12 V vehicle battery charge level is too low, the seat may not be able to be adjusted with the power controls.

Seat adjustment is canceled while the engine is starting.

Folding the front passenger backrest forwards


Please read the introductory information and heed the Warnings and Notice ⇒ and Introduction.
The front passenger seat backrest can be folded down and locked in a horizontal position.

If objects are transported on the folded front passenger seat, the front passenger's front airbag must be deactivated.

Folding the front passenger backrest forwards

89
Fig. 59 Front passenger seat: Fold backrest forwards.

1. Remove objects from the front passenger seat ⇒ .

2. Set the front passenger seat as low as possible.

3. Move the front passenger seat as far back as possible.

4. Move the head restraints all the way down.

5. Unlock the front passenger backrest in the direction of the arrows fig. 59.

6. Fold the front passenger backrest forwards in the direction of the arrows fig. 59 into the horizontal position.

The front passenger backrest must engage securely in the folded down position.

Unfolding the front passenger backrest

Do not have any objects or body parts near the hinge when unfolding.

1. To unfold the front passenger backrest unlock it again fig. 59.

2. Fold the front passenger backrest backwards into the upright position.

The front passenger backrest must engage securely in the folded out, upright position.

WARNING

Folding and unfolding the front passenger backrest in an uncontrolled or careless manner can cause severe injury.

Only fold or unfold the front passenger backrest when the vehicle is stationary.

Always ensure that no people or animals are in the way of the backrest when folding down the front passenger backrest.

As long as the front passenger backrest is folded down, the front airbag must be deactivated and the PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator light must
be illuminated.

Keep hands, fingers, feet, and other parts of the body out of the range of operation of the seat hinges and seat locking mechanism when folding the
backrest forward and back.

Floor mats or other objects must not become caught in the area of the hinges. The floor mats or other objects could get caught in the front passenger
backrest hinges. This can lead to the front passenger backrest not being securely locked when unfolded to the upright position.

The front passenger backrest must be securely locked when being unfolded to the upright position. A front passenger backrest which is not securely
locked can move unexpectedly and cause severe injury.

WARNING

The uncovered seat mountings or hinges can lead to severe injury during a braking maneuver or accident when the front passenger backrest is folded down.

Never transport adults or children on the front passenger seat when the front passenger backrest is folded down.

Only the seat behind the driver seat on the rear bench seat may be used when the front passenger backrest is folded down. This also applies to child
seats.

90
WARNING

Objects that are not secured or are secured incorrectly can cause serious injuries in the event of sudden driving and braking maneuvers or a collision. This is
especially true if the airbags deploy and strike objects, causing them to fly through the vehicle interior.

Store all objects securely in the vehicle. Follow the legal regulations whilst doing so.

As long as the front passenger backrest is folded down, the front airbag must be deactivated and the PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator light must
be illuminated.

Rear seats
Introduction
The following information describes the various options for adjusting the rear seats. Always make sure the seats are adjusted to the correct position ⇒ Correct
seating position.

WARNING

Incorrectly positioned rear seats increase the risk of serious injuries if an accident occurs.

Before every journey, ensure that the rear seats are positioned so that all passengers are sitting upright and have their safety belts on correctly.

Only adjust the rear seats when there is no one within the range of movement of the seats.

WARNING

If you adjust the rear seats while driving, you will adopt the wrong sitting position. In addition, the rear seats may move unexpectedly during the journey. This will
increase the risk of serious injuries if an accident occurs.

Only adjust the rear seats when the vehicle is stationary.

WARNING

Lighters in the vehicle can become damaged or ignite unintentionally. This can cause severe burns and vehicle damage.

Before adjusting any seat, always make sure that there are no cigarette lighters near the moving parts of the seat.

WARNING

Incorrect use of the rear center armrest may cause serious injuries.

The rear center armrest must always be folded up during journeys.

If the center armrest is folded down, the center rear bench seat must never be used by either adults or children.

Never allow an adult or child to ride on the center armrest.

NOTICE

Objects in the luggage compartment may get into the space between the seat and the luggage compartment floor when the rear seat is adjusted. This may
cause damage.

Remove all objects located between the seat and luggage compartment floor before you move the rear seat.

NOTICE

Objects with sharp edges can damage the seats.

Never touch the seats with sharp-edged objects. Sharp-edged objects, such as zippers, rivets on clothing, or belts, can cause surface damage. Open
hook and loop fasteners can also cause damage.

Folding the rear bench seat backrest forward or backward


Please read the introductory information and heed the Warnings and Notice ⇒ and Introduction.
The seat backrest is divided. Each part of the rear seat backrest can be folded forward individually to enlarge the luggage compartment.

Folding the rear seat backrest forward and down with the release button

91
Fig. 60 In the rear seat backrest: release button.

1. Move the head restraints all the way down.

2. Pull the release button fig. 60 forward while folding the rear seat backrest forward and down.

The corresponding backrest part of the rear seat backrest is released when the red marking fig. 60 can be seen.

Folding the rear seat backrest up and back


1. Fold the rear seat backrest to the back and push firmly into the catch until it securely engages ⇒ .

The red marking fig. 60 must no longer be visible.

WARNING

Folding and unfolding the rear seat backrest in an uncontrolled or careless manner may cause severe injury.

Always take care that no people or animals are in the way of the rear seat backrest when folding it forward and down.

Never fold the rear seat backrest forward or back while driving.

Make sure the safety belt is not pinched or damaged when folding the rear seat backrest back.

Keep hands, fingers, feet and other body parts away from the rear seat backrest when folding forward or back.

Each rear seat backrest must always be securely engaged to ensure that the safety belts in the rear seats can provide the maximum protection. Take
extra care especially with the middle seat in the rear bench seat. If a seat on the rear bench is used without the rear seat backrest being engaged, the
vehicle occupant will move forward with the rear seat backrest in the event of sudden braking and driving maneuvers or a collision.

A red marking fig. 60 indicates that the rear seat backrest is not engaged. Always check that the red marker is not visible when the rear seat backrest is
in the upright position.

Never allow people to sit in a rear seat if that rear seat backrest is folded forward or is not engaged.

NOTICE

Folding and unfolding the rear seat backrest in an uncontrolled or careless manner may cause damage to the vehicle or other objects.

Before folding the rear seat backrest forward, always adjust the front seats so that the head restraint or padding on the rear seat backrest does not press
against the front seats.

Before folding the rear seat backrest forward, always take care that there are no objects in its path.

Head restraints
Introduction
The information that follows describes how the head restraints can be adjusted and removed. Always make sure the seats are adjusted to the correct position
⇒ Correct seating position.

All seats are equipped with head restraints. The head restraints are specially approved for the relevant seat and should not be installed in another seat in the
vehicle.

The center rear head restraint (depending on the vehicle equipment) is only intended for the center seat on the rear bench seat. Therefore do not install this head
92
restraint in any other position.

There are notches in the head restraint supports so that they can be locked in different positions. Only head restraints which are correctly mounted can lock into the
notches within the adjustable range. To prevent the head restraints from being removed unintentionally after mounting, there are stops at the top and bottom of the
adjustable range.

Correct head restraint adjustment

Adjust the head restraint so that the upper edge of the head restraint is in line with the upper portion of the head as much as possible, but not lower than eye level.
Position the back of the head as close as possible to the head restraint.

Head restraint adjustment for shorter persons

Slide the head restraint all the way down, even if the head is then below the upper edge of the head restraint. When the head restraint is in the lowest position, there
may be a small gap between the head restraint and the backrest.

Head restraint adjustment for taller persons

Move the head restraint up all the way.

WARNING

Driving with head restraint that have been removed or adjusted incorrectly increases the risk of serious or fatal injuries in the event of an accident or sudden
driving and braking maneuvers.

If a person is sitting in a seat, always drive with the head restraint correctly installed and adjusted on that seat.

If a person is sitting in a seat, adjust the head restraint according to their height.

Never adjust the head restraint while driving.

NOTICE

Removing and fitting the head restraints incorrectly may cause damage.

When removing and installing the head restraint, make sure the head restraint does not hit the headliner, the front seat backrest, or other vehicle
components.

Adjusting the head restraints


Please read the introductory information and heed the Warnings and Notice ⇒ and Introduction.

Adjusting the height of the head restraints

Fig. 61 Adjusting the front head restraint (general example).

93
Fig. 62 Adjusting the rear head restraint (general example).

1. Slide the head restraint up or down in the direction of the arrow; you may need to press the fig. 61 or fig. 62 button first to release the head restraint.

The head restraint must lock securely into place.

Removing and installing the head restraints


Please read the introductory information and heed the Warnings and Notice ⇒ and Introduction.

Removing the front head restraints

Fig. 63 Removing the front head restraint (general example).

1. Lower the head restraint if necessary.

2. To release, find the notch on the rear side in the marked area fig. 63, push inwards in the direction of the arrow and hold.

3. Pull out the head restraint in the direction of the arrow fig. 63.

Installing the front head restraints


1. Position the head restraint correctly above the head restraint guides and insert into the guides on the seat backrest.

2. Slide the head restraint downward until it engages into the guide rods.

3. Adjust the head restraint to the correct position.

Removing the rear head restraint

94
Fig. 64 Removing the rear head restraint (general example).

1. Release the backrest of the rear bench seat and fold forwards.

2. Slide the head restraint all the way upward ⇒ Adjusting the head restraints.

3. Press the button fig. 64 on the head restraint guide.

4. At the same time, press button while a second person pulls the head restraint all the way out.

5. Fold the rear bench seat backrest toward the rear and lock it securely into place.

Installing the rear head restraint


1. Release the backrest of the rear bench seat and fold forwards.

2. Position the head restraint correctly above the head restraint guides and insert into the guides on the seat backrest.

3. Push the head restraint downward while pressing the fig. 64 button.

4. Fold the rear bench seat backrest toward the rear and lock it securely into place.

5. Adjust the head restraint to the correct position.

Seat functions
Center armrest
Front center armrest

Fig. 65 Front center armrest (general example).

To lift: Pull the center armrest up to the detents in the direction of the arrow fig. 65.

To lower: Pull the center armrest up fully. Then press the center armrest down.

Forward and backward adjustment: Slide the center armrest in the direction of the arrow all the way forward or all the way backward fig. 65.

WARNING

95
If the front center armrest is opened all the way or not completely closed, it can limit the driver’s ability to move his or her arms, which can cause accidents and
serious injuries.

Always keep the storage compartments closed while driving.

Never allow an adult or child to ride on the center armrest. This incorrect seating position can cause serious injuries.

Rear center armrest

Fig. 66 Folding center armrest in the rear.

There may be a folding armrest in the backrest of the rear center seat.

To fold forward: pull the center armrest in the direction of the arrow using the loop fig. 66.

To fold back: fold the center armrest upward in the opposite direction of the arrow fig. 66 and press it all the way toward the seat backrest.

Passengers must not sit in the center rear seat when the center armrest is folded down.

WARNING

Incorrect use of the rear center armrest may cause serious injuries.

The rear center armrest must always be folded up during journeys.

If the center armrest is folded down, the center rear bench seat must never be used by either adults or children.

Never allow an adult or child to ride on the center armrest.

Memory function
Memory buttons

Fig. 67 On the outer side of the driver’s seat: memory buttons.

Driver seat and outside mirror settings can be saved and called up using the memory buttons.

Storing the driver's seat and outside mirror settings for driving forward
1. Set the electronic parking brake.

96
2. Shift the transmission to neutral.

3. Switch the ignition on.

4. Adjust the driver's seat and outside mirror.

5. Press the fig. 67 button for longer than ten seconds.

6. Press the desired memory button within approximately ten seconds.

A chime will confirm that the settings were saved.

Storing the front passenger's outside mirror settings for driving in reverse
1. Set the electronic parking brake.

2. Shift the transmission to neutral.

3. Switch the ignition on.

4. Press the desired memory button fig. 67.

5. Select the reverse gear.

6. Adjust the front passenger's outside mirror so that the edge of the curb can be seen clearly, for example.

The selected mirror position will be stored automatically and assigned to the vehicle key that was used to unlock the vehicle.

Recalling driver's seat and outside mirror settings


1. When the vehicle is stationary, the ignition is switched off, and a door is open, press the respective memory button briefly.

After approximately ten minutes, the stored positions can no longer be adjusted automatically. The adjustment process will be canceled if one of the memory
buttons is pressed again.

Or: When the ignition is switched on or the door is closed, press and hold the respective memory button until the saved positions are reached.

The front passenger's outside mirror automatically leaves the position stored for driving in reverse once you begin driving forward at speeds of at least approx.
15 km/h (approx. 10 mph) or when you turn the knob for the outside mirrors from the R position to another position.
If you open the driver door more than approximately ten minutes after the vehicle is unlocked, the driver seat and the outside mirrors will not be adjusted
automatically.

WARNING

Improper use of seat functions can cause injuries.

Before beginning a journey always adjust to the correct seat position and maintain this throughout the journey. This also applies to all passengers.

Set the memory function only with the vehicle stationary.

Always keep your hands, fingers, feet and other parts of your body clear of the area in which the seats operate and move during adjustment.

Massage feature

Fig. 68 Massage function button to the side of the driver seat.

For the massage function, the lumbar support moves and massages the lumbar area of your back.

The lumbar support cushioning can be individually adjusted during operation by pressing repeatedly on the corresponding switch ⇒ Adjusting power front seats.

Switching the massage function on or off


1. To switch on, push the button in the seat control panel. Press the button again to switch off.

97
After around ten minutes, the massage function switches off automatically.

WARNING

Improper use of seat functions can cause injuries.

Before beginning a journey always adjust to the correct seat position and maintain this throughout the journey. This also applies to all passengers.

Only switch the massage function on and off when the vehicle is stationary.

Always keep your hands, fingers, feet and other parts of your body clear of the area in which the seats operate and move during adjustment.

98
Lights
Headlights
Switching the turn signals on and off

Fig. 69 On the left side of the steering column: turn signal and high beam lever.

Right turn signal .

Left turn signal .

Switching the turn signals on and off


1. Switch the ignition on.

2. Move the turn signal and high beam lever from the center position to the preferred position fig. 69.

3. To cancel the turn signal, move the turn signal and headlamp lever back to its basic position.

If no chime sounds when the turn signal is on, contact suitably qualified professionals and have the vehicle checked. Volkswagen recommends contacting an
authorized Volkswagen dealer or authorized Volkswagen Service Facility.

3-blink turn signal

To use the 3-blink turn signal, move the turn signal and high beam lever upward or downward to the pressure point and then release the lever. The turn signal will
blink three times.

To stop the 3-blink turn signal before it ends, move the turn signal and high beam lever immediately to the pressure point in the opposite direction and release.

The 3-blink turn signal can be activated and deactivated in the vehicle settings in the Infotainment system ⇒ Vehicle settings menu.

WARNING

Using the turn signals incorrectly, not using the turn signals, or forgetting to turn the turn signal off can mislead other road users. This can cause accidents and
serious or fatal injuries.

Always activate the turn signals correctly when changing lanes, passing, or turning.

Switch the turn signal off again every time you finish changing lanes, passing, or turning.

The emergency flashers also work when the ignition is switched off ⇒ In case of an emergency .

Switching the lights on and off

99
Fig. 70 Next to the steering wheel: Control to switch on the exterior lighting (models with poor weather light).

Fig. 71 Next to the steering wheel: Control to switch on the exterior lighting (models with fog light).

Switching the lights on


1. Switch the ignition on.

2. Tap the button repeatedly until the corresponding indicator lights come on.

The low beam headlights are switched on. The green indicator light turns on.

Automatic headlights: The low beam headlights are switched on or off depending on the ambient brightness ⇒ , ⇒ Automatic headlight control.

Parking light and daytime running light switched on; the green indicator light comes on. The automatic headlights are activated from a speed of
approximately 10 km/h (approximately 6 mph) or after a distance driven of around 100 m (approximately 0.062 mi) .

Display only in instrument cluster: Light switched off. The automatic headlights are activated from a speed of approximately 10 km/h (approximately
6 mph) or after a distance driven of around 100 m (approximately 0.062 mi) .

Switching the lights off


1. Switch the ignition off.

The orientation lighting can be switched on ⇒ Entry and exit lighting (orientation lighting) .

The parking light is switched on ⇒ Parking lights. The green indicator light turns on.

Display only in instrument cluster: Light switched off.

Daytime running lights

The daytime running lights can improve the vehicle's visibility in daytime traffic and switch on every time the ignition is switched on (when daylight is detected).

Daytime running lights parking function

Depending on the equipment, the vehicle may have a daytime running lights parking function to turn off the daytime running lights temporarily when the ignition is
switched on.

Switch off the daytime running lights:

1. Switch the ignition on.

2. Switch the lights off.

100
3. Set the electronic parking brake.

Switch on the daytime running lights:

1. Switch off the electronic parking brake.

WARNING

If the vehicle lighting is not used appropriately for the weather conditions, the road will not be illuminated sufficiently. The vehicle will not be visible to other road
users or will be difficult to see. This can cause accidents and serious or fatal injuries.

Always turn on the low beam headlight in the dark, when it is raining, and when visibility is poor.

Regularly check that the lighting system and turn signals are functioning correctly.

WARNING

The parking lights or daytime running lights are not bright enough to illuminate the road sufficiently and to be seen by other road users. The taillights do not
switch on with the daytime running lights. Without its taillights turned on, the vehicle may not be seen by other road users in the dark, in the fog, and when
visibility is poor. This can cause accidents and serious or fatal injuries.

Always turn on the low beam headlight in the dark, when it is raining, and when visibility is poor.

WARNING

The automatic headlights are for assistance only. The driver is always responsible for turning on the correct vehicle lighting. Automatic headlight control
only turns the low beam headlights on and off when there are changes in brightness. Insufficient lighting on the road may cause accidents and serious or
fatal injuries.

Turn on the low beam headlights manually in certain weather conditions, such as in fog.

When reverse gear is engaged, the cornering lights on both sides of the vehicle will turn on automatically to better illuminate the surroundings while
maneuvering.

Switching the high beam headlights on and off

Fig. 72 On the left side of the steering column: turn signal and high beam lever.

Turn on the high beam headlight.

Activate the headlight flashers or turn off the high beam headlights.

If the high beam headlights or headlight flashers are turned on, the blue indicator light will come on in the Volkswagen Digital Cockpit ⇒ .

Turning on the high beam headlight


1. Switch the ignition on.

2. Switch on the low beam headlight.

3. Press the turn signal and high beam lever forward out of the center position fig. 72.

Turning off the high beam headlight


1. Pull the turn signal and high beam lever backward out of the center position fig. 72.

Turning the headlight flasher on and off

101
1. Pull the turn signal and high beam lever backward out of the center position and hold it fig. 72.

Release the turn signal and high beam lever to turn the headlight flasher off.

Light Assist

Depending on the equipment, high beam control (Light Assist) may be available ⇒ High Beam Control (Light Assist) .

WARNING

Incorrect use of the high beam headlight may distract and blind other road users. This can cause accidents and serious or fatal injuries.

Use the high beam headlights only if other road users cannot be distracted or blinded.

High Beam Control (Light Assist)


High beam control (Light Assist) switches off automatically if the system detects oncoming vehicles or vehicles driving ahead. In addition, Light Assist generally
detects well-lit areas such as towns and deactivates the high beam headlights when driving through these areas.

The high beam headlights switch on and off automatically within the limits of the system, depending on the environmental and traffic conditions and the vehicle
speed ⇒ .

Switching on high beam control (Light Assist)

1. Switch on the ignition and the automatic headlights .

2. Tap the turn signal and high beam lever forward out of the basic position.

When Light Assist is switched on, the indicator light in the instrument cluster display will turn on. When high beam control (Light Assist) is active, the blue
indicator light for the high beam headlight in the instrument cluster lights up.

Adjusting the sensitivity of Light Assist

Depending on the country, the sensitivity of Light Assist can be set in two stages:

Increasing the sensitivity: press the turn signal and high beam lever forwards from its original position and hold it in this position for around 15 seconds.

The indicator light on the instrument cluster will blink three times to confirm that this has been applied.

Setting the sensitivity back to its standard setting: press the turn signal and high beam lever forwards from its original position and hold it in this position for
around 15 seconds.

The indicator light on the instrument cluster will blink three times in quick succession to confirm that this has been applied.

Or: Switch the ignition off and on.

Switching off high beam control (Light Assist)


1. Switch off automatic headlights.

Or: when Light Assist is switched on and active, pull the turn signal and high beam lever backward.

Or: if high beam control (Light Assist)is switched on and not active, tap the turn signal and high beam lever forward. The manual high beam headlights are now
switched on. Pull the turn signal and high beam lever backwards to switch the high beam headlights off manually if necessary.

Or: Switch off the ignition.

System limitations

The high beams must be switched off manually in the following situations, because Light Assist may not switch them off at the right time or at all:

In poorly lit towns which cannot be recognized as a town by the system.

On poorly lit roads with strongly reflective signs.

If there are others on the road who have inadequate lighting, such as pedestrians or cyclists.

On tight curves where the view of traffic is partially obstructed, on steep rises, or in dips.

When there are oncoming vehicles on roads with a center barrier and the drivers in the oncoming vehicle can clearly see above the barrier, for example truck
drivers.

In fog, snow, and heavy rain.

When there are dust and sand in the air.

If the windshield is damaged in the camera's field of vision.

If the camera visual field is fogged over, dirty, or covered by a sticker, snow, or ice.

If the camera switches off automatically due to a high ambient temperature or exposure to direct sunlight for a prolonged period. Light Assist will be available
once the camera is available again.

If the camera is faulty and the power supply is interrupted.

102
WARNING

Light Assist may not detect all traffic situations correctly and the function may be restricted in certain situations. High beam control (Light Assist) is only an aid.
The driver is always responsible for turning on the correct vehicle lighting. Switching on the high beam headlight at the wrong time may distract and blind other
road users. This can cause accidents and serious or fatal injuries.

Always control the headlights yourself and adapt them to the lighting, visual, and traffic conditions.

Switch the high beam off manually if it could blind other road users.

WARNING

If the camera lens is dirty, covered, or damaged, the Light Assist function may be limited. This is also the case if the vehicle lighting system is changed, such as
by adding auxiliary headlights. This can cause accidents and serious or fatal injuries.

Regularly clean the camera view area and keep it free of snow and ice.

Do not cover the camera view area.

Regularly check the windshield for damage in the camera lens area.

Dynamic cornering light


The dynamic cornering lights provide optimum illumination of the roadway.

The dynamic cornering light only works when the automatic headlights are switched on and at speeds of more than approximately 10 km/h (approximately
6 mph).

Switching the poor weather lights on and off


Poor weather lights help you to illuminate the carriageway more effectively when visibility is poor.

The poor weather lights can only be switched on when the ignition is switched on.

Switching on the Poor Weather Lights


1. Switch the ignition on.

2. Tap the button ⇒ Switching the lights on and off .

The green indicator light in the button turns on. The indicator light will also light up on the instrument cluster for a few seconds.

Switching off the Poor Weather Lights


1. Tap the button again.

If the poor weather lights are switched on when the light is off , the parking lights are switched on or the automatic headlights are switched on,
the low beam headlights will also be switched on, regardless of the ambient brightness.

Troubleshooting
Turn signal indicator light

The green indicator light blinks.

If a turn signal light on the vehicle is not working, the indicator light will blink twice as fast.

1. Check the lights and replace any bulbs as necessary ⇒ Introduction.

2. If the malfunction persists, contact a suitably qualified professional. Volkswagen recommends contacting an authorized Volkswagen dealer or authorized
Volkswagen Service Facility.

Exterior lighting malfunction

The yellow indicator light turns on.

The headlights have completely or partially failed.

1. Check the lights and replace any bulbs as necessary ⇒ Introduction.

2. If the malfunction persists, contact a suitably qualified professional. Volkswagen recommends contacting an authorized Volkswagen dealer or authorized
Volkswagen Service Facility.

Rain/light sensor malfunction

The yellow indicator light turns on.

If the automatic headlights ( ) are switched on, the vehicle lighting will not turn on or off automatically.

103
1. Switch the ignition off and on.

2. If the malfunction persists, contact a suitably qualified professional. Volkswagen recommends contacting an authorized Volkswagen dealer or authorized
Volkswagen Service Facility.

Dynamic cornering light

The swinging behavior of the bulbs can be influenced by the selected driving mode in vehicles with driving mode selection.

If the dynamic cornering light malfunctions, this is indicated on the instrument cluster display. Contact a suitably qualified professional. Volkswagen recommends
contacting an authorized Volkswagen dealer or authorized Volkswagen Service Facility.

Controls are responding differently than expected

Moisture, dirt and grease may limit the functioning of the controls.

1. Always keep the control panels clean and dry.

Fog lights
Switching the fog lights on and off
The fog lights can be switched on when the ignition is on and the parking light or low beam headlight is switched on ⇒ Switching the lights on and off .

Switching the fog lights on


1. Press the button ⇒ Switching the lights on and off .

The green indicator light in the button turns on.

Switching the fog lights off


1. Press the button again.

Parking lights
Parking lights
Parking lights

If the parking light function is switched on, both headlights will come on, along with the parking lights, sections of the taillights, the license plate light and various
buttons in the vehicle interior.

Automatic parking light deactivation

The vehicle detects that the 12 V vehicle battery is low and switches off the parking light early enough to ensure that the engine can still be started, but not until at
least two hours have passed.

If the battery capacity is not sufficient for the parking light to run for two hours, the 12 V vehicle battery may drain to such an extent that the engine can no longer be
started.

WARNING

If the vehicle is stopped without enough lighting and cannot be seen or is difficult for others on the road to see, this can cause accidents and serious or fatal
injuries.

Always stop the vehicle safely and with enough lighting.

Follow the country-specific legal regulations.

Entry and exit lighting (orientation lighting)


When you are entering and exiting the vehicle in the dark, the entry and exit lighting illuminates the immediate area around the vehicle.

The entry and exit lighting is automatically controlled by a light sensor.

Switching on entry lighting


1. Unlock the vehicle when the automatic headlights are switched on and the light sensor detects darkness.

Switching off entry lighting


1. Turns off automatically after the lighting time has elapsed.

Or: Lock the vehicle.

Or: Press the button repeatedly until the setting is displayed in the instrument cluster.

Or: Switch on the ignition.

Switching on exit lighting


1. Switch the ignition off.
104
The exit lighting switches on when the automatic headlights are switched on and the light sensor detects darkness.

The lighting time begins when the last vehicle door or trunk lid is closed.

Switching off exit lighting


1. Turns off automatically after the set lighting time has elapsed.

Or: Automatically if a vehicle door or the trunk lid is still open approximately 30 seconds after switching on.

Or: Press the button repeatedly until the setting is displayed in the instrument cluster.

Or: Switch on the ignition.

Adjusting entry and exit lighting

The lighting time can be adjusted in the vehicle settings in the Infotainment system and the function can be activated or deactivated ⇒ Vehicle settings menu.

Depending on the vehicle equipment, you can adjust the behavior of the exterior lighting in the vehicle settings in the Infotainment system.

You can choose between two display strategies in the Convenience lighting settings menu:

Classic entry and exit lighting.

The periphery lighting, headlights and taillights are switched on and off at the same time.

Dynamic entry and exit lighting.

The ambient lighting, headlights and taillights are switched on and off dynamically and, if necessary, in an animated pattern.

In vehicles with Keyless Access with push-button start, switching on the entry lighting when approaching can be activated or deactivated.

Light functions
Cornering lights
If the low beam headlights are switched on, a cornering light will also switch on during slow turns or in very tight corners.

When reverse gear is engaged, the cornering lights on both sides of the vehicle will turn on automatically to better illuminate the surroundings while
maneuvering.

Automatic headlight control


If automatic headlights are switched on, the vehicle lighting switches on and off automatically along with the instrument illumination under the following
conditions:

The light sensor has detected darkness.

The windshield wipers are switched on for a long time.

When the lights are turned on, the yellow indicator light turns on ⇒ Switching the lights on and off .

Automatic headlight control is merely an aid and cannot always accurately detect all driving situations.

If the vehicle is equipped accordingly, the activation time of the automatic headlights can be adjusted in the vehicle settings in the Infotainment system ⇒ Vehicle
settings menu.

Headlight range control

Fig. 73 In the Infotainment system: Touch control for headlight range control.

Touch control for the headlight range control.

Headlight range control is used to adjust the beam of the dipped beam headlight to the load level of the vehicle. This provides the driver with the best possible
visibility and oncoming traffic is not dazzled.

Depending on the vehicle equipment, the headlight range can be adjusted in the Infotainment system fig. 73 , ⇒ .

Manual headlight range control


Adjustment with the touch control in the Infotainment system:

1. Tap the Vehicle function keys.

105
2. Tap the Low beam headlight function key to open the Headlight range control fig. 73 menu item.

3. Tap the required position (example vehicle load).

Setting in the Infotainment system

Front seat occupied and luggage compartment empty.

All seats occupied and luggage compartment empty.

All seats occupied and luggage compartment fully loaded.

Only driver seat occupied and luggage compartment fully loaded.

Dynamic headlight range control

Manual adjustment does not apply to vehicles with dynamic headlight range control. The headlight range automatically adjusts to the vehicle load when the
headlights are switched on ⇒ .

WARNING

Heavy objects in the vehicle can affect the vehicle level in such a way that causes the headlights to dazzle and distract other road users. This can cause
accidents and serious or fatal injuries.

Always adjust the light cone to the vehicle load so that other road users are not dazzled.

WARNING

If the headlight range control fails or malfunctions, the headlights may blind and distract other road users. This can cause accidents and serious or fatal injuries.

Have the headlight range control inspected immediately by an authorized Volkswagen dealer or authorized Volkswagen Service Facility. Volkswagen
recommends contacting an authorized Volkswagen dealer or authorized Volkswagen Service Facility.

Adjusting headlights (travel mode)


When driving in countries that drive on the opposite side of the road to the country in which you live, if your vehicle has advanced high beam control (Dynamic Light
Assist) or the dynamic cornering light function, the low beam headlights may blind oncoming traffic. Therefore, the headlight alignment on vehicles equipped with
these functions can be adjusted in the Infotainment system via the Vehicle settings menu (travel mode) ⇒ Vehicle settings menu. On vehicles without Dynamic
Light Assist and dynamic cornering light, it is not necessary to adjust the headlights.

Travel mode may be used only for a short period of time. Contact an authorized Volkswagen dealer or authorized Volkswagen Service Facility for permanent
conversion. Volkswagen recommends contacting an authorized Volkswagen dealer or authorized Volkswagen Service Facility.

Warning tones when lights are not turned off


If the ignition has been switched off and the driver door is opened, warning tones will sound under the following conditions:

With the side lights switched on .

If the orientation lighting is switched on, the warning tone to indicate that the light is still turned on will not sound when leaving the vehicle ⇒ Entry and exit lighting
(orientation lighting).

Interior lighting
Instrument and switch illumination
You can adjust the brightness of the instrument illumination in the vehicle settings in the Infotainment system ⇒ Vehicle settings menu.

Depending on the vehicle equipment, the brightness of the head-up display can be adjusted ⇒ Head-up display (HUD).

The selected brightness will automatically adjust to the changing brightness in the vehicle.

If the automatic headlights are switched on, a sensor switches the dipped beams and the instrument and switch lighting on and off automatically based on
outside brightness.

The instrument illumination for the needles and dials turns on when the ignition is on and the lights are off. The lighting for the gauges reduces automatically
and eventually turns off as brightness outside increases. This function should remind the driver to turn off low beam headlights at the right time, such as when
driving through tunnels.

Interior/reading lights, ambient lighting

106
Fig. 74 On the overhead console: touch-sensitive reading lights.

Switching on or off interior and reading lights

Tap the corresponding symbol:

Switch the interior lights on or off. Function switched off: the interior lights will switch on automatically when unlocking or leaving the vehicle.

Touch-sensitive reading lights with manual dimming function

On the roof console and above the rear door, there can be touch-sensitive reading lights depending on the equipment fig. 74. By tapping the illuminated area, the
respective reading light can be switched on or off.

To activate the manual dimming function, touch the illuminated area until the desired brightness level is reached.

Glove compartment and luggage compartment lights

The glove compartment and the luggage compartment may be illuminated depending on the vehicle equipment.

The relevant light turns on or off when opening and closing the glove compartment or trunk lid.

Ambient lighting

Ambient lighting can provide indirect lighting in various areas of the vehicle interior.

The brightness and, depending on the vehicle equipment, the color of the ambient lighting, can be adjusted in the Ambient light menu in the Infotainment system
⇒ Vehicle settings menu. If you select the setting Auto, the color of the ambient lighting changes depending on the driving mode setting.

After the ignition has been switched off, the lights will turn off when the vehicle is locked or automatically after a few minutes. This reduces the risk of the 12 V
vehicle battery being drained.

107
Visibility
Window wipers
Operating the windshield wiper lever

Fig. 75 On the right side of the steering column: operating the windshield wipers.

The windshield wipers only work when the ignition is switched on and the hood or trunk lid is closed. Move the wiper lever into the desired position ⇒ :

Wipers are switched off.

Interval wiping for the windshield or rain sensor mode. Interval wiping for the windshield depends on the driving speed. The higher the speed, the faster
the wipers will move.

Slow wiper speed.

Fast wiping.

One-tap wiping – brief wiping. Press and hold the lever down longer to wipe faster.

Pull the lever to activate the automatic wiper/washer system to clean the windshield. While the wiper/washer system is active, the Climatronic system
switches to recirculation mode for approximately 30 seconds to help prevent the washer fluid odor from entering the vehicle interior.

Switch for interval levels (vehicles without rain/light sensor) or to adjust the sensitivity of the rain/light sensor.

Fig. 76 On the right side of the steering column: operating the rear window wiper.

Move the wiper lever into the desired position ⇒ :

Interval wiping for the rear window. The wiper moves approximately every six seconds.

Press the lever to activate the automatic wiper/washer system to clean the rear window.

WARNING

108
Without the sufficient freeze protection, washer fluid can freeze on the window glass and reduce visibility. This can cause accidents and serious or fatal injuries.

Only use the washer system with sufficient freeze protection in winter temperatures.

Never use the window washer system in winter temperatures if the windshield has not been warmed up with the air conditioning system.

WARNING

Worn or dirty wiper blades reduce visibility and increase the risk of accidents and serious injuries.

Always replace wiper blades if they are damaged or worn and are no longer cleaning the window glass sufficiently ⇒ Cleaning and changing wiper
blades.

NOTICE

Incorrect handling of the windshield wipers can cause damage to the windshield, the wiper blades and the wiper motor.

Before driving and before the ignition is switched on, check that the windshield wiper lever is in the basic position.

Remove any snow and ice from the windshield wipers and the windshield.

Always carefully loosen wiper blades that have frozen onto the windshield from the windshield.

Do not turn on the windshield wipers when the windshield is dry.

The activated wiper speed temporarily changes to the next lower speed when the vehicle is stationary.

When parking the vehicle in cold weather conditions, moving the windshield wipers to the service position may be helpful for loosening the wiper blades more
easily from the windshield ⇒ Putting the windshield wipers in the service position .

Wiper function
Automatic rear window wiping

The rear window wiper switches on automatically when the windshield wipers are switched on and reverse gear is engaged. The automatic activation in reverse
gear function can be activated and deactivated in the vehicle settings in the Infotainment system ⇒ Vehicle settings menu.

Heated washer nozzles

The heat thaws frozen washer fluid nozzles. The heat output is automatically regulated when the ignition is switched on and is dependent on the outside
temperature. Only the window washer nozzles are heated and not the washer fluid hoses.

Rain/light sensor

Fig. 77 On the right side of the steering column: windshield wiper lever.

Switch for adjusting the sensitivity of the rain/light sensor.

Rain/light sensor deactivated.

Rain/light sensor activated, automatic wiping as necessary.

When switched on, the rain/light sensor automatically shortens or lengthens the delay between wiping cycles depending on how hard it is raining.

Activating and deactivating the rain/light sensor


1. Press the lever into the desired position fig. 77.

109
Automatic wiping can be activated and deactivated in the vehicle settings in the Infotainment system ⇒ Vehicle settings menu.

If automatic wiping is deactivated in the Infotainment system, the interval time will be set in fixed stages.

Adjusting the sensitivity of the rain/light sensor

The sensitivity of the rain/light sensor can be manually adjusted with the switch in the windshield wiper lever fig. 77 , ⇒ .

Move the switch to the right – high sensitivity.

Move the switch to the left – low sensitivity.

WARNING

The rain/light sensor cannot detect all precipitation sufficiently and activate the windshield wipers accordingly. Reduced visibility can cause accidents and
serious or fatal injuries.

If necessary, switch on the windshield wipers manually if water on the windshield is impairing visibility.

Troubleshooting
Washer fluid level too low

The yellow indicator light turns on.

1. Fill the washer fluid reservoir ⇒ Washer fluid.

Windshield wiper malfunction

The yellow indicator light turns on.

The windshield wipers are not working.

1. Switch the ignition off and on.

2. If the malfunction persists, contact a suitably qualified professional. Volkswagen recommends contacting an authorized Volkswagen dealer or authorized
Volkswagen Service Facility.

Rain/light sensor malfunction

The yellow indicator light turns on.

The windshield wipers will not be automatically activated in rain/light sensor mode when it is raining.

1. Switch the ignition off and on.

2. If the malfunction persists, contact a suitably qualified professional. Volkswagen recommends contacting an authorized Volkswagen dealer or authorized
Volkswagen Service Facility.

Changes to rain/light sensor reaction

Some possible reasons for malfunctions and misinterpretations in the sensor area of the rain/light sensor ⇒ View from the front could be:

Damaged wiper blades: damaged wiper blades can leave a film of water or streaks on the window, and this can extend the activation time, greatly shorten the
wiper intervals, or cause fast wiping time.

Insects: insects hitting the windshield may trigger the wipers.

Salt streaks: salt streaks on the windshield from driving in the winter can cause the wipers to wipe more frequently or continuously on a window that is almost
dry.

Dirt: dried dust, wax, any other build-up on the windshield (lotus effect), or washing product residue (car wash) can lower the sensitivity of the rain/light sensor
and cause it to react too slowly or not at all. Clean the sensor area for the rain/light sensor regularly and check the wiper blades for damage ⇒ Exterior care
and cleaning.

Crack in the windshield: if a stone strikes and chips the sensor area while the rain/light sensor is on, this will trigger a wiper cycle. After that, the rain/light
sensor will detect this irregularity on the sensor surface and react to it. Depending on the size of the chip, the reaction behavior of the rain/light sensor may or
may not change.

If there is an obstacle for the wipers on the window glass, the wipers will attempt to remove it. If it continues to block the wipers, the wipers will stop moving.
1. Remove the obstacle and switch the wipers on again.

Mirrors
General safety precautions
Using the outside mirrors and the interior rearview mirror, the driver can observe traffic and adjust their driving based on traffic.

110
For driving safety, it is important that the driver adjusts the outside mirrors and the interior rearview mirror correctly before starting to drive.

It is not possible to oversee the entire side and rear area of the vehicle by looking in the outside and interior rearview mirrors. These areas that are not visible are
called blind spots. Other road users and objects could be in the blind spot.

WARNING

Adjusting the outside mirrors and interior rearview mirror while driving can distract the driver. This can cause accidents and serious or fatal injuries.

Only adjust the outside mirror and interior rearview mirror when the vehicle is stationary.

Always make sure that the mirrors are adjusted correctly and visibility to the rear is not limited by ice, snow, fog, or other objects.

WARNING

The view in the outside mirrors and interior rearview mirror does not cover the entire area around the side and rear of the vehicle. Other road users and objects
could be in these blind spots. This can cause accidents and serious or fatal injuries.

When parking, changing lanes, passing, and turning, always pay attention to your surroundings.

WARNING

Curved mirror surfaces (convex or aspheric) enlarge the field of vision and allow objects in the mirror to appear smaller and farther away. This can make it
difficult to estimate the exact distance from the vehicles behind, e.g. when changing lane. This can cause accidents and serious or fatal injuries.

Use the interior rearview mirror as much as possible to more accurately determine the distance to vehicles or other objects behind you.

Make sure there is sufficient visibility of the area behind the vehicle.

WARNING

An automatic dimming rearview mirror contains an electrolyte fluid that can leak out if the mirror glass breaks. Coming into contact with this liquid can irritate the
skin, eyes, and respiratory organs, especially in individuals with asthma or similar illnesses. This may cause serious injuries.

If electrolyte fluid is swallowed, rinse out the mouth immediately for at least 15 minutes with plenty of water. Do not induce vomiting unless it ordered to
do so by a doctor. Call for medical assistance immediately.

Immediately get plenty of fresh air and exit the vehicle. If this is not possible, open all the windows and doors.

If the electrolyte fluid comes into contact with eyes or skin, wash the affected area immediately for at least 15 minutes with plenty of water and seek
medical assistance.

If the electrolyte fluid comes into contact with your shoes or clothing, wash it for at least 15 minutes with plenty of water. Clean the shoes and clothing
thoroughly before wearing them again.

NOTICE

If the glass on an automatic dimming mirror breaks, electrolyte fluid can leak out. This fluid damages plastic surfaces.

Remove any leaking fluid as soon as possible, for instance using a wet sponge.

Interior rearview mirror

111
Fig. 78 On the windshield: automatic dimming interior rearview mirror.

Sensor for light entering from the rear.

Sensor for light entering from the front.

Fig. 79 On the windshield: manual dimming interior rearview mirror.

Automatic dimming interior rearview mirror

When the ignition is on, the sensors measure the amount of light entering from the rear fig. 78 and from the front .

Depending on the measured values, the interior rearview mirror will dim automatically.

If the amount of light entering the sensors is limited or interrupted, for example by a sunshade or attachment, the automatic dimming interior rearview mirror may not
function or may malfunction. Mobile navigation devices on the windshield or near the automatic dimming interior rearview mirror can also affect the sensors ⇒ .

Automatic dimming will be deactivated in some situations, for example when reverse gear is engaged.

112
Manual dimming interior rearview mirror
Base position: lever on the lower edge of the mirror points forward toward the windshield.

To dim, pull the lever back fig. 79.

WARNING

The illuminated display of a mobile navigation system may interfere with the automatic dimming interior rearview mirror. This may stop you from using the
interior rearview mirror to accurately determine the distance from vehicles or other objects behind you. Accidents and serious or fatal injuries could result.

Switch the mobile navigation system off in such cases.

Outside mirrors

Fig. 80 In the driver door: knob for the outside mirrors.

The following information describes the outside mirror functions for left-hand drive vehicles. Position corresponds to the outside mirror on the driver's side, and
position corresponds to the outside mirror on the passenger's side. For right-hand drive vehicles, proceed in the reverse order.

Adjusting outside mirrors


1. Switch the ignition on.

2. Turn the knob in the driver door to the preferred symbol fig. 80.

3. To adjust the outside mirror, push the knob forward, back, right or left in the direction of the arrow.

Fold the outside mirror in towards the vehicle body ⇒ .

Switch on the outside mirror heating. The exterior mirror heating only works when the ambient temperature is below approx. 20 °C (around 68 °F) and
provides the most heat when it first turns on. After about two minutes, the mirrors will be heated depending on the ambient temperature.

Adjusts the left outside mirror.

Adjusts the right outside mirror.

Neutral position. The outside mirror cannot be adjusted and all functions are switched off.

Activating outside mirror functions

The following outside mirror functions must be activated in the vehicle settings in the Infotainment system before they are used for the first time ⇒ Vehicle settings
menu.

Synchronized mirror adjustment

The synchronized mirror adjustment feature simultaneously adjusts the right-side outside mirror to match adjustments to the left-side outside mirror.

1. Turn rotary knob to position .

2. Adjusts the left outside mirror. The right outside mirror will be adjusted the same way (synchronized).

3. To correct the adjustment of the right outside mirror, if necessary, turn the knob to the position and adjust the right outside mirror.

Folding the outside mirrors in while parking

If the vehicle is locked or unlocked from the outside, the outside mirrors will automatically fold in or out. For this to happen, the knob must be in the , , or
113
position.

If the knob for power exterior mirrors is in the position, the outside mirrors will remain folded in.

Save the passenger-side outside mirror settings when reversing


1. Unlock the vehicle using the key, to which the setting is allocated.

2. Set the electronic parking brake.

3. Switch the ignition on.

4. Shift the transmission to neutral.

5. Select the reverse gear.

6. Adjust the front passenger outside mirror so that, for example, the edge of the curb can be seen clearly.

7. Shift the transmission to neutral.

8. Switch the ignition off.

The selected mirror position will be stored and assigned to the vehicle key.

Opening the front passenger outside mirror settings for driving in reverse
1. Turn rotary knob for the outside mirrors to the relevant position for adjusting the front passenger outside mirror.

2. With the ignition switched on, select reverse gear.

The front passenger outside mirror will adjust to the stored position.

The front passenger outside mirror will exit the position stored for driving in reverse when you begin driving forward faster than about 15 km/h (about 9 mph) or when
the knob is turned to any other position.

WARNING

If you fold the outside mirrors against the vehicle or back without taking care, you could get your fingers jammed between the outside mirror and the mirror
base. This can cause serious injuries.

Do not fold the outside mirrors out or in if there are any obstacles in the path.

NOTICE

If outside mirrors are not folded in when driving through a car wash, they can get damaged.

Always fold in the outside mirrors.

NOTICE

Folding in the power exterior mirror manually can worsen wear and tear or damage the mirror motor.

Do not fold power exterior mirrors in or out by hand.

Leave the outside mirror heating on only as long as it is needed. Otherwise fuel will be used unnecessarily.

If there is a malfunction in the power outside mirror, you can adjust the position of the mirror manually by hand by pushing on the edge of the mirror surface.

Sunshade
Sun visors

114
Fig. 81 In the front of the headliner: sun visor.

Light.

Remove from holder.

Slide cover open.

Adjustment options for the driver and front passenger sun visors:
Fold toward the windshield.

Remove from the holder and tilt toward the door fig. 81.

Illuminated vanity mirror

When the sun visor is folded down, there is a vanity mirror located behind a cover. The lights fig. 81 turn on when the cover fig. 81 slides open.

WARNING

Visibility may be reduced when sun visors are folded down and the sunshades are extended. This can cause accidents and serious or fatal injuries.

Always guide sun visors and sunshades back into their holders when they are no longer needed.

Under certain conditions, the light above the sun visor will turn off automatically after several minutes. This reduces the risk of the 12 V vehicle battery being
drained.

115
Heating and air conditioning system
Climatronic
Overview of the Climatronic
Climatronic is an automatic air conditioning system which warms, cools and dehumidifies the air. In automatic mode, Climatronic can automatically control the air
temperature, air distribution and the volume of air.

The air conditioner is most effective when the vehicle interior is kept closed. If there is a build-up of heat inside the vehicle, ventilation can help to speed up the
cooling process.

Some functions of the air conditioner, as well as a climate control bar for the rear seats, depend on the vehicle equipment.

Display of activated functions

Illuminated symbols on the sensor areas indicate that a function is activated.

In the Air conditioner menu in the Infotainment system, function keys highlighted in color indicate that a function is switched on ⇒ Air conditioner menu in the
Infotainment system.

Air conditioner with voice command operation

Some of the air conditioner functions can be operated with voice control, depending on the vehicle equipment ⇒ Voice control.

WARNING

Icy, snow-covered or misted windows greatly reduce visibility. This increases the risk of collisions and accidents that could result in serious or fatal injuries.

Keep all windows free of ice, snow and fog.

Adjust the heating, air conditioner, and rear window defroster to a setting where the windows do not fog up ⇒ Troubleshooting.

Only start driving when all windows are clear.

Only use recirculation mode for a short time. Otherwise, the windows could fog up very quickly and greatly reduce visibility.

Switch off air recirculation as soon as it is no longer needed.

Air conditioner menu in the Infotainment system


In the upper center console
Open the Air conditioner menu in the Infotainment system.

In the Classic Climate and Smart Climate submenus, you can find, for example, the functions for temperature regulation ⇒ Temperature regulation and air
distribution ⇒ Air distribution and blower speed.

Depending on the vehicle equipment, the Classic Climate menu may also be called Climate control.

The Smart Climate submenu is available depending on the vehicle equipment.

Climate control settings submenu


Open the Climate control settings submenu.
Depending on the vehicle equipment, you can find additional comfort functions in the Climate control settings submenu:

Switch on seat heating and seat ventilation automatically at the beginning of the journey ⇒ Seat heating and seat ventilation .

Switch on steering wheel heating automatically at the beginning of the journey ⇒ Steering wheel heating.

Switching the Climatronic on and off


In the Air conditioner menu: top of the screen
Switch the air conditioning system on and off.
1. Tap in the upper center console.

2. Tap in the Air conditioner menu.

Automatic mode of the Climatronic


In the air conditioner menu
The set air temperature is maintained constant. The air volume and air distribution are automatically controlled. Automatic mode switches off when the
blower speed is changed manually.
If a Smart Climate function is switched on, Climatronic automatic mode is also switched on ⇒ Air distribution and blower speed.

Selecting the air conditioner profile

The blower power in automatic mode can be controlled via the air conditioning profiles.

116
1. Open the Air conditioner menu in the Infotainment system.

2. Tap .

3. Select your preferred air conditioner profile in the pop-up window.

Air Care
In the Air conditioner menu: Air Care submenu
The Air Care Climatronic active combination filter can limit the entrance of hazardous substances as well as allergens.

If Air Care is switched on, the air recirculation of the air conditioner is maximized as far as permitted by the risk of fogging up the windows depending on the humidity
in the vehicle interior and the outside temperature. Air recirculation is controlled automatically and adapts itself continuously to prevent vehicle occupant fatigue.

Switching Air Care on and off


1. Open the Air conditioner menu in the Infotainment system.

2. Tap Air Care.

3. Tap Active.

Temperature regulation
in the Infotainment system: Bottom of the screen
Adjust the temperature. The temperature settings are displayed permanently at the bottom of the screen in the Infotainment system.
The set temperatures for the rear seats are shown on the climate control bar displays for the rear seats.

In the Air conditioner menu: Classic Climate submenu


The air is cooled and dehumidified in cooling mode. Switch the maximum cooling output on and off.
Air recirculation is switched on automatically and Climatronic automatically directs air to the upper body.

Apply temperature settings for the driver side to all seats. Open the settings for the rear seats.

On the Infotainment system: setting the temperature with the touch control

Depending on the equipment, you can set the temperature via the touch control on the Infotainment system.

1. To set the temperature of the Climatronic to +22 °C (+72 °F), tap and hold the touch control in the center between and .

Or: to set a different temperature, swipe to the right or left on the touch control.

The set temperatures are displayed at the bottom of the screen in the Infotainment system.

Adjusting the temperature for the rear seats


1. Open the Air conditioner menu in the Infotainment system.

2. Tap the function key for the rear seats.

3. Tap the or function key.

Or: tap or on the climate control bar for the rear seats.

The set temperatures for the rear seats are shown on the climate control bar displays for the rear seats.
If REAR LOCK is activated in the Infotainment system, the rear climate control bar cannot be used.

Air distribution and blower speed


Vents

Vents are located in the following places in the vehicle:

Driver’s side.

Passenger's side.

Front center console.

Rear center console.

NOTICE

Food, medication, and objects that are sensitive to heat or cold can become damaged or unusable from the air coming out of the vents.

Do not place any food, medication, or other objects that are sensitive to temperature in front of the vents.

Air distribution functions in the Air conditioner menu: Classic Climate


Set the blower speed with the touch control. Direct air to the upper body. Direct air into the footwell. Direct air to the upper body and into the
footwell. Direct air onto the windshield and into the footwell. Direct air onto the windshield.

Air distribution functions in the Air conditioner menu: Smart Climate


117
If a Smart Climate function is switched on, Climatronic automatic mode is also switched on. The Smart Climate functions remain switched on for a short time and
automatic mode also remains switched on once this time has elapsed.

Clear fog and ice from the windshield. Direct warm air into the footwell. Direct warm air onto the steering wheel. Direct cool air into the
footwell. Direct fresh air from outside into the vehicle interior. Temporarily increase the power of the refrigerant system.

Defrost function
On the control next to multi-function steering wheel
The Climatronic defrost function clears fog and ice from the windshield.
The air is dehumidified and the blower is set to a higher speed.

Air recirculation
No fresh air will enter the vehicle interior when recirculation mode is switched on.

Switch air recirculation on and off in the Air conditioner menu.


1. Open the Air conditioner menu in the Infotainment system.

2. Tap Classic Climate.

3. Tap .

When does recirculation mode switch off?

Recirculation mode will switch off in the following situations ⇒ :

If the defrost function is switched on.

If a sensor detects that the windows could fog up.

If the tilting and sliding panoramic sunroof is open at high vehicle speeds.

WARNING

Without a supply of fresh air, the door windows can mist up and reduce visibility, and the driver can quickly become fatigued from inhaling exhaled air. This can
result in collisions, accidents and serious or fatal injuries.

Only use recirculation mode for a short time.

Switch off air recirculation as soon as it is no longer needed.

NOTICE

Cigarette smoke can settle on the air conditioner evaporator and the enhanced air filter and cause permanent odors.

To prevent permanent odors, do not smoke inside the vehicle with air recirculation switched on.

When reverse gear is engaged or while the automatic wash and wipe system is on, recirculation mode switches on automatically so that no odors will enter
the vehicle interior.

Seat heating and seat ventilation


The seat heating and seat ventilation function when the engine is running. The front seats can be equipped with either a seat heating system or a combined seat
heating and seat ventilation system. There are three levels of heating for the outer rear seats ⇒ .

The seat ventilation function ventilates the seat using vehicle interior air. This removes moisture from the body. The seat itself is not cooled directly.

Switch the seat heating on and off in the Air conditioner menu. Switch the seat heating and seat ventilation on and off in the Air conditioner menu.

Heating and ventilation levels

The operation statuses of the seat heating and seat ventilation are represented by colors in the Infotainment system.

At the highest heating level, all three indicators under or in the Infotainment system are red.

At the highest ventilation level, all three indicators under or in the Infotainment system are blue.

Using the seat heating function


1. Open the Air conditioner menu in the Infotainment system ⇒ Air conditioner menu in the Infotainment system .

2. To switch on the seat heating at the highest heating level, tap or at the bottom edge of the screen.

3. To set the heating level, tap or repeatedly.

4. To switch the seat heating off, tap or repeatedly until the symbol is gray.

118
Or: to switch the seat heating on or off, tap with two fingers on the touch control under the Infotainment system on the driver's or passenger's side (depending on
the vehicle equipment).

Using the seat ventilation function


1. Open the Air conditioner menu in the Infotainment system ⇒ Air conditioner menu in the Infotainment system .

2. To switch on the seat ventilation at the highest ventilation level, tap or at the bottom edge of the screen.

3. To set the ventilation level, tap or repeatedly.

4. To switch the seat ventilation off, tap or repeatedly until the symbol is grey.

Switching on seat heating and seat ventilation automatically at the beginning of the journey
1. Open the Air conditioner menu in the Infotainment system ⇒ Air conditioner menu in the Infotainment system .

2. To open the Climate control settings submenu, tap .

3. To select the heating and ventilation level at the beginning of the journey, tap in the Seat heating or Seat ventilation menu item.

The selected heating and ventilation level is automatically switched on after starting the engine, depending on the outside temperature.

Or: To stop seat heating and seat ventilation being switched on automatically at the beginning of the journey, select Off in the respective menu item.

The seat heating switches on and off automatically

If you start the engine again within approximately ten minutes, the last heating level set for the driver seat is automatically switched on. If the front passenger seat is
occupied, the last heating level set for the front passenger seat is also switched on automatically.

If the front passenger leaves their seat when the seat heating is switched on and the engine is running, the seat heating for the front passenger seat is automatically
switched off. The display in the Infotainment system turns grey after approximately two seconds. If the front passenger takes their seat again when the engine is still
running, the seat heating for the front passenger seat is automatically switched back on.

When should the seat heating and seat ventilation be switched off?

Switch off the seat heating and seat ventilation under any of the following conditions:

The seat is occupied by a person with a limited perception of pain or temperature ⇒ .

The seat is not occupied

A child restraint is installed on the seat

Objects are covering the seat, e.g. protective covers, jackets, blankets or bags.

The seat is damp or wet.

Seat heating only: The interior or exterior temperature is higher than +25 °C (+77 °F).

WARNING

Magnetic fields are generated when the seat heating is operated. In individual cases, these magnetic fields can affect active medical implants (e.g.
pacemakers).

If you wear an active medical implant, you should consult your doctor or the manufacturer of your implant before operating the seat heating.

Make your vehicle occupants aware of this as well.

WARNING

People who cannot perceive pain or temperature or who have a limited perception of these due to medication, paralysis, or chronic illnesses such as diabetes
could develop burns or undercooling on the back, buttocks, and legs when using seat heating or seat ventilation. Such injuries could take a very long time to heal
or may never heal completely.

Never use the seat heating and seat ventilation if you suffer from limited perception of pain and/or temperature.

Contact a medical doctor for questions about personal health conditions.

WARNING

If the seat cover is soaked through, this can cause the seat heating to malfunction and increase the risk of burns.

Make sure the seat surface is dry before using the seat heating function.

Never sit on the seat while wearing damp or wet clothing.

Do not place any damp or wet objects and clothing on the seat.

Do not pour any fluids on the seat.

119
NOTICE

Localized pressure and insulating materials can damage the heating elements of the seat heating.

Do not kneel on the seats and do not exert any other form of localized pressure on the seat cushion and backrest.

Do not exert pressure on the seat cushion and backrest with pointed objects.

Switch off the seat heating if insulating materials have been fitted to the seat, e.g. a protective cover or a child restraint.

Use the seat heating only when the seat is equipped with the original seat covers.

If any odor starts to develop, turn off the seat heating immediately and have it checked by suitably qualified professionals. Volkswagen recommends
contacting an authorized Volkswagen dealer or authorized Volkswagen Service Facility.

In order to save fuel, switch off the seat heating and seat ventilation as soon as possible.

Steering wheel heating


The steering wheel heating only works when the engine is running.

Switch the steering wheel heating on and off via the multi-function steering wheel.

Heating levels for the steering wheel heating

The steering wheel heating modes are shown by colors in the Infotainment system. At the highest heating level, all three indicators under in the Infotainment
system are red.

Operating steering wheel heating


1. To switch on steering wheel heating at the highest heating level, press the button.

2. To adjust the heating level, press the button repeatedly.

3. To switch off steering wheel heating, press the button repeatedly until the bar display in the instrument cluster display turns off.

Steering wheel heating switches on automatically

If you start the engine again within approximately ten minutes, the last heating level set is automatically switched on.

Saving the heating level


1. Switch on the steering wheel heating and set the desired heating level.

2. To save the current heating level, press and hold the button for approximately one second.

The heating level is saved and the steering wheel heating is switched off.

3. To switch the steering wheel heating back on at the most recently saved heating level, press and hold the button for approximately one second.

Switching on steering wheel heating automatically at the beginning of the journey


1. Open the Air conditioner menu in the Infotainment system.

2. To open the Climate control settings submenu, tap .

3. Activate the Steering wheel heating checkbox.

The steering wheel heating is automatically switched on after starting the engine, depending on the outside temperature.

Steering wheel heating switches off automatically

If one of the following conditions applies, the steering wheel heating switches off automatically:

If the energy use is too high.

If the steering wheel heating system is malfunctioning.

Rear window defroster


The rear window defroster only works when the engine is running.

Switch the rear window defroster on and off on the control next to the multi-function steering wheel.
The rear window defroster switches off automatically after a maximum of around ten minutes.

NOTICE

Stickers applied over the heating wires of the rear window defroster on the inside can damage the rear window defroster.

Do not affix stickers over the heating wires of the rear window defroster.

120
In order to save fuel, switch off the rear window defroster as soon as possible.

Troubleshooting
The cooling mode or heating cannot be switched on or the function is limited

The cooling mode only works when the engine is running and at ambient temperatures above +3 °C (+38 °F).

If the engine is very hot or if the outside temperature is extremely high, the function of the cooling mode , the heating and the defrost may be restricted.

Switch on the fan.

Check the safeguard on the air conditioning system ⇒ Replacing fuses.

Change active combination filters ⇒ Service.

If the malfunction persists, contact a suitably qualified professional. Volkswagen recommends contacting an authorized Volkswagen dealer or authorized
Volkswagen Service Facility.

NOTICE

Continuing to operate the air conditioner when it is not working can result in subsequent damage.

If the air conditioner is not cooling or heating the air, switch it off immediately.

Have the air conditioner checked by suitably qualified professionals. Volkswagen recommends contacting an authorized Volkswagen dealer or
authorized Volkswagen Service Facility.

The windows are fogged up


The windows fog up when they are colder than the ambient temperature and the air is very humid. Cold air does not absorb as much moisture as warm air which is
why windows fog up more frequently during cold seasons.

1. To improve the heating and cooling output, keep the air intake in front of the windshield free of ice, snow, and leaves ⇒ Vehicle care.

2. Leave the air duct in the rear section of the luggage compartment uncovered so that air can flow through the vehicle from front to back.

3. Switch on the defrost function ⇒ Defrost function.

The temperature unit has changed


You can change the temperature units for all temperature displays in the vehicle using the Infotainment system.

1. Tap the home button.

2. Open the Settings menu.

3. Select the Units menu item.

Water or water vapor under the vehicle

In the case of high outside humidity and temperatures, condensation can drip from the air conditioning system evaporator and pool under the vehicle. This is normal
and does not mean there is a leak in the system.

Controls are responding differently than expected

Moisture, dirt and grease may limit the functioning of the controls.

1. Always keep the control panels clean and dry.

121
Driving
Steering
Steering information
To make it more difficult to steal the vehicle, the steering must always be locked before leaving the vehicle.

Steering

Power steering on an electromechanical steering system adjusts automatically based on the driving speed, the steering torque, and the steering angle of the
wheels. Electromechanical power steering works only when the engine is running. The steering also works if the start-stop system engages and the engine
switches off.

If the power steering system is impaired or malfunctioning, a significantly greater amount of force than normal must be used to steer.

Vehicles with eco-coasting function: The power steering also works when the engine is switched off while driving ⇒ .

On vehicles with Driving Mode Selection, power steering handling can be influenced by the selected driving mode.

Electronic steering lock


1. Stop the vehicle.

2. Depending on the vehicle equipment: Engage the parking lock .

3. Switch the ignition off and then open the driver's door.

The steering column will be locked.

If the steering column does not lock, first open the driver's door and then switch the ignition off. As long as the vehicle is unlocked, the steering column also stays
unlocked.

Progressive steering

Depending on the vehicle's equipment, the progressive steering can adapt the force of the steering movement to the driving situation. Progressive steering only
works when the engine is running.

In city traffic, less steering movement is needed for parking, maneuvering or for taking sharp bends.

On highways or on expressways, progressive steering gives a sportier, direct steering experience and noticeable dynamics when driving along curved stretches, for
instance.

WARNING

Depending on the equipment, power steering may only work when the engine is running. If the power steering is not functioning, the steering wheel becomes
stiff, making it much more difficult to steer. This can result in loss of control of the vehicle, accidents, serious injuries or death.

Never let the vehicle roll when the engine is stopped.

WARNING

If the electronic steering lock engages, you can no longer steer the vehicle. This can result in loss of control of the vehicle, accidents, serious injuries or death.

Never switch off the ignition when the vehicle is in motion.

NOTICE

If the ignition is switched off when the vehicle is being towed, some vehicle functions are not available, such as the turn signals, horn, windshield wipers and the
windshield washer system.

Switch on the ignition when towing the vehicle.

Troubleshooting
Steering malfunction

The red warning light turns on or flashes.

There is an electromechanical steering or electronic steering lock malfunction.

Do not continue driving!

1. Contact an authorized Volkswagen dealer or authorized Volkswagen Service Facility for assistance.

If the red warning light turns on, it may be difficult to move the steering wheel because the electromechanical steering system is malfunctioning.

122
If the red warning light blinks, the steering column cannot unlock.

Steering malfunction

The yellow indicator light turns on or flashes.

The steering is stiffer or more sensitive than usual.

The indicator light comes on permanently:

1. Restart the engine and drive the vehicle slowly for a short distance.

2. If the indicator light stays on, contact a suitably qualified professional and have the system checked. Volkswagen recommends contacting an authorized
Volkswagen dealer or authorized Volkswagen Service Facility.

The indicator light blinks:

1. Turn the steering wheel back and forth slightly.

2. Switch the ignition off and back on.

3. Pay attention to the messages in the instrument cluster display.

4. If the indicator light continues to flash after switching the ignition back on, do not continue driving. Contact an authorized Volkswagen dealer or authorized
Volkswagen Service Facility for assistance.

Pedals
Information on the pedals

Fig. 82 In the footwell: Pedals in vehicles with a manual gearbox.

Fig. 83 In the footwell: Pedals in vehicles with an automatic gearbox.

Accelerator pedal.

Brake pedal.

For vehicles with a manual transmission: Clutch pedal.

WARNING

Objects in the driver footwell can prevent the pedals from moving. This can cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle and increases the risk of serious or

123
fatal injuries.

Make sure all pedals can always be pressed without obstructions.

Always attach floor mats securely in the footwell.

Never place floor mats or other carpet over the installed floor mat.

Make sure no objects can enter the driver footwell while driving.

Remove any objects from the footwell when the vehicle is parked.

Wear shoes that give your feet good grip for operating the pedals.

WARNING

Not paying attention to road traffic can cause accidents and serious or fatal injuries.

Always comply with the applicable driving regulations and speed limits and think ahead while driving.

Take regular breaks on long drives. You should take a break at least every two hours.

WARNING

Alcohol, drugs, medication, and prescription narcotics can considerably impair perception, reaction times, and driving safety, which can result in loss of vehicle
control. This can cause accidents and serious or fatal injuries.

Do not drive under the influence of alcohol, drugs, medication or prescription narcotics.

NOTICE

If a brake circuit is malfunctioning, the brake pedal may need to travel farther in order to stop the vehicle. A longer braking distance may cause damage to the
vehicle.

Ensure that all the pedals can always be pressed without obstructions.

Press the brake pedal down farther if braking power is reduced.

Brakes
Information on the brakes
Breaking in brake pads

During the first approx. 200 to 300 km (approx. 100 to 200 miles), new brake pads do not yet have their full braking efficiency and first need to be “worn in” ⇒
However, you can compensate for the slightly reduced braking force by pressing firmly on the brake pedal. During the break-in period, the braking distance during
full braking or automatic braking is longer than with brake pads that have been broken in. During the break-in period, avoid full braking and situations that place a
heavy load on the brakes, such as driving too close to the vehicle ahead.

Brake pad wear

Brake pad wear depends on driving conditions and style. When driving frequently in cities and on curves or with a sporty driving style, have your brake pads
checked frequently by suitably qualified professionals. Volkswagen recommends contacting an authorized Volkswagen dealer or authorized Volkswagen Service
Facility.

External influences on the brake

When driving with wet brakes, for example after driving through water, in heavy rain, or after washing your vehicle, the braking efficiency can be reduced by moisture
or ice on the brake discs. You must “dry” the brakes as soon as possible by braking carefully at high speeds. Make sure there is no vehicle behind you and that you
do not endanger anyone else on the road ⇒ .

A coating of salt on the brake discs and brake pads reduces the braking efficiency and increases the braking distance. If you do not apply the brakes for long periods
of time on salt-covered roads, you must brake carefully to clean off the layer of salt ⇒ .

Leaving the vehicle parked for long periods of time, low mileage, and avoiding heavy braking can contribute to corrosion on the brake rotors and dirty brake pads. If
you usually avoid heavy braking or if there is corrosion present, occasional heavy braking at high speeds is recommended to clean the brake rotors and pads.
Ensure that you do not endanger any other vehicles or anyone else on the road ⇒ .

WARNING

Driving with worn brake pads or a malfunctioning brake system can lead to a loss of control of the vehicle, accidents and serious or fatal injuries.

If you suspect that the brake pads are worn or the brake system is malfunctioning, immediately find a suitably qualified professional and have the brake
pads checked and worn brake pads replaced. Volkswagen recommends contacting an authorized Volkswagen dealer or authorized Volkswagen Service
124
Facility.

WARNING

Up to the first approx. 300 km (approx. 200 miles), new brake pads do not yet have their full braking efficiency and first need to be "worn in". Insufficient braking
efficiency can increase the risk of accidents. This can cause serious or even fatal injuries.

Increase the pressure on the brake pedal if reduced braking efficiency can be felt.

To reduce the risk of accidents, serious injuries, and loss of vehicle control, drive with extra caution when the brake pads are new.

During the break-in period for new brake pads, do not drive too close to other vehicles and avoid driving situations that place a heavy load on the brakes.

WARNING

Prolonged braking causes the brakes to overheat. This can considerably reduce braking performance, increase braking distance and possibly cause a total
brake system malfunction. This can cause a loss of vehicle control, accidents, and serious or fatal injuries.

Never let the brakes “rub” too often and too long or press the brake pedal too often and too long.

WARNING

When driving downhill, a lot of force is placed on the brakes and they become hot quickly. Overheated brakes reduces the braking efficiency and increase the
braking distance considerably. This can cause a loss of vehicle control, accidents, and serious or fatal injuries.

Before driving on a long stretch of road with a steep gradient, reduce your speed by shifting down to a lower gear with a manual transmission or in
tiptronic mode of the automatic transmission.

Utilize the engine braking effect to reduce the load on the brakes.

Before starting a journey, ensure that the air supply to the brakes is not covered, e.g. by aftermarket or damaged front spoilers.

WARNING

Wet, icy, or salt-covered brakes will take longer to brake and increase the braking distance. This can cause a loss of vehicle control, accidents, and serious or
fatal injuries.

Test the brakes carefully.

Press the brake pedal carefully several times to dry the brakes and clear the ice and salt from them, as long as the visibility, weather, road, and traffic
conditions permit.

If you are having the front brake pads checked, the rear brake pads should be checked at the same time. Regularly check the thickness of the brake pads
visually by inspecting them through the openings in the wheel rims or from underneath the vehicle. If necessary, remove the wheels so that the brake pads can be
inspected. For further information, contact an authorized Volkswagen dealer or authorized Volkswagen Service Facility. Volkswagen recommends contacting an
authorized Volkswagen dealer or authorized Volkswagen Service Facility.

Troubleshooting
Brake system malfunction

The red warning light turns on. A message may also be displayed.

1. Do not continue driving! Contact an authorized Volkswagen dealer or authorized Volkswagen Service Facility immediately for assistance.

Brake pad wear indicator

The red warning light turns on or flashes.

The front brake pads are worn.

1. Immediately contact an authorized Volkswagen dealer or authorized Volkswagen Service Facility to have the system checked. Volkswagen recommends
contacting an authorized Volkswagen dealer or authorized Volkswagen Service Facility.

2. Have all brake pads inspected and replaced, if necessary.

and The brake is too hot

The yellow indicator light turns on.

An audible warning may also sound. Where applicable, a message will appear in the instrument cluster display.

1. Stop at the next opportunity.


125
2. To engage the parking lock, press the button.

3. Leave the vehicle with the electronic parking brake applied and the ignition switched on until a further message appears.

4. Then get professional assistance to have the system inspected. Volkswagen recommends contacting an authorized Volkswagen dealer or authorized
Volkswagen Service Facility.

Unusual noises when braking

If there are sustained scraping or squeaking noises when braking, that is a sign of worn brake pads on the front or rear axle.

1. Immediately contact an authorized Volkswagen dealer or authorized Volkswagen Service Facility to have the system checked. Volkswagen recommends
contacting an authorized Volkswagen dealer or authorized Volkswagen Service Facility.

2. Have all brake pads inspected and replaced, if necessary.

If the vehicle's braking performance changes

If the brake pads are worn or if you notice that your vehicle does not brake as usual, e.g. the braking distance suddenly increases:

1. Immediately contact an authorized Volkswagen dealer or authorized Volkswagen Service Facility to have the system checked. Volkswagen recommends
contacting an authorized Volkswagen dealer or authorized Volkswagen Service Facility.

2. Have all brake pads inspected and replaced, if necessary.

Start the engine


Starter button
The starter button replaces the ignition
lock (Press & Drive).

Fig. 84 Located in the lower area of the center console: Starter button for starting the engine (in vehicles with a manual gearbox).

Fig. 85 Located in the lower area of the center console: Starter button for starting the engine (in vehicles with a DSG automated transmission).

Vehicles with manual transmission: Start the engine with the starter button and by pressing the clutch pedal.

Vehicles with an automatic transmission: Start the engine with the starter button and by pressing the brake pedal.

The vehicle can only be activated when there is a valid vehicle key inside the vehicle.

Depending on the model, the starter button blinks to indicate readiness for use.

126
The electronic steering lock is activated when you leave the vehicle by opening the driver door when the ignition is switched off ⇒ Steering information.

Switching the ignition on or off


1. Press the starter button once without pressing the brake or clutch pedal ⇒ .

Automatic ignition switch off

If the vehicle recognizes that the driver is absent when the internal combustion engine is switched off, the ignition is automatically switched off after a certain amount
of time.

Engine restart function

If no valid vehicle key is detected in the vehicle interior after stopping the engine, it can be started again within approximately five seconds. A message about this will
be shown in the instrument cluster display.

Once this time has elapsed, the vehicle can no longer be started without a valid vehicle key inside the vehicle.

WARNING

If the brake pedal is pressed when switching on the ignition, the engine will start immediately. This can cause unintentional vehicle movement and serious
injuries.

Avoid pressing the brake pedal when switching on the ignition if the engine is not intended to be started.

WARNING

If you leave vehicle keys unattended in the vehicle, children or unauthorized people could lock the doors and/or the trunk lid, start the engine, or switch on the
ignition and thereby activate electrical equipment, such as the power windows. This can cause accidents and serious or fatal injuries.

Always take all vehicle keys with you when leaving the vehicle.

WARNING

If you leave children, people requiring assistance or animals unattended in the vehicle, they may accidentally set the vehicle in motion or be subjected to very
high or low temperatures. There is a risk of accidents and serious or fatal injuries.

Never leave children, people requiring assistance or animals unattended in the vehicle.

WARNING

Starting the engine in unventilated or enclosed spaces may cause poisonous gases to enter the vehicle interior. This can cause serious injuries and death due to
asphyxiation.

Never start the engine or let it run in unventilated or enclosed spaces, such as in garages.

Always switch the ignition off manually before leaving the vehicle and note any messages in the instrument cluster display.

The vehicle being stationary for long periods with the ignition switched on can cause the 12 V vehicle battery to drain and then it will not be possible to start the
engine.

Electronic immobilizer
The immobilizer helps prevent the engine from being started and the vehicle from being moved with an unauthorized vehicle key.

For vehicles with a starter button: In the remote control vehicle key, there is a chip used to automatically deactivate the electronic immobilizer when there is a valid
remote control vehicle key in the vehicle interior.

For vehicles with a starter button: The electronic immobilizer is automatically activated as soon as there is no valid vehicle key in the vehicle.

The engine can only be started with a Volkswagen Genuine vehicle key that is coded correctly. You can obtain coded vehicle keys from an authorized Volkswagen
dealer or authorized Volkswagen Service Facility.
Only using Volkswagen Genuine vehicle keys will ensure that your vehicle operates correctly.

Start the engine


Start the engine
1. Switch the ignition on.

2. Set the electronic parking brake.

127
3. Vehicles with an automatic transmission: Press and hold the brake pedal until the engine has started. Engage gear or the parking lock .

Vehicles with manual transmission: Fully press and hold the clutch pedal until the engine has started. Bring the gearshift lever to the neutral position.

4. Press the starter button ⇒ Starter button briefly and do not press the accelerator pedal. A valid vehicle key must be inside the vehicle for the engine to start.

5. If the engine does not start, stop the starting procedure and try again after approximately one minute.

6. If the vehicle was locked with the vehicle key, the starter button will be deactivated. If you are in the vehicle and you need to start the engine, unlock the vehicle
first or perform an emergency start.

Performing an emotion start (R models only)


1. Switch the ignition on.

2. Set the electronic parking brake.

3. Press and hold the starter button with the brake pedal not depressed until the message Please depress the brake appears in the instrument cluster.

4. Press and hold the brake pedal until the engine has started, but do not press the accelerator pedal. The engine starts with a briefly increased idle speed. A valid
vehicle key must be inside the vehicle for the engine to start.

5. If the engine does not start, stop the starting procedure and try again after approximately one minute.

6. If the vehicle was locked with the vehicle key, the starter button will be deactivated. If you are in the vehicle and you need to restart the engine, unlock the
vehicle or perform an emergency start.

WARNING

Starting the engine in unventilated or enclosed spaces may cause poisonous gases to enter the vehicle interior. This can cause serious injuries and death due to
asphyxiation.

Never start the engine or let it run in unventilated or enclosed spaces, such as in garages.

WARNING

Hot vehicle parts and exhaust can ignite flammable or explosive materials in the vicinity. This can lead to fires and cause accidents and serious or fatal injuries.

Never start the engine or leave the engine running if oil, fuel or other flammable operating equipment is in the vicinity of the vehicle or is escaping from the
vehicle.

Do not use any start boosters.

WARNING

An unattended vehicle which is ready to drive may cause accidents and severe injuries.

Never leave the vehicle unattended when the engine is running, especially if a gear is engaged.

NOTICE

Incorrect handling of the vehicle can increase wear to components, such as the engine or starter, or cause damage.

Avoid restarting the engine while driving or directly after turning off the engine.

Avoid high engine speeds, full acceleration and heavy engine loads when the engine is cold.

Be aware that at high altitudes, the air density is lower, which can make it more difficult to start the engine.

NOTICE

Uncombusted fuel can damage the catalytic converter.

Do not tow-start or push-start the vehicle.

Do not let the engine run to warm up while the vehicle is parked. Begin driving as soon as there is enough visibility through the windows. This allows the engine
to reach its operating temperature sooner and reduces the emissions.

Major electrical equipment switches off temporarily when starting the engine.

If there is no vehicle key in the vehicle or the key is not detected, a message will appear in the instrument cluster display. This can occur if another signal
interferes with the remote control vehicle key or if the remote control vehicle key is covered by an object, such as a metal case.

For example, if the vehicle key button cell battery is weak or drained, the engine cannot be started with the starter button. If this is the case, use the emergency
start function.
128
After starting, operating noises may be temporarily higher than usual while the engine is cold. This is normal and not a cause for concern.

Troubleshooting
Engine control malfunction

The red warning light turns on.

The vehicle's drive power may be limited or not present at all. It may not be possible to continue driving, or only with limitations.

Do not continue driving!

1. Safely park the vehicle.

2. Pay attention to the text in the instrument cluster.

3. See an authorized Volkswagen dealer or authorized Volkswagen Service Facility for assistance and have the engine control checked.

Engine control malfunction

The yellow indicator light turns on.

The vehicle's drive power may be limited.

1. The instrument cluster displays the message Error: drive system. Please visit workshop.

2. Have the engine checked immediately by a suitably qualified professional. Volkswagen recommends contacting an authorized Volkswagen dealer or authorized
Volkswagen Service Facility.

Engine control malfunction

The yellow indicator light turns on.

The driving performance has been limited to prevent the engine control components from overheating.

The instrument cluster displays the message Error: drive system. Performance is limited.

It is possible to continue driving with reduced driving performance.

The driving performance limitation is removed in the following scenarios:

The engine control components are no longer within a critical temperature range.

Engine speed limited

The yellow indicator light turns on.

The engine speed has been limited to reduce the risk of the engine overheating, and the speed is also displayed in the instrument cluster display.

The engine speed limitation is removed in the following scenarios:

The engine is no longer within a critical temperature range.

The driver’s foot is removed from the accelerator pedal.

together with Engine speed limitation due to engine control malfunction

The yellow indicator lights turn on.

The engine speed limitation is triggered by an engine control malfunction.

The drive system's power may be limited.

1. Make sure the displayed RPM is not exceeded.

2. Have the engine checked immediately by a suitably qualified professional. Volkswagen recommends contacting an authorized Volkswagen dealer or authorized
Volkswagen Service Facility.

Valid vehicle key cannot be detected

129
Fig. 86 In the center armrest: Emergency start function.

A corresponding indicator appears in the instrument cluster display.

If the vehicle key has a weak or drained button cell battery, the vehicle key may not be able to be detected.

An emergency start must be performed:

1. Press and hold the brake pedal.

2. Place the vehicle key in the rear cup holder in the center armrest and press the starter button fig. 86.

The ignition will switch on automatically and the engine may start.

The engine cannot be started

If an unauthorized vehicle key is used or the system is malfunctioning, a corresponding indicator appears in the instrument cluster display.

1. Use an authorized vehicle key.

2. If the malfunction persists, contact an authorized Volkswagen dealer or authorized Volkswagen Service Facility.

Stopping the engine


Stopping the engine
1. Bringing the vehicle to a stop ⇒ .

2. Park the vehicle.

3. Press the starter button briefly. If the engine cannot be turned off, use the emergency stop function.

4. Pay attention to the messages in the instrument cluster.

Car wash function

Vehicles with an automatic transmission: If the ignition is switched off in gear , the vehicle will be capable of rolling for 30 minutes. After this time, the parking lock
is automatically engaged when the vehicle is stationary. Approximately one minute before the parking lock is automatically engaged, a corresponding message is
shown in the instrument cluster display.

Exit warning

When the driver door is opened, a warning chime sounds and warning notifications appear in the instrument cluster display to warn you that you are exiting a
vehicle that can roll.

WARNING

When the engine is switched off, certain vehicle systems do not work or only work in a limited way, such as the brake booster or power steering. As a result, you
must use more force for steering and you must apply more pressure on the brake pedal to stop. When the vehicle is moving, this can result in loss of control of
the vehicle, accidents and serious or fatal injuries.

Never switch off the engine while the vehicle is in motion.

WARNING

130
When the engine is switched off, the airbags and safety belt pretensioners will not function. This can cause serious or fatal injuries in the event of accidents.

Never switch off the engine while the vehicle is in motion.

WARNING

If the ignition is switched off, the steering lock can engage and you would no longer be able to steer the vehicle. When the vehicle is moving, this can result in
loss of control of the vehicle, accidents, and serious or fatal injuries.

Never switch off the ignition when the vehicle is in motion.

WARNING

The parts of the exhaust system become very hot and can ignite flammable materials, for example shrubs, leaves, dry grass or spilled fuel. This can lead to a fire
and cause accidents and serious or fatal injuries.

Never park the vehicle in such a way that the exhaust system components come into contact with flammable materials under the vehicle.

Never use additional undercoating or corrosion protection for exhaust pipes, catalytic converters, heat shields, or particulate filters.

NOTICE

The engine can overheat after turning it off if the vehicle is driven with a high engine load for a long period of time.

Let the engine run in neutral for approximately two minutes before turning it off.

The radiator fan in the engine compartment may continue running for several minutes after turning the engine off, even if the ignition is switched off. The
radiator fan will turn off automatically.

Troubleshooting
The engine cannot be turned off

The engine cannot be turned off when the starter button is pressed briefly.

An emergency stop must be performed:

1. Press the starter button twice within several seconds or press and hold one time.

The engine will stop automatically ⇒ Starter button.

Start/Stop system
Start-stop system
The start-stop system automatically
switches the engine off when you stop
and when the vehicle is stationary. The
engine starts again automatically when
needed.

Switching on the start-stop system

The function is automatically activated every time the ignition is switched on.

Always manually deactivate the start-stop system when driving through water.

1. Press and hold the brake pedal to stop the vehicle.

The engine turns off shortly before the vehicle becomes stationary.

2. To restart the engine, take your foot off the brake pedal or press the accelerator pedal.

Indicator lights

When indicator light comes on, the start-stop system is available and the automatic engine stop is active.

When indicator light comes on, the start-stop system is not available ⇒ .

Important conditions for automatic engine switch off


The driver is wearing their safety belt.

The driver door is closed.

The hood is closed.

A minimum engine temperature has been reached.


131
The vehicle interior temperature is within the preset temperature value and air humidity is not too high.

The air conditioner's defrost function is not switched on.

The charge level of the 12-volt vehicle battery is sufficient.

Vehicles with mHEV system: The charge level of the 48-volt vehicle battery is sufficient.

The temperature of the 12-volt vehicle battery is neither too low or too high.

The vehicle is not on a large uphill or downhill gradient.

The steering wheel is not significantly turned.

Reverse gear is not engaged.

Park Assist is not activated.

If the conditions for automatic engine switch-off are only achieved during a stationary phase, then the engine may also switch off at this point, e.g. if the defrost
function is switched off.

Conditions for automatic restart

The engine can start automatically under the following conditions:

If the vehicle interior heats up or cools down significantly.

If the vehicle starts to move.

If the electrical voltage in the 12-volt vehicle battery falls.

Vehicles with mHEV system: If the electrical voltage in the 48 V battery falls.

In principle the following applies: The engine always restarts automatically when required for the identified situation and vehicle.

Conditions that make manual engine start necessary

The engine must be started manually under the following conditions:

The driver’s door is opened.

The hood is opened.

Manually deactivating and activating the start-stop system

The start/stop system can be manually deactivated and activated in the Infotainment system.

Manually deactivating the start-stop system:

1. Tap the Vehicle function key in the menu selection.

2. Tap the Status function key.

3. Tap the StartStop function key to deactivate the start-stop system. If the start/stop system is deactivated, the StartStop function key has a blue
background.

Manually activating the start-stop system:

1. Tap the Vehicle function key in the menu selection.

2. Tap the Status function key.

3. Tap the StartStop function key to activate the start-stop system.

If the start/stop system has switched off the engine, it will start again as soon as the system is deactivated with the StartStop function key.

Vehicles with mHEV system: If the start-stop system has switched off the engine and the system was deactivated via the StartStop function key, the engine will
only start when the vehicle is stationary.

Always manually deactivate the start-stop system when driving through water.

Deactivating the start-stop function does not deactivate the eco-coasting function.

Start/stop mode with Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)

The engine is switched off after the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC ) has brought the vehicle to a stop with active braking support.

In the following scenarios, the engine restarts if ACC is active:

The accelerator pedal is pressed.

ACC resumes speed and cruise control again.

The vehicle in front has moved on.

The engine also restarts if the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is deactivated and the vehicle in front moves on.

WARNING

132
If the start-stop system is activated during work in the engine compartment, the motor may start suddenly. This can cause accidents and serious injuries.

Always deactivate the start-stop system when working in the engine compartment.

WARNING

With the ignition switched off, certain vehicle systems do not work or only work in a limited way, such as the brake booster or power steering. As a result, you
must use more force for steering and you must apply more pressure on the brake pedal to stop. When the vehicle is moving, this can result in loss of control of
the vehicle, accidents and serious or fatal injuries.

Never switch off the ignition when the vehicle is in motion.

WARNING

With the ignition switched off, the airbags and safety belt pretensioners will not function. This can cause serious or fatal injuries in the event of accidents.

Never switch off the ignition when the vehicle is in motion.

WARNING

If the ignition is switched off, the steering lock can engage and you would no longer be able to steer the vehicle. When the vehicle is moving, this can result in
loss of control of the vehicle, accidents, and serious or fatal injuries.

Never switch off the ignition when the vehicle is in motion.

NOTICE

If the start-stop system is used for a very long period of time at very high outside temperatures, this can damage the 12-volt vehicle battery.

Avoid using the start-stop system at very high outside temperatures.

In some cases you may need to restart the engine manually. Pay attention to the relevant message on the instrument cluster display.

Always manually deactivate the start-stop system when driving through water.

Troubleshooting
The engine no longer starts automatically

The red warning light turns on.

There is a start-stop system malfunction.

1. Start the engine manually ⇒ Start the engine.

2. Contact an authorized Volkswagen dealer or authorized Volkswagen Service Facility immediately. Volkswagen recommends contacting an authorized
Volkswagen dealer or authorized Volkswagen Service Facility.

Manual transmission
Manual transmission: Engaging a gear

133
Fig. 87 Gear shift pattern for 6-speed manual transmission. Your vehicle may be equipped with a 5-speed manual transmission.

Engaging forward gear

The positions of the individual gears are depicted on the gear lever.

1. Fully depress the clutch pedal and hold.

2. Move the gearshift lever into the preferred position fig. 87 .

3. Release the clutch pedal to engage the clutch.

In some countries the clutch pedal must be fully depressed to start the engine.

Engaging reverse gear


Only select reverse gear when the vehicle is stationary.

1. Fully depress the clutch pedal and hold.

2. Move the gearshift lever to the neutral position and push it down.

3. Push the gearshift lever all the way to the left and then forward into the reverse gear position fig. 87 .

4. Release the clutch pedal to engage the clutch.

Downshifting

You should always downshift gear-by-gear when driving, i.e. into the next gear down, and at engine speeds that are not too high. At high speeds or engine speeds,
skipping a gear or several gears when downshifting can result in damage to the clutch or transmission, even if the clutch is not engaged when doing so.

WARNING

Incorrectly downshifting into gears that are too low can result in loss of vehicle control as well as accidents and serious or fatal injuries.

Always select an appropriate gear for the relevant driving situation.

WARNING

Fast acceleration or switching off the ASR can cause traction loss and sliding on slippery roads, such as on wet, icy or dirty roads. This could cause loss of
vehicle control, accidents and serious or fatal injuries.

Only accelerate quickly when the visibility, weather, road, and traffic conditions allow it, and when other road users will not be endangered by the vehicle's
acceleration and driving style.

Always adapt your driving style to the flow of traffic.

WARNING

As soon as a gear is engaged and the clutch pedal has been released, the vehicle immediately begins to move when the engine is running. This applies even if
the electronic parking brake is switched on. Unintentional vehicle movement may cause accidents and serious injuries.

Never engage reverse gear when the vehicle is in motion.

134
NOTICE

If the gearshift lever is shifted to a gear that is too low at high speeds or high engine speeds or if the clutch pedal remains pressed and is not engaged,
significant damage to the clutch and transmission can result.

Always select an appropriate gear for the relevant driving situation.

Avoid pressing the clutch unnecessarily and for too long.

NOTICE

If the manual transmission is not used properly, this may cause damage or premature wear.

Do not rest your hand on the gearshift lever while driving. The pressure from your hand is transmitted to the selector forks in the transmission.

Ensure that the vehicle is completely stationary before engaging reverse gear.

Always fully depress the clutch pedal when shifting gears.

Do not hold your vehicle stationary on inclines by “slipping” the clutch while the engine is running.

Early upshifting helps to save fuel and reduces operating noise.

Troubleshooting
Clutch “slips”

The yellow indicator light turns on.

The clutch does not transmit the full engine torque.

1. Take foot from clutch pedal if required.

Clutch overheats

The yellow indicator light comes on, an audible warning may sound, and additional warning lights and a message may be shown in the display of the instrument
cluster.

The clutch may, for example, overheat upon frequent starting.

1. Stop at the next opportunity.

2. Disengage the transmission.

3. Set the electronic parking brake.

4. Allow the transmission to cool down with the engine running.

5. If the indicator light does not disappear, do not continue driving, and contact an authorized Volkswagen dealer or authorized Volkswagen Service Facility.

Otherwise, the transmission could become severely damaged.

Faulty clutch

The yellow indicator light turns on.

The clutch is faulty.

1. Drive on carefully.

2. Immediately contact an authorized Volkswagen dealer or authorized Volkswagen Service Facility to have the system checked. Otherwise the clutch may
become severely damaged. Volkswagen recommends contacting an authorized Volkswagen dealer or authorized Volkswagen Service Facility.

Automatic transmission
Automatic transmission: Selecting a position

135
Fig. 88 Selector lever of the automatic transmission.

Button for the parking lock.

When the ignition is switched on, the gear position that is currently selected is shown on the instrument cluster display and on the selector lever.

When operating the brake or selecting a gear, the gear shift pattern is displayed in the instrument cluster.

The drive gears are locked. Only select this gear when the vehicle is stationary.
To engage the parking lock, press the button fig. 88.

If the engine is switched off while in the or gear, the transmission position is automatically engaged and the vehicle is prevented from rolling away.

If the engine is switched off when selector lever position is selected, the transmission remains in neutral position for approximately 30 minutes and only then
activates the parking lock (car wash function) ⇒ Stopping the engine.

Reverse gear is selected. Only select this gear when the vehicle is stationary. The transmission is in the neutral setting. No power is transferred to the wheels
and the engine braking effect is not available. gear: normal program.
The transmission upshifts and downshifts automatically when in the forward driving gears. The shifting time depends on the engine load, the personal driving style,
and the driving speed.

gear: sport program.

The forward gears automatically upshift later and downshift earlier than in gear in order to fully utilize the engine power reserves. The shifting time depends on
the engine load, the personal driving style, and the driving speed.

To switch between gears and , tap the selector lever toward the rear.

The selector lever will always spring back to the center position.

Selector lever position +: Sport Plus program

The forward gears automatically upshift later and downshift earlier than in gear in order to fully utilize the engine power reserves.

Activating the Sport Plus program:

1. Select the Drift or Special driving mode in the Driving Mode Selection ⇒ Selecting the driving mode. The Sport Plus program is active immediately.

Deactivating the Sport Plus program:

1. Tap the selector lever toward the rear.

To switch between the and + gears, tap the selector lever toward the rear.

Changing gear

To select the nearest selector lever position, move the selector lever backward or forward to the first pressure point. The selector lever will then return to its starting
position.

To skip a selector lever position, move the selector lever beyond the pressure point and in the direction you require. The selector lever will then return to its starting
position. It is therefore possible to switch directly from gear to gear , for example. This skips gear .

WARNING

If the brake pedal is released while the engine is running and gear or is engaged, the vehicle will start moving. This can cause unintentional vehicle
movement and accidents and serious injuries.

When the engine is running and the or gear is engaged, hold the vehicle with the brake pedal.

136
As the driver, never leave the driver seat when the engine is running and a gear is engaged.

If you have to leave the vehicle while the engine is running, always set the electronic parking brake and move the selector lever to the position.

WARNING

Engaging the incorrect gear can cause you to lose control of the vehicle, which could lead to an accident and serious or fatal injuries.

Never press the accelerator pedal when engaging a gear.

Never shift into reverse gear or engage the parking lock while the vehicle is moving.

WARNING

If the vehicle is left in selector lever position on inclines, the vehicle will roll downhill even if the engine is switched on. This can cause accidents and serious
injuries.

Never leave the vehicle in selector lever position .

NOTICE

If the electronic parking brake is not switched on when the vehicle is stationary and the brake pedal is released when the parking lock is engaged, the vehicle
may move forward or backward a few inches. This can cause damage to the vehicle.

Always set the electronic parking brake first before releasing the brake pedal.

If is engaged by mistake while driving, take your foot off the accelerator pedal. Wait until the engine is at idle speed in neutral before shifting into a drive
gear.

Shifting using tiptronic

Fig. 89 Steering wheel with shift paddles for Tiptronic.

The tiptronic mode allows you to shift


gears manually on an automatic
transmission.

You can switch to the tiptronic program from gears and by pulling a shift paddle fig. 89.

The tiptronic program is switched on temporarily from gear .

The tiptronic program is switched on permanently from gear .

When shifting in the tiptronic program, the gear currently engaged is maintained. This applies until the system shifts gears automatically when the speed threshold is
reached.

Once the gearbox has switched to the Tiptronic program, this is indicated in the instrument cluster display with .

If the engine is switched off while the gearbox is in Tiptronic mode, the gearbox engages the electronic parking brake . The vehicle is secured from rolling away.

Operating Tiptronic with the shift paddles


To shift up a gear, pull the right-hand shift paddle toward the steering wheel fig. 89.

To shift down a gear, pull the left-hand shift paddle toward the steering wheel.

To engage the lowest gear, pull the left-hand shift paddle toward the steering wheel and hold it there.
When accelerating, the transmission automatically upshifts to the next gear shortly before the maximum permissible engine RPM is reached.

When downshifting manually, the transmission only shifts if it is no longer possible to over-rev the engine.

137
Leaving the tiptronic program
1. Exits automatically after 8 seconds if the tiptronic program was initiated from gear .

Or: push the selector lever back and release again to engage gear .

Or: Pull the right-hand shift paddle towards the steering wheel for about three seconds and release again.

Gear +: Sport Plus program, manual mode

The forward gears are shifted up and down manually in order to fully utilize the engine's power reserves. The gear does not shift automatically when the engine
speed threshold is reached.

Activating the + program:

1. Select the Drift or Special driving mode in the Driving Mode Selection ⇒ Selecting the driving mode. The Sport Plus program is active immediately.

2. Pull the right- or left-hand shift paddle fig. 89.

Deactivating the + program:

1. Pull the right-hand shift paddle toward the steering wheel and hold it there fig. 89.

Or: Tap the back of the selector lever.

WARNING

Incorrectly downshifting into gears that are too low can result in loss of vehicle control as well as accidents and serious or fatal injuries.

Only change gear when the driving situation permits it.

NOTICE

At high vehicle or engine speeds, the clutch and gearbox can sustain significant damage if the selected gear is too low.

Always select an appropriate gear for the relevant driving situation.

Early upshifting helps to save fuel and reduces operating noise.

Driving with an automatic transmission


The transmission shifts up and down
automatically when in the forward
driving gears.

Driving on an incline

The steeper the incline, the lower the gear that you should select. Lower gears increase the engine braking effect. Never let the vehicle roll down mountains or hills
in the neutral setting.

1. Reduce your speed.

2. Switch the transmission to tiptronic mode.

3. Downshift using the shift paddles on the steering wheel.

Stopping and starting to drive uphill

The steeper the hill, the lower the gear that you should select.

Coasting with a DSG® automated transmission

When coasting, the vehicle's momentum is used to save fuel with predictive driving. The engine does not slow down the vehicle, so it can roll for a longer period.
This function is only available in gear and within a speed range of approx. 7 to 160 km/h (approx. 4 to 99 mph) when the accelerator pedal is not depressed.

R models only: The coasting feature is only available in the Comfort driving mode.

If the brake pedal is depressed when rolling below a speed of approx. 40 km/h (approx. 25 mph), the engine will remain switched off until the vehicle is stationary.

If the brake pedal is depressed when rolling above a speed of approx. 40 km/h (approx. 25 mph), the coasting feature will be deactivated and the engine will start.

When rolling without braking, the engine starts again automatically when the vehicle reaches “creeping pace”.

The engine may restart automatically to ensure the engine restarts safely and there is a secure supply of electricity to the vehicle electrical system.

Triggering the coasting feature


1. Vehicles with eco-coasting function: In the Driving Mode Selection, select the Eco or Comfort driving mode.

2. Take your foot off the accelerator. The engine is disengaged and in neutral. The vehicle is rolling without any engine braking effect.

3. Vehicles with eco-coasting function: Take your foot off the accelerator. The engine may be disengaged and switched off automatically.

138
Interrupting coasting
1. Press the brake pedal.

Or: Briefly press the accelerator pedal.

Or: Pull the shift paddle toward the steering wheel.

Or: change driving modes from Eco or Comfort.

Kick-down

The kick-down function makes maximum acceleration possible in the and gears or in tiptronic mode.

When you press the accelerator pedal all the way down, the automatic transmission downshifts into a lower gear, depending on the vehicle speed and engine RPM.
This utilizes the full acceleration power of the vehicle ⇒ .

With the kick-down function, the automatic upshift to the next gear only occurs if the maximum predefined engine RPM is reached.

When the Eco driving mode is selected and the accelerator pedal has been depressed beyond the pressure point, engine performance is controlled to provide the
vehicle with maximum acceleration.

Launch Control Program

The Launch Control Program provide maximum acceleration from a standstill.

1. To open the Launch Control Program, tap TCS off in the Infotainment system.

Or: tap ESC off.

Or: tap ESC Sport to activate it.

2. Use your left foot to press down on the brake pedal and hold it.

3. Select gear .

Or: activate tiptronic mode.

Or: depending on the vehicle equipment: select Race driving mode.

4. Use your right foot to operate the accelerator pedal until an engine speed of approx. 2000 rpm to 4000 rpm is automatically maintained.

Depending on the model, a message is shown in the instrument cluster display to indicate activation of the Launch Control Program.

5. To start the vehicle with maximum acceleration, take your left foot off the brake ⇒ .

6. Switch the traction control system and ESC back on or switch ESC Sport off after acceleration.
The Launch Control Program is only available if the transmission has “warmed up” and the steering wheel is pointing “straight ahead”.

WARNING

Fast acceleration or switching off the ASR or ESC or activating ESC Sport can cause traction loss and sliding. This could cause loss of vehicle control,
accidents, and serious or fatal injuries, especially on slippery roads, such as on wet, icy or dirty roads.

Always adapt your driving style to the flow of traffic.

Only use the kick-down function, Launch Control Program or accelerate quickly when the visibility, weather, road, and traffic conditions allow it, and when
other road users will not be endangered by the vehicle's acceleration and driving style.

Switch ASR or ESC back on or switch ESC Sport back off after acceleration.

WARNING

Prolonged braking causes the brakes to overheat. This can considerably reduce braking performance, considerably increase braking distance and possibly lead
to a total brake system malfunction. Accidents and serious or fatal injuries could result.

Never let the brakes “rub” too often and too long or press the brake pedal too often and too long.

NOTICE

If the vehicle rolls with the engine switched off, the transmission is not lubricated. This can cause the automatic transmission to overheat and can damage it.

If you stop on inclines when a gear is engaged, do not press the accelerator pedal to prevent the vehicle from rolling away.

Never let the vehicle roll in gear, especially when the engine is stopped.

NOTICE

Vehicles with the Launch Control Program: All vehicle components are put under intense strain when accelerating with the Launch Control Program. This can

139
cause increased wear.

Only use this function if the vehicle is at operating temperature.

NOTICE

If the brake pads “rub” when the brake pedal is pressed lightly, wear is increased.

Never let the brakes “rub” by pressing the pedal lightly when braking is not really necessary.

Troubleshooting
The engine is not starting

The green indicator light turns on.

The brake pedal was not pressed, for example when trying to shift to another gear using the selector lever.

1. Press the brake pedal to select a gear.

Transmission overheating

The yellow indicator light turns on.

An audible warning may also sound. Where applicable, a message will appear in the instrument cluster display.

The DSG ® automated transmission can become too hot, for example due to frequently starting up on slopes.

1. At the next opportunity, stop and let the transmission cool down with the parking lock engaged and the engine running ⇒ .

2. If the indicator light does not turn off, do not continue driving.

3. Contact an authorized Volkswagen dealer or authorized Volkswagen Service Facility for assistance. Otherwise, the transmission could become severely
damaged.

Transmission overheating

The red warning light turns on.

An audible warning may also sound. Where applicable, a message will appear in the instrument cluster display.

The DSG ® automated transmission can become too hot, for example due to frequently starting up on slopes.

Do not continue driving!

1. Let the transmission cool down with the parking lock engaged and the engine running ⇒ .

2. If the warning light stays on, stop driving.

3. Contact an authorized Volkswagen dealer or authorized Volkswagen Service Facility for assistance. Otherwise, the transmission could become severely
damaged.

Selector lever lock emergency release

If there is a loss of power, for example due to the 12 V vehicle battery being drained, and the vehicle should be towed, then the selector lever lock must be released
manually. Contact an authorized Volkswagen dealer or authorized Volkswagen Service Facility for assistance.

Emergency program

If all of the selector lever position displays have a gray background on the instrument cluster display, this means there is a system malfunction. The DSG ®

automated transmission runs in emergency mode. The vehicle can still be driven in emergency mode, but only at a reduced speed and not in all gears.

With the DSG ® automated transmission, it may no longer be possible to drive in reverse gear in some cases.

In all cases, have the DSG ® automated transmission checked immediately by suitably qualified professionals. Volkswagen recommends contacting an authorized
Volkswagen dealer or authorized Volkswagen Service Facility.

Vehicle is not moving even when a drive gear is engaged

If the vehicle does not move in the desired direction, the system may not have engaged the drive position correctly.

1. Press the brake pedal and select the drive position again.

2. If the vehicle still does not move in the desired direction, there is a system malfunction. See an authorized Volkswagen dealer or authorized Volkswagen Service
Facility for assistance to have the system checked.

WARNING

If the parking lock is released and the electronic parking brake is switched off, the vehicle may start to move unexpectedly on inclines or hills. This can cause
accidents and serious injuries.

140
Never release the parking lock once the electronic parking brake is switched off.

NOTICE

If the vehicle rolls with the engine off and the selector lever in position for a long period of time or at high speed, the DSG® automated transmission will be
damaged.

Do not allow the vehicle to roll for a long period of time or at high speed with the engine off and in the gear, e.g. in the case of towing.

NOTICE

If the transmission gets too hot or overheats, this may lead to increased wear or damage to the component.

Avoid starting the vehicle and driving slowly, like at walking speed, while the transmission is overheated.

Drive faster than approx. 20 km/h (approx. 12 mph) or immediately stop the vehicle safely the first time the vehicle indicates that the transmission is
overheating.

Stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible and switch off the engine if the message and audible warning are repeating approximately every 10 seconds.

Let the transmission cool down.

Only start driving again when the audible warning is no longer sounding.

Messages about driving


General driver information
Anticipatory driving

An inconsistent driving style increases consumption. When the driver actively pays attention to traffic, this can prevent frequent acceleration and braking
maneuvers. Maintaining enough distance to the vehicle driving ahead helps you to drive with better anticipation.

Avoiding full acceleration

Excessively high speeds increase the rolling resistance and air resistance and with that, the power needed to move the vehicle. Never drive at the maximum vehicle
speed.

Checking tire pressures

Low tire pressures cause wear as well as increased rolling resistance of tires, and this increases consumption. Use tires with optimal rolling resistance.

Adapt the tire pressures to the load:

Follow the specifications on the tire pressure label ⇒ Checking the tire pressure .

Tire Pressure Monitoring System ⇒ How the Tire Pressure Monitoring System Works .

Using synthetic engine oil

Full synthetic engine oils with a low viscosity reduce the frictional resistance in the engine and distribute significantly better and faster when cold-starting the engine.

WARNING

If you drive at high speed and without sufficient safety distance, accidents and serious or fatal injuries can result.

Always adapt your speed and remain a safe distance to vehicles driving ahead according to the visual, weather, road, and traffic conditions.

Breaking in the engine


A new engine needs to be broken in
during the first 1500 km (approx.
1000 miles). All moving parts should be
able to work together. During the first
few hours of operation, the engine has
a higher internal friction than it will
later.

Up to 1000 km (approx. 600 miles)


Do not accelerate fully.

Do not use more than two thirds of the maximum engine RPM.

Between 1000 and 1500 km (approx. 600 to 1000 miles)


1. Increase the speed and engine RPM gradually.

141
The driving style during the first 1500 km (approx. 1000 miles) also affects the engine's quality. Even after that – especially when the engine is cold – the engine
should be driven at moderate engine speeds to reduce engine wear and increase the possible mileage.
New tires and brake pads must be carefully broken in.

NOTICE

Driving at too low an RPM can cause increased wear and damage to the engine.

Do not drive at an insufficient engine speed.

Downshift if the engine stops running “smoothly”.

If the new engine is broken in gently, its service life is increased while, at the same time, reducing engine oil consumption.

Gear recommendation

Fig. 90 Gear recommendation on the instrument cluster display.

Currently selected gear.

Recommended gear for you to select.

Depending on the vehicle equipment, a recommendation to select a fuel-saving gear can be displayed as a number in the instrument cluster while you are driving
fig. 90.

Vehicles with an automatic transmission: To do this, the transmission must be in the tiptronic program.

If the optimal gear is currently selected, no gear recommendation is made. The gear that is currently selected is displayed.

CAUTION

The gear recommendation is simply an aid and cannot replace the driver's attention and responsibility. Selecting an unsuitable gear for the driving situation may
lead to accidents and injuries.

Always select the correct gear for the relevant driving situation, such as when overtaking or driving uphill.

An optimally selected gear helps to save fuel.

For vehicles with manual transmission, the gear recommendation display is turned off when you press the clutch pedal. For vehicles with automatic
transmission, the gear recommendation display is turned off when you leave the tiptronic position.

Eco tips
The correct driving style can help to
reduce consumption, pollution, and
wear on the engine, brakes, and tires.
The following tips will help you
conserve the environment and your
money.

142
Fig. 91 Fuel consumption in l/100 km (mpg) for two different environmental temperatures.

Energy recuperation in vehicles with mHEV system

Whenever you brake or decelerate, energy can be recovered and stored.

Whenever you have to brake and rolling is not possible, the switch from the accelerator pedal to the brake pedal should be quick and even. This ensures the best
possible use of energy recuperation. No fuel is consumed.

Using the freewheel function

Vehicles with an automatic transmission: If neither the accelerator nor the brake pedal are pressed in gear , the vehicle will roll (“coasting feature”) using almost no
energy.

With the Eco coasting function, the engine will not only disengage but will also stop. No energy is recuperated, but the vehicle can roll a very long distance without
fuel consumption with a predictive driving style.

Reducing to idle speed

Start driving immediately at low speeds. When stationary for a long time, do not shift to idle, but rather stop the engine, for example when in a traffic jam or at a
railroad crossing. On vehicles with an activated start-stop system, the engine can turn off automatically when the vehicle is stopped and when stationary.

Refuel in moderation

A full fuel tank increases the vehicle weight. A fuel tank that is half to three-quarters full is best suited for city driving.

Avoid short trips

A cold engine has a very high consumption rate. The optimal operating temperature is only reached after several kilometers (miles). When outside temperatures are
very low, for example in winter, the consumption is much higher than average fig. 91. Plan trips economically and combine short trips.

Have maintenance performed regularly

Regular maintenance is required for fuel-efficient driving and increases the service life of the vehicle.

Removing unnecessary weight

Clearing out the luggage compartment, for example by removing empty crates or unneeded child restraints, can reduce consumption.

To keep the vehicle air resistance as low as possible, remove accessories such as ski, bicycle, and roof racks after use.

Saving energy

The alternator, which is powered by the engine, generates power for the electrical equipment, such as the climate control system, window heating, or ventilation.
Saving energy is simple, for example:

When temperatures are high, air out the vehicle before driving and drive short distances with the windows open. Then turn on the climate control system.

Turn off electrical equipment when it is no longer needed.

NOTICE

If the vehicle rolls down mountains or hills in neutral , the transmission is not lubricated. This can cause the automatic transmission to overheat and can
damage it.

Never leave the vehicle in neutral gear, especially when the engine is stopped.
143
An authorized Volkswagen dealer or authorized Volkswagen Service Facility can provide you with more information about correct maintenance and replacement
parts that are particularly energy efficient, such as new tires.

Driving a loaded vehicle


Heed the following for good vehicle handling when the vehicle is loaded:

Stow all cargo securely ⇒ Transporting.

Accelerate with extra care and caution.

Avoid sudden braking and driving maneuvers.

Brake earlier than usual.

If necessary, read and heed the information about roof racks ⇒ Roof rack.

WARNING

Sliding loads can considerably impair the driving stability and safety of your vehicle, and increase the braking distance when you brake hard or perform
emergency braking. This can cause accidents and serious or fatal injuries.

Correctly secure the load to prevent it from sliding.

Use suitable tie-downs or securing straps on heavy objects.

Engage the rear seat backrests and, if necessary, the adjustable rear seats securely.

Driving with an open trunk lid


Driving with an open trunk lid can be especially dangerous. Secure all objects and the open trunk lid correctly and take sufficient precautions to reduce the amount
of poisonous exhaust that enters the vehicle.

WARNING

If driving with the trunk lid unlocked or open, loose objects can fall out of the vehicle and injure other road users. This can cause accidents and serious or fatal
injuries.

Always drive with the trunk lid closed.

Store all objects in the luggage compartment securely.

Always drive carefully and anticipate upcoming traffic situations.

Avoid abrupt or sudden driving and braking maneuvers because the open trunk lid can move in an uncontrolled manner.

If there is a roof rack with cargo on the trunk lid, always remove it before driving with an open trunk lid.

WARNING

Objects protruding from the luggage compartment change the vehicle length and may possibly endanger other road users. This can cause accidents and
serious or fatal injuries.

Follow the legal regulations.

Mark objects sticking out of the luggage compartment so they will be visible to others on the road.

Never use the trunk lid to secure or wedge objects.

WARNING

Among other substances, engine exhaust gases contain carbon monoxide, an odorless and colorless poisonous gas. If driving with the trunk lid open,
poisonous exhaust may enter the vehicle interior, leading to a loss of consciousness, carbon monoxide poisoning, accidents and serious or fatal injuries.

To prevent poisonous exhaust from entering the vehicle, always drive with the trunk lid closed.

Close all windows.

Close the power sunroof.

Switch off recirculation mode.

Open all the air vents in the instrument panel.

Switch the blower to the highest blower level.

144
Always drive with the trunk lid closed if the load can be transported with the trunk lid closed.

NOTICE

Opening the trunk lid changes the height and possibly the length of the vehicle. This can cause damage to the vehicle if driving carelessly.

Be aware of the changed outer dimensions, such as when driving through underpasses.

Driving through water on roads


Note the following to reduce the risk of vehicle damage when driving through water, for example on flooded roads:

The water must not be any higher than the bottom of the vehicle body ⇒ .

Do not driver faster than walking speeds.

Never stop the vehicle, drive in reverse, or stop the engine in water.

Oncoming vehicles create waves that can raise the water level for your vehicle enough that it is not safe to drive through.

Always manually deactivate the start-stop system when driving through water ⇒ Start/Stop system.

WARNING

When driving through water, mud, slush, etc., the braking effect may be delayed due to damp or icy brake rotors and brake pads in the winter, and this can
extend the braking distance. This could cause a loss of vehicle control, accidents and serious or fatal injuries.

Perform careful braking maneuvers to dry and remove ice from the brakes.

Do not endanger road users or disregard legal regulations during braking maneuvers.

Avoid abrupt and sudden braking maneuvers directly after driving through water.

NOTICE

Driving through water can greatly damage or corrode parts of the vehicle, e.g. electronics.

Never drive through salty water.

Using fresh water, immediately rinse any parts of the vehicle that may have come into contact with salty water.

Protect electronic components against contact with water.

Operating the vehicle in different countries and continents


Approval regulations

The vehicle was manufactured by the factory for a specific country and meets those requirements and approval regulations that were valid at the time of vehicle
manufacture ⇒ .
If the vehicle will be used temporarily or for a brief period in another country, then read and observe the following information.

Safety standards and regulations

Some countries have special safety standards and regulations that differ from the vehicle configuration. Volkswagen recommends obtaining information about legal
regulations from an authorized Volkswagen dealer or authorized Volkswagen Service Facility before driving in other countries.

Selling in other countries

If the vehicle is sold in another country or will be used for an extended period in another country, then the applicable legal regulations in that country must be
observed.

Certain equipment may need to be installed or removed and functions may need to be deactivated. The scope and types of service may also be affected. This
particularly applies if the vehicle is being operated for an extended period in a different climate region.

Functions of the Infotainment system

Due to the many different frequency bands around the world, the Infotainment system installed at the factory may not function in other countries.

Volkswagen is not responsible for damage to the vehicle caused by substandard fuel, insufficient service, or not using Volkswagen Genuine parts.

Volkswagen is not responsible if the vehicle does not meet all of the applicable legal requirements in other countries and continents.

WARNING

145
At high altitudes, the air density is lower. Due to the reduced air density, engine power may be reduced and when in operation for extended periods at high
altitudes, vehicle components may be damaged. Lower engine power can result in accidents, e.g. when overtaking, and may result in serious or fatal injuries.

Before driving abroad, obtain information from a suitably qualified professional, particularly for altitudes above 3000 m (around 9843 ft) above sea level.
Volkswagen recommends contacting an authorized Volkswagen dealer or authorized Volkswagen Service Facility.

Driving on slopes
Hill start assist
Hill start assist helps when starting to
drive uphill by actively holding the
vehicle in place.

Functional requirements
The following requirements must be met at the same time:

The vehicle must be stationary and held with the brake pedal until you start driving.

The engine must be running “evenly”.

A gear or a position is engaged for driving uphill.

To start driving, take your foot off the brake pedal and press the accelerator pedal immediately. The brakes will release gradually as you start driving.
The holding function of the Hill Start Assist remains active only for a short time. Drive off within approx. two seconds.

When is it active?
Hill Start Assist is immediately deactivated if one of the conditions specified below in is no longer met:

The driver’s door is opened.

If the engine is running “unevenly” or in the event of an engine fault.

The engine is switched off or it stalls.

The selector lever is in the neutral position .

CAUTION

If you do not pull away immediately after releasing the brake pedal, the vehicle may roll backward under certain circumstances. This can cause injuries or
damage to objects.

If this is the case, press the brake pedal or set the electronic parking brake immediately.

Press the brake pedal for a few seconds before you start to drive if you are driving on an incline in heavy traffic and you would like to prevent the vehicle
from rolling backwards when starting to drive.

Downhill speed control


Downhill speed control helps the driver
when traveling on slopes.

System function

The DSG ® automated transmission selects the optimum gear itself, depending on the present gradient and current speed. The selector lever must be in the
selector lever position. Downhill speed control is not active in Tiptronic mode.

As the downhill speed control can only downshift as far as third gear, you may need to switch to Tiptronic mode on very steep downhill stretches. In Tiptronic mode,
manually shift into second or first gear to use the engine's braking efficiency and reduce the load on the brakes.

While downhill speed control is active, the start-stop system is automatically deactivated.

Automatically activating downhill speed control


If the gradient is greater than approximately 6%.

And: if the selector lever is in the selector lever position.

In addition, if Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is switched off: if the speed is slower than approx. 80 km/h (approx. 50 mph).

Or: The brake is pressed.

Additionally if Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is active: If the saved speed is exceeded.

Downhill speed control deactivates automatically


When the gradient decreases.

146
If the transmission upshifts because the engine speed is greater than approximately 4500 rpm.

Additionally if Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is active: if the saved speed can be maintained.

WARNING

The downhill speed control is not a replacement for the driver's attention and works only within the system limitations. The downhill speed control cannot detect
all driving situations and may not react, or may react with a delay, or may react in a way that is not desired. If you are careless, there is a risk of accidents due to
unintentional vehicle movement. This can cause serious or fatal injuries.

Always stay attentive and do not rely solely on the system. The driver is always responsible for control of the vehicle.

Be aware that the downhill speed control cannot hold the vehicle on the incline or brake sufficiently going downhill in every situation, for example if the
ground is slippery or icy.

Always be ready to brake, in particular if the ground is slippery or icy.

Manually brake the vehicle if the vehicle moves faster despite downhill speed control.

Always adapt your speed and driving style to the visibility, weather, road and traffic conditions.

Driving Mode Selection


Introduction
Via the driving modes, the driver can
adapt various properties of vehicle
systems to the current driving situation,
the desired driving comfort, and for an
economic driving style. The suspension,
steering, drive, and the air conditioner
are some of the vehicle systems that can
be adjusted.

Different driving modes are available depending on the vehicle equipment. The influence of vehicle systems on the individual driving modes depends on the vehicle
equipment.

Vehicles with adaptive chassis control (DCC)

During the drive, the adaptive chassis control (DCC ) adapts the suspension damping to the current ground and driving situation. The adaptive chassis control also
incorporates the suspension tuning of the selected driving mode.

Vehicles with R-Performance rear axle differential with dynamic torque splitter

The R-Performance rear axle differential with dynamic torque splitter is available on R models, depending on the vehicle equipment. To achieve more traction when
cornering, the system can distribute more torque to the wheel on the outside of the corner. The system also incorporates the suspension tuning of the selected
driving mode.

Selecting the driving mode


The driving mode can be selected when the ignition is switched on and the vehicle is stationary or while driving.

WARNING

Setting the driving mode while driving can distract from traffic. This can cause accidents and serious or fatal injuries.

Always drive attentively and responsibly.

If you select a driving mode while driving, the vehicle systems, except for Drive, will be switched over to the new driving mode immediately.

1. When the traffic situation allows it, briefly take your foot off the accelerator pedal to enable the newly selected driving mode to be applied to the Drive vehicle
system as well.

Selecting the driving mode via the control in the upper center console
1. Tap .

2. To select driving modes, tap again or tap the desired driving mode in the Infotainment system.

Selecting a driving mode via the button on the multi-function steering wheel

on the multi-function steering wheel is available on R models, depending on the vehicle equipment.

1. Press gently.

2. To select driving modes, press again gently.

Or: To select the Race driving mode, press firmly.

The Drift and Special driving modes can only be selected in the Infotainment system.

147
Displaying information about the driving mode
1. To display additional information about the selected driving mode, tap in the Infotainment system.

Selecting the Custom driving mode


1. Tap until the Custom driving mode has been selected.

2. Tap ... to open the Individual menu.

Driving mode properties


The Eco driving mode switches the vehicle to fuel-efficient operation and supports the driver with an energy-saving driving style. The Comfort driving
mode is the basic setting for the vehicle systems, provides a comfort-oriented vehicle setup and is suited, for instance, for everyday use. The Sport driving
mode gives the driver a sporty feel. If the Sport driving mode is selected, vehicles with an automatic transmission switch to S. In R models with an automatic
transmission, it switches to D. The Race driving mode is only available on R models, depending on the vehicle equipment. It gives you a very sporty feel. If
you select Race driving mode, the chassis suspension will be set to hard and, for vehicles with an automatic transmission, gear S will be selected. The
Special driving mode is only available on special sports models of the vehicle, depending on the vehicle equipment. If you select Special driving mode, the vehicle
systems will be tuned to the road characteristics of the north loop of the Nürburgring. The Drift driving mode only available on R models, depending on the
vehicle equipment. Vehicles with R-Performance rear axle differential with dynamic torque splitter distribute high torque to the rear axle to enable vehicle
handling with oversteering. When the Drift driving mode is in use, the Electronic Stability Control (ESC) is in ESC Sport mode. This makes wheelspin easier and the
traction control system (ASR) is switched off. Oversteering causes the rear of the vehicle to slide out. If the vehicle slides out too far, the electronic stabilization
program will automatically cut back in. The Drift driving mode is intended only for race tracks or closed-off courses and should only be used by drivers who have
been trained in the art of drifting and who are skilled and experienced in the art ⇒ . Always observe the country-specific laws and regulations.
For vehicles with a manual transmission: If you select the Drift driving mode, do not press down or slip the clutch while you are drifting.

With the Custom driving mode, you can adapt individual vehicle systems according to your preferences.

WARNING

Oversteer can cause accidents, serious injury or even death.

Always adapt your speed and driving style to the visibility, weather, road and traffic conditions.

Use the Drift driving mode only if you have been trained in the art of drifting and are skilled and experienced in the art.

Use the Drift driving mode on race tracks or closed-off courses only.

Only use Drift driving mode if the closed road is dry and free of ice and snow.

NOTICE

Drifting can lead to increased or additional wear of vehicle components. Taking your vehicle beyond its limits and improper use of the Drift driving mode may
affect the validity of your guarantee.

Only use Drift driving mode if you are familiar with this function.

Standard behavior of the driving mode and the vehicle systems


The Comfort driving mode shows the basic settings of the vehicle systems when the ignition is switched on.

In R models, the Sport driving mode represents the basic settings for the vehicle systems when the ignition is switched on.

Behavior of the driving mode when switching the ignition off and on

If you switch the ignition off and then on again, the previously selected driving mode remains selected.

Whenever you switch the ignition in R models off and on again, the Sport driving mode is selected.

Behavior of the Drive vehicle system when the ignition is switched off and on
The Drive vehicle system settings are reset to the Comfort driving mode settings when you switch the ignition off and on again.

In R models, the settings for the Drive vehicle system are reset to the Sport driving mode settings when you switch the ignition off and on again.

The other vehicle systems will retain their settings.

You can change the Drive vehicle system back to the preferred driving mode.

1. Select your desired driving mode again.

Troubleshooting
Adaptive chassis control malfunction

The yellow indicator light turns on.

The message Fault: Damper control may appear in the instrument cluster display.

1. Contact an authorized Volkswagen dealer or authorized Volkswagen Service Facility to have the system inspected. Volkswagen recommends contacting an
authorized Volkswagen dealer or authorized Volkswagen Service Facility.

148
Malfunction in the all-wheel drive

The yellow indicator light turns on.

The rear axle differential may be overheated.

The message All-wheel drive is not working. It is not possible to continue driving. Please contact workshop. may appear in the instrument cluster display.

1. Park the vehicle for about 10 minutes and then continue driving with adapted speed and driving style.

2. If the malfunction persists, contact a suitably qualified professional. Volkswagen recommends contacting an authorized Volkswagen dealer or authorized
Volkswagen Service Facility.

The driving mode or the vehicle systems do not behave as expected


1. Pay attention to the standard behavior of the driving mode and the vehicle systems ⇒ Standard behavior of the driving mode and the vehicle systems .

149
Driver assistance systems
Sensor system information
Introduction
Depending on the vehicle equipment,
the vehicle has driver assistance
systems that increase driving
convenience. These driver assistance
systems use some sensors and cameras
(hereafter referred to as the “sensor
system”) that are only partially visible
to you.

The sensors and cameras visually detect the vehicle's surroundings ultrasonically or by using radar waves.

Installed sensor systems


Depending on the vehicle equipment, the following sensor systems may be installed:

Radar sensor in the front of the vehicle.

Radar sensors in the rear of the vehicle.

Camera behind the windshield.

Ultrasonic sensors in the front of the vehicle.

Ultrasonic sensors in the rear of the vehicle.


You can find information on the relevant installation location in the vehicle overviews ⇒ Vehicle overviews.

WARNING

The driver assistance systems are not a replacement for the driver's attention and work only within their system limitations. The driver assistance systems
cannot detect all driving situations and may not provide warnings or react, or may provide warnings or react with a delay, or may provide warnings or react in a
way that is not desired. If you are careless, there is a risk of accidents, serious injuries and death.

Always stay attentive and do not rely solely on the system. The driver is always responsible for control of the vehicle.

Be aware of the limits of the sensor system and the system limitations of the individual systems.

Always adapt your speed and distance to vehicles driving ahead based on the visual, weather, road, and traffic conditions.

Be prepared to override or interrupt automatic interventions at all times.

Pay attention to indicators in the instrument cluster display and respond to the displays accordingly when the traffic situation allows.

Do not use driver assistance systems if you suspect a problem or damage.

Limits of the sensor system


Please read the introductory information and heed the Warnings and Notice ⇒ Introduction.

Limits of the radar sensor


Driver assistance systems that use radar sensors may not respond, may offer a delayed response or may respond in an unexpected way in the following situations:

When driving in poor weather conditions, such as heavy rain, snow or heavy spray.

When driving through construction zones, tunnels or toll stations.

When driving on winding roads, for example, mountain roads

In front of bumps or dips in the road

When driving off-road

When driving in parking ramps

When driving on roads with embedded metal objects, such as railroad tracks

When driving on gravel roads

In complex driving situations, such as traffic islands.

Following a violent impact affecting components within the range of the radar sensors, e.g. following a rear-end collision.

If the radar sensors are obscured, dirty, misaligned or damaged.

Limits of the camera behind the windshield


Driver assistance systems that use the camera behind the windshield may not respond, may offer a delayed response or may respond in an unexpected way in the
following situations:

150
In front of bumps or dips in the road

When driving in construction zones

When driving off-road

When driving in poor weather conditions, such as heavy rain, snow, fog or heavy spray and poor road conditions.

In low-lying sun, darkness or if there is glare from oncoming vehicles.

If the camera is not available due to long exposure to direct sunlight or high ambient temperatures.

If the camera field of view is covered, dirty or damaged.

If the camera is misaligned.

Delayed reaction

If the sensor system is exposed to environmental conditions that limit its function, the driver assistance systems may only be able to detect this with a delay.
Therefore, the display that indicates that functions are impaired may be delayed when you first start driving or while driving.

Limits in certain driving situations

Fig. 92 Driving around curves.

The sensor system always measures straight ahead. Therefore, on tight curves, vehicles may be detected by mistake or vehicles driving ahead may not be
detected.

Fig. 93 Narrow vehicle.

Vehicles that are driving close to your vehicle but outside the sensor range, such as motorcycles, cannot be detected.

Fig. 94 Changing lanes.

Vehicles that change to your lane close in front of your vehicle cannot be detected. This also applies to vehicles with attachments exceeding the vehicle dimensions.

Specific system limitations


In addition to the limits of the sensor system, every driver assistance system has additional system limitations linked to their function. Please also note these:

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) ⇒ System Limitations of ACC.

151
Autonomous Emergency Braking (Front Assist) ⇒ System Limitations of Front Assist .

Lane Assist ⇒ Lane Assist system limitations .

Comfort drive Travel Assist ⇒ Introduction.

Emergency Assist ⇒ Introduction.

Lane Change System (Side Assist) ⇒ Side Assist system limitations .

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)


Introduction
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
maintains your selected speed. When
the vehicle approaches a vehicle driving
ahead, the ACC adjusts the speed
automatically and maintains your set
distance to the vehicle driving ahead.

Does this vehicle have ACC?

The vehicle has ACC if you can adjust ACC settings in the Assistance systems menu in the Infotainment system.

Speed range

You can set a speed between approx. 20 km/h (approx. 15 mph) and approx. 210 km/h (approx. 130 mph). The maximum speed that you can set may be lower,
depending on the vehicle equipment and country.

Driving with ACC

You can override the ACC system at any time. The regulation function is canceled when you apply the brakes. When you accelerate, the regulation function is
paused while accelerating and then resumed with the speed set.

Driver intervention request


If automatic deceleration by the ACC is not sufficient or the system limits are reached, the ACC will prompt you – with a message in the instrument cluster –
to also apply the brakes. The red warning light will also turn on and a warning tone will sound. Take over steering and be ready to brake.

WARNING

ACC is not a replacement for the driver's attention and works only within the system limitations. ACC cannot detect all driving situations and may not react, or
may react with a delay, or may react in a way that is not desired. If you are careless, there is a risk of accidents, serious injuries and death.

Always stay attentive and do not rely solely on the system. The driver is always responsible for control of the vehicle.

Observe the system limitations ⇒ System Limitations of ACC.

Always adapt your speed and distance to vehicles driving ahead based on the visual, weather, road, and traffic conditions.

Take over steering immediately if a driver intervention prompt appears in the instrument cluster display or the deceleration by ACC is not sufficient.

Apply the brakes if the vehicle continues to roll unintentionally, e.g. after a driver intervention prompt.

Special driving situations


Please read the introductory information and heed the Warnings and Notice ⇒ Introduction.
The functions described below depend on the vehicle equipment and are not available in all countries.

Stop-and-go traffic

ACC can brake the vehicle and bring it to a standstill. ACC remains active, and the instrument cluster display shows ACC is ready for a few seconds. In this time,
the vehicle will automatically move again once the vehicle driving ahead starts.

Extend drive-readiness or reactivate:

1. Press the button.

Driving off when drive-readiness has ended and the vehicle driving ahead has already started moving:

1. Press the button.

Or: Briefly press the accelerator pedal.

The ACC does not stay active in the following scenarios:

The stationary phase lasts several minutes.

A vehicle door is opened.

The ignition is switched off.

WARNING
152
If ACC is ready appears in the instrument cluster display and the vehicle driving ahead starts to move, your vehicle will start driving automatically. The vehicle
may not be able to detect obstacles in the vehicle's path when this happens. This may cause accidents and serious injuries.

Check the vehicle's path every time before you start driving and brake the vehicle if necessary.

System Limitations of ACC


Please read the introductory information and heed the Warnings and Notice ⇒ Introduction.

Limits of the sensor system

ACC detects driving situations using the radar and ultrasonic sensors in the front of the vehicle and the camera behind the windshield. The radar sensor has a range
of up to approx. 160 m (approx. 520 ft).

WARNING

If you use the ACC in situations outside system limitations, accidents and serious injuries may result and legal regulations may be violated.

Be aware of the limitations of the sensor system ⇒ Limits of the sensor system and cancel the regulation in the situations described.

Unrecognizable objects
ACC only detects vehicles that are moving in the same direction or are stationary. The following will not be detected:

Pedestrians

Animals

Vehicles crossing the street or oncoming vehicles

Other stationary obstacles

Stationary vehicles

Fig. 95 Stationary vehicle.

ACC responds in a limited manner to stationary vehicles up to approx. 60 km/h (approx. 37 mph), provided that a stationary vehicle is detected as such and your
own vehicle can be comfortably braked behind the stationary vehicle within the system limits of ACC. ACC does not perform emergency braking fig. 95.

The reaction to stationary vehicles depends on the vehicle equipment and is not available in all countries.

Switching ACC on and off


Please read the introductory information and heed the Warnings and Notice ⇒ Introduction.

153
Fig. 96 Left side of the multi-function steering wheel (variant 1).

Fig. 97 Left side of the multi-function steering wheel (variant 2).

Switching on
1. Press the button.

ACC is not yet functioning.

Starting the regulation function


1. Press the button while driving forward.

ACC saves the current speed and maintains the set distance. If the current speed is outside the specified speed range, the ACC adjusts the minimum speed
when driving too slowly or the maximum speed when driving too quickly.

In addition, the anti-slip regulation (ASR) is activated and ESC Sport is deactivated.

The following indicator lights may turn on depending on the driving situation:

ACC is regulating – no vehicle ahead detected. ACC is regulating – vehicle ahead detected.
If the ACC is not functioning, the gray indicator lights come on.

Canceling the regulation function


1. Press the button briefly.

Or: Press the brake pedal.

If the respective indicator light for the driving situation lights up gray, the speed and distance are saved.

If the anti-slip regulation (ASR) is deactivated, then the Adaptive Cruise Control is automatically stopped.

154
Resuming the regulation function
1. Press the button.

ACC assumes the last set speed and the last set distance. The instrument cluster display shows the set speed, and indicator lights turn on corresponding to the
driving situation.

Switching off
1. Press and hold the button.

The set speed is deleted.

Adjusting the ACC settings


Please read the introductory information and heed the Warnings and Notice ⇒ Introduction.

Setting the distance

Fig. 98 In the instrument cluster display: set distance (general example, ACC is regulating).

You can set the distance at five levels from very short to very long:

1. Press the button.

2. Press the or button.

Steering wheel version 2: Alternatively, swipe vertically over the button area from to or .

Or: Press the button repeatedly until the preferred distance is set.

The instrument cluster display shows the selected level fig. 98 . Heed the country-specific regulations for minimum distance.

In the Assistance systems menu of the Infotainment system, you can choose whether you want the regulation to start at the distance that was set at the end of the
journey or start at a preselected distance.

If ACC is not regulating, the set distance and the vehicle will not be highlighted on the instrument cluster display.

Setting the speed

You can adjust the stored speed within the specified speed range using the buttons on the multi-function steering wheel as follows:

Steering wheel version 1:

+ 1 km/h (1 mph): Press the button.

- 1 km/h (1 mph): Press the button.

+ 10 km/h (5 mph): Press and hold the button. Pressing for the first time changes to the next-largest tens digit (km/h) or fives digit (mph).

- 10 km/h (5 mph): Press and hold the button. Pressing for the first time changes to the next-smallest tens digit (km/h) or fives digit (mph).

Steering wheel version 2:

+ 1 km/h (1 mph): Press the button gently.

- 1 km/h (1 mph): Press the button gently.

+ 10 km/h (5 mph): Press the button firmly or swipe it from the bottom to the top. Pressing for the first time changes to the next-largest tens digit (km/h) or
fives digit (mph).

155
- 10 km/h Press the
(5 mph): button firmly or swipe it from the top to the bottom. Pressing for the first time changes to the next-smallest tens digit (km/h) or fives digit
(mph).

WARNING

ACC cannot detect all driving situations correctly. If the vehicle is less than the minimum distance from the vehicle ahead and the difference in speed between
the vehicle ahead and your own vehicle is so great that the speed deceleration from the ACC is not sufficient, there is a risk of a rear end collision. This may
result in serious injury or even death.

Always be ready to apply the brakes yourself.

To override the speed and distance control, press the accelerator pedal. In this case, ACC will not brake automatically.

Heed the country-specific regulations regarding minimum distance.

Always set a longer distance when there is rain, snow, or poor visibility.

Adjusting the regulation function system settings


You can influence how the ACC reacts in a sporty driving style:

Vehicles with Driving Mode Selection:

Select the desired driving mode.

Vehicles without Driving Mode Selection:

Select the desired driving mode in the Assistance systems menu in the Infotainment system.

Deactivating distance control


1. Press the button.

2. Select Control system in the instrument cluster display.

Distance control is deactivated. The vehicle only maintains the set speed.

Troubleshooting
Please read the introductory information and heed the Warnings and Notice ⇒ Introduction.

ACC is not available

The yellow indicator light turns on.

The radar sensor is dirty. Clean the radar sensor ⇒ Vehicle care.

The visibility of the radar sensor is limited due to weather conditions, such as snow, or from soap residue or coatings. Clean the radar sensor ⇒ Vehicle care

Radar sensor visibility is limited by attachments, decorative frames on license plate holders, or stickers. Clear the area around the radar sensor ⇒ Sensors
and Cameras.

The radar sensor is misaligned or damaged, for example as a result of damage to the front of the vehicle. Check if there is noticeable damage ⇒ Sensors and
Cameras.

Malfunction or fault. Stop the engine and restart.

Painting work was carried out on or structural modifications were made to the front of the vehicle ⇒ Repairs and technical modifications.

The original Volkswagen emblem is not used. Volkswagen recommends the use of Volkswagen original parts or Volkswagen original accessories, which you
can acquire from an authorized Volkswagen dealer or authorized Volkswagen Service Facility.

If the problem persists, contact an authorized Volkswagen dealer or authorized Volkswagen Service Facility. Volkswagen recommends contacting an
authorized Volkswagen dealer or authorized Volkswagen Service Facility.

ACC is not functioning as expected


The radar sensor is dirty. Clean the radar sensor ⇒ Vehicle care.

The ultrasonic sensors are soiled, obscured or damaged. Clean the ultrasonic sensors ⇒ Vehicle care.

Clear the area around the ultrasonic sensors and check for damage ⇒ Sensors and Cameras .

The system limitations are not adhered to ⇒ System Limitations of ACC.

The brakes are overheating, and the regulation function has been automatically canceled. Let the brakes cool down and check the function again.

If the problem persists, contact an authorized Volkswagen dealer or authorized Volkswagen Service Facility. Volkswagen recommends contacting an
authorized Volkswagen dealer or authorized Volkswagen Service Facility.
Additional information may be displayed in the vehicle status, depending on the malfunction ⇒ Vehicle settings menu .

The Adaptive Cruise Control cannot start


Make sure the following requirements are met:

156
A gear is engaged for driving forward.

The brake lights on the vehicle are functioning.

ESC is not regulating.

The brake pedal is not being pressed.

Unusual noises during automatic braking

This is normal and not a cause for concern.

Controls are responding differently than expected


Moisture, dirt and grease may limit the functioning of the controls.

1. Always keep the control panels clean and dry.

Front Assist
Introduction
Front Assist can recognize impending
forward collisions and warn the driver.
In addition, the system can provide
support when braking and initiate an
automatic braking maneuver.

The Front Assist system can help to avoid accidents but cannot replace the driver's attention.

Front Assist works solely within the system limitations. Warning times vary depending on the Traffic Situation and the driving behavior.

Range of functions
Front Assist includes the following additional functions, depending on the vehicle equipment and the country:

Pedestrian Monitoring.

Cyclist Monitoring.

The functions named are automatically active if Front Assist is switched on.

Recognizable objects
Autonomous Emergency Braking (Front Assist) can recognize the following objects, depending on the vehicle equipment and the country:

Vehicles.

Bikes.

Pedestrians.

Driving with Front Assist

You can cancel automatic braking interventions by moving the steering wheel or pressing the accelerator pedal.

Automatic braking

Front Assist can brake the vehicle to a stop. The vehicle will not be held at a stop after that. Press the brake pedal.

The brake pedal feels more firm during an automatic braking maneuver.

WARNING

Front Assist is not a replacement for the driver's attention and works only within the system limitations. Front Assist cannot detect all driving situations and may
not react, may react with a delay, or may react in a way that is not desired. If you are careless, there is a risk of accidents, serious injuries and death.

Always stay attentive and do not rely solely on the system. The driver is always responsible for control of the vehicle.

Observe the system limitations ⇒ System Limitations of Front Assist .

Always adapt your speed and distance to vehicles driving ahead based on the visual, weather, road, and traffic conditions.

Consider interrupting automatic Autonomous Emergency Braking (Front Assist) interventions if necessary.

When Front Assist warns you, brake the vehicle immediately or maneuver around the obstacle, depending on the driving situation.

If you are unsure which functions are included with your vehicle depending on the vehicle equipment and country, consult suitably qualified professionals
before starting your journey. Volkswagen recommends contacting an authorized Volkswagen dealer or authorized Volkswagen Service Facility.

Warning levels and braking support


Please read the introductory information and heed the Warnings and Notice ⇒ Introduction.

Speed ranges

157
Autonomous Emergency Braking (Front Assist) provides maximum support within these speed ranges:

Response to vehicles: Approx. 5 km/h (approx. 3 mph) to approx. 250 km/h (approx. 155 mph).

Response to bikes: Approx. 5 km/h (approx. 3 mph) to approx. 250 km/h (approx. 155 mph).

Response to pedestrians: Approx. 5 km/h (approx. 3 mph) to approx. 85 km/h (approx. 53 mph).

The support system can involve an advance warning, an immediate warning, automatic braking or braking support. A distance warning may also be displayed.

Influencing factors
Whether and in which speed range Autonomous Emergency Braking (Front Assist) reacts to the named objects is dependent on the following factors:

Type of object.

Movement direction of the object.

Speed of the object.

Speed of the vehicle.

The work area can therefore be limited if the vehicle approaches an object very quickly and thus has little time to react.

Furthermore, not all warning levels are passed through in all situations. Depending on the speed, there may not be, for example, an advance warning or immediate
warning, but rather an automatic braking maneuver that occurs straight away, so as to best protect the detected object.

Distance warning
Front Assist detects if there is a safety hazard from following the vehicle ahead too closely.
The indicator light turns on. Increase the distance.

Advance warning
Front Assist detects a possible collision and prepares the vehicle for possible emergency braking.
A warning tone sounds and the warning light turns on. Apply the brakes or maneuver to avoid the collision.

Immediate warning

If you do not respond to the advance warning, the brakes may be applied briefly to indicate the increasing risk of a collision. Apply the brakes or maneuver to avoid
the collision.

Automatic braking

Autonomous Emergency Braking (Front Assist) can brake the vehicle automatically in several stages of increasing braking force. Reducing the vehicle speed may
help to reduce the damage resulting from a collision.

Braking support

If the system detects that you are not braking enough before an impending collision, Front Assist can increase the braking force and thus help to reduce the risk of a
collision. The braking support is only active as long as you are firmly pressing the brake pedal.

System Limitations of Front Assist


Please read the introductory information and heed the Warnings and Notice ⇒ Introduction.

Limits of the sensor system

Front Assist detects driving situations using a radar sensor in the front of the vehicle and the camera behind the windshield.
Note the limitations of the sensor system ⇒ Limits of the sensor system . Always remain attentive and intervene manually if necessary.

After a vehicle start


Front Assist is not available or its availability is limited immediately after starting the vehicle. During this time, the white indicator light in the instrument
cluster display comes on.

Unrecognizable objects
Autonomous Emergency Braking (Front Assist) may not react or may react with a delay to the following objects:

If there are oncoming vehicles or vehicles crossing the street

Oncoming pedestrians; generally no reaction to people without Pedestrian Monitoring.

Stationary or oncoming cyclists; also no reaction to cyclists crossing the road without Cyclist Monitoring.

Pedestrians and cyclists who are not detected as such, for example because they are fully or partially hidden.

Functional limitations
In addition to the situations described under the sensor system limitations, Front Assist may not react, may react with a delay, or may react in a way that is not
desired in the following example situations:

When driving in reverse

158
If ESC is regulating or is malfunctioning.

If multiple brake lights on the vehicle are malfunctioning.

If multiple brake lights are malfunctioning on a bicycle rack that is connected to the vehicle electrical system.

If the vehicle is accelerating very quickly or the accelerator pedal is pressed all the way down

In unclear traffic situations, for example if vehicles driving ahead are braking quickly or are turning

When entering or exiting a tunnel.

If Front Assist is malfunctioning

Switching off Front Assist


Depending on the system, Front Assist may not be suitable in the following situations and must be switched off if they occur ⇒ :

If the vehicle is not being driven on public roads, for example during off-road driving or on a racetrack.

If the vehicle is being towed or transported

If add-ons cover the radar sensor or camera.

If the camera or radar sensor is malfunctioning.

Following a violent impact affecting components within the range of the radar sensor, e.g. following a rear-end collision.

If the windshield is damaged in the camera field of view.

If there are multiple unwanted activations

WARNING

If you use Front Assist in these situations, accidents and serious injuries or even death could occur.

Switch off Front Assist in the situations described.

Using Front Assist


Please read the introductory information and heed the Warnings and Notice ⇒ Introduction.
When you switch on the ignition, Front Assist with all of its equipment- and country-dependent functions is automatically switched on.

However, Front Assist is not available or its availability is restricted while the white indicator light is turned on.
Volkswagen recommends always leaving Front Assist and all of its equipment- and country-dependent functions switched on. Exceptions ⇒ System Limitations of
Front Assist.

Switching on and off

You can switch Autonomous Emergency Braking on and off manually and view the switched on condition.

In the Infotainment system:

1. Open the Assistance systems menu.

2. Switch Autonomous Emergency Braking on or off in the corresponding submenu.

If you switch off Front Assist, all of its equipment- and country-dependent functions are also switched off. The yellow indicator light turns on in the
instrument cluster display.
If Front Assist was automatically deactivated, e.g. if towing is detected, the yellow indicator light also comes on.

Setting Up Equipment- and Country-dependent Functions


If Front Assist is switched on, you can set the following settings in the assistance systems menu of the Infotainment system depending on the equipment and
country:

Switch on and off distance warning.

Troubleshooting
Please read the introductory information and heed the Warnings and Notice ⇒ Introduction.

Autonomous Emergency Braking starts

The white indicator light comes on.

Autonomous Emergency Braking (Front Assist) is temporarily not available or has limited availability. After driving straight for a short distance, Autonomous
Emergency Braking is available again and the indicator light goes out. If the vehicle does not drive, the indicator light stays on.

Autonomous Emergency Braking (Front Assist) not available or has limited availability

The yellow indicator light turns on. In addition, a message is shown in the instrument cluster display.

The radar sensor or camera field of view is dirty. Clean the radar sensor and windshield ⇒ Vehicle care.

The visibility of the radar sensor or camera is limited due to weather conditions, such as snow, or from soap residue or coatings. Clean the radar sensor and
159
windshield ⇒ Vehicle care.

Radar sensor visibility is limited by attachments, decorative frames on license plate holders, or stickers. Clear the area around the radar sensor ⇒ Sensors
and Cameras.

The camera's view is limited by attachments or stickers. Keep the area around the camera field of view clear ⇒ Sensors and Cameras .

The radar sensor or the camera is misaligned or damaged, for example as a result of damage to the front of the vehicle or the windshield. Check if there is
noticeable damage ⇒ Sensors and Cameras .

The camera was automatically deactivated due to a high ambient temperature or long exposure to direct sunlight. Front Assist will be available once the
camera is available again.

Painting work was carried out on or structural modifications were made to the front of the vehicle ⇒ Repairs and technical modifications.

The original Volkswagen emblem is not used. Volkswagen recommends the use of Volkswagen original parts or Volkswagen original accessories, which you
can acquire from an authorized Volkswagen dealer or authorized Volkswagen Service Facility.

If the problem persists, turn off Autonomous Emergency Braking and contact suitably qualified professionals. Volkswagen recommends contacting an
authorized Volkswagen dealer or authorized Volkswagen Service Facility.

Front Assist is not functioning as expected or has been triggered multiple times unnecessarily
The radar sensor or camera field of view is dirty. Clean the radar sensor and windshield ⇒ Vehicle care.

The system limitations are not adhered to ⇒ System Limitations of Front Assist .

Low-lying sun or darkness.

If the problem persists, turn off Autonomous Emergency Braking and contact suitably qualified professionals. Volkswagen recommends contacting an
authorized Volkswagen dealer or authorized Volkswagen Service Facility.

Controls are responding differently than expected


Moisture, dirt and grease may limit the functioning of the controls.

1. Always keep the control panels clean and dry.

Lane Keeping System (Lane Assist)


Introduction
Lane Assist helps the driver to stay in a
lane, within the system limitations. This
function is not suitable for, and not
designed for, autonomously keeping
your vehicle in a lane.

If the system detects that the vehicle is coming too close to a lane marker, Lane Assist warns the driver with corrective steering. The driver can override the
corrective steering at any time.

Speed range

Lane Assist is ready to take control (active system status) when a lane marking is detected within the system limits above approximately 60 km/h (approximately
35 mph).

WARNING

Lane Assist is not a replacement for the driver's attention and works only within the system limitations. Lane Assist cannot detect all driving situations and may
not react, may react with a delay, or may react in a way that is not desired. If you are careless, there is a risk of accidents, serious injuries and death.

Always stay attentive and do not rely solely on the system. The driver is always responsible for keeping the vehicle within the lane.

Observe the system limitations ⇒ Lane Assist system limitations .

Always adapt your speed and distance to vehicles driving ahead based on the visual, weather, road, and traffic conditions.

Always keep your hands on the steering wheel so that you are prepared to steer at any time.

Override immediately by steering if the system intervenes when it should not.

Pay attention to indicators in the instrument cluster display and respond to the prompts accordingly when the traffic situation allows.

Lane Assist system limitations


Please read the introductory information and heed the Warnings and Notice ⇒ Introduction.

Limits of the sensor system

Lane Assist detects lane markings with the camera behind the windshield.
Observe the limits of the camera ⇒ Limits of the sensor system . Always be attentive and intervene yourself if necessary!

160
Lane markings not detected or not correctly recognized
Lane Assist does not correctly detect all lane markings. If lane markings are not detected or if markings are incorrectly detected as lane markings, Lane Assist may
fail to intervene when it should or may intervene when not desired. In addition to the situations specified in the camera limitations, this may also occur in the
following situations, among others:

If lane markings are not present.

When the driving style is very dynamic.

When not on highways or well-developed roads.

On poor road surfaces, road structures or objects.

In the event of reflections or dazzling effects.

Always be attentive and intervene yourself if necessary by overriding unwanted interventions by the system immediately. Temporarily switch off Lane Assist if
required.

Lane Assist not available


Lane Assist is not available under the following conditions (inactive system status):

The vehicle speed is less than around 55 km/h (around 30 mph).

Lane Assist has not detected a lane marking.

If lanes and curves are too narrow.

Temporarily, when the driving style is very dynamic.

When the turn signals are switched on before a manual lane change.

When the driver oversteers during a system intervention.

When there is no reaction from the driver to a driver intervention prompt.

Driving with Lane Assist


Please read the introductory information and heed the Warnings and Notice ⇒ Introduction.

Switching on and off

You can view the switched on condition of Lane Assist in the instrument cluster display and in the Infotainment system. You can also switch Lane Assist on and off
there.

In the instrument cluster display:

1. Press the button.

2. Switch Lane Assist on or off.

Depending on the vehicle equipment, the button is located either on the multi-function steering wheel or the turn signal and high beam lever.

In the Infotainment system:

1. Open the Assistance systems menu.

2. Switch Lane Assist on or off in the corresponding submenu.


If there is a system malfunction, Lane Assist may switch off automatically.

Displays

161
Fig. 99 In the instrument cluster display: displays of Lane Assist

Lane marking detected. The system is monitoring on the indicated side.

Lane marking detected. The system is ready to monitor on the indicated side.

Depending on the vehicle equipment, further details about lane marking, such as broken road markings, may also be shown on the instrument cluster display.

Depending on the equipment, a display may also appear in the head-up display.

One of the following indicator lights will light up, depending on the driving situation:

System active and ready to control. System in operation (corrective steering intervention).
If the indicator light does not light up, Lane Assist is not ready for operation on both sides (inactive system status) or is switched off.
If Travel Assist is actively controlling, there will not be any steering intervention and no Lane Assist display.

Driver intervention request

If there is no steering activity, Lane Assist prompts you to drive in the center of your lane with an indicator in the instrument cluster display and warning chimes.

If you do not respond accordingly, Lane Assist becomes inactive.

Depending on the vehicle equipment, semi-automatic vehicle control in a medical emergency (Emergency Assist) is activated when Emergency Assist is switched
on in the Infotainment system.

Independently of steering activity, you are also prompted by an indicator on the instrument cluster display and by a warning chime to drive in the middle of the lane if
the corrective steering intervention takes a long time.

Steering wheel vibration


The following situation may cause the steering wheel to vibrate:

A lane is no longer detected during a sharp corrective steering intervention by the system.

In addition, you can select the Vibration or Steering wheel vibration option in the Assistance systems menu in the Infotainment system. If you select this option, the
steering wheel will vibrate if Lane Assist is active and you drift onto a road lane marking that the system has detected.

Troubleshooting
Please read the introductory information and heed the Warnings and Notice ⇒ Introduction.

Lane Assist not available

The yellow indicator light turns on. In addition, a message is shown in the instrument cluster display.

The camera field of view is dirty. Clean the windshield ⇒ Vehicle care.

The camera's view is limited due to weather conditions, such as snow, or from soap residue or coatings. Clean the windshield ⇒ Vehicle care.

The camera's view is limited by attachments or stickers. Keep the area around the camera field of view clear ⇒ Sensors and Cameras .

The camera is misaligned or damaged, for example as a result of damage to the windshield. Check if there is noticeable damage ⇒ Sensors and Cameras .

The camera was automatically deactivated due to a high ambient temperature or long exposure to direct sunlight. Lane Assist will be available once the
camera is available again. Stop the engine and restart.

Malfunction or fault. Stop the engine and restart.

162
If the problem persists, contact an authorized Volkswagen dealer or authorized Volkswagen Service Facility. Volkswagen recommends contacting an
authorized Volkswagen dealer or authorized Volkswagen Service Facility.
It can take a few seconds once the ignition has been switched on for a system fault to be recognized.

If Lane Assist is not available, Emergency Assist is not available either.

If Lane Assist is not available, Travel Assist is not available either.

The system is functioning differently than expected


1. Do not mount any objects on the steering wheel.

Controls are responding differently than expected


Moisture, dirt and grease may limit the functioning of the controls.

1. Always keep the control panels clean and dry.

Comfort drive Travel Assist


Introduction
Thanks to the comfort drive Travel
Assist, within the system limitations, the
vehicle can maintain a distance, which
has been preselected by the driver, to
the vehicle in front and hold the
preferred position within the lane
(adaptive lane guidance).

Does this vehicle have Travel Assist?

The vehicle has Travel Assist, if the button on the multi-function steering wheel is available.

Speed range

Travel Assist operates in a speed range between around 20 km/h (approximately 15 mph) and around 210 km/h (approximately 130 mph). This range is expanded
to, from 0 km/h (0 mph) to around 250 km/h (approximately 155 mph), for the adaptive lane guidance. This speed range may vary depending on the country.

System Limitations of Travel Assist

Travel Assist detects driving situations using the same sensor technology as the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) and Lane Keeping System (Lane Assist).
Also observe the system limitations of and information on ACC and Lane Assist. Always remain attentive and intervene manually if necessary.

Driving with Travel Assist

Travel Assist automatically regulates the speed and steers the vehicle. Within the system limitations, Travel Assist can also bring the vehicle to a halt behind a
stopping vehicle and drive on again.

You can override the Travel Assist regulation function at any time.

Displays

Fig. 100 In the instrument cluster display: Display during active control.

163
Adaptive lane guidance is active.

Set distance.

Depending on the equipment, a display may also appear in the head-up display.

Depending on the vehicle equipment, further details may also be shown on the instrument cluster display, such as broken road markings and vehicles driving in
front.

Indicator lights on the instrument cluster display show the Travel Assist status, depending on the vehicle equipment:

Travel Assist active, Adaptive Cruise Control and adaptive lane guidance active. Travel Assist active, Adaptive Cruise Control active and adaptive lane
guidance passive.

Driver intervention request

If you remove your hands from the steering wheel, the system will ask you to take over the steering wheel after a few seconds with a message in the instrument
cluster display and with audible warnings.

If you do not respond to this, Travel Assist is deactivated.

Alternatively, depending on the vehicle equipment, semi-automatic vehicle control in a medical emergency (Emergency Assist) is activated when Emergency Assist
is switched on in the Infotainment system.

WARNING

Travel Assist is not a replacement for the driver's attention and works only within the system limitations. Travel Assist cannot detect all driving situations and
may not react, or may react with a delay, or may react in a way that is not desired. If you are careless, there is a risk of accidents, serious injuries and death.

Always stay attentive and do not rely solely on the system. The driver is always responsible for control of the vehicle.

Observe the system limitations of ACC ⇒ System Limitations of ACC and Lane Assist ⇒ Lane Assist system limitations .

Always adapt your speed and distance to vehicles driving ahead based on the visual, weather, road, and traffic conditions.

Always keep your hands on the steering wheel so that you are prepared to steer at any time.

Take over steering immediately if a driver intervention prompt appears in the instrument cluster display or the deceleration by Travel Assist is not
sufficient.

Apply the brakes if the vehicle continues to roll unintentionally, e.g. after a driver intervention prompt.

Operating Travel Assist


Please read the introductory information and heed the Warnings and Notice ⇒ Introduction.

Fig. 101 Left side of the multi-function steering wheel (variant 1).

164
Fig. 102 Left side of the multi-function steering wheel (variant 2).

Switching on and starting the regulation function


1. During forward travel with ACC switched on, press the button on the multi-function steering wheel.

The vehicle switches from ACC to Travel Assist.

Depending on the driving situation, the vehicle switches to the following system status in Travel Assist:

If ACC is regulating, Travel Assist maintains the current speed and the preset distance from the vehicle driving ahead (system status inactive).

At the same time, the vehicle is kept in its lane by steering movements when road markings are detected (system status active).

If ACC is not regulating, Travel Assist is switched on, but stays deactivated.

1. Press the button.

Travel Assist switches the driving situation accordingly to an active or inactive system status.

The indicator/warning light corresponding to the driving situation comes on in the instrument cluster display. A notification is also displayed.

Canceling the regulation function


1. Press the button briefly.

Or: Press the brake pedal.

The set distance remains saved.

Changing to ACC
1. Press the button on the multi-function steering wheel.

The vehicle switches from Travel Assist to the system status of ACC corresponding to the driving situation.

Adjusting further settings

The further operation of Travel Assist corresponds to the operation of the ACC ⇒ Adjusting the ACC settings.

Troubleshooting
Please read the introductory information and heed the Warnings and Notice ⇒ Introduction.

Travel Assist is not available or is not functioning as expected

The yellow indicator light turns on. In addition, a message is shown in the instrument cluster display.

There is a malfunction in the sensor system. Check the causes and troubleshooting measures described in the information on ACC and Lane Assist.

Malfunction or fault. Stop the engine and restart.

The system limitations are not adhered to.

If the problem persists, contact an authorized Volkswagen dealer or authorized Volkswagen Service Facility. Volkswagen recommends contacting an
authorized Volkswagen dealer or authorized Volkswagen Service Facility.

Take over the steering

The white warning light will come on and a message will be shown in the instrument cluster display.

You have let go of the steering wheel for a few seconds.


165
1. Take hold of the steering wheel and take over steering the vehicle.

Take over the steering immediately

The red warning light will come on and a message will be shown in the instrument cluster display. An audible warning will sound or the steering wheel will vibrate,
depending on the driving situation.

You have let go of the steering wheel for a long period of time or the system limits have been reached.

1. Immediately take hold of the steering wheel and take over steering the vehicle.

Comfort drive Travel Assist switches off automatically


Vehicles without Emergency Assist:

You have let go of the steering wheel for a long period of time.

Malfunction or fault. Stop the engine and restart.

If the problem persists, contact an authorized Volkswagen dealer or authorized Volkswagen Service Facility. Volkswagen recommends contacting an
authorized Volkswagen dealer or authorized Volkswagen Service Facility.

The regulation function is canceled unexpectedly


You have operated the turn signal.

Semi-automatic vehicle control in a medical emergency (Emergency Assist)


Introduction
Emergency Assist can recognize driver
inactivity and can automatically keep
the vehicle in its lane and, if necessary,
slow it down to a stop. The system can
hereby actively help to avoid an
accident or reduce the consequences of
an accident.

Emergency Assist system limitations

Emergency Assist detects driving situations using the same sensor technology as the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) and Lane Keeping System (Lane Assist).

WARNING

Emergency Assist is not a replacement for the driver's attention and works only within the system limitations. Emergency Assist cannot detect all driving
situations and may not react, may react with a delay, or may react in a way that is not desired. Emergency Assist also cannot always avoid accidents and serious
injury by itself. If you are careless, there is a risk of accidents, serious injuries and death.

Always stay attentive and do not rely solely on the system. The driver is always responsible for control of the vehicle.

Observe the system limitations of ACC ⇒ System Limitations of ACC and Lane Assist ⇒ Lane Assist system limitations .

Always adapt your speed and distance to vehicles driving ahead based on the visual, weather, road, and traffic conditions.

Driving with Emergency Assist


Please read the introductory information and heed the Warnings and Notice ⇒ Introduction.

Switching on and off

You can switch Emergency Assist on and off in the Assistance systems menu in the Infotainment system.

When it is switched on, Emergency Assist is only active under the following conditions:

Travel Assist or Lane Assist is switched on.

The system must detect lane markers on the left and right side of the vehicle.
If there is a system malfunction, Emergency Assist may switch off automatically.

If Lane Assist is not available, Emergency Assist is not available either.

Driver intervention request

Using warning chimes and brief braking maneuver, Emergency Assist prompts an inactive driver to take over control of driving. In addition, a message is shown in
the instrument cluster display and the volume of the Infotainment system is decreased.

System intervention

If you do not respond, the system can brake the vehicle and keep it in its lane. The following indicator light will come on in the instrument cluster display:

166
System is regulating.
You can cancel the regulation at any time by accelerating rapidly, braking or steering as the traffic situation allows.

If Emergency Assist is active, other road users will be warned as follows:

The emergency flashers are switched on after a short delay.

The vehicle's horn sounds, depending on the speed.

If the remaining stopping distance is sufficient, the vehicle slows down, if necessary, to a stop.

As soon as the vehicle comes to a standstill, the following happens:

The electronic parking brake is switched on.

Gear P is engaged.

The doors are unlocked.

The interior lighting is switched on.

WARNING

Emergency Assist cannot detect all driving situations and may react in a way that is not desired. Accidents and serious injuries or even death could result.

If the vehicle behaves unexpectedly, you can stop intervention of Emergency Assist.

Switch off the Lane Keeping System (Lane Assist).

Do not use the comfort drive Travel Assist.

Seek assistance from suitably qualified professionals and have the system checked. Volkswagen recommends contacting an authorized Volkswagen
dealer or authorized Volkswagen Service Facility.

Troubleshooting
Please read the introductory information and heed the Warnings and Notice ⇒ Introduction.

Semi-automatic vehicle control in a medical emergency (Emergency Assist) not available

Malfunction or fault. The yellow indicator light turns on. In addition, a message is shown in the instrument cluster display.

1. Stop the engine and restart.

2. If the problem persists, turn off Emergency Assist and contact suitably qualified professionals. Volkswagen recommends contacting an authorized Volkswagen
dealer or authorized Volkswagen Service Facility.

Controls are responding differently than expected


Moisture, dirt and grease may limit the functioning of the controls.

1. Always keep the control panels clean and dry.

Lane Change System (Side Assist)


Introduction
The Lane Change System (Side Assist)
helps the driver to discern the traffic
situation behind the vehicle.

Radar sensors behind the rear bumper cover monitor the area behind the vehicle. The system measures the distance and difference in speed to other vehicles and
informs the driver through visual signals in the housing of the outside mirrors.

Only use Side Assist on secure roads.

Speed range

If Side Assist is switched on, it is active at speeds of approx. 15 km/h (approx. 9 mph) and above. Side Assist is deactivated at speeds below approx. 10 km/h
(approx. 6 mph).

WARNING

Side Assist is not a replacement for the driver's attention and works only within the system limitations. Side Assist cannot detect all driving situations and all
objects in the surrounding environment, and may not provide warnings, may provide warnings with a delay, or may provide warnings in a way that is not desired.
If you are careless, there is a risk of accidents, serious injuries and death.

Always stay attentive and do not rely solely on the system. The driver is always responsible for control of the vehicle and changing lanes.

Observe the system limitations ⇒ Side Assist system limitations .

Always adapt your speed and distance to vehicles driving ahead based on the visual, weather, road, and traffic conditions.

Always keep your hands on the steering wheel so that you are prepared to steer at any time.
167
Pay attention to the displays in the outside mirror housings and in the instrument cluster display, and act accordingly.

Side Assist system limitations


Please read the introductory information and heed the Warnings and Notice ⇒ Introduction.

Limits of the sensor system

Side Assist detects driving situations via the radar sensors in the rear area.
Note the limits of the radar sensors ⇒ Limits of the sensor system and always pay attention!

Functional limitations
In addition to the situations specified in the sensor system limitations, Side Assist may not correctly interpret the traffic situation in the following situations, among
others:

When driving in the center of two lanes.

When lanes have different widths.

When certain types of equipment are on the side of the road, such as high or offset guard rails.

Restricted visibility

Sunlight may reduce the visibility of the visual display in the outside mirror.

Calibration

The radar sensors calibrate once, on the first kilometer of a journey after the vehicle is delivered, and then again if the sensor technology has been repaired. The
range of the sensors may be limited during the calibration phase.

Driving with Side Assist


Please read the introductory information and heed the Warnings and Notice ⇒ Introduction.

Switching on and off

You can view the switched on condition of Side Assist in the instrument cluster display and in the Infotainment system. You can also switch Side Assist on and off
there.

In the instrument cluster display:

1. Press the button.

2. Switch Side Assist on or off.

Depending on the vehicle equipment, the button is located either on the multi-function steering wheel or the turn signal and high beam lever.

In the Infotainment system, depending on the vehicle equipment:

1. Open the Assistance systems menu.

2. Switch Side Assist on or off in the corresponding submenu.

After it is switched on, the yellow indicator light lights up once briefly in the outside mirror housing.
If there is a system malfunction, Side Assist may turn off automatically.

Displays in the outside mirror

168
Fig. 103 In the outside mirror housing: Side Assist displays.

Flashing: A vehicle has been detected in the blind spot and the turn signal in the direction of the detected vehicle has also been activated. Lit: Your vehicle
is being overtaken, or you are overtaking another vehicle with a speed difference of up to approx. 15 km/h (approx. 9 mph).
There is no indicator if the passing speed is clearly faster.

The faster another vehicle approaches, the sooner the display in the outside mirror housing will turn on.

Lane change system “Side Assist Plus”

In vehicle with a Lane Keeping System (Lane Assist), a corrective steering intervention warns you when a possible critical situation is detected when changing lanes
(information level, warning level), if Lane Assist is switched on. The steering intervention also occurs if you activate the turn signal for the respective side. If you
oversteer the steering intervention, an additional warning is provided by a steering wheel vibration. Steering wheel vibration must also be activated in the Assistance
systems menu in the Infotainment system.

Brightness

The brightness of the visual display adapts it self automatically to the ambient brightness.

You can set the default brightness of the display in the Assistance systems menu of the Infotainment system. Side Assist is not active while adjusting the settings.

Troubleshooting
Please read the introductory information and heed the Warnings and Notice ⇒ Introduction.

Side Assist malfunction

Malfunction or fault. The yellow indicator light in the instrument cluster display comes on. In addition, the yellow central warning light comes on.

1. Stop the engine and restart.

2. If the problem persists, contact an authorized Volkswagen dealer or authorized Volkswagen Service Facility. Volkswagen recommends contacting an authorized
Volkswagen dealer or authorized Volkswagen Service Facility.

Malfunctioning sensor view, malfunction message, system switches off automatically


Clean the radar sensors and remove the stickers or attachments from the radar sensors or the bumper ⇒ Exterior care and cleaning, ⇒ Sensors and Cameras

Check if there is any noticeable damage ⇒ Sensors and Cameras .

If the problem persists, contact an authorized Volkswagen dealer or authorized Volkswagen Service Facility. Volkswagen recommends contacting an
authorized Volkswagen dealer or authorized Volkswagen Service Facility.

The system is functioning differently than expected


The radar sensors could be dirty. Clean the radar sensors ⇒ Exterior care and cleaning.

The radar sensors could be covered by water.

The field of view of the radar sensors is limited by weather conditions, such as snow, or by dirt, soap residue or coatings. Clean the radar sensors ⇒ Exterior
care and cleaning.

The system limitations are not adhered to ⇒ Side Assist system limitations .

The vehicle could be damaged in the radar sensor area, for example from parking barriers. Check if there is any noticeable damage ⇒ Sensors and Cameras

The field of view of the radar sensors is limited by attachments, bicycle racks or stickers. Keep the area around the radar sensors clear ⇒ Sensors and
Cameras.

Painting work or structural modifications were carried out in the area of the radar sensors, on the vehicle rear or on the suspension ⇒ Repairs and technical
modifications.

169
The side windows have been covered with after-market tinting films ⇒ Repairs and technical modifications.

If the problem persists, contact an authorized Volkswagen dealer or authorized Volkswagen Service Facility. Volkswagen recommends contacting an
authorized Volkswagen dealer or authorized Volkswagen Service Facility.

Controls are responding differently than expected


Moisture, dirt and grease may limit the functioning of the controls.

1. Always keep the control panels clean and dry.

170
Parking and maneuvering
Parking the vehicle
Parking

WARNING

Parking the vehicle incorrectly can result in the vehicle rolling, even on slight downhill slopes. Accidents and serious or fatal injuries could result.

When parking the vehicle, always follow the steps in the specified order.

Before exiting the vehicle, make sure the electronic parking brake is activated and the red warning light comes on in the Volkswagen Digital
Cockpit display once the ignition has been switched off.

1. Press and hold the brake pedal.

In vehicles with a manual transmission, press the clutch pedal down completely or disengage the clutch.

2. In vehicles with an automatic transmission, move the selector lever into the P position.

3. Set the electronic parking brake.

4. On uphill and downhill slopes, turn the steering wheel so that the vehicle will roll into a curb if it begins moving.

5. Stop the engine and switch the ignition off.

The red indicator light in the instrument cluster display will turn on.

6. With a manual transmission, engage the 1st gear if the vehicle is on a level or an uphill surface, or engage the reverse gear if the vehicle is on a downhill
surface. Release the clutch pedal.

7. Release the brake.

8. Exit the vehicle ⇒ . Pay attention to other road users.

9. Take all vehicle keys with you and lock the vehicle.

WARNING

If you leave children, people requiring assistance or animals unattended in the vehicle, they may accidentally set the vehicle in motion or be subjected to very
high or low temperatures. There is a risk of accidents and serious or fatal injuries.

Never leave children, people requiring assistance or animals unattended in the vehicle.

To avoid damage and dangerous situations, always park the vehicle in a suitable parking area ⇒ .

NOTICE

Any unevenness in the ground, as well as sand or mud, may prevent the vehicle from being parked safely. This can result in damage to the vehicle.

Always park the vehicle on solid and level ground.

NOTICE

Vehicle components that are low to the ground such as the bumpers, spoilers, and parts of the suspension may collide with objects protruding up from the
ground when they are driven over. The vehicle can be damaged.

Drive carefully over driveways, ramps, curbs and fixed barriers, as well as when driving through dips.

Electronic parking brake

171
Fig. 104 In the center console: Button for the electronic parking brake (manual transmission).

Fig. 105 In the center console: Button for the electronic parking brake (automatic or DSG automated transmission).

Switching on
1. When the vehicle is stationary, pull and hold the button for the electronic parking brake fig. 104 or fig. 105 .

The yellow indicator light in the button comes on.

The brake pedal moves slightly upon switching on.

If the electronic parking brake is switched on, the red indicator light comes on in the instrument cluster.
Manual transmission: If the ignition is switched off, the electronic parking brake is activated automatically. The function is activated in the factory.

1. Open the vehicle settings in the Infotainment system ⇒ Vehicle settings menu.

172
2. Open the Vehicle menu.

3. Open the Exterior menu.

4. Open the Brakes submenu.

5. Select the function.

Switching off
1. Switch the ignition on.

2. Press the brake pedal and press the button.

Or: when the engine is running, press the accelerator pedal lightly without pressing the brake pedal.

The indicator light in the button and the red warning light in the Volkswagen Digital Cockpit will turn off.

Automatic switch-on if you leave the vehicle incorrectly

If it is detected that the vehicle has been exited improperly, the electronic parking brake can be activated automatically ⇒ .

In vehicles with automatic transmission or DSG ® automated transmission, if the selector lever is in the N neutral position, the electronic parking brake will not be
activated automatically.

WARNING

Parking the vehicle incorrectly can result in the vehicle rolling, even on slight downhill slopes. Accidents and serious or fatal injuries could result.

When parking the vehicle, always follow the steps in the specified order.

Before exiting the vehicle, make sure the electronic parking brake is activated and the red warning light in the Volkswagen Digital Cockpit display
comes on after switching off the ignition.

Automatic switch-off when starting to drive

The parking brake releases automatically as you drive off if one of the following situations occurs when the driver's door is closed ⇒ :

Manual transmission: The clutch is pressed all the way down before starting to drive.

Automatic transmission: A gear is engaged or changed.

DSG automated transmission: A gear is engaged or changed.

Starting to drive on steep inclines or with increased vehicle weight

You can prevent the electronic parking brake from releasing automatically if you pull the switch upward and hold it up while starting to drive.

If more engine power is required when starting to drive, the electronic parking brake will release only after the switch is released.

Driving through a car wash

If you would not like the electronic parking brake to switch on automatically, e.g. in a car wash, note the following:

1. Automatic transmission or DSG automated transmission: Put the vehicle in neutral N.

Manual transmission: Press the brake pedal and press and hold the button until the ignition has been switched off.

Emergency braking function

Only use the emergency braking function in an emergency, if the vehicle cannot be stopped using the brake pedal ⇒ .

1. Pull and hold the switch.

The vehicle will brake abruptly. A warning chime will also sound at the same time.

WARNING

The electronic parking brake is not designed for braking the vehicle. The braking distance will be significantly longer because only the rear wheels will be braked
under certain circumstances. This could result in accidents and serious or fatal injuries.

Always use the brake pedal to brake the vehicle and never the electronic parking brake unless it is an emergency.

WARNING

If the accelerator pedal is accidentally pressed when the electronic parking brake is activated, this may release the electronic parking brake. The vehicle will
start moving. Accidents and serious injuries could result.

Do not press the accelerator pedal when the engine is running and a gear is engaged if the vehicle is to be brought to a standstill.

Noises can be heard when you switch the electronic parking brake on of off. This may also occur during an automatic check.
173
Troubleshooting
The holding force is too low for the current situation

The red warning light is blinking.

It is not possible to park the vehicle safely.

1. Park the vehicle in another location or on a flat surface.

/ Electronic parking brake malfunction

The yellow central warning light comes on. The symbol with a message is additionally shown in the instrument cluster display.

1. Contact an authorized Volkswagen dealer or authorized Volkswagen Service Facility. Volkswagen recommends contacting an authorized Volkswagen dealer or
authorized Volkswagen Service Facility.

The electronic parking brake does not switch off


The requirements for switching off the electronic parking brake are not met ⇒ Electronic parking brake.

The 12 V vehicle battery is drained ⇒ Preparing and Performing a Jump-start .

Exit warning system


The exit warning system gives a
warning when opening doors if other
road users are approaching from
behind.

System function

Fig. 106 Monitored area behind your own parked vehicle (general example).

Fig. 107 In the outside mirror housing: Visual indicator for the exit warning system.

The system uses radar sensors to detect an obstacle approaching from behind when opening a door, e.g. a pedestrian or cyclist. The indicator lights in the outside
mirror housing blink yellow and then light up continuously fig. 107. A warning signal will also sound at the same time ⇒ .

WARNING

174
The exit warning system is not a replacement for the driver's attention and works only within the system limitations. The indicator may not light up or may not
light up in time in response to stationary, slow-moving or rapidly approaching objects. If you do not take care, there is a risk of accidents and serious injuries.

Always stay attentive and do not rely solely on the system. The driver is always responsible for control of the vehicle.

Before you open the doors, pay attention to the vehicle environment, e.g. pedestrians and cyclists.

Requirements
Vehicle is stationary.

Vehicle is unlocked.

The function has been activated in the Infotainment system.

Switching on and off


1. Tap the control for parking functions.

2. Tap the function key in the Infotainment system.

3. Switch on the exit warning system.

When the ignition is switched off, the exit warning system is available for around three minutes, e.g. after unlocking or parking the vehicle.

Malfunction

In the event of an error, the exit warning system is deactivated → page , Requirements. An error message is displayed in the Infotainment system.

Information about the parking systems


Safety instructions

WARNING

Parking systems are not a replacement for the driver's attention and can only operate within the limitations of the system. The parking systems cannot detect all
driving situations and may not react, or may react with a delay, or may react in a way that is not desired. If you are careless, there is a risk of accidents, serious
injuries and death.

Always stay attentive and do not rely solely on the system. The driver is always responsible for control of the vehicle.

Always keep an eye on the direction of travel and the vehicle surroundings when parking.

Pay particular attention to small children, animals and objects when parking.

Do not allow the parking system's display to distract you from the traffic around you.

Bear in mind that the parking system may not react if the vehicle approaches too quickly and will not issue a warning.

Always adapt your speed and driving style to the visibility, weather, road and traffic conditions.

NOTICE

When you maneuver in a parking space without a curb, the vehicle may be damaged by obstacles.

Keep a safe distance of approx. 50 cm (around 20 in) from walls and buildings.

Sensor and camera boundaries


Various sensors and cameras that detect the vehicle surroundings ultrasonically, by radar waves, and visually are located on and in the vehicle. The various parking
systems use different combinations of sensors. All sensors have technical and physical limits ⇒ :

In some situations, some objects may not be detected, e.g. trailer draw bars, narrow poles, fences, posts, and trees, extremely low or high obstacles, or trunk
lids that are opening or already open ⇒ .

The parking system coverage areas have “blind” spots in their range where they cannot detect people and objects.

Dirt, ice, or water on the sensors and cameras may be detected as obstacles or prevent the detection of objects in some cases. In addition to dirt and snow,
soap residue or other coatings can also impair the sensor range → page , Exterior care and cleaning.

External noises and certain surfaces on objects and clothing can affect the sensor signals. In some situations, people and objects may not be detected or may
be detected incorrectly.

Certain objects, such as small posts or grating, cannot be shown or cannot be adequately shown due to the resolution of the screen and if there is insufficient
lighting.

The cameras only show two-dimensional images on the screen. Due to the lack of depth of field, it may be difficult or impossible to identify protruding objects or
recesses in the road.

175
Volkswagen recommends practicing with the parking systems in a location or parking space with no traffic in order to become acquainted with the functions.

Requirements
The use of parking systems, e.g. with camera assistance, may not be allowed in some countries and regions according to legal provisions.

General information

So that the sensors and cameras can detect the area surrounding the vehicle as well as possible and display this image on the Infotainment system screen, the
following requirements must be met.

The doors and trunk lid are closed.

The outside mirrors must not be folded in.

The sensors or cameras are not covered by attachments or decorative license plate holder frames. The decorative license plate holder must not protrude at
the sides or bottom.

The vehicle must be on level ground.

The vehicle must not be loaded primarily in the rear or on one side.

Engine is running.

Braking assistance systems such as ESC or ASR are switched on.


If you use any other functions in the Infotainment system while you are parking, the parking function and its warning chimes will be deactivated.

Finding a suitable parking space


The length and width of the parking space must be larger than the vehicle measurements and provide enough space to maneuver.

The distance when driving past the parking space is approx. 1 m (approx. 3 feet).

Vehicles with Park Assist: The speed when passing the parking space is, for parking spaces parallel to the road, maximum approx. 40 km/h (approx.
25 mph), and for parking spaces across the road maximum approx. 20 km/h (approx. 12 mph).

Automatic braking intervention


A parking system's automatic braking
support helps to avoid collisions, if an
obstacle is detected.

Parking systems with braking support

Depending on the vehicle equipment, the vehicle has parking systems with a maneuvering and/or emergency braking function ⇒ .

WARNING

The automatic braking support is not a replacement for the driver's attention and works only within the system limitations. In some driving situations, the
automatic braking support may be limited or may intervene in a way that is not desired or may not engage at all. If you are careless, there is a risk of accidents,
serious injuries and death.

Always stay attentive and do not rely solely on the system. The driver is always responsible for control of the vehicle.

In a hazardous situation, apply the brakes using the brake pedal to avoid collision with an obstacle.

React quickly to parking system warnings, e.g. Park Distance Control.

Requirements
When maneuvering, the vehicle is not driving faster than approx. 10 km/h (approx. 6 mph).

A parking system has been switched on.

What happens during an automatic braking intervention?

If there is an obstacle, the vehicle brakes to a stop and is kept stationary for around two seconds.

1. After braking, press the brake pedal to keep the vehicle stationary.

2. Check your surroundings.

Park Assist: If the speed is too high, the vehicle will brake to a stop. The parking process can then be resumed.

Depending on the vehicle equipment, there may be a message on the instrument cluster display.

Switching on and off

Automatic braking is activated or deactivated when a parking system is switched on or off by the driver.

Maneuver braking for Park Distance Control


176
The maneuver braking is automatically switched on each time the ignition is switched on.

1. Briefly press the accelerator pedal to cancel the automatic braking support ⇒ .

Deactivate function:

1. Tap the function key in the screen of the Park Distance Control.

2. Apply the setting.


If there is an obstacle in the front area of the vehicle, automatic braking support will not happen if Park Distance Control was activated automatically while
driving forward → page , Switching Park Distance Control (PDC) on and off .

General information
Switch the parking system off temporarily if automatic braking support happens too frequently or when undesired and maneuver the vehicle carefully, for
example when driving off-road or parking in your garage.

If the maneuver braking function for Park Distance Control intervenes to stop the vehicle, the function will be inactive for a distance of approx. 5 m (approx.
16 ft) when driving in the same direction. It will become active again if the gear or selector lever position changes.

The parking process is canceled following Park Assist emergency braking, e.g. if an obstacle has been detected.

Following a Rear Traffic Alert emergency braking intervention, it will take approx. 10 seconds before automatic braking support can occur again.

Troubleshooting
The parking system is functioning differently than expected
The conditions of the parking system are not met → page , Requirements.

The sensors are dirty or covered in ice or the camera lens is dirty and the camera image is not clear → page , Exterior care and cleaning.

Sources of noise, such as a jackhammer or driving over cobblestones, can interfere with the ultrasonic signal.

The vehicle is damaged in the area of the sensors or camera, for example from parking barriers, or the paint may have been changed or other structural
modifications may have been made near the sensors or camera, for example to the vehicle front end or to the suspension.

The areas detected by the sensors or camera may be blocked by accessories such as bicycle racks.

Fault displays
1. Note any messages on the instrument cluster display and in the Infotainment system.

NOTICE

If you use the parking system despite a malfunction, the vehicle may be damaged.

Contact an authorized Volkswagen dealer or authorized Volkswagen Service Facility in the event of a parking system malfunction. Volkswagen
recommends contacting an authorized Volkswagen dealer or authorized Volkswagen Service Facility.

No sensor range or the parking system has been switched off

If a sensor malfunctions, the sensor area is deactivated.

The affected sensor area can be displayed in the Infotainment system with the symbol and a grey section of the image . The parking system may be completely
switched off.

If Park Distance Control is malfunctioning, a continuous tone will sound for several seconds when you switch it on. Where applicable, a message will appear in the
instrument cluster display.

1. Check if one of the causes listed is responsible.

2. Once the source of the issue has been resolved, switch the system on again.

3. If the problem persists, contact an authorized Volkswagen dealer or authorized Volkswagen Service Facility. Volkswagen recommends contacting an authorized
Volkswagen dealer or authorized Volkswagen Service Facility.

Park Assist is canceled automatically

Park Assist will end the parking process if one of the following situations occurs.

The function key is pressed.

The driver takes over steering.

The driver’s door is opened.

The time limit or number of movements for the parking process is exceeded.

ASR is switched off or it engages.

There is a system malfunction.

177
1. Restart the parking process.

Park Assist is active and supports steering movements when the vehicle is stationary

If Park Assist attempts to turn the steering while the vehicle is stationary, the white symbol appears in the instrument cluster display.

1. Press the brake pedal.

After a wheel change, Park Assist parks inaccurately

If, after a wheel change, Park Assist parks inaccurately, e.g. with an increased or reduced distance from the curb, the system may have to acquire the wheel sizes
again.

1. Drive the vehicle over a longer distance, including around bends.

Park Assist automatically learns the new wheel sizes after an ignition cycle.

Park Distance Control (PDC)


Introduction
Park Distance Control assists the driver
when parking and warns if there are
obstacles.

Fig. 108 Infotainment system: Display of Park Distance Control (general example).

Obstacle detection.

Steering lock.

System function

Using ultrasound sensors, the Park Distance Control detects the distance of the vehicle from an obstacle.

The Park Distance Control warns you of a collision via colored segments on the screen of the Infotainment system and via warning chimes fig. 108, ⇒ .

If the driver does not respond to an approaching obstacle, automatic braking support may kick in ⇒ .

WARNING

Park Distance Control is not a replacement for the driver's attention and works only within the system limitations. Park Distance Control might not be able to
detect some obstacles and may not react, may react late, or may react in a way that is undesired. If you do not take care, there is a risk of accidents and serious
injuries.

Always stay attentive and do not rely solely on the system. The driver is always responsible for control of the vehicle.

React quickly to the Park Distance Control visual warnings and chimes.

Brake the vehicle using the brake pedal before reaching an obstacle.

NOTICE

The system will only provide visual and audible warnings for obstacles within the vehicle's path. The collision area has been reached, at the latest, when the
penultimate segment on the Park Distance Control screen is displayed or a continuous warning tone sounds. There is a risk of vehicle damage.

Always brake the vehicle in good time before reaching an obstacle.

NOTICE

178
Depending on the vehicle equipment, distances to obstacles in the side areas are also displayed. Any obstacles that enter these areas from the outside are not
displayed. The vehicle may be damaged in this instance.

In order to fully scan and display the side areas, move the vehicle a few yards forward or back.

Screen display
Red section of the image: Nearby obstacle. The vehicle is at risk. Apply the brakes. Yellow section of the image: Obstacle in the path of the vehicle.
The vehicle is at risk. Steer around the obstacle. Grey section of the image: Obstacle outside of the vehicle's path or a malfunction in the sensor area.
Maneuver braking deactivated or malfunctioning. Mute the warning chimes. There is a system malfunction in the area that is detected (depending on vehicle
equipment). The colors may vary.

Park Distance Control settings


1. Tap the control for parking functions in the upper section of the center console.

2. Tap the function key.

3. Select a setting, e.g. automatic activation when driving forward or maneuver braking.

To operate the volume reduction, first engage the electronic parking brake if necessary.

Switching Park Distance Control (PDC) on and off


Please read the introductory information and heed the Warnings and Notice ⇒ and Safety instructions.

Switching on
1. Select the reverse gear.

Or: tap the control in the upper section of the center console. Then tap the function key in the Infotainment system, if necessary.

Or: The vehicle will roll backward.

Switching off
1. Tap the function key.

Or: the vehicle is driving forward at more than approx. 10 km/h (approx. 6 mph) up to approx. 15 km/h (approx. 9 mph).

Or: tap the control in the upper section of the center console.

Or: Engage parking lock P.

Automatic activation when driving forward

If the vehicle slowly approaches an obstacle, Park Distance Control is automatically activated.

1. Tap the control in the upper section of the center console.

2. Switch the function on or off.

If the driver switches off Park Distance Control, no further automatic activation occurs.

Automatic activation is available again under following conditions:

The vehicle has been accelerated to more than approx. 15 km/h (approx. 9 mph) and then the speed has fallen below this again.

Or: the ignition has been switched off and on again.

Or: parking lock P has been changed to a gear.


If an obstacle is detected in front of the vehicle, the display in the Infotainment system is activated. If the vehicle approaches further, warning chimes also
sound.

Rear View Camera (Rear View)


Introduction
The Rear View Camera system in the
rear of the vehicle makes it easier for
the driver to see behind the vehicle and
assists when parking.

System function

The Rear View Camera system shows the area behind the vehicle on the Infotainment system screen. Depending on the mode and vehicle equipment, orientation
lines may assist in the view toward the rear ⇒ .

WARNING

The Rear View Camera system is not a replacement for the driver's attention and works only within the system limitations. Using the camera image to estimate
the distance to people or obstacles may not be precise. If you do not take care, there is a risk of accidents and serious injuries.

179
Always stay attentive and do not rely solely on the system. The driver is always responsible for control of the vehicle.

Bear in mind that camera lenses can enlarge and distort the field of vision.

The orientation lines superimposed on the camera image are shown by the system regardless of the vehicle's surroundings. There is no automatic obstacle
detection by the camera while it is active. The driver must evaluate whether the vehicle will fit in the parking space.

If a camera is installed in the trunk lid, the orientation lines are also hidden if the trunk lid is open.

CAUTION

Vehicles with a swiveling emblem: The Rear View Camera system extending can cause serious injuries due to entrapment.

When engaging reverse gear, make sure that there are no persons directly against the trunk lid and that nobody is reaching into the range of operation of
the Volkswagen emblem.

Switching the Rear View Camera system on and off


Please read the introductory information and heed the Warnings and Notice ⇒ and Safety instructions.

Switching on
1. Select the reverse gear.

Or: tap the control in the upper section of the center console. If available, then tap the function key in the Infotainment system.

Switching off
1. The vehicle drives at more than approx. 10 km/h (approx. 6 mph).

Or: Tap the or function key on the screen of the Infotainment system.
In vehicles without Park Distance Control, the Rear View Camera system is deactivated when the vehicle exceeds a certain speed.

Parking (Rear View Camera system with parking mode selection)


Please read the introductory information and heed the Warnings and Notice ⇒ and Safety instructions.

Screen display
Perpendicular parking: Guide lines help when parking in reverse perpendicular to the road. Cross traffic: Depiction of the area behind the vehicle and the
areas to the side of the vehicle at a wide angle. Red line: Boundary or safety distance from the vehicle. Yellow lines: the vehicle's path based on the
steering angle. Green horizontal lines: Boundaries. Adjust the brightness, contrast, and color.

USA and Canada: If the camera image on a parking system has been switched on by engaging the reverse gear, no function keys are displayed for safety reasons.
These function keys can be displayed again by tapping the function key .

Parking mode: Parking perpendicular to the road

180
Fig. 109 Infotainment system: Parking perpendicular to the road.

Searching for a parking space.

Steering toward the selected parking space.

Aligning the vehicle within the parking space.

Road surface.

Parking space.

Side boundary of the parking space.

Rear boundary of the parking space.

1. Press the control panel for parking functions before driving past the selected parking space. Then tap the function key in the Infotainment system, if
necessary.

2. To select the parking mode, tap the function key in the Infotainment system.

3. Position your vehicle in front of the parking space fig. 109 .

4. Steer so that the yellow lines lead into the parking space. The green and yellow lines must align with the side boundary lines fig. 109 .

5. Stop when the red line reaches the rear boundary fig. 109 .

Park Assist
Introduction
Park Assist displays a suitable parking
space and assists the driver when
parking and leaving the parking space.

System function

Park Assist is an extension of Park Distance Control.

Park Assist steers the vehicle into a parking space while you operate the accelerator pedal, the gears and the brake ⇒ .

WARNING

Park Assist is not a replacement for the driver's attention and works only within the system limitations. Park Assist cannot detect all driving situations and may
not react, may react with a delay, or may react in a way that is not desired. If you are careless, there is a risk of accidents, serious injuries and death.

Always stay attentive and do not rely solely on the system. The driver is always responsible for control of the vehicle.

Pay close attention to the parking process and the traffic.

In a hazardous situation, apply the brakes using the brake pedal.


181
Available functions
Display suitable parking spaces.

Select parking mode.

Driving into a suitable parallel parking space or parking bay.

Driving out of a suitable parallel parking space.

WARNING

If you use another function in the Infotainment system when maneuvering with the parking system, all active parking functions will switch off, including the
warning chimes. You will no longer be warned about a collision or receive intervention. Accidents and serious or fatal injuries could result.

Do not use any other functions in the Infotainment system while maneuvering.

NOTICE

Park Assist orients itself to parked vehicles, curbs, or other objects. If there are obstacles on the ground, low-down vehicle components such as tires and wheel
rims may be damaged.

Watch out for obstacles on the ground when parking.

Brake and stop the parking process if necessary.

NOTICE

Aftermarket accessories mounted on the vehicle, such as bicycle racks, can interfere with the Park Assist functionality and can cause damage.

Do not use Park Assist if there are attachments fitted on the vehicle.

Automatic braking support may occur during parking processes if the driver accelerates too much.

Searching for parking spaces


Please read the introductory information and heed the Warnings and Notice ⇒ and Safety instructions.

Fig. 110 Infotainment system: selecting a parking space (general example).

Number of detected parking spaces.

Possible parking modes:

Cross parking driving forward.

Cross parking in reverse.

Parallel parking in reverse.

Change the preferred parking space (blue vehicle) and parking scenario.

Searching for parking spaces


1. Tap the control in the upper section of the center console.

182
2. While paying attention to traffic around your vehicle, drive slowly past a row of parked vehicles.

Park Assist will automatically look for possible parking spaces.

Park Assist will automatically select a parking space and display it as the preferred parking space (blue vehicle) in the Infotainment system fig. 110 and
The number of detected parking spaces is displayed on the function key fig. 110 .

3. Come to a complete stop and press and hold the brake pedal.

Changing parking spaces and parking scenarios


If there are multiple parking spaces shown along the street in the Infotainment system, you can change the parking space.

1. Tap the desired parking space on the Infotainment system screen fig. 110 .

A new preferred parking space (blue vehicle) is displayed.

If the parking scenario can be changed with the available parking modes, the symbol will be displayed fig. 110 .

1. Tap the symbol.

A new parking scenario is displayed.

Park Assist can be activated subsequently. If you drive past a suitable parking space and then drive into the parking space, this will be indicated afterwards.

If Park Assist is not activated, detected parking spaces fig. 110 are shown in the Park Distance Control screen display, if necessary.

Driving into parking spaces


Please read the introductory information and heed the Warnings and Notice ⇒ and Safety instructions.

Fig. 111 On the instrument cluster display: drive into a parking space along the road (general example).

Search for a parking space.

Driving into a parking space.

Maneuvering into a parking space.

Prompt to drive forward.

Your vehicle.

Detected parking space.

Request to brake.

Progress bar (relative distance remaining).

Request to drive backwards (with driving direction arrow).

183
Fig. 112 On the instrument cluster display: prompt for changing driving direction (general example).

Driving forwards.

Driving backwards.

Requirements
Park Assist has been activated.

A parking space has been found and selected.

The vehicle is in the starting position and its path is highlighted in blue in the Infotainment system.

Driving into parking spaces


1. Stop the vehicle with the brake.

2. Tap in the Infotainment system.

Or: When driving in reverse into a parking space, engage the reverse gear R.

3. Release the steering wheel.

4. Release the brake.

5. Pay attention to the messages and indicators in the instrument cluster display.

6. Accelerate carefully.

7. Apply the brakes if a warning chime sounds, the indicator lights up, or a message appears on the instrument cluster display.

8. If a change of driving direction is shown in the instrument cluster, change gear accordingly fig. 112. Follow the text messages.

9. At the end of a parking maneuver, always wait until Park Assist has completed all rotational movements of the steering wheel in order to achieve an optimum
parking result ⇒ .

10. Carry out several parking maneuvers if necessary.

When the process of driving into a parking space is finished, a text message appears in the instrument cluster display.

11. Park the vehicle ⇒ Parking.

WARNING

During maneuvering, the steering wheel turns quickly. Interfering with the steering wheel can result in serious injury.

Do not take over the steering until the system prompts you to do so.

Take over the steering in dangerous situations.

Assistance during a parking attempt

184
Fig. 113 Infotainment system: taking over the parking process from the driver.

Vehicle “during” a parking attempt.

In difficult parking situations where an “attempt” at parking has already been made, Park Assist can take over the parking process and guide the vehicle into the
parking space fig. 113.

Requirements
Park Assist is not activated.

It is driven forwards or backwards into a parking space ("parked").

Reversing into a parking space


1. Stop the vehicle with the brake pedal.

In the Infotainment system, the function key indicates a detected parking space.

2. To switch to Park Assist, tap .

3. Tap to start the process of driving into a parking space.

Or: Engage reverse gear.

4. Release the steering wheel.

5. Release the brake and follow all the actions for parking as described from item 5.

Drive the front of the vehicle into a parking space


1. Stop the vehicle with the brake pedal.

2. Tap the control for the parking menu.

3. Tap to start the process of driving into a parking space.

Or: Engage reverse gear R.

4. Release the steering wheel.

5. Release the brake and follow all the actions for parking as described from item 5.

If you stop a reverse parking process and reactivate Park Assist, the parking process can be started again.

The lane shown on the Infotainment system during a parking process is a general example. It does not correspond to the actual parking process with Park
Assist.

Exiting a parking space


Please read the introductory information and heed the Warnings and Notice ⇒ and Safety instructions.

185
Fig. 114 Infotainment system: exiting procedure (general example).

Vehicle in the parking space.

Option 1:

1. Start the engine.

2. Press and hold the brake pedal.

3. Activate Park Assist.

4. Activate the turn signal for the side of the road where the vehicle should drive out of the parking space.

5. Start the exiting procedure.

6. Release the steering wheel.

7. Release the brake.

8. Pay attention to the messages in the instrument cluster display.

The vehicle is guided fully onto the road by Park Assist ⇒ .

A chime and a message from the Infotainment system signal that you have exited the parking space.

9. Resume control of the vehicle.

Option 2:

1. Follow all the actions as described above, including item 5.

2. Select the reverse gear.

3. Release the steering wheel.

4. Release the brake.

5. Follow the messages in the instrument cluster display.

6. Apply the brakes if a chime sounds, the indicator comes on, or a prompt to drive forward appears in the instrument cluster display.

The vehicle is guided fully onto the road by Park Assist ⇒ .

A chime and a message from the Infotainment system signal that you have exited the parking space.

7. Resume control of the vehicle.

WARNING

When you maneuver out of a parking space, there is a danger of pulling into moving traffic. Accidents and serious or fatal injuries may occur.

Only drive the vehicle out of the parking space when the traffic situation allows it.

The lane shown on the Infotainment system during a parking process is a general example. It does not correspond to the actual parking process by Park Assist.

Rear Traffic Alert


Rear Traffic Alert monitors the cross
traffic when reversing out of a space or
maneuvering.

WARNING

186
Rear Traffic Alert is not a replacement for the driver's attention and works only within the system limitations. All approaching objects, e.g. pedestrians or objects
approaching quickly, may not be detected. If you do not take care, there is a risk of accidents and serious injuries.

Always stay attentive and do not rely solely on the system. The driver is always responsible for control of the vehicle.

Pay attention to the traffic situation and the vehicle environment.

React quickly to the visual warnings and warning chimes of the Rear Traffic Alert system.

Switching on and off


1. Press the button.

Or: tap the control in the upper section of the center console.

Tap the function key in the Infotainment system.

2. Switch the Rear Traffic Alert on or off.

System function

Fig. 115 Rear Traffic Alert, general example: monitored area around the vehicle that is exiting a parking space.

Fig. 116 Infotainment system: Rear Traffic Alert display.

The Rear Traffic Alert functions with radar sensors in the rear bumper.

The system detects approaching or moving objects in the surrounding area to the rear and to the side and warns the driver if there is an obstacle fig. 115, ⇒

If there is an obstacle, a warning signal will sound and there will be a colored display of the area of the obstacle in the Infotainment system fig. 116.

Automatic braking intervention by Rear Traffic Alert.


1. Press the brake pedal to bring the vehicle to a standstill.

If the driver does not respond, automatic braking support may kick in.

Malfunction

187
If Rear Traffic Alert is malfunctioning, the following indicator light comes on in the Volkswagen Digital Cockpit:

Rear Traffic Alert malfunction (for example. dirty sensors or system error).

Braking assistance systems


Information about braking assistance systems
Braking assistance systems can assist the driver in critical driving and braking situations. The driver is always responsible for safe driving ⇒ .

If a braking assistance system is regulating, continue braking with the necessary force.

If necessary, steer the vehicle.

WARNING

Braking assistance systems cannot replace the driver's attention and can only operate within the limitations of the system. Fast driving on icy, slippery, or wet
roads, as well as following the vehicle ahead too closely, may impair the vehicle stability and cause you to lose control of the vehicle. If you are careless, there is
a risk of accidents, serious injuries and death.

Always stay attentive and do not rely solely on the system. The driver is always responsible for control of the vehicle.

Always adapt your speed and driving style to the visibility, weather, road and traffic conditions. Do not take any risks.

Always keep the footwell beneath the pedals clear so that the brake pedal is unobstructed and can move freely.

Always use suitable tires, as driving stability depends on the tires' ability to grip the road.

ESC, ABS and ASR only function correctly when all four wheels have the intended tires ⇒ .

If the ABS malfunctions, the ESC, ASR and EDS also fail.

When the ignition is switched on, the condition of the braking functions is automatically checked. The indicator lights will come on briefly and then turn off. If an
indicator light remains on permanently, there is a malfunction. Contact an authorized Volkswagen dealer or authorized Volkswagen Service Facility immediately.
Volkswagen recommends contacting an authorized Volkswagen dealer or authorized Volkswagen Service Facility.

WARNING

The effectiveness of the ESC may be reduced considerably if other components and systems that affect driving dynamics have not been maintained correctly or
are malfunctioning. This applies in particular to changes made to the suspension and any non-approved wheel and tire combinations. Accidents and serious or
fatal injuries could result.

Ensure that conversion and modifications to the vehicle are only performed by an authorized Volkswagen dealer or authorized Volkswagen Service
Facility. Volkswagen recommends contacting an authorized Volkswagen dealer or authorized Volkswagen Service Facility.

Always use suitable tires, as driving stability depends on the tires' ability to grip the road.

Electronic Stability Control (ESC)


ESC is regulating the vehicle to reduce the risk of skidding and improve driving stability ⇒ . The indicator light flashes yellow.

Anti-Slip Regulation (ASR)


ASR is regulating the vehicle to reduce the risk of the wheels spinning. The indicator light flashes yellow.

ASR reduces drive power at wheels that are spinning and adapts the drive power to the road conditions. ASR makes it easier to start, accelerate, and drive up hills
⇒ .

Anti-Lock Braking System (ABS)

ABS prevents the wheels from locking during braking so that the vehicle can be steered ⇒ .

Brake Assist System (BAS)

BAS can help to reduce the vehicle braking distance. BAS increases braking power when the driver presses the brake pedal quickly in emergency situations ⇒

Electronic Differential Lock (EDL and XDL)

EDS automatically applies the brakes to a wheel that starts spinning and transfers the drive power to the other driving wheels.

XDS is an extension of the electronic differential lock, and improves traction with braking support to help keep the vehicle in its lane.

Multi Collision Brake

The Automatic Post-Collision Braking System automatically brakes the vehicle if the airbag control module has detected a collision in an accident situation.

Requirements for automatic braking:

The driver does not press the accelerator pedal.


188
Electronic braking distribution (EBD)

The electronic braking distribution (EBD ) regulates the braking force between the front axle and the rear axle, even outside of ABS regulation. Overbraking of the
rear axle is avoided and the vehicle remains stable when braking.

Electromechanical brake booster (eBB)

The electromechanical brake booster (eBB) supports the foot pressure only when the ignition is switched on and enhances the pressure applied to the brake pedal
by the driver ⇒ . In case of braking support by a driver assistance system, such as during control by the ACC or during emergency braking, the brake pedal may
move itself.

After switching off the ignition, braking assistance will be gradually reduced. If the vehicle is still being held by the brake pedal, text messages will appear on the
instrument cluster display. Brake support is limited in this case.

Secure the stationary vehicle against rolling away → page , Parking.

WARNING

Driving without the brake booster or when the brake booster's system function is limited can increase the braking distance significantly. This may lead to
accidents resulting in serious or fatal injuries.

Never stop the engine or switch the ignition off while the vehicle is moving.

Press the brake pedal harder if the brake booster does not work or the vehicle is being towed.

Always keep the footwell beneath the pedals clear so that the brake pedal is unobstructed and can move freely.

Switching the braking support system on and off


Driving situations

In order to avoid risks, the brake systems should not be switched off under normal conditions ⇒ .

WARNING

When ESC is switched off, the risk of the vehicle swerving is significantly higher. The vehicle can be difficult for inexperienced drivers to handle at high speeds.
Accidents and serious or fatal injuries could result.

Only switch off ESC completely if you are driving on a closed track and are experienced in sporty driving.

Only switch on ESC Sport if you are driving on a closed track and are experienced in sporty driving.

Do not take any risks.

Switching on and off


1. Open the vehicle settings of the Infotainment system ⇒ Vehicle settings menu.

2. Open the Vehicle menu.

3. Open the Exterior menu.

4. Open the Brakes menu.

5. Activate the function in the ESC system drop-down list.

If the setting is no longer being used, you should completely switch off the braking assistance system again ⇒ .

ASR

It can be helpful to switch off ASR when the vehicle is driven on loose ground or when “rocking” the vehicle out of place because it is stuck ⇒ .

ASR is manually switched off. The yellow indicator light turns on.

ESC Sport

Golf GTI, R model: On special sports models, the function assists with sporty driving. The ESC intervenes later to stabilize the vehicle, e.g. during fast cornering ⇒
.

ESC Sport is switched on. The yellow indicator light turns on.

ESC Off

Golf GTI, R model: On special sports models, the function assists experienced drivers with sporty driving. The ESC is switched off and stabilizing interventions are
not performed. Always read the safety instructions ⇒ .

ESC is manually switched off. The yellow indicator light turns on.

Defining ESC mode as a favorite in the Infotainment system

To access ESC settings directly, you can save a favorite function, e.g. for switching off ESC, in Control Center in the Infotainment system. This function depends on
189
the vehicle equipment → page , Overview and controls of the 10" version , → page , Overview and controls of the 8.25" version .

Troubleshooting
Electromechanical brake servo failure

Do not continue driving!

The red warning light turns on.

A message is displayed if necessary. Press the brake pedal harder, as the lack of braking assistance will increase the braking distance.

1. Contact an authorized Volkswagen dealer or authorized Volkswagen Service Facility for assistance.

Electromechanical brake servo faulty

The yellow indicator light turns on.

A message is displayed for a few seconds.

The brake pedal might pulse when pressed. Press the brake pedal harder, because the reduced braking assistance will increase the braking distance.

1. Contact an authorized Volkswagen dealer or authorized Volkswagen Service Facility. Volkswagen recommends contacting an authorized Volkswagen dealer or
authorized Volkswagen Service Facility.

ABS failure or malfunction

The yellow indicator light turns on.

1. Contact an authorized Volkswagen dealer or authorized Volkswagen Service Facility. Volkswagen recommends contacting an authorized Volkswagen dealer or
authorized Volkswagen Service Facility.

The vehicle can be braked without ABS.

ESC malfunction

The yellow indicator light turns on. ESC has been switched off.

There is a fault or malfunction.

1. Switch the ignition off and on.

2. Drive a short distance at a speed of approximately 15 km/h (approx. 9 mph) to 20 km/h (approx. 12 mph).

3. If the indicator light stays on, contact a suitably qualified professional. Volkswagen recommends contacting an authorized Volkswagen dealer or authorized
Volkswagen Service Facility.

Noises in the braking assistance systems

When the braking assistance systems are actively regulating, the brake pedal may move or noises may occur.

1. Continue braking with the necessary force and, if necessary, steer the vehicle.

WARNING

If the brake warning light comes on together with the indicator light, the regulating function of the ABS could be malfunctioning. This can cause the
rear wheels to lock when braking. This could cause you to lose control of the vehicle and lead to accidents with serious or fatal injuries.

Drive at low speed to the nearest authorized Volkswagen dealer or authorized Volkswagen Service Facility to have the brake system checked.
Volkswagen recommends contacting an authorized Volkswagen dealer or authorized Volkswagen Service Facility.

Avoid sudden braking or driving maneuvers.

WARNING

If the indicator light does not turn off, or comes on during the journey, the ABS is not working correctly. The vehicle can only be stopped with the normal
brakes. If the ABS is restricted, this may lead to accidents causing damage to the vehicle and serious or fatal injuries.

Contact an authorized Volkswagen dealer or authorized Volkswagen Service Facility. Volkswagen recommends contacting an authorized Volkswagen
dealer or authorized Volkswagen Service Facility.

190
Practical equipment
Storage compartments
Introduction

WARNING

Loose objects can be thrown around the inside of the vehicleduring sudden driving or braking maneuvers. This can cause a loss of vehicle control, and can
cause accidents and serious or fatal injuries.

Store objects in only closed storage compartments.

Always keep the storage compartments closed while driving.

Only hang lightweight clothing, up to a maximum of 2.5 kg (approximately 5.5 lbs), from the coat hooks in the vehicle.

Never leave heavy, hard or sharp objects in clothing pockets.

WARNING

If the glove compartment is open while you are driving, objects may be flung into the vehicle interior. This can cause a loss of vehicle control, and can cause
accidents and serious or fatal injuries.

Always keep the glove compartment closed while driving.

WARNING

Lighters in the vehicle can become damaged or ignite unintentionally, for example due to high surface temperatures. This can cause severe burns and vehicle
damage.

Before closing compartments or storage areas, always make sure that there are no cigarette lighters near the sections that will be closing.

Never place lighters in compartments, in storage areas, or on other surfaces in the vehicle.

WARNING

Incorrect usage of the cup holders can cause injuries. Hot beverages in the cup holders could spill and cause burns while driving, during sudden braking
maneuvers, or in collisions.

Do not place hot beverages in the cup holders.

Take care that only suitably sized drinks are stored in the cup holder. Drinks must always be steady and secure in the cup holder.

WARNING

Closed beverage bottles can explode from heat and burst from frost and cause severe injuries.

Never leave closed beverage bottles in an extremely hot or extremely cold vehicle.

NOTICE

Objects stored in the vehicle may be damaged by strong sunlight or the effects of heat or cold or cause damage to the vehicle.

Never leave any objects, groceries, or medications that are sensitive to temperature in the vehicle interior.

Bear in mind that objects made from transparent materials, e.g. transparent suction cups on door windows, can concentrate sunlight.

Sockets
Introduction
Electrical devices can be connected to the sockets in the vehicle.

The 12 V socket only works when the ignition is switched on.

WARNING

Using sockets and connected electrical devices incorrectly can cause fires and serious injuries or death.

191
If the electrical devices become too warm, turn off the devices immediately and disconnect them.

Be aware that sockets and devices connected to them may still be used, e.g. by children in the vehicle, when the ignition is switched off.

NOTICE

Electrical devices that are unsuitable, not permitted, or connected incorrectly may cause damage to the vehicle or electronics. Do not use any malfunctioning
devices.

Never connect electrical devices that provide power, such as solar panels or battery chargers, to the 12 V socket in order to charge the 12 V vehicle
battery.

Only use electrical devices that have been tested for compliance with the applicable directives for electromagnetic compatibility.

Do not use any malfunctioning devices.

To reduce the risk of damage from voltage fluctuations, turn electrical devices off before switching the ignition on or off and before starting the engine.

Refer to the operating instructions for the electrical devices.

NOTICE

The vehicle electrical system can be damaged when the maximum load is exceeded.

Never connect electrical devices that draw more than the specified load of a 12 V socket.

The 12 V vehicle battery will drain if the ignition and electrical devices are switched on while the engine is switched off.

Unshielded devices can cause malfunctions in the radio, the Infotainment system and in the vehicle electronics, depending on the vehicle equipment.

Sockets in the vehicle


Please read the introductory information and heed the Warnings and Notice ⇒ and Introduction.
Do not exceed the maximum power of the sockets. The power draw of the external devices is indicated on their identification labels.

12 V socket

Fig. 117 In the lower part of the center console and in the luggage compartment: Folding 12-volt socket (general example).

The total continuous output of all 12 V sockets in the vehicle is 120 watts ⇒ Introduction.

The maximum power of a 12 V socket in the vehicle with the engine running totals 180 watts.

192
NOTICE

Using 12 V sockets for too long at maximum power can cause the fuse to blow.

Never use 12 V sockets at their maximum power for longer than 10 minutes.

Only ever use a single 12 V socket at maximum power.

Charging Options for Mobile Devices


Please read the introductory information and heed the Warnings and Notice ⇒ and Introduction.

You can charge mobile devices in the


vehicle either wirelessly or by using the
built-in USB-C connectors.

Charging with USB-C Connectors

The vehicle may contain the following USB -C ports:

Symbol for a USB port for data transmission and charging. Symbol for a USB port for charging only.

Available Charging Power

Voltages up to 20 V are provided via the USB port, which enables up to 45 W charging power.

Depending on the vehicle equipment, the following charging profiles may be supported by the USB ports:

Legacy charging (2.5 W).

BC1.2 (7.5 W).

USB-C charging (15 W).

USB power delivery (up to 45 W).

The actual charging power of the connected device depends on the following aspects:

Supported charging profiles.

Device charge level.

Device temperature.

Charging cable used.

For double USB ports, the charging power can be split between both ports.

Wireless charging function

Fig. 118 General example: Storage compartment with a liner pad for wireless charging in the center console.

Shelf with a liner pad.

The wireless charging function depends on the vehicle equipment and is not available in all countries.

The wireless charging function uses electromagnetic induction to transfer energy wirelessly over short distances. To use this function, you need a suitable Qi-
certified cell phone. To find out whether a cell phone supports the Qi standard, see the cell phone operating instructions. New technologies might not be compatible
with the wireless charging function. The manufacturer of the cell phone can offer further information regarding compatibility.

The maximum charging power is 5 watts.

193
Depending on the vehicle, the rear shelf with liner mat fig. 118 for the wireless charging function is located in the center console or between the front seats in a
storage compartment.

In some vehicles, the liner mat bears a phone symbol, which indicates the center position for the wireless charging function fig. 118. The symbol on the liner mat
may look different in some vehicles.

Only a single Qi-certified cell phone without a protective case and with maximum dimensions (width x length) of 80 mm x 140 mm (approx. 3 in x 6 in) should be
placed flat on the wireless charging function shelf at a time.

Qi-certified cell phones with larger dimensions cannot be charged wirelessly.

Wireless Cell Phone Charging

Requirements
You must have a suitable cell phone that does not exceed the maximum dimensions and supports the Qi standard.

1. Before charging, remove any foreign objects with metal components, such as coins, from the storage compartment and follow the cell phone operating
instructions.

2. Place your cell phone, without a protective case and with the display facing upward, completely flat at the center of the shelf.

The charging process starts automatically.

The Infotainment system informs you when the charging process is starting and, if applicable, if there are any foreign objects with metal components in the storage
compartment. Remove foreign objects immediately.

Your Cell Phone Is Not Recognized

If a cell phone is not placed on the shelf correctly or if it is too large, it may not be detected correctly or detected at all. The Infotainment system may notify you of a
foreign object in the storage compartment.

If a suitable cell phone is used and its position is corrected, the fault may be eliminated. Remove your cell phone and place it correctly in the storage compartment
for the wireless charging function.

Storage compartment cover

Depending on the vehicle equipment and in some countries, the storage compartment for the wireless charging function may have a cover for the cell phone display.

Only a cell phone with maximum dimensions (width x length) of approximately 80 mm x 140 mm (3 in x 6 in), in accordance with the specifications, may be placed
in the covered storage compartment.

The cover can prevent you from being distracted by the cell phone, e.g. by incoming notifications.

The cover must always be closed while driving and the display of the cell phone must be completely covered up.

WARNING

Notifications on the cell phone display may distract the driver. This can result in accidents and serious injury or death.

Only place a single suitable and, if applicable, Qi-certified cell phone without a protective case and with maximum dimensions (width x length) of
80 mm x 140 mm (approx. 3 in x 6 in), in accordance with the specifications, on the shelf in the storage compartment at a time.

Remove objects that prevent the cover from closing.

Always keep the cover closed while driving.

WARNING

Metal objects on the shelf can become very hot. This may cause burns or fires.

Do not place metal objects or objects with metal components on the wireless charging shelf.

NOTICE

If any ID cards, debit cards or credit cards with magnetic strips or chips are placed on the wireless charging shelf, the data saved on the magnetic strips or chips
could become unusable or damaged.

Do not place any ID cards, debit cards or credit cards with magnetic strips or chips on the wireless charging shelf.

194
Data transmission
Cyber security
Cyber security describes measures that
reduce the risk of illegal access to
vehicle functions, data and control
modules caused by malware or an
Internet attack.

What are connectivity components?

Control modules for data transmission, interfaces, media and diagnostic connections are connectivity components, through which information and data can be
exchanged between the vehicle and external devices or the Internet.

Connectivity components are the key points for cyber security. Connectivity components are also equipped with security mechanisms that minimize the risk of
unauthorized access to vehicle systems.

The following connectivity components may not be available in all vehicles:

Diagnostic connection port

Control module with installed eSIM card.

Mobile phone interface

App-Connect.

Wi-Fi hotspot.

NFC radio technology.

Bluetooth® interface.

USB port.

SD card slot.

SIM card slot.

Security mechanisms

Software and security mechanisms available in the vehicle undergo continuous development. Similar to computers or operating systems on cell phones, software
and security mechanisms in the vehicle may also be updated at various times.

Generally, system updates improve the security, stability, and processing speeds of the vehicle systems in vehicles.

WARNING

In spite of the integrated security mechanisms, malware can cause malfunctions in control modules and the vehicle. Malfunctions may cause serious accidents
and fatal injuries.

If the vehicle works or reacts differently to normal, reduce your speed in a controlled manner.

Contact qualified professionals for assistance. Volkswagen recommends contacting an authorized Volkswagen dealer or authorized Volkswagen Service
Facility.

Malware can also access data and information that are stored in the control modules, in the Infotainment system, on connected data carriers, and in paired cell
phones.

Minimizing risks

You can actively help to reduce the risk of unauthorized access to vehicle systems and functions by following these guidelines:

Only use data carriers, Bluetooth devices and cell phones in the vehicle that do not contain any manipulated data or malware.

Install the system updates provided by Volkswagen immediately ⇒ System update.

Only have the vehicle repaired and serviced by suitably qualified professionals. Volkswagen recommends contacting an authorized Volkswagen dealer or
authorized Volkswagen Service Facility.

WARNING

Computers, data carriers and cell phones that are connected to the Internet or are used in public or private networks can be infected by viruses through
manipulated data and by malware. This may cause a complete loss of data or damage to computers, data carriers or cell phones.

Protect computers, data carriers and cell phones with a suitable antivirus program and by taking generally recognized precautions.

Regularly update the antivirus program using the supplied system updates or upgrades provided by the vendor.

195
System update
Introduction
The system update is a preventative
measure, for example, to protect from
malware and to optimize functionality.

A system update can be used to update the software of control modules in the vehicle.

Depending on the vehicle and country, this can be performed in two ways:

System update by a suitably qualified authorized Volkswagen dealer or authorized Volkswagen Service Facility.

System update by Volkswagen via an Over-the-Air Update.

How do I recognize an upcoming system update?

When switched on, the Infotainment system displays an upcoming system update.

If multiple system updates are available for the vehicle at a given time, one system update must be successfully completed before the next system update can be
carried out.

WARNING

In very occasional circumstances, there is the possibility that a control module may no longer work properly after a system update. Malfunctions in a control
module and the vehicle can cause serious accidents and fatal injuries.

If the vehicle works or reacts differently to normal while driving, reduce your speed in a controlled manner.

Contact qualified professionals for assistance. Volkswagen recommends contacting an authorized Volkswagen dealer or authorized Volkswagen Service
Facility.

WARNING

If the digital instrument cluster malfunctions after a system update, no instruments, warning lights, symbols or messages can be displayed. Driving with a
malfunctioning instrument cluster can lead to serious accidents and fatal injuries.

Do not use the vehicle. Contact Volkswagen Customer Care.

A measure (e.g. engine tuning) to increase performance or efficiency that has not been undertaken by Volkswagen may be undone when you update the
system.

Depending on the vehicle equipment, “release notes” that describe the changes to the vehicle status may be displayed once before or after a system update.
The release notes cannot be viewed again after this.

Prerequisites for a system update


Please read the introductory information and heed the Warnings and Notice ⇒ Introduction.
The following prerequisites must be met so that the system update download can take place and you can install the software.

The “system update” function is available in your country.

A primary user has been set up.

The vehicle is in an area with enough mobile reception.

The 12-volt vehicle battery is sufficiently charged.

Download and software installation


Please read the introductory information and heed the Warnings and Notice ⇒ Introduction.

Download costs

A system update is downloaded via the factory-installed control module with an eSIM card and is free of charge. Volkswagen pays the connection charges.

The download duration depends on the network quality, file size and type of system update.

The download can be interrupted at any time and then continued if required by switching on the ignition.

Prerequisites for download


The requirements for a system update have been met ⇒ Prerequisites for a system update .

The ignition and Infotainment system are switched on.

Information in the Infotainment system has been noted.

196
The download has been confirmed in the Infotainment system.

Software installation

Select a time for the software installation of a system update at which neither you nor any other person needs to use the vehicle.

WARNING

Control units are deactivated and do not operate for the duration of any software installation. Driving with deactivated or non-functioning control units can lead
to accidents and fatal injuries.

Never operate your vehicle during a software installation.

Requirements
The requirements for a system update have been met ⇒ Prerequisites for a system update .

The vehicle is parked safely in accordance with legal requirements and local conditions ⇒ Parking.

The software installation in the Infotainment system is confirmed.

Functional limitations during software installation

During software installation, control units, functions and displays will not be available. Do not use the vehicle during this process and do not operate the Infotainment
system.

Infotainment system central computer: During software installation, the central computer, display and control unit and other control modules will not be
available.

Control unit for the digital instrument cluster: During software installation, it may be the case that there are no or limited displays in the instrument cluster.

Control module with integrated eSIM: for the duration of the software installation process, the “Emergency Call Service” will not be available.

Switching on the ignition during the software installation can cause the following error message: Error: Emergency call function. Please service vehicle. This is
normal in this case. Please wait a few minutes until the message disappears.

Following the software installation

After the software installation and before starting the engine, read the message regarding completion of the installation in the Infotainment system or instrument
cluster. The vehicle takes up to a minute to display the system update status.

The engine can be started following the successful software installation.

If the software installation is unsuccessful: ⇒ Troubleshooting.

Troubleshooting
Please read the introductory information and heed the Warnings and Notice ⇒ Introduction.

Software installation is unsuccessful


If the software installation was not successful, a corresponding error message appears in the Infotainment system or instrument cluster. Take note of
corresponding messages and warning notifications.

If there was a critical installation error, control modules may no longer function or not function correctly. Functions and displays will not be available until the
error is rectified. Do not use the vehicle. If this is the case, contact Volkswagen Customer Care.

Should I allow the system update?

For your own benefit, you should run the system update as soon as possible. If the system update is ignored multiple times by the driver, you must see a suitably
qualified professional for advice. Volkswagen recommends contacting an authorized Volkswagen dealer or authorized Volkswagen Service Facility.

Can I interrupt the software installation?

No, this is not possible.

What happens if the software installation is interrupted?

If a software installation is interrupted, e.g. due to damage to the vehicle's electrical system, control modules cannot be updated and may be damaged by the
incomplete software installation.

Wired and wireless connections


Introduction
Some external devices can be connected to the Infotainment system using the wired and wireless connections in the vehicle, if available.

The type and number of wired and wireless connections depends on the vehicle equipment and the country. The connections may differ within a model line or in a
model with optional equipment.

In wired connections, only use the original connecting cable that belongs to the device or the connecting cable that was placed in the vehicle at the factory, if

197
available.

If the plug on the connector cable cannot be inserted, check the position and the connections.

NOTICE

Using unsuitable or damaged connector cables or inserting the plug on the connector cables in the wrong position or too forcefully may cause malfunctions and
damage to devices.

Only use suitable and undamaged connector cables.

Hold the plug on the connector cable in the correct position and insert it into the intended socket while pressing lightly. Pressing strongly can damage the
device connection and the plug on the connector cable.

The connector cable must not be pinched or bent sharply.

If a connected device is not recognized, disconnect all connected devices and then reconnect the device. Check the function of the connector cable used, if
necessary.

If malfunctions occur in a connected device, restart the device. This sometimes fixes the error.

USB port
Please read the introductory information and heed the Warnings and Notice ⇒ Introduction.

Using the USB port, you can transfer


data and charge devices or only charge
devices.

USB-C port

Fig. 119 USB-C connection in the vehicle (general example).

The vehicle may contain the following USB-C ports:

Symbol for a USB port for data transmission and charging. Symbol for a USB port for charging only.
You can find information about charging options and charging power here ⇒ Charging Options for Mobile Devices .

Possible USB port installation locations

The number and installation locations of USB ports depend on the vehicle and vehicle equipment and are not available in all countries.

In the center console.

At the base of the interior rearview mirror.

In the storage compartment in the center console.

In the compartment underneath the center armrest.


USB ports at the rear seats only come with a charging function.

Available Data Transfer Functions

The following USB data transfer functions are available depending on the vehicle equipment.

App-Connect ⇒ App-Connect.

Media playback ⇒ Media mode.

Update, e.g. of the navigation data ⇒ Navigation data.

198
Instructions and restrictions
Only use suitable USB connection cables. The USB connection cable must match the USB port installed in the vehicle.

Dirty, overheated or damaged data carriers are not to be used. Read and heed the information provided by the manufacturer.

Difference in quality between data carriers from different manufacturers can cause problems with media playback.

Using USB extension cables, USB adapters or USB hubs may result in malfunctions or failure of the USB functions.

Bluetooth® interface
Please read the introductory information and heed the Warnings and Notice ⇒ Introduction.
The Bluetooth interface is a wireless connection.

In Bluetooth audio mode, audio files that are on a Bluetooth audio source that is connected via Bluetooth, such as a cell phone, can be played through the vehicle
speakers.

Bluetooth audio mode is only possible in vehicles equipped with a factory-installed mobile phone interface that supports this function.

Bluetooth profiles

The Infotainment system is equipped with a Bluetooth interface at the factory.

A maximum of three Bluetooth devices can be connected at the same time.

The following Bluetooth profiles may be available in the specified version or in another version:

HFP 1.7.

Telephony and handsfree mode.

A2DP 1.3.

Music playback.

AVRCP 1.6.

Display and operation for music playback.

Transfer of cover art.

PBAP 1.2.

Access to phone book and call lists.

MAP 1.4.

Access to SMS and e-mail.

SPP 1.2.

Serial data transfer via Bluetooth.

Starting Bluetooth audio

Requirements
The Bluetooth audio source is paired with and connected to the Infotainment system ⇒ Coupling, connecting and managing.

The Bluetooth audio source supports the Bluetooth profile Advanced Audio Distribution Profile (A2DP).

1. Lower the volume on the Infotainment system.

2. Activate Bluetooth visibility on the external Bluetooth audio source, such as a cell phone.

3. Open the Media menu.

4. Tap Source and select Bluetooth audio .

5. If necessary, start playback on the Bluetooth audio source manually.

When playback from the Bluetooth audio source is finished, the Infotainment system remains in Bluetooth audio mode.

Controlling playback

The extent that the Bluetooth audio source can be controlled by the Infotainment system depends on the type of Bluetooth audio source that is connected.

For media players that support the AVRCP Bluetooth profile, playback from the Bluetooth audio source can be started or stopped automatically when Bluetooth
audio mode or another audio source is selected. Depending on the Bluetooth audio source, it may also be possible to display and play the track on the Infotainment
system.

Because of the large number of possible Bluetooth audio sources, it is not possible to guarantee that all functions described can be performed correctly.

On a connected Bluetooth audio source, all warning and operation tones, such as touch tones on a cell phone, should generally be switched off to avoid
interference and malfunctions.

Depending on the device, if an external media player is connected to the Infotainment system via Bluetooth and the USB port at the same time, the
Bluetooth audio connection may be automatically disconnected.
199
Wi-FI hotspot
Introduction
The "Wi-Fi hotspot" function is not available in all countries and vehicles.

Some Infotainment systems can be used as a Wi-Fi hotspot for Internet access on up to eight Wi-Fi devices.

Some Infotainment systems can use the Wi-Fi hotspot on an external Wi-Fi device (Wi-Fi client) ⇒ Setting up a Wi-Fi client.

A data connection is required for connecting to the Internet and for certain functions, such as using VW Car-Net.
The Wi-Fi connection is encrypted by default with WPA2 encryption for security reasons. Volkswagen recommends always using WPA2 encryption. Observe
legal regulations for the country where you are operating the vehicle.

There may be fees for the required data connection. Volkswagen recommends using a mobile phone plan with a flat rate data package due to the possible
volume of data. Information on this can be obtained from the mobile network provider.

Depending on your mobile data rate, additional costs, such as roaming fees, may result from downloading and using data plans online, especially in other
countries.

When crossing the border into countries with different permitted radio frequencies than your own country, use of the wireless function/the Wi-Fi must be
deactivated to comply with legal provisions. The wired functions are not affected by this restriction and can still be used.

Opening the Wi-Fi settings


1. Tap HOME Wi-Fi.

2. Make corresponding entries or tap function keys.

Changes will be automatically applied when the menu is closed.

Setting options
Setting up the Infotainment system as a Wi-Fi hotspot.

Connecting to the Infotainment system via a quick connection.

Connecting with the Wi-Fi.

Establishing a data connection


Wi-Fi (10" version)
Wi-Fi in accordance with IEEE 802.11 a/b/g/n/ac.

2.4 GHz and 5 GHz data transfer.

Three Wi-Fi modes at once:

Tethering (2.4 GHz or 5 GHz).

2.4 GHz access point.

5 GHz access point.

Wi-Fi antenna.

One multi-band aerial each for 2.4 GHz and 5 GHz.

Up to eight Wi-Fi devices can be connected at the same time.

Internet connection via Wi-Fi:

Tethering via cell phone.

Hotspot for clients in the vehicle.

Apple CarPlay™ via Wi-Fi.

Android Auto™ via Wi-Fi.

Audio and video streaming via Wi-Fi.

Simplified pairing process via WPS , NFC or QR code .

Possible data connection types


eSIM (embedded SIM): The vehicle has a control module with installed SIM card (SIM). In order to use the Wi-Fi hotspot, you need to purchase data plans via the
In-Car Shop or via the online shop of our mobile communications partner.

External Wi-Fi device: Use the Wi-Fi hotspot on an external cell phone ⇒ Setting up a Wi-Fi client.

The types of possible data connections depend on the country and equipment.

Setting up and deactivating a Wi-Fi hotspot


200
Depending on the vehicle equipment and the country, the Infotainment system can be used as a Wi-Fi hotspot for Internet access on up to eight Wi-Fi devices, e.g.
cell phones.

To connect to the Internet, a data connection is also required, e.g. via an internal eSIM card or an external Wi-Fi device.

The possible types of data connections depend on the country and the Infotainment system being used.

Setting up a Wi-Fi hotspot

You will need to enter information both on the Wi-Fi device and in the Infotainment system.

1. Tap HOME Wi-Fi Infotainment system as hotspot.

2. Tap Use as hotspot and activate it.

3. Search for the Wi-Fi hotspot's name on the Wi-Fi device.

4. Enter the network key that is displayed on the Wi-Fi device and confirm it.

The Wi-Fi connection will be established. If necessary, you may need to enter additional information on the Wi-Fi device.

5. Optional: repeat the process to connect other Wi-Fi devices.


The name and network key for the Wi-Fi hotspot are generated automatically. You can then change these and set your own name and network key for the Wi-
Fi hotspot.

Deactivating a Wi-Fi hotspot


1. Tap HOME Wi-Fi Infotainment system as hotspot.

2. Tap Mobile hotspot and deactivate it.

Setting up a Wi-Fi client


The Infotainment system can use the Wi-Fi hotspot of an external Wi-Fi device, e.g. of a cell phone, to connect to the Internet and use mobile online services.

Connecting to Wi-Fi
1. Activate the Wi-Fi hotspot on the Wi-Fi device. Refer to the manufacturer's operating instructions.

2. Tap HOME Wi-Fi Wi-Fi: .

3. Tap Search for Wi-Fi .

The Infotainment system scans for Wi-Fi hotspots in the area. This scan process can take a few seconds.

4. Select the Wi-Fi network of the preferred Wi-Fi device.

5. Enter the Wi-Fi hotspot network key in the Infotainment system and confirm it.

The Wi-Fi connection will be established. If necessary, you may need to enter additional information on the Wi-Fi device.
Due to the large number of Wi-Fi devices that are available, there is no guarantee that all functions will always be available.

The Wi-Fi function may not be available in all countries and may vary.

WPS with Infotainment system as client


The Wi-Fi device supports WPS.

1. Tap HOME Wi-Fi Wi-Fi: .

2. Tap WPS quick connection (WPS button).

3. Activate WPS on the external Wi-Fi device.

The Wi-Fi connection will be established. If necessary, you may need to enter additional information on the Wi-Fi device.
WPS is not supported by all Wi-Fi devices. In this case, connect manually:

Setting up the Infotainment system as a Wi-Fi hotspot ⇒ Wi-FI hotspot, ⇒ Setting up and deactivating a Wi-Fi hotspot .

Or: Connect the Infotainment system to the Wi-Fi hotspot of an external Wi-Fi device as a client .

Quick connection
Quick connection makes it possible to easily and quickly set up a wireless local network with encryption. In several countries, the function can alternatively be
executed by scanning in a QR code.

WPS with the Infotainment system as a Wi-Fi hotspot

Requirements
The Wi-Fi hotspot of the Infotainment system is activated.

The Wi-Fi device supports WPS.

1. Tap HOME Wi-Fi.


201
2. Tap Quick connection with Infotainment system.

3. Activate WPS on the external Wi-Fi device to be connected.

The Wi-Fi connection will be established. If necessary, you may need to enter additional information on the Wi-Fi device.

4. Repeat the process to connect additional Wi-Fi devices.

Only one WPS connection can be established at a time. If multiple connection attempts start at the same time, all connection attempts will fail.

Setting up a Wi-Fi connection via NFC

The Wi-Fi connection can be established via NFC using the shelf of the cordless charging function.
The availability of the Wi-Fi connection via NFC depends on the cell phone used, its operating system and the Infotainment system used.

Requirements
NFC technology and a rear shelf for the wireless charging function are installed in the vehicle.

NFC Is activated on the Wi-Fi device.

The Wi-Fi hotspot of the Infotainment system is activated.

1. Tap HOME Wi-Fi.

2. Tap Quick connection with Infotainment system.

3. Unlock the Wi-Fi device and place on the rear shelf for the wireless charging function ⇒ Charging Options for Mobile Devices .

The Wi-Fi device is connected as client to the Wi-Fi hotspot of the Infotainment system.
The wireless charging function is deactivated while the Infotainment system is in the Wi-Fi settings menu. Wireless charging is reactivated if you leave the
settings menu.

On older Wi-Fi devices, the functionality may be restricted or not work at all. Ensure that you always use the latest software version for your Wi-Fi device.

Setting up a Wi-Fi connection via QR code

The Wi-Fi connection can also be established by scanning the corresponding QR code.

Requirements
The Wi-Fi hotspot of the Infotainment system is activated.

A suitable application for scanning QR codes is installed on the Wi-Fi device.

1. Tap HOME Wi-Fi.

2. Tap Quick connection with Infotainment system.

3. Scan the QR code on the screen of the Infotainment system with the Wi-Fi device.

The Wi-Fi device is connected as client to the Wi-Fi hotspot of the Infotainment system.

App-Connect
Introduction
App-Connect makes it possible to display and control content and functions displayed on the cell phone through the Infotainment system screen.

To do this, the cell phone must be connected to the Infotainment system via a USB interface with a data transfer function.

Some technologies can also be used with App-Connect Wireless via the Bluetooth interface and a Wi-Fi connection.

The following technologies may be available:


Apple CarPlay™.

Apple CarPlay™ Wireless.

Android Auto™.

Android Auto™ Wireless.

MirrorLink®.

Which App-Connect technologies are available to you depends on the country and on the cell phone in use.

MirrorLink, Apple CarPlay and Android Auto are technologies which are operated by third parties and provided by Volkswagen. Volkswagen is not responsible if
these technologies are canceled, discontinued or deactivated during the service life of the vehicle.

You can find more information on the Volkswagen website.

App-Connect wireless function in the event of border crossings

202
In the event of border crossings into countries with different permissible radio frequencies than your own country, please note the following:

The App-Connect wireless function may be limited due to legal provisions, or may not be possible at all. This can be indicated by a message in the Infotainment
system.

The App-Connect wireless function must be deactivated due to legal provisions. The Wi-Fi hotspot must be deactivated.

This does not apply to wired functions.

Opening the App-Connect main menu


Navigation to the App-Connect main menu depends on the Infotainment system being used.

1. Tap HOME .

Or: press APP .

Setting up App-Connect Wireless

In order to use App-Connect Wireless, first pair the cell phone with the Infotainment system.

Connecting a cell phone for the first time


1. Unlock the cell phone.

2. Activate Wi-Fi reception and Bluetooth on the cell phone.

3. Connect the cell phone to the Infotainment system via a USB cable or Bluetooth.

4. Open the App-Connect main menu if it does not open automatically.

5. Select the cell phone and your preferred technology.

6. Allow the Infotainment system the required access. To do this, confirm authorization requests on the cell phone.

7. Disconnect the USB connection and re-connect with the Infotainment system using Wi-Fi or Bluetooth.

App-Connect Wireless set-up is complete.

Pairing is complete. The paired cell phone can now use App-Connect Wireless in the future without a USB connection.

If any pop-up menus were dismissed during the connection process, App-Connect Wireless will not be available. In this case, Volkswagen recommends deleting the
devices from the cell phone settings and Infotainment system and restarting the connection process.
App-Connect Wireless may not be supported by all technologies.

WARNING

Using apps while driving can distract from traffic. Driver distraction can cause serious accidents and fatal injuries.

Only use apps and functions when the vehicle is stationary.

Always drive attentively and responsibly.

WARNING

If unsuitable apps are used or apps are not used correctly, this may result in vehicle damage and accidents with serious or even fatal injuries.

Protect the cell phone and its apps from misuse.

Volkswagen is not responsible for vehicle damage that is caused by low-quality or malfunctioning third-party apps, inadequate programming of third-party
apps, insufficient network strength, data loss, misuse of mobile devices, or malware on data carriers, computers, tablets and cell phones.

Apps
Please read the introductory information and heed the Warnings and Notice ⇒ Introduction.
Content from Volkswagen apps and third party provider apps displayed on cell phones can be displayed on the Infotainment system screen using Volkswagen App-
Connect.

Apps from third-party providers may be incompatible.

The use of apps and the required mobile phone connection may be subject to additional charges.

Apps can be based on many different designs and can also differ depending on the vehicle and country. The content, scope, and providers of the apps may vary.
Furthermore, some apps depend on the availability of services from third party providers.

It cannot be guaranteed that the apps that are offered will be able to run on all cell phones and with all operating systems.

The apps provided by Volkswagen can also be changed, canceled, deactivated, reactivated, and enhanced without notice.

To avoid driver distraction, only certified apps can be used while driving.

203
Symbols and settings for App-Connect
Please read the introductory information and heed the Warnings and Notice ⇒ Introduction.
Symbols in the App-Connect menu
The symbols present depend on the type of Infotainment system and the vehicle model.

Show further information. Open the App-Connect settings menu. Open the App-Connect settings menu. Select the Apple CarPlay technology.
Select the Android Auto technology. Select the MirrorLink technology.

Setting options in the App-Connect settings menu

The setting options depend on the integrated Infotainment system.

Mobile devices: Open the device manager.

Activate data transmission for VW apps: Data transmission for VW apps is activated.

Allow MirrorLink messages to display: Messages are displayed when using MirrorLink.

Apple CarPlay™
Please read the introductory information and heed the Warnings and Notice ⇒ Introduction.

Requirements
The following requirements must be met in order to use Apple CarPlay:

The iPhone must support Apple CarPlay.

Voice control (Siri) must be activated on the iPhone.

Apple CarPlay must be activated in the iPhone settings without restrictions.

The iPhone must be connected to the Infotainment system with a USB connection. Only USB ports with data transfer are suitable for use with Apple CarPlay.

The USB cable being used must be an original cable from Apple.

Apple CarPlay Wireless: Bluetooth and Wi-Fi must also be activated on the iPhone.
These technologies may not be available in all countries.

Information on technical requirements, compatible iPhones, certified apps and availability can be found at the Volkswagen and Apple CarPlay website or at
an authorized Volkswagen dealer or authorized Volkswagen Service Facility.

Connecting

When connecting an iPhone for the first time, follow the instructions on the Infotainment system screen and the iPhone display.

The requirements must be met in order to use Apple CarPlay.

Starting Apple CarPlay


1. Tap MENU App-Connect to open the App-Connect main menu.

Or: press APP .

2. To connect to the iPhone, tap Apple CarPlay.

Disconnecting
1. Tap in Apple CarPlay mode to open the App-Connect main menu.

2. To end the active connection, tap or .

The presentation of the function keys in the display may vary.

Special conditions

During an active connection with Apple CarPlay, the following conditions apply:

Bluetooth connections between the iPhone and the Infotainment system are not possible.

If there is an active Bluetooth connection, it will be automatically ended.

For an iPhone connected with the Infotainment system via Apple CarPlay, phone functions can only be accessed via Apple CarPlay.

The connected iPhone cannot be used as a media device in the Media main menu.

It is not possible to use the internal navigation and Apple CarPlay navigation at the same time. The route guidance which was started last ends the previous
active one.

Depending on your Infotainment system, you can view information about telephone operation in the instrument cluster display.

Depending on your Infotainment system and the navigation app used, you can view upcoming turns in the instrument cluster display.

You can accept or decline incoming calls or end a call in progress using the buttons on the multi-function steering wheel.

204
Voice control

The “voice control” function depends on the vehicle equipment.

1. Tap briefly to start the Infotainment system voice control.

Or: to start voice control (Siri) on the connected iPhone, tap and hold .

Android Auto™
Please read the introductory information and heed the Warnings and Notice ⇒ Introduction.

Requirements
The cell phone – hereafter referred to as a smartphone – must support Android Auto.

An Android Auto app must be installed on the smartphone.

If Android Auto Wireless cannot be used, the smartphone must be connected to the Infotainment system with a USB connection that allows data transfer.

The USB cable used must be an original cable from your mobile device manufacturer.

Android Auto Wireless: Bluetooth and Wi-Fi must also be activated on the smartphone.
These technologies may not be available in all countries.

Information on technical requirements, compatible smartphones, certified apps and availability can be found on the Volkswagen and Android Auto websites or
at an authorized Volkswagen dealer or authorized Volkswagen Service Facility.

Connecting

When connecting a smartphone for the first time, follow the instructions on the Infotainment system screen and the smartphone display.

The requirements must be met in order to use Android Auto.

1. Tap MENU to open the App-Connect main menu.

Or: press APP .

2. Tap Android Auto to establish the connection with the smartphone.

Disconnecting
1. Tap Close in Android Auto mode to open the App-Connect main menu.

2. Tap to end the active connection.

Special conditions

During an active connection with Android Auto, the following conditions apply:

An active Android Auto device can also be connected with the Infotainment system via Bluetooth (hands-free profile, HFP) at the same time.

Phone functions are possible through Android Auto. The Infotainment system phone function can also be used if the Android Auto device is connected to the
Infotainment system via Bluetooth at the same time.

An active Android Auto device cannot be used as a media device in the Media main menu.

It is not possible to use the internal navigation and Android Auto navigation at the same time. The route guidance which was started last ends the previous
active one.

You can view information about telephone operation in the instrument cluster display.

Depending on your Infotainment system and the navigation app used, you can view upcoming turns in the instrument cluster display.

You can accept or decline incoming calls or end a call in progress using the buttons on the multi-function steering wheel.

Voice control

The “voice control” function depends on the vehicle equipment.

1. Tap briefly to start the Infotainment system voice control.

Or: Tap and hold the button to start voice control of the connected smartphone.

MirrorLink®
Please read the introductory information and heed the Warnings and Notice ⇒ Introduction.

Function keys
Returns to the App-Connect main menu. Here you can end the MirrorLink connection, connect another cell phone, or select another technology. Tap to close
apps that are open. Then tap the apps to be closed or tap the Close all function to close all open apps. Tap to display the cell phone on the Infotainment
system screen. Open the MirrorLink settings. Tap to return to the MirrorLink main menu.

Requirements
The cell phone must support MirrorLink.
205
The cell phone must be connected to the Infotainment system via a USB connection with data transfer.

The USB cable used must be an original cable from your cell phone manufacturer.

Depending on the cell phone in use, an appropriate Car Mode app must be installed on the device to use MirrorLink.
Information about technical requirements, compatible cell phones, certified apps and availability can be found via the Volkswagen and MirrorLink website or
at your authorized Volkswagen dealer or authorized Volkswagen Service Facility.

Connecting

When connecting a cell phone for the first time, follow the instructions on the Infotainment system screen and the cell phone display.

The requirements must be met in order to use MirrorLink.

Start MirrorLink:

1. Tap MENU App-Connect .

Or: press APP .

2. Tap to connect to your cell phone.

Disconnecting
1. To get to the App-Connect main menu, tap MirrorLink mode APP .

Or: To get to the MirrorLink main menu, tap .

2. Tap to end the active connection.

Special conditions

When there is an active connection with MirrorLink, the following conditions apply:

An active MirrorLink device can also be connected with the Infotainment system at the same time via Bluetooth.

If the MirrorLink device is connected to the Infotainment system via Bluetooth, you can use the Infotainment system phone function.

An active MirrorLink device cannot be used as a media device in the Media main menu.

You can view information about telephone operation in the instrument cluster display.

The instrument cluster display will not show upcoming turns or display information about media mode.

You can accept or decline incoming calls or end a call in progress using the buttons on the multi-function steering wheel.

206
Mobile online services
myVW with Connected Features by Car-Net®
Introduction
VW Car-Net Ready

Your vehicle is equipped with VW Car-Net hardware, including a three-button module in the roof console. In order to use the VW Car-Net services, you need a
subscription to them and to activate them. Many of the services come at an additional cost. Some services may be offered as a trial subscription for a limited period
of time.

VW Car-Net requires a mobile network connection and GPS signal availability.

WARNING

Using apps while driving can distract from traffic. Driver distraction can cause serious accidents and fatal injuries.

Only use apps and functions when the vehicle is stationary.

Always drive attentively and responsibly.

Once you have registered with VW Car-Net, positional information from the vehicle is transmitted every time one of the VW Car-Net buttons is tapped. This
also occurs in the event of an automatic emergency call or periodically in conjunction with using the VW Car-Net functions. Volkswagen has the capability to
determine the exact position of the vehicle at any time, should this be required legally, by order or compulsory measure, or be necessary in emergencies,
provided that the VW Car-Net equipment has not been deactivated. For further information, please contact the VW Car-Net Response Center on 1-833-648-
2735. Calls may be monitored or recorded.

Volkswagen collects, processes, shares and transmits information about you and your vehicle in compliance with the VW Car-Net terms and conditions and
privacy provisions. For more information, please visit our website at:

https://carnet.vw.com/#/home

Situations that can affect system functions


Please read the introductory information and heed the Warnings and Notice ⇒ Introduction.
Even if requirements for the usage of these services have been met, the performance of VW Car-Net may be impaired or blocked by various factors that are outside
of the control of Volkswagen. In particular, this includes:

Maintenance, repairs, deactivations, software updates, and technical improvements to the telecommunications systems, satellites, servers, and databases.

Switching the mobile network standard to transmit mobile data through the telecommunications provider, for example, from UMTS to EDGE or GPRS.

Switching off an existing mobile network standard via the telecommunications provider.

Malfunction, impairment, or interruption of the mobile network and GPS reception, for example due to high speeds, solar storms, weather conditions, regional
circumstances, malfunctioning equipment, and high mobile network usage in the applicable radio cells.

If you are in a location with no or very poor cell phone or GPS reception. These locations may include tunnels, areas between tall buildings, garages, parking
ramps, underpasses, mountains, and valleys.

Limited availability of information or incomplete or incorrect information from third-party providers, such as on map displays.

In countries, federal states and regions where VW Car-Net not offered.

VW Car-Net® Portfolio
Please read the introductory information and heed the Warnings and Notice ⇒ Introduction.
VW Car-Net is part of Connected Vehicle Services and makes driving a Volkswagen more convenient. The In-Vehicle Services can be used via the control for voice
services in the roof console.

Emergency Call Service

If you or your passengers require medical assistance or help from the police, press the emergency call button. You will be connected to a contact partner at the
Volkswagen emergency call center, who will assess your situation and, if required, will send the police or medical help to the GPS location of your vehicle.
Only press the emergency call button if you require medical assistance or help from the police via VW Car-Net.

Volkswagen is not responsible for the reaction time of police or medical emergency services, or the assistance they provide on site.

Roadside assistance call

In the event of a breakdown, press the roadside assistance call button. You will be connected to a contact partner at VW Roadside Call Assist, who will send help to
your GPS location.
Do not use the roadside assistance call button or the information call button to request police or medical help.

Information call
207
Press the information call button. You will be connected to a contact parter at the VW Car-Net call center, who can help you in the following cases, amongst others:

Logging in and registering services.

Finding and sending routes to the navigation system.

Locating VW service partners.

Registration required

If you want to use VW Car-Net, you must log in and activate the functions. Many functions require a paid subscription. Some functions can be provided with a time-
limited trial subscription. For more information on VW Car-Net functions, visit our website at:
https://carnet.vw.com/#/home
After registering successfully, inform all users of the vehicle that the following data from the vehicle is sent or automatically received:

Speed

Location.

Further information.

Functions and services of VW Car-Net and every trial or paid subscription may be adjusted, ended, deactivated, reactivated or enhanced without additional
notifications. You can read details regarding subscription, Terms of Use and privacy policy at:
https://carnet.vw.com/#/home
If you have any questions or would like to start a subscription, contact our VW Car-Net Response Center on 1-833-648-2735, or visit our website at:
https://carnet.vw.com/#/home

208
Infotainment system
First steps
Introduction
The functions and settings of the Infotainment system depend on the vehicle equipment and are not available in all countries.

Prior to the first use


Before using the Infotainment system for the first time, read the following points to be able to fully use the available functions and settings:

Observe the safety instructions ⇒ Safety instructions.

Reset the Infotainment system to factory settings ⇒ System and sound settings.

Find your favorite radio stations, also referred to in the following as stations, and save them on the station preset buttons to quickly access them ⇒ Radio
mode.

Only use suitable audio sources and data carriers ⇒ Media mode.

Use current map data for the navigation system.

Pair a cell phone in order to use the phone interface to make calls ⇒ Mobile phone interface.

Register on VW Car-Net® to use related services.

Other applicable documents

In addition to this manual, please refer to the following documentation when using this Infotainment system and its components:

Supplements to your Owner's Manual.

Operating instructions for the cell phone or audio sources.

Operating instructions for external data carriers and players.

Instructions for retrofitted or additional Infotainment accessories.

Safety instructions
Refer to ⇒ and .
Some functions may contain links to websites that are administered by third parties. Volkswagen does not assume ownership of third-party sites reached
through links and is not responsible for their content.

Some functions may contain third-party information that originates from third-party providers. Volkswagen is not responsible for the accuracy, currentness, and
completeness of this non-proprietary information, and for ensuring that the rights of third parties are not violated.

The radio stations and owners of the data carriers and audio sources are responsible for the transmitted content.

Parking buildings, garages, underpasses, tunnels, tall buildings, mountains and valleys or electrical devices such as battery chargers can also interfere with
cell phone, GPS and radio signal reception.

Foil stickers or stickers with a metal layer placed on the antenna and on the windows can impair radio reception.

Read and follow the applicable manufacturer's operating instructions when using cell phones, data carriers, external devices, and external audio and media
sources.

WARNING

The Infotainment system's central processor is networked with the control modules installed in the vehicle. If the central processor is incorrectly repaired,
removed or reinstalled, there is an increased risk of accident and injury due to the control module not functioning properly or at all.

Never replace the central processor with a used central processor from a scrap vehicle or from recycling.

Always have the central processor repaired, removed and reinstalled by suitably qualified professionals. Volkswagen recommends contacting an
authorized Volkswagen dealer or authorized Volkswagen Service Facility.

WARNING

Reading information on the screen, operating the Infotainment system and connecting, inserting or removing a data carrier or audio source while driving can
distract from traffic. Driver distraction can cause accidents and injuries.

Always drive attentively and responsibly.

WARNING

Displays and information on the screen may be difficult to read if the lighting conditions are unfavorable or if the screen is damaged or dirty.

209
Never allow displays and information on the screen to cause you to engage in behavior that poses a safety risk. Always drive attentively and responsibly.

WARNING

Setting the volume too high can prevent you hearing audible signals. Failing to hear external audible signals could result in accidents.

Adjust the volume settings in the Infotainment system so that audible signals from outside the vehicle (such as sirens on emergency service vehicles)
can still be heard.

WARNING

Setting the volume too high can cause hearing damage, even if you are exposed to a loud volume for only a short time.

Select a volume level that is comfortable for all vehicle occupants.

Avoid excessively high volume levels.

WARNING

Sudden volume fluctuations, e.g. when the audio or media source is changed or connected, could distract the driver, which could result in accidents and injuries.

Reduce the volume level before changing or connecting an audio or media source, for example.

WARNING

The following conditions may prevent or cause interruptions to emergency calls, phone calls, and data transmission:

If you are in a location with no or very poor cell phone or GPS reception.

If you are in a location where there is good cell phone and GPS reception, but the telecommunications provider's mobile communications network is
malfunctioning or unavailable.

If the vehicle components required for emergency calls, phone calls, and data transmission are damaged, not operating, or have insufficient power.

If the cell phone battery is drained or if the battery charge level is too low.

WARNING

Radio stations can broadcast messages about disasters and dangers. It may not be possible to receive or send messages under the following conditions:

If you are in a location with no radio reception, or insufficient reception.

If the radio station's frequency bands are malfunctioning or not available.

If the speakers and vehicle components required for radio reception are damaged, not operating, or have insufficient power.

WARNING

In some countries and mobile networks, emergency calls can only be made under the following conditions:

A cell phone with an unlocked SIM card and sufficient calling credit is connected to the vehicle's phone interface.

Adequate network coverage is available.

WARNING

Using a cell phone or CB radio inside the vehicle without a separate outside antenna that is installed correctly may create electromagnetic energy that exceeds
permissible limits. This may be dangerous to the health of all vehicle occupants.

Keep the cell phone antenna at least approximately 20 cm (8 inches) away from any active medical implants, such as pacemakers, because cell phones
can impair the function of active medical implants.

Do not place a cell phone that is turned on directly above or in the immediate vicinity of any active medical implants, for example by keeping the phone in
a shirt pocket.

Immediately switch off cell phones if you suspect there is interference with an active medical implant, such as a pacemaker, or other medical device.

WARNING

210
Loose, unsecured or incorrectly mounted cell phones, external devices, and accessories can be thrown through the vehicle interior and cause accidents and
severe injuries in the event of sudden driving or braking maneuvers or a collision.

Secure cell phones, external devices and accessories outside of the airbag deployment zone or stow them securely.

Always safely secure or stow cell phones, external devices, audio sources and accessories in the provided storage compartments and holders within the
vehicle to prevent them being thrown through the vehicle interior and thereby avoid hindering the driver.

Never leave heavy, hard or sharp objects in clothing pockets.

Arrange cables for external devices and audio sources so that they are not in the way of the driver.

WARNING

Driving recommendations and traffic signs displayed in the navigation system may differ from the actual traffic situation and must not be allowed to mislead you
into undertaking actions that present a safety risk.

Always drive attentively and be ready to intervene at any moment.

Always be aware that traffic signs, signal systems, and traffic regulations take priority over the driving recommendations and displays in the navigation
system.

Always adapt your speed and driving style to the current visibility, weather, road and traffic conditions.

NOTICE

Radiation from cell phones that are switched on can interfere with sensitive technical and medical devices, potentially causing malfunctions or damage to the
devices.

Always switch off the cell phone in areas with special regulations relating to or prohibiting the use of cell phones.

NOTICE

Setting the volume too high and excessively loud or distorted playback can damage the speakers.

Select the volume setting so that the speakers are not damaged.

User information
Refer to ⇒ and Safety instructions.
The Infotainment system requires a few seconds to perform a complete system start, and will not respond to inputs during that time. During the system start,
only the Rear Assist camera can be displayed.

The Infotainment system must start completely before all displays can appear and functions can be performed. The length of time that it takes for the system to
start depends on the scope of functions in the Infotainment system, and it can take longer to start at low and high temperatures.

Observe local regulations and legal requirements when using the Infotainment system and corresponding accessories, such as a headset or headphones.

For the Infotainment system to function, it must be switched on and the vehicle must be set to the current date and time if necessary.

A missing function key in the screen is not the result of a device error, but instead corresponds to the country-dependent equipment.

Some Infotainment system functions can only be selected when the vehicle is stationary. In some countries, the selector lever must also be in the or
selector lever position. This is not a malfunction, but rather compliance with legal regulations.

Some countries may have restrictions regarding the use of Bluetooth® devices. Information can be obtained from the local authorities.

If the 12 V vehicle battery has been disconnected, switch on the ignition before switching on the Infotainment system.

Displays on the screen may vary due to differences in the settings, and the Infotainment system may function differently than described in this manual.

The Infotainment system will switch off automatically when the engine stops and if the 12 V vehicle battery charge level is low.

In some vehicles with a parking system, the volume of the current audio source may be automatically lowered when you shift into reverse. The volume
reduction level can be adjusted.

The Infotainment system contains information about the software contained in the system and the licensing terms under: Setup Copyright.

If selling or loaning your vehicle, make sure that all saved data, files and settings are deleted, and that the external SD card, external audio sources and data
carriers are removed, if necessary.

Certain functions in the Infotainment system require an active VW Car-Net account for the vehicle and an online connection to the Internet. In order to enable
functions to be carried out, data transfer must not be restricted.

Overview and controls of the 10" version


Refer to ⇒ and Safety instructions.
211
Fig. 120 Overview: display and control unit, 10" version.

Time.

Status display for the “Privacy settings” function (availability depends on the country) and number of notifications.

Home Button: (hereafter: HOME ).

Temperature display (can be adjusted via ) and status display for seat heating and seat ventilation (available depending on vehicle equipment).

Sensor area (Infotainment system on or off).

Touch control for temperature.

Touch control for volume.

Views (current view is highlighted).

Scroll bar.

Control Center.

Function keys for main menus.

Screen (touchscreen).
Further information and tips for operating the Infotainment system can be found in this Owner's Manual ⇒ Operating the Infotainment system .

Home Button: (hereafter: HOME )


The Home Button is hereafter referred to as HOME .

1. To open the home screen, tap HOME .

Sensor area (Infotainment system on or off)


1. Tap the sensor area to manually switch the Infotainment system on or off.

Touch control for temperature


Touch control for the driver seat and touch control for the front passenger seat.

Swipe left to reduce the temperature.

Swipe right to increase the temperature.

Touch control for volume

Swipe left to reduce the volume.

212
Swipe right to increase the volume.

Views (current view is highlighted)


Certain menus and functions have multiple views with different content. The current view is highlighted.

Tap a selection to switch to a view.

Swipe left or right on the screen to switch between views.

Scroll bar
Certain menus and functions contain additional content above and below the content currently displayed on the screen.

1. Tap the scroll bar and swipe down or up to display additional content.

Control Center
The control center contains additional function keys for functions and notifications. Displayed functions can be configured ⇒ Personalizing the Infotainment system

1. Tap the selection and swipe down to open the control center.

Function keys for main menus


You can configure the position of the function keys ⇒ Personalizing the Infotainment system .

1. To open a main menu, tap the corresponding function key e.g. for the phone interface.

Screen (touchscreen)
You can operate the Infotainment system functions via the screen. The screen brightness can be adjusted from the Control Center. You will find detailed
explanations of the different finger movements in the digital manual for the Infotainment system, if available ⇒ Operating the Infotainment system .

1. Tap HOME Operation.

Gesture control (without position numbers)


Gesture control can also be switched on. If gesture control is switched on, this is shown on the screen.

1. Tap HOME Screen Hand gesture.

Overview and controls of the 8.25" version


Refer to ⇒ and Safety instructions.

Fig. 121 Overview: display and control unit, 8.25" version.

Rotary knob.

Time.

213
Status display for the “Privacy settings” function (availability depends on the country).

Home Button: (hereafter: HOME ).

Status display for seat heating and seat ventilation (available depending on the vehicle equipment).

Function keys for main menus.

Control Center.

Screen (touchscreen).

Scroll bar.

Menu knob.
Further information and tips for operating the Infotainment system can be found in this Owner's Manual ⇒ Operating the Infotainment system .

Rotary knob

Press to switch the Infotainment system on or off.

Turn left to decrease the volume.

Turn right to increase the volume.

Home Button: (hereafter: HOME )


The Home Button is hereafter referred to as HOME .

1. To open the home screen, tap HOME .

Function keys for main menus


It is not possible to configure the position of the function keys.

1. To open a main menu, tap the corresponding function key e.g. for the phone interface.

Control Center
The control center contains additional function keys for functions and notifications. Displayed functions can be configured ⇒ Personalizing the Infotainment system

1. Tap the selection and swipe down to open the control center.

Screen (touchscreen)
You can operate the Infotainment system functions via the screen. The screen brightness can be adjusted from the Control Center. You will find detailed
explanations of the different finger movements in the digital manual for the Infotainment system, if available ⇒ Operating the Infotainment system .

1. Tap HOME Operation.

Scroll bar
Certain menus and functions contain additional content above and below the content currently displayed on the screen.

1. Tap the scroll bar and swipe down or up to display additional content.

Menu knob
1. Turn to control the list selection.

2. Press to confirm a selection.

Operating the Infotainment system


Refer to ⇒ and Safety instructions.

Opening the digital manual of the Infotainment system (if available)


Further information and tips on operation can be found in the digital manual for the Infotainment system.

1. Tap HOME .

Switching the Infotainment system on and off

The Infotainment system starts up when the ignition is switched on, unless it was previously switched off manually.

The Infotainment system starts at the volume that was last set, as long as this does not exceed the preset maximum switch-on volume.
If you leave the vehicle while the ignition is not active, the Infotainment system switches off automatically.

If you switch on the Infotainment system manually while the ignition is not active, it will switch off automatically after approximately 30 minutes without user
input.

Opening the home screen


1. Tap HOME ⇒ Overview and controls of the 10" version , ⇒ Overview and controls of the 8.25" version .

214
Main menus on the home screen

The following main menus may be shown as function keys on the home screen:

Ambient lighting, ambient light ⇒ Interior/reading lights, ambient lighting. App-Connect ⇒ App-Connect . Apps. Assistance systems ⇒ Driver
assistance systems. Vehicle ⇒ Driver information. Help: Here, you can find additional information about Infotainment system functions and operation,
e.g. the quick guide . Sound ⇒ System and sound settings . Climate control ⇒ Heating and air conditioning system . Navigation ⇒ Navigation.
Radio/Media ⇒ Radio mode, ⇒ Media mode . Legal. Setup ⇒ System and sound settings . Stationary air conditioning: Auxiliary heater ⇒ Heating
and air conditioning system . Telephone ⇒ Mobile phone interface .

Configuring the home screen


In the display and control unit, you can configure the arrangement of the function keys, views and displays on the home screen or have them positioned by means
of factory-supplied layout templates.

1. Tap the function key and hold until the function key is highlighted.

2. Move the function key to the preferred position and release it.

Scrolling through lists, switching titles

Select your desired function, setting or track via the touchscreen or the control knob.

Moving objects, adjusting volume

To adjust settings, e.g. those using sliders, or move areas of a menu around, move the objects around on the screen.

Personalize function keys and views depending on the vehicle equipment ⇒ Personalizing the Infotainment system .

Zooming in or out of pictures and maps shown on the screen


Recommendation: Use thumb and index finger.

1. Tap and hold the screen with two fingers at the same time.

To zoom in on the pictures and maps shown, slowly move your fingers apart.

To zoom out of the pictures and maps shown, slowly move your fingers together.

Personalizing the Infotainment system


Refer to ⇒ and Safety instructions.

Depending on the vehicle equipment,


you can personalize the Infotainment
system to access your favorite and
frequently used functions quicker.

The Infotainment system views contain tiles for accessing additional menus and functions.

Configuring tiles
Configure the tiles by removing or adding views.

1. Tap and hold tiles until an additional window appears.

2. To open the configuration screen, tap .

To add a new view with tiles, tap and tap on the desired template. New tiles are created without any functions.

Tap to remove a view with tiles.

3. Tap to close the configuration screen.

4. To return to View, tap or tap any free area of the screen.


There are always at least two views available. They cannot be removed. Depending on the vehicle equipment, you can add two further views. A maximum of
four views can be displayed.

Adjusting tiles
Adjust the tiles and displayed tile functions in the Infotainment system views to manage the Infotainment system as you wish.

1. Tap and hold tiles until an additional window appears.

2. To add functions to a tile, tap on the desired tile.

3. Tap the desired function in the additional window. Various functions are available depending on the size of the tile.

4. To remove a function from a tile, tap on the desired tile and tap .

5. To return to View, tap or tap any free area of the screen.


For some tiles, more functions are available than can be seen initially in the additional window. Swipe to the left or right in the additional window to see all the
functions.

Adjusting the control center


215
Personalize the Infotainment system Control Center to access your favorite and frequently used functions quicker.

1. Tap and hold the function until an additional window appears.

2. Tap the desired function in the additional window and hold until the function is highlighted.

3. Move the function to the preferred position and release it.

The active function is automatically removed from the control center and added to the additional window.
For the control center, more functions are available than can be seen initially in the additional window. Swipe to the left or right in the additional window to see
all the functions.

Opening personalization tips (if available)


Further information and tips on personalization can be found in the digital manual for the Infotainment system.

1. Tap HOME Adjustment.

System and sound settings


Refer to ⇒ and Safety instructions.

Changing settings

The meanings of the following symbols apply to all system and sound settings.

Changes will be automatically applied when the menu is closed.

or The setting is selected and activated or switched on. or The setting is not selected and deactivated or switched off. or Open the
drop-down list. Increase the set value. Reduce the set value. Go back stepwise. Go forward stepwise. Use the slide control to continuously change the
set value.

System settings

The system settings may include the following functions, information, and setting options:

Screen.

Time and date.

Language.

Additional keyboard languages.

Units.

Voice control.

Wi-Fi.

Data connection.

Mobile devices.

Restore factory settings.

System information.

Copyright.

Configuration assistant.

Opening system settings


1. Tap HOME Setup.

Sound settings

The sound settings may include information and setting options for equalizer, position, volume and setup.

Opening sound settings


1. Tap HOME Sound.

Adjusting the volume of external audio sources

Lower the volume of the Infotainment system before turning up the volume of an external audio source.

If the connected audio source plays too quietly, increase the output volume of the external audio source. If that does not correct the problem, set the input volume to
Medium or Maximum.

If the connected external audio source plays too loudly or the sound is distorted, lower the output volume of the external audio source. If that does not correct the
problem, set the input volume to Medium or Quiet.

Cleaning the screen


Refer to ⇒ and Safety instructions.
When cleaning the screen, please note this checklist:
216
The Infotainment system is switched off.

Use a soft, clean cloth that has been moistened with water.

Or: use a cleaning cloth which is available from an authorized Volkswagen dealer or authorized Volkswagen Service Facility.

For stubborn dirt:

NOTICE

If the screen is cleaned with incorrect cleaning agents or when dry, it may be damaged.

Only apply gentle pressure.

Do not use any aggressive cleaners or products which contain solvents. These types of cleaners can damage the device and cause glare on the screen.

NOTICE

If the cloth used to clean the screen is too moist, the screen can no longer be operated or switched off.

Dry the screen and then leave the vehicle locked from the outside for at least two minutes.

Brands, licenses, copyright


Refer to ⇒ and Safety instructions.

Brands and licenses

Certain terms in this manual have the ® or ™ symbols. These symbols indicate emblems or registered trademarks. However, the absence of this symbol does not
constitute a waiver of any rights associated with intellectual property.

Other product names are registered trademarks for the respective rights holder.

Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. Dolby and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.

Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. Dolby, Pro Logic and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.

All SiriusXM services require a subscription. See the SiriusXM Customer Agreement for complete terms at www.siriusxm.com (US) or www.siriusxm.ca
(Canada). All fees, content and features are subject to change. Satellite and steaming lineups may vary. SiriusXM, Pandora and all related logos are
trademarks of Sirius XM Radio Inc. and its respective subsidiaries. All rights reserved.

HD Radio Technology manufactured under license from iBiquity Digital Corporation. U.S. and Foreign Patents. For patents see http://dts.com/patents. HD
Radio, Artist Experience, and the HD, HD Radio, and “ARC” logos are registered trademarks or trademarks of iBiquity Digital Corporation in the United States
and/or other countries.

Apple Music is a trademark of Apple Inc.

SPOTIFY and the Spotify logo are among the registered trademarks of Spotify AB. Compatible vehicle and Spotify Premium subscription required, where
available.

Android Auto™ is a certified trademark of Google, Inc.

Apple CarPlay™ is a certified trademark of Apple, Inc.

Bluetooth® is a registered trademark of Bluetooth® SIG, Inc.

iPod®, iPad®, and iPhone® are registered trademarks of Apple Inc.

MirrorLink® and the MirrorLink® logo are certified trademarks of the Car Connectivity Consortium LLC.

MPEG-4 HE-AAC audio coding technology and patents licensed from Fraunhofer IIS.

SD® and SDHC® are trademarks or registered trademarks of SD-3C LLC in the USA and other countries.

Windows® is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation, Redmond, USA.

This product is protected by the intellectual property rights of Microsoft Corporation. Use or distribution of such technology outside of this product is prohibited
without a license from Microsoft or an authorized Microsoft subsidiary.

Copyright

Audio and video files saved on data carriers and audio sources are generally subject to copyright regulations in compliance with applicable international and national
laws. Observe legal regulations.

Radio mode
Introduction
In radio mode you can receive various available radio stations on different frequencies and save your favorites to the station buttons for quick access.
217
Available reception modes and bands depend on the vehicle equipment and are not available in all countries. Frequency bands in individual countries may be
discontinued, switched off or no longer offered.

The radio stations are responsible for transmitted content.

Other electrical devices connected in the vehicle can impair radio signal reception and cause noise in the speakers.

Decals or metal-coated stickers on the vehicle windows can impair radio reception in vehicles with window antennas.

Functions and radio symbols


Refer to ⇒ and Safety instructions.

Radio

The available scope of functions and also possible reception modes and bands depend on the vehicle equipment and are not available in all countries.

FM multiple tuner (diversity antenna).

Station list of FM stations.

Summarized memory list.

Merging of all stations stored on station preset buttons in a list.

Up to 36 station preset buttons as storage locations for favorites.

Station logos.

Antenna amplifier

Internet radio.

HD Radio™.

Satellite radio:

SiriusXM™ 360L.

General symbols for radio operation

The symbols may look different depending on the Infotainment system.

1. To open the main menu, open the home screen and tap or ⇒ Overview and controls of the 10" version , ⇒ Overview and controls of the 8.25" version .

FMSelect a FM reception mode. Internet RadioSelect the Internet Radio reception mode. SXMSelect the satellite radio reception mode. Open an
additional window with current playback. Select the previous station from the station list or station on the previous station preset button. Select the next
station from the station list or station on the next station preset button. Display the preset list with station preset buttons. Stations already stored on a
station preset button in a station list. Opening the settings.

Symbols in the AM frequency band


Show the station list of AM stations. Manually update the station list. Display the frequency band for manual selection of the AM frequency.

Symbols in the FM and FM/DAB band


Show the station list of FM and DAB stations. Display the frequency band for manual selection of the FM frequency.
Only possible when the summarized station list is switched off.

Symbols for Internet Radio operation


Open full-text search. Unable to receive Internet radio. Display the last internet radio station. Display the 100 most popular internet radio
stations. Display the available Internet Radio podcasts. Display Internet Radio stations that originate from the preferred country. Display Internet Radio
stations that transmit their program in the preferred language. Display Internet Radio stations whose programs are of the preferred genre. Display the
station selection.

Symbols for HD Radio operation


Station supports HD Radio. Tune the HD Radio substations. Open the Emergency list of the “HD Radio Emergency Alerts” function.
HD Radio logo.

Symbols for satellite radio operation


Display the channel list. Open the window for entering the channel number.

Adjusting, tuning, and storing stations


Refer to ⇒ and Safety instructions.

Selecting the frequency band or reception mode


Before selecting a station, you must first select a frequency band or reception mode. Various stations are available, depending on the selected frequency band or
reception mode. The available bands and reception modes depend on the vehicle equipment and are not available in all countries.
218
1. Tap Source to open the list of frequency bands and reception modes.

2. Select the band or reception mode, e.g. FM.

Searching for and selecting a station

There are different ways to search for and select stations. The options vary based on the frequency band and reception mode.

Selecting via the frequency band (AM and FM)

You can select frequencies and save them as favorites.

1. Tap .

2. Tap the cursor to press and slide to the frequency band and release at the desired frequency.

Or: tap a point on the frequency band. The cursor automatically jumps to the corresponding frequency.

The station at the set frequency will be tuned.

Selecting from a station list (AM, FM and FM/DAB)


The station list displays the stations that currently can be received. Depending on the vehicle equipment, it is possible that the station list must be manually updated
if you have left the area since the last time the station list was opened. The station list in the FM/DAB band generally updates automatically.

1. Open the station list.

2. Tap the desired station.

The selected station will be tuned.

Searching for and filtering stations (Internet Radio)


In Internet Radio mode, stations can be filtered according to category or searched for using a full-text search.

1. Open the station selection.

2. Select the categories by which to filter the stations.

Or: to start the full-text search, tap .

The input line is displayed.

3. Enter the name of the preferred station or the preferred category.

The list of the found stations updates automatically during input.

4. Tap the desired station.

The selected station will be tuned.

SCAN Search in SCAN mode (AM, FM and FM/DAB)


In SCAN mode, the stations in the frequency band are set automatically in succession and played for approx. 5 seconds each.

1. To start SCAN mode, tap SCAN.

SCAN mode starts and the current station is shown on the display.

The SCAN function key is shown.

2. To select a station, tap SCAN.

SCAN mode stops and the station is tuned.

Storing stations on the station preset buttons


You can save up to 36 stations from different frequency bands and reception modes as favorites on the station preset buttons.

1. Tune the desired station.

2. Tap .

Or: tap and hold the station on the station list.

The station preset buttons are displayed.

3. Tap .

Or: tap on an already occupied station preset button and hold for approx. three seconds.

The station is saved on the selected station preset button.

If a station was already saved on the station preset button, this station will be removed from the station preset button and replaced by the new station.

Special functions in radio mode


Refer to ⇒ and Safety instructions.
The special functions in radio mode listed below may not be available for all Infotainment systems, depending on the vehicle equipment, and may not be available in
all countries.

219
Internet radio

Internet radio is a reception mode for Internet radio stations and podcasts independent of AM, FM and DAB. Due to its transmission over the internet, receipt is not
regionally limited.

Internet radio is only available if the Infotainment system has an active Internet connection. Costs for streaming data online may result when using Internet radio.
This function of the Internet Radio in some countries depends on your vehicle privacy settings.

Station logos

Station logos can be preinstalled for some frequency bands in the Infotainment system.

If the Automatic station logo selection function is activated in the settings, the station logos are automatically assigned to the stations.

In Internet radio mode, the Infotainment system obtains the station logos from an online database and assigns them automatically to the stations.

Assigning station logos manually


1. In radio mode, tap Radio Station logos.

2. Select the station to which a station logo should be assigned.

3. Select the station logo.

4. This process can be repeated for additional stations.

5. To finish assigning station logos, tap .

Online functions in radio mode


Refer to ⇒ and Safety instructions.
Depending on the vehicle equipment, the Infotainment system features online functions in radio mode.

Online functions in radio mode are not available in all countries and vehicle models.

Online functions in radio mode include Internet Radio, for instance.

Prerequisites for using online functions in radio mode:


The vehicle is equipped with VW Car-Net.

You have registered and you have an active VW Car-Net user account.

The vehicle is assigned to your VW Car-Net user account.

You have purchased a corresponding active data package for an Internet connection and have also purchased a “Plus Online Radio subscription” via the
VW Car-Net app or the VW Car-Net website, USA: vw.com/carnet, Canada: vw.ca.

SiriusXM
Refer to ⇒ and Safety instructions.
SiriusXM is a satellite radio station that can be received in the USA and Canada. Satellite radio services are subject to fees and must be enabled for the
Infotainment system by phone or online.

SiriusXM subscriptions can be activated via cell phone.

The current status of the subscription can be shown in the settings in satellite radio mode.

Additional information can be found on the Internet:

In the USA:
www.siriusxm.com
In Canada:
www.siriusxm.ca

Displaying the SiriusXM ID

Each radio has its own SiriusXM ID with which you can manage your subscription.

1. In satellite radio mode: Tap Subscription Information.

Or: in radio or media mode, tap Radio Subscription information.

Or: In satellite radio mode: Tap and enter channel number “0”.

The SiriusXM ID, the website and phone number for the SiriusXM activation hotline will be displayed on the screen.

SiriusXM with 360L

Your vehicle can be equipped with SiriusXM with 360L. SiriusXM with 360L offers both satellite and streaming connectivity for a multitude of music, news, sports, talk
and entertainment channels and content. With SiriusXM with 360L, you have a personalized listening experience with recommendations and functions based on
your listening habits.

SiriusXM live channels

220
The channels available depend on the enabled services. All available channels are displayed in the channel list.

Each channel is assigned a channel number.

The channels are sorted in the channel list according to their channel number. The channels can be opened directly via their channel number under .

All channels are sorted according to categories. Within the categories, the channels are sorted according to genre. Channels can be browsed in categories, e.g.
music.

Setting SiriusXM live channels


Available channels can be set in various ways depending on the vehicle equipment.

1. In satellite radio mode: Tap and set the preferred channel using the channel number.

Or: Tap the title image of the preferred channel.

Or: turn the knob, select the preferred channel and press it.

2. Optional: To search for channels with content related to the content currently being played, tap Related in the station display.

A list with related content will be displayed.

On Demand

SiriusXM with 360L offers access to a multitude of on-demand content, e.g. concerts.

Opening on-demand content


1. Select a channel category, e.g. music, and select a genre, e.g. rock.

2. Tap On Demand.

3. Optional: To search for on-demand content related to the content currently being played, e.g. shows, tap Related in the station display.

A list with related content that is currently playing will be displayed.

Live Sports

With the category of “Live Sports”, you can call up transmissions of games that are being aired on SiriusXM.

Opening Live Sports


1. Select the category “Live Sports”.

2. Select the preferred transmission of a game.

Play Ahead Controls

With the “Play Ahead Controls” function, both live and on-demand content can be played and paused, and you can jump forwards or backwards in the playback.

Presets

SiriusXM live channels and on-demand shows can be saved as a preset. Up to 36 presets can be saved.

Saving SiriusXM content as Presets


1. To save a live channel currently being played back or an on-demand show currently being played back as a preset, press and hold a preset bank.

Or: In the channel list or the list of on-demand shows, press and hold the preferred content and select a preset bank.

Listening profile

The personalized listening profile saves recommendations based on the program content currently being listened to and the latest listening history, and is regularly
updated.

The listening profile can be set up in the Volkswagen user account and used with the SiriusXM app.

Setting up a listening profile


1. In satellite radio mode: To create a new listening profile, tap in the station view.

Or: tap Radio Set up new listening profile in radio or media mode.

Personalized SiriusXM recommendations

A collection of personalized SiriusXM recommendations is available for each listening profile.

The personalized SiriusXM recommendations are regularly updated, based on what you're listening to.

Displaying personalized SiriusXM recommendations


1. Tap For You.

Listening history

For each listening profile, a list of SiriusXM content recently listened to is displayed. This listening history can be displayed and reset at any time.

221
HD Radio
Refer to ⇒ and Safety instructions.
HD Radio is a digital radio station that can be received in the USA and Canada.

HD Radio Technology

Some AM and FM radio stations also transmit their content digitally via HD Radio Technology.

When the function is activated in settings in the AM or FM band and the current station supports HD Radio Technology, the function key appears on the
Infotainment system display. The Infotainment system switches automatically between digital and analog reception depending on the reception quality. If the station
is currently received in analog mode, the function key is grayed out.

Some stations offer additional substations via HD Radio Technology (multicast programming). If this is the case, HD1 is displayed after the station frequency of the
main station. Substations are marked with HD2, HD3, etc.

Tuning the HD Radio Substations


1. Tap to cycle through the available substations.

Or: Select an additional station from the station list.

Or: to cycle through the additional stations individually, tap < or >.

The substation that is currently selected is displayed after the main station on the screen (for example ... HD3 for the second substation).
The available substations of the current stations are displayed on the station list.

Additional HD Radio Technology services


1. To select your chosen additional service, tap View.

HD Radio Emergency Alerts

The “HD Radio Emergency Alerts” function can be used to receive reports of unusual, potentially life-threatening events, such as natural disasters. These
notifications are played as pop-up notifications while the radio is on. This function is activated in the factory.

If you tap Remind me later when a notification appears, the notification will appear again about ten minutes later. If you tap Close, the notification will be moved to the
Alert list. If the “HD Radio Emergency Alerts” function is deactivated, these notifications are moved directly to the Alert list and indicated by and a number in the
status bar. The number on the symbol displays the number of notifications.

Activating or deactivating HD Radio Emergency Alerts


1. In radio mode, activate or deactivate Radio Emergency notifications.

Opening the Alert list


Up to five notifications can be displayed in the Alert list.

1. Tap in radio mode.

Media mode
Introduction
In media mode, you can play back media files from data carriers in the Infotainment system.

Depending on the vehicle equipment, the following data carriers can be used:

USB storage medium, e.g. USB flash drive.

Bluetooth device, e.g. cell phone.

Depending on the vehicle equipment, the following types of media files can be played:

Audio files, e.g. music.

Video files.

Streaming services

You can also use streaming services, depending on the vehicle equipment and in some countries ⇒ Online functions in media mode .

Restrictions and instructions for data carriers

Dirty, overheated or damaged data carriers are not to be used. Read and heed the information provided by the manufacturer.

Difference in quality between data carriers from different manufacturers can cause problems with media playback.

Wrong configuration of data carriers can lead to the data carriers being unreadable.

The storage volume, condition (copy and delete processes), file system, folder structure and the amount of saved data can increase the time taken to read data
carriers.

Playlists only define the order of play and refer to the saved location of the media files within the folder structure. No media files are saved in playlists. To play a
playlist, the media files must be present in the data storage device memory location, to which the playlist refers.
222
Volkswagen is not responsible for damaged, altered or lost files on data carriers.

Functions and media symbols


Refer to ⇒ and Safety instructions.

Audio, media, connectivity

The available scope of functions and possible media formats depend on the vehicle equipment and are not available in all countries.

Media playback and media control via Bluetooth.

Audio playback in these formats:

AAC.

APE.

ALAC.

FLAC.

MP2.

MP3.

MP4.

Vorbis.

OPUS.

WMA.

WAV.

Video playback in these formats:

MPEG-1 and MPEG-2 (.mpg, .mpeg, .mkv, .avi).

ISO MPEG-4 ASP; Xvid (.mp4, .m4v, .mov, .mkv, .avi).

ISO MPEG-4 AVC/H.264 (.mp4, .m4v, .mov, .mkv, .avi).

Windows Media Video 9 (.wmv, .asf, .mkv, .avi).

Cross-device playlists.

Cross-source media database:

Data from all media sources connected to the Infotainment system are stored in a media database.

Media streaming (online).

Media search.

General symbols for media operation


1. To open the main menu, open the home screen and tap ⇒ Overview and controls of the 10" version , ⇒ Overview and controls of the 8.25" version .

Start replay. Pause replay. Go to the previous track. Skip to the next track. Repeats the current track. Repeats all tracks. Activate
random playback. Display favorites list. Add media file to favorites list. Opening the settings. Go back one folder level in the media source.

Symbols for media sources


Select My media as a media source. Connected USB devices may be selected under My media. Select a device connected via Bluetooth as a media
source. Set up available streaming services.
Streaming services which have already been set up are represented by their own logos in the list of media sources.

Symbols for categories and groups of media files


Music tracks. Videos. Playlists. Albums. Artists. Genres. Podcasts. Audiobooks.

Video replay symbols


Replay video in full-screen mode. Minimize replay.

Selecting and playing a media source


Refer to ⇒ and Safety instructions.

Selecting a media source


1. If you want playback from an external media source, connect the external media source.

2. Select the connected media source to be used for playback.

Playing audio and video files


223
A media source must be connected and selected before media files can be played back.

There are different ways to search for and play media files from an available media source.

Searching the folder structure


All media files from USB devices are filtered by category (e.g. albums). This category view is always displayed In My Media. The classic folder structure of the
individual USB data carriers can also be found in the My Media menu.

1. Display the folder structure.

The folder structure of the selected media source is displayed. If My Media is selected, the categories (e.g. music) and connected media sources are displayed.

2. Searching the folder structure for a desired track.

Or: to start the full-text search, tap .

The input line is displayed.

3. Enter the name of the desired track.

The list of the found tracks updates automatically during input.

4. Tap the desired track.

When playback starts, if the selection is located in a folder on a media source, all of the media files located in the folder will be added for playback.

If a playlist is played back, all available tracks on the playlist will be added for playback.

5. Close the selection with .

Selecting from favorites


You can save individual tracks, albums, artists and genres under favorites for playback.

1. Tap .

2. Tap on your favorites.

Depending on the selection, all tracks heard during the current playback will be added to favorites.

Saving favorites
Only media files that are displayed in My Media in the Music and Video folders can be saved as favorites. You can save individual tracks, albums, artists and genres
as favorites.

1. Start playback of the desired track.

2. Tap .

3. Tap .

Or: tap on an already occupied favorite position, and press and hold for approx. three seconds.

4. Select from the selection list, e.g. track.

The selection is saved in the selected favorite position as a favorite. If the favorite position was already occupied, the previously saved favorite is overwritten.

The selection options in the selection list depend on the data attached to the media file. If a genre is not indicated for music files, the genre cannot be saved as a
favorite.

If a video file is currently being replayed, only this video can be saved as a favorite.

Setting up streaming services


Depending on the vehicle equipment and in some countries, you can use streaming services directly through the Infotainment system ⇒ Introduction. There
must be an internet connection to use streaming services ⇒ Introduction.

1. Select Media Streaming as the media source.

A list of available streaming services is displayed.

2. Select the desired streaming service.

The input field for entering login data is displayed.

3. Enter the login data for the desired user profile and confirm.

The streaming services will be added as a new function key in the list of media sources.
Depending on the country, you may need to log in to the streaming service again if you change your privacy settings, for example.

Entertainment playback via the Infotainment system


Refer to ⇒ and Safety instructions.
The Infotainment system can play music and videos.

Video mode

In video mode, the Infotainment system display can play a video from a data carrier ⇒ Selecting and playing a media source .
224
Depending on the vehicle equipment and in some countries, video from a streaming service can also be played back ⇒ Selecting and playing a media source .

The video sound is played back via the vehicle speakers.

A stable Internet connection is required for playback via a streaming service. There may be costs associated with your mobile network provider for doing so.

The video image is only displayed when the vehicle is stationary. The Infotainment system display will be switched off when the vehicle is moving. The video sound
will continue to be played.

In some countries, for road safety reasons, no video image is shown even when the vehicle is stationary.

Online functions in media mode


Refer to ⇒ and Safety instructions.
Depending on the vehicle equipment, the Infotainment system features online functions in media mode.

Online functions in media mode are not available in all countries and vehicle models.

Online functions in media mode include streaming services, for instance.

Prerequisites for using online functions in media mode:


The vehicle has VW Car-Net.

You have registered and you have an active VW Car-Net user account.

Your vehicle is assigned to your user account.

You have purchased a corresponding active data package for an Internet connection via the VW Car-Net app or via the VW Car-Net website, USA:
vw.com/carnet, Canada: vw.ca.

Streaming services

Depending on the vehicle equipment, you can also use streaming services.

Streaming services are not available in all countries and vehicle models.

Prerequisites for using streaming services:


The prerequisites for using online functions in media mode must be fulfilled.

You have your own user account for the relevant streaming service.

Navigation
Introduction
The current vehicle position is determined by a global satellite system. In order to enable optimum navigation to your destination, all measured values and possible
traffic information are compared with the available map material.

Acoustic navigation announcements and graphic displays lead you to your destination.

In some countries, it may not be possible to select some Infotainment system functions on the screen when driving above a certain speed. This is not a malfunction,
but rather compliance with legal regulations.

WARNING

If settings are adjusted, destinations entered and changes made to navigation information while driving, the driver may be distracted and cause accidents and
injuries.

Always drive attentively and responsibly.

Only adjust settings, enter destinations, or change navigation information when the vehicle is stationary.

If you missed a turn on your route, the navigation system may recalculate the route.

The quality of the driving directions depends on the available navigation data and any reported traffic incidents.

Traffic information is only given in the navigation system if the available VW Car-Net service has been activated.

Navigation restrictions

If the Infotainment system cannot receive data from GPS satellites, for example in a tunnel, navigation will still be possible using the vehicle's sensors.

In areas that are not digitized or only partially digitized in the Infotainment system memory, the Infotainment system will still try to provide route guidance.

If navigation data is missing or incomplete, the vehicle position may not be determined accurately. This may result in navigation that is not as accurate as usual.

Routing is subject to ongoing changes, like new streets, construction zones, road closures, or changes to street names or house numbers. Using outdated
navigation data can lead to errors or uncertainty when using route guidance.

Function descriptions
225
Please read the introductory information and heed the Warnings and Notice ⇒ and Safety instructions.

Voice guidance

Navigation messages are acoustic driving directions for the current route.

The type and frequency of navigation messages depends on the settings and the driving situation, like the start of the route guidance and whether you are driving on
a highway or roundabout.

If the destination cannot be reached exactly, for example because it is not in a digitized area, there will be a navigation announcement that the Destination area has
been reached. Messages about the direction and distance to your destination will also be displayed on the screen.

During dynamic route guidance, reported traffic incidents on the route are announced. There will be an additional navigation announcement if the route is
recalculated due to a traffic incident or a change in driving style.

You can adjust or mute the volume during a traffic announcement. All other navigation announcements will be given at that volume or will be muted.
Navigation messages will not be given if the Infotainment system is muted.

Adapting the Navigation Map

To ensure an optimum view, you can also adapt the navigation map and map view using enhanced finger movements.

Moving the navigation map


Recommendation: Use index finger.

1. Move the navigation map with your finger.

Zooming in or out on the map view


Recommendation: Use index finger.

1. Tap and hold the map twice in a row.

2. To zoom out of the map view, move your finger upwards. To zoom in on the map view, move your finger downwards.

Zooming in or out on the map view


Recommendation: Use thumb and index finger.

1. Tap and hold the map with two fingers at the same time.

2. To zoom out of the map view, slide your fingers towards each other. To zoom in on the map view, slide your fingers away from each other.

Tilting the map view


Recommendation: Use index and middle finger.

1. Tap and hold the map with two fingers at the same time, held horizontally next to each other.

2. To tilt the map view to the front, move your fingers upwards. To tilt the map view to the back, move your fingers downwards.

Rotating the map view


Recommendation: Use thumb and index finger.

1. Tap and hold the map with two fingers at the same time.

2. Turn your fingers clockwise or anti-clockwise to turn the map view.

Route plan

The route plan contains information about relevant events, such as waypoints and destination suggestions, if the relevant data is available to the navigation system.

Tapping an event will open a dialog box with additional options. The options available depend on the event and the current settings.

Opening and closing the route plan


1. Tap the route plan to open.

2. To close the route plan, tap .

3. To stop the route guidance to the destination or waypoint, tap next to the destination in the route plan.

Editing route guidance


To edit route guidance, move the stopovers or the destination in the route plan.

1. Tap and hold the desired destination until it is visibly highlighted.

2. Move the destination to the desired position and release it.

The route will be recalculated.

Additional dialog box in the route plan

Tapping the route plan entries may cause a dialog box to open with additional options for these entries. The options available depend on the entry that is tapped.

Functions in the split screen:

226
Display on map Displays the selection on the map.

Add waypoint Adds a waypoint to the route guidance.

Direct route Starts direct route guidance.

Delete Delete waypoint from route guidance.

Avoid Avoid traffic disruptions. The route will be recalculated.

Stop route guidance Ends the current route guidance.

Closing an additional dialog box in the route plan


1. Tap a free area outside of the additional window.

Setting preferred POI categories

The system offers different points of interest, e.g. gas stations, using the quick select symbol when entering destinations, in the route plan and on the map. You can
prioritize how these symbols are displayed under Basic functions Preferred POI categories. The system also automatically learns your preferred
categories.

Saved data

In order to enable you to enter destinations quickly and to optimize route guidance, the Infotainment system saves certain data, such as frequently driven routes and
positioning data.

Delete saved data


1. Tap Basic functions Delete usage pattern.

2. Tap confirm to delete the data.

Learning usage patterns

While driving, the Navigation system saves routes traveled and destinations reached in order to create automatic destination suggestions. Destinations are learned
with reference to the time of day and the day of the week.

The navigation system can suggest pre-learned routes.

1. Tap to show the suggested routes.

Selecting one of the suggested routes will cause route guidance to begin.

The route guidance follows the selected route until you deviate from it. The route will then be recalculated and will lead back to the selected route via the most direct
path.

Relevant traffic disruptions are taken into consideration in route guidance. If an alternative route and the navigation data are available, relevant disruptions will be
avoided.

If you are driving a pre-learned route without active route guidance, the destination is added to the route plan. Route guidance does not need to be actively started
for a journey to a pre-learned destination. You are warned about traffic disruptions if necessary.

A predicted arrival time is displayed.

You can activate or deactivate this function at any time as well as delete the saved data for this function.

Activating or deactivating “Learn usage pattern”


1. To open this function's settings, tap Basic functions.

2. Tap Learn usage pattern.

Deleting saved “Learn usage pattern” data


1. To open this function's settings, tap Basic functions.

2. Tap Delete usage pattern.

Functions and symbols of the navigation system


Please read the introductory information and heed the Warnings and Notice ⇒ and Safety instructions.

Navigation

The functions and symbols of the navigation system may differ depending on the vehicle equipment and are not available in all countries.

Functions
Entering a destination and route calculation.

Simultaneous display of two navigation maps (screen and instrument cluster).

Personal destinations.

3D City Maps.

227
Online Map Update.

Online Traffic Information.

General navigation symbols


1. To open the main menu, open the home screen and tap ⇒ Overview and controls of the 10" version , ⇒ Overview and controls of the 8.25" version .

Display additional route guidance options. Display navigation map. Open saved addresses (contact list for the connected cell phone).
Opening the settings.

Symbols on the map

The function keys and displays shown depend on the settings and the current driving situation.

Symbols for traffic information, e.g. traffic disruptions, and POIs s, e.g. gas stations, are displayed on the map if the data is available to the navigation system
⇒ Traffic information.

Display current position. Align the map. Map scale. Display route information. Fully automatic map mode (orientation in direction of
travel, position, zoom and tilt). Display dialog box with route options. Display destination memory. Display dialog box with additional options.

Symbols in the dialog box


1. To open the dialog box with further options, tap .

Display route overview and alternative routes to the current route guidance for the active route guidance. Repeats the last navigation announcement.
Mute or adjust volume of navigation instructions.

Additional symbols
Destination search: detailed destination input for an address.

Symbols in the route plan


Display current position. Destination for the current route guidance. Ends the current route guidance. Close route plan.

Traffic disruptions

Traffic disruptions are displayed on the map if the data is available to the navigation system ⇒ Traffic information.

1. Tap a traffic disruption to open a dialog box with details ⇒ Function descriptions.

Traffic jam. Accident. Ice. Road closed. Slip hazard. Danger. Construction zone. Strong wind.

Inputting destinations and starting route guidance


Please read the introductory information and heed the Warnings and Notice ⇒ and Safety instructions.
Depending on the vehicle equipment, different functions are available for inputting destinations. Some functions are only available in some countries.

The various functions for inputting destinations are located in the navigation system main menu ⇒ Introduction.

You can further restrict your search with specific suggestions in the results list, e.g. “nearby”.

For further information about symbols on the Infotainment system screen, see ⇒ Functions and symbols of the navigation system in this Owner's Manual.

Enter address

Start route guidance by entering an address. During input, the navigation system suggests already known destinations. You can also enter a new, unknown address
for route guidance.
When inputting the address, input the name of the destination, not the postcode of the destination.

Selecting the destination and starting the navigation system


1. Tap .

Or: tap .

2. Enter the destination address and select your desired destination.

3. Tap Start.

Or: tap .

Quick start
1. Tap .

2. Enter the address of the destination, tap the desired destination and hold for a few seconds.
Enter the destination as accurately as possible. If there is an error in the destination entered, route guidance cannot take place or may lead to the wrong
destination.

Destination suggestions

Navigation uses saved data such as your last destinations, learned destinations, favorites, home address and work address to provide you with route guidance.

228
Selecting the destination and starting the navigation system
1. Tap Destination suggestions.

2. Tap on the desired destination.

The route guidance starts automatically.

Last destinations

The navigation system saves up to 25 of the most recent destinations to make them available for route guidance. A new destination automatically overwrites the
oldest destination.

Selecting the destination and starting the navigation system


1. Tap Last destinations.

2. Tap on the desired destination.

3. Tap Start.

Or: tap .

Quick start
1. Tap Last destinations.

2. Tap and hold the preferred destination for a few seconds.

Favorite destinations

You can save up to 50 journey destinations as favorites.

Saving a journey destination as a favorite


1. While entering a destination, tap on in the additional window.

Selecting the destination and starting the navigation system


1. Tap Favorites.

2. Tap on the desired destination.

3. Tap Start.

Or: tap .

Quick start
1. Tap Favorites.

2. Tap and hold the preferred destination for a few seconds.

Selecting on the map

The navigation map contains active areas at many points which are suitable for the input of a destination. To enter a destination, tap on your preferred position or
preferred location on the map. If map data is available at this point, you can launch route guidance.

Entering a destination via the navigation map is dependent on data status and not possible for all positions.

Use the Offroad navigation system to enter a destination to a selected destination point with unknown data.

Offroad navigation

The Offroad navigation system calculates routes to selected destinations with unknown data. If the destination is not located on a known road or at a known
position, the navigation system will calculate the route up to the next point on the known road and then complete the route to the destination using a straight line.

In order to start an Offroad navigation, tap on a free area without positioning data.

Starting the navigation


1. Tap .

2. Press and slide the map view until you can select your desired position. You can operate the navigation map using extended finger touches ⇒ Introduction.

3. Tap the preferred destination or any destination point on the map without positioning data.

4. Tap Start.

Or: tap .

Using a contact's address data

Start route guidance via the saved address data for a contact. You cannot use contacts for whom you have not saved any address data for route guidance.

Starting the navigation


1. Tap .

2. Tap on the preferred contact and address data.

229
3. Tap Start.

Or: tap .

NOTICE

If the address data for your contact is out of date, the route guidance will nevertheless direct you to the stored address. Please ensure the address for your
contact is up to date.

Navigation data
Please read the introductory information and heed the Warnings and Notice ⇒ and Safety instructions.
The Infotainment system is equipped with an internal navigation data storage medium. Depending on the country, the required navigation data may already be
installed.

The Infotainment system always requires up-to-date navigation data to ensure that route guidance can be implemented correctly and that the functions provided are
fully available.

NOTICE

If you use outdated navigation data, there may be adverse effects on the navigation system. It may not be possible to determine up-to-date routes, or route
guidance may guide you to an incorrect destination.

Always ensure that your navigation data is kept up-to-date.

Navigation Data Online - Additional Information


Regions in the navigation data that you do not use can be removed from the system under certain circumstances, e.g. navigation data memory low on space. If you
subsequently need these regions again at a later time, the navigation system will download them again on request. No contract for mobile online services is
needed. This service depends on the vehicle equipment and is only available in some countries.

1. Switch the ignition on.

2. Establish an Internet connection if you have not already done so.

Navigation data is automatically updated in the background.

Updating navigation data manually


Up-to-date navigation data for larger regions, such as Western Europe, can be downloaded online at www.volkswagen.com and stored on a suitable USB data
carrier, available to buy in stores. If the Infotainment system is switched off during the process, installation will be interrupted and it will continue automatically once
the system is turned on again.

1. Download and save the navigation data onto a USB data storage device.

2. Switch the vehicle ignition on.

3. Link the USB data carrier to the Infotainment system when the vehicle is stationary.

The navigation data for frequently driven regions is automatically updated in the background.
While and after updating the navigation data, no message appears in the Infotainment system.

If you update the navigation data manually, the USB data carrier must remain permanently connected. You will not receive a notification when the update is
complete.

Do not disconnect the USB data carrier from the Infotainment system for a few days until the navigation data for visited regions has been fully downloaded
and installed. The installation will start automatically in the background during the journey. Doing so will cancel the update process. If you disconnect the data
carrier and visit a new region, the navigation data is not updated due to the lack of a USB data carrier.

Displaying the map data version


1. Tap HOME System information.

Or: tap MENU System information.

Traffic information
Please read the introductory information and heed the Warnings and Notice ⇒ and Safety instructions.
Depending on the vehicle equipment, the reception of traffic information may not be available in all Infotainment systems or in all countries.

The Infotainment system automatically receives detailed traffic information when there is an active Internet connection. This information is displayed on the map via
symbols and color coding on the road network.
Reception of traffic information is possible in some countries if permitted by the privacy settings selected. No traffic information is received in offline mode.

Traffic disruptions

Traffic disruptions such as traffic jams are displayed on the navigation map as symbols ⇒ Functions and symbols of the navigation system .

230
The route plan displays current traffic disruptions if the relevant data is available to the Navigation system.

If route guidance is active, traffic disruptions on the current route will be displayed on the route plan. You can avoid these traffic disruptions by modifying the route
plan.

Avoiding traffic disruptions


1. Tap the traffic disruption.

2. Tap Avoid.

The route will be recalculated.


Only one traffic disruption can be avoided in this manner for each route guidance.

Local warnings, e.g for severe weather, can be played via the Infotainment system as a pop-up notification.

Traffic flow display

The traffic flow for current traffic disruptions is displayed on the navigation map via color coding on the road network.
OrangeStop-and-go traffic.RedTraffic jam.

Mobile phone interface


Introduction
Using the phone interface, you can connect your cell phone to the Infotainment system and control the phone functions via the Infotainment system. The sound is
played back via the vehicle speakers. Depending on the vehicle equipment, you can connect up to two cell phones to the Infotainment system at the same time
⇒ Coupling, connecting and managing.

Availability of functions may differ depending on the cell phone used and its operating system and the vehicle equipment, and functions are not available in all
countries.

High speeds, poor weather and road conditions, a lot of background noise, even outside the vehicle, and the network quality can impair phone calls in the vehicle.

The phone interface may contain an antenna amplifier that improves the reception quality of the cell phone.
You generally only need to pair a device like a cell phone once. You can reestablish the device's connection to the Infotainment system at any time via
Bluetooth or Wi-Fi without re-pairing your device.

For a phone call via the hands-free system or at a high volume, a conversation may also be heard by third parties outside the vehicle.

Locations with special regulations

Switch off the cell phone and phone interface at locations where there is a risk of explosions. These locations are not always clearly identified. These include, for
example:

Areas near pipes and tanks containing chemicals

Lower decks in ships and ferries

Areas near vehicles powered by liquefied petroleum gas, such as propane and butane.

Areas with chemicals or particles in the air, such as flour, dust, or metal powder

All other locations where the engine or the cell phone must be switched off.

WARNING

In locations where there is a risk of explosion, e.g. near to gas stations, and in areas with specific regulations, sparks such as those caused by electrostatic
discharges or cell phones can cause explosions or fires, resulting in serious injuries or death.

Switch off cell phones and the phone interface in locations where there is a risk of explosions, e.g. near to gas stations, and in locations with specific
regulations.

Do not operate cell phones or the phone interface in locations where there is a risk of explosions, e.g. near to gas stations, and in locations with specific
regulations.

NOTICE

Radiation from cell phones that are switched on can interfere with sensitive technical and medical devices, potentially causing malfunctions or damage to the
devices.

Always switch off the cell phone in areas with special regulations relating to or prohibiting the use of cell phones.

Types of phone interface

Depending on the country and vehicle equipment, your vehicle may have the following mobile phone interfaces:
231
Phone interface basic configuration.

The phone interface uses the Hands-free profile (HFP) Bluetooth profile for transmission. This enables the use of phone functions via the Infotainment system
and played back via the vehicle speakers.

Convenience phone interface.

Just like the basic configuration of the phone interface, the Convenience phone interface uses the HFP Bluetooth profile.

The Convenience phone interface can be equipped with the wireless charging function ⇒ Charging Options for Mobile Devices . In order to use the features of
the wireless charging function, you need to place a suitable cell phone correctly in the storage compartment. If you place a suitable cell phone in the storage
compartment, the cell phone will be connected to the vehicle antenna depending on the vehicle equipment. This improves reception and call quality.

Functions and symbols of the phone interface


Please read the introductory information and heed the Warnings and Notice ⇒ and Safety instructions.
The range of functions and the symbols may differ depending on the vehicle equipment and are not available in all countries. The available functions depend on the
cell phone used and its operating system. The symbols may look different depending on the Infotainment system.

Functions
Hands-free system.

SMS functions via Bluetooth:

Read SMS.

Write SMS, inc. templates.

Have an SMS read out.

Message thread.

E-mail functions via Bluetooth:

Read e-mail.

Write e-mail.

Symbols in the main menu


1. To open the main menu, open the home screen and tap ⇒ Overview and controls of the 10" version , ⇒ Overview and controls of the 8.25" version .

Open contact list. Open incoming and outgoing calls lists. Dial telephone number. Open messages (SMS and, depending on your country, e-
mail). Select the active device from two or more connected cell phones. Opening the settings.

Symbols for telephone calls


Handle and display a call. End or decline a call. Mute the hands-free system. Put a call on hold. Decline a call with a SMS template. Add
participants to a phone conference or begin a phone conference. Make an emergency call (SOS). Receive breakdown assistance. Voice mail.
Receive information about Volkswagen and various value added traffic and travel services.

Symbols in the contact list


1. To open the contact list, tap .

Input to search for contacts. Address. Editing favorites. Add favorites. Remove favorites.

Call list symbols


1. To open the call lists, tap on .

Received incoming call. Outgoing call. Missed call. Frequent calls or favorites from your cell phone, if supported by your cell phone.
Telephone number (company). Telephone number (private). Cell phone number. Fax device. Fax device (company). Fax device (private).

Text message symbols


1. To open the text messages, tap on .

Top left: Select active input. Received text message. Sent text message. Template for text messages.

Coupling, connecting and managing


Please read the introductory information and heed the Warnings and Notice ⇒ and Safety instructions.
To use the phone interface functions, pair a cell phone with the Infotainment system.

Depending on the vehicle equipment, you can connect up to two cell phones to the Infotainment system at the same time. However, only one device is active at a
time and can be used to make calls. The second connected device can receive calls via the Infotainment system and be used to play media.

Pairing a cell phone

Before connecting for the first time, you need to pair the cell phone with the Infotainment system. A user profile is then automatically saved in the Infotainment
system . The coupling process may take a few minutes.

Requirements:

232
Bluetooth is activated on the cell phone.

Bluetooth is activated on the Infotainment system.

1. Open the list of available Bluetooth devices on your cell phone and select the device name for the Infotainment system.

2. Pay attention to messages on the cell phone and in the Infotainment system and confirm these if necessary.

If the pairing is successful, the data on the cell phone will be saved in the user profile.

3. Optional: Confirm the message for transferring the data on the cell phone.

WARNING

If you carry out the coupling when driving, this may cause accidents or injuries.

Only carry out the coupling when the vehicle is stationary.

When pairing some cell phones, a PIN may be displayed on the cell phone screen. Type this PIN into the Infotainment system to finish pairing.

Connecting a cell phone

Precondition:
A cell phone is paired with the Infotainment system.

1. Activate Bluetooth in the cell phone.

Connection management

Precondition:
The cell phone is paired and connected.

1. Tap HOME Mobile devices.

2. Tap to connect the desired technology.

Active and passive connection

In order to use the phone interface functions, at least one cell phone must be connected to the Infotainment system. If several cell phones are connected to the
Infotainment system, you can switch between an active and an inactive connection. In order to operate the phone interface with your preferred cell phone, establish
an active connection to the Infotainment system.

Difference between the types of connection


ActiveThe cell phone is paired and connected. You can carry out phone interface functions using data from this cell phone. PassiveThe cell phone is paired and
connected. You can only take incoming calls via the mobile phone interface. Other functions are not available.
Paired cell phones are saved in the Infotainment system even if they are not currently connected.

Change connection type (inactive to active)

Precondition:
Several cell phones are connected to the Infotainment system simultaneously.

1. Tap .

The actively connected cell phone is highlighted.

2. Tap the name for the preferred cell phone.

The connection with the other cell phones will be inactivated automatically.

User profiles

An individual user profile is automatically created for each paired cell phone. Data from this cell phone, e.g. contact data, is stored in the user profile. A maximum of
ten user profiles may be saved in the Infotainment system simultaneously.

Deleting a user profile


1. Tap .

The user profiles are located in the Select cell phone area or in Mobile devices.

2. Tap the desired user profile and tap to delete.

Calling and sending text messages


Please read the introductory information and heed the Warnings and Notice ⇒ and Safety instructions.

Using a phone

Select a telephone number to make a call. Various functions are available for selecting a telephone number.

233
Using contact data
If a contact has multiple telephone numbers, you must select the number you wish to call accordingly.

1. Tap .

2. To search for a contact, tap and enter the name of the contact in the input field.

Or: To call a favorite, tap Favorites.

Or: Tap All.

3. Tap on a contact in the list to make the call.


When searching for a contact, enter the last name and first name separated by a space.

Using a call list


The mobile phone interface stores the incoming and outgoing calls on a call list. Recently used telephone numbers are saved under favorites. Make a call via the
call list.

1. Tap and filter entries in the call list, e.g. by missed calls.

2. Tap on a number or, where applicable, a contact in the list to make the call.

Manually entering the telephone number


1. Tap and enter a telephone number.

2. Tap to make the call.


While you are entering a telephone number, the contact related to the number is displayed on the Infotainment system screen.

Sending text messages

Depending on the cell phone and the Infotainment system in use, you can send and receive SMS text messages and, depending on your country, e-mails via the
phone interface.

Sending and receiving e-mails is also dependent on the app used on the cell phone.

Sending an SMS
1. Tap SMS New message and enter the message on the screen.

2. Enter the desired contact in the search bar.

3. Tap OK to send the message.

Sending an e-mail
1. Tap E-MAIL New message and enter the message on the screen.

2. Enter the desired contact in the search bar. If required, a contact can be searched for using Search.

3. Tap OK to send the message.

Switching between SMS and e-mail


To send an e-mail or SMS, activate the relevant option. The active option is displayed on the screen, e.g. SMS.

1. Tap .

2. Tap the desired option.

Phone directory, favorites and speed dial keys


Please read the introductory information and heed the Warnings and Notice ⇒ and Safety instructions.

Phonebook

This first time a cell phone is paired with the Infotainment system, the phonebook is saved in the Infotainment system. If necessary, confirm the transfer on the cell
phone.

Depending on the vehicle equipment, you can save up to 5000 contacts in your phonebook.

The phone directory is updated after each new connection. During the update, the present phone directory can still be used.

If teleconferences are supported, the phonebook can be opened during a phone call and another participant can be added to the phone call.

If an image is stored for the contact, it can be displayed in the list next to the entry.

The symbols may look different depending on the Infotainment system.

Favorites and speed dial keys

A speed dial key can be assigned with a favorite from the phone directory. If the entry contains an image, this is displayed on the speed dial key.

Speed dial keys must be programmed manually and are assigned to a user profile ⇒ Coupling, connecting and managing, ⇒ Bluetooth® interface .

234
Programming a speed dial key
1. Tap .

2. Tap a contact in the phone directory. If a contact has multiple telephone numbers, tap a number on the list.

Editing the speed dial key


1. Tap and hold the speed dial key until the phonebook opens.

2. Tap the new contact in the phone directory. If a contact has multiple telephone numbers, tap a number on the list.

Calling a favorite
1. Tap a programmed speed dial key.
Favorites are not automatically updated. If the phone number for a contact changes, the speed dial key must be reassigned.

Deleting a favorite from the speed dial key


1. Tap .

2. To delete a favorite, tap the preferred speed dial key .

Voice control
Introduction to using voice control
With voice control, you can have certain
functions carried out by voice
command.

Types of voice control


Depending on which language has been set in the Infotainment system, one of the following voice controls will be available in the vehicle:

Command-based voice control (standard).

Enhanced voice control (offline or online).

Speech recognition for individual seating positions

Additional microphones enable voice control to recognize whether the driver or passenger is speaking. For supported languages, you can open functions for
individual seat positions, for example switching on the seat heating.

Does my vehicle have voice control?

If there is a Talk button on the multi-function steering wheel or the VOICE button is available in the Infotainment system or your vehicle understands the
activation word, voice control is installed in the vehicle.

In black with blue background: Voice control is active and recognizes spoken words.
Test voice control before a journey to get to know the function.

Differences in the voice controls


Command-based voice control (standard)

Only grammatically correct voice commands are recognized by the voice control. Voice commands must follow a fixed syntax in order to be recognized correctly,
e.g. “Navigate to [city, street name, house number ]”. You can find further examples in the Infotainment system. The command-based voice control can be carried
out in any available language.

Enhanced voice control (offline or online)

Speech commands can be freely worded in common speech. For example, in response to the question “How long is left to drive?”, the system gives the remaining
time until arrival at the destination. Suggestions for voice commands depend on the set language and can be found in the Infotainment system.

Enhanced voice control works both online and offline. By evaluating voice commands, online mode offers improved POIs, media and online radio station search
functionality. Additionally, messages can be dictated. For online mode, you need a VW Car-Net contract valid for the vehicle.
If enhanced voice control is available in your language, it is used to activate voice control.

Supported languages

The number of languages available in your country depends on the vehicle equipment.

Start voice control by saying the activation word available in your country ⇒ Activation word.

Starting and ending voice control


Voice commands

Voice control only recognizes voice commands in the language selected in the infotainment system.

235
Observe the following tips for successful voice commands:

Speak clearly and at normal volume. Speak a little louder at higher speeds.

Avoid excessive emphasis and strong accents.

Do not leave long pauses in speech.

Avoid external and background noise.

Do not direct the air flow from the vents towards the microphone or headliner.

Open suggestions for speech commands


1. Tap HOME .
To ensure that names in the phonebook are identified correctly, you may need to switch the order of the first and last names of the desired contact, depending
on how the phonebook entry is structured.

Starting voice control


You can use different methods to start voice control, depending on the vehicle equipment:

Start via speech: Say the activation word ⇒ Activation word.

Start via multi-function steering wheel: Press the Talk button .

Starting up via the Infotainment system: Tap on VOICE .

Depending on the cell phone and operating system, voice control of a connected cell phone can be started by pressing and holding or the VOICE button
⇒ App-Connect .

Ending voice control


You can use different methods to end voice control, depending on the vehicle equipment:

End via speech: To open suggestions for a voice command to cancel, tap HOME General.

End via the multi-function steering wheel: press the Talk button .

End automatically: If you use functions within the Infotainment system, activate the parking system; if telephone calls or tasks involving speech and navigation
warnings occur, the voice control ends automatically.

Activation word
In the ring memory of the Infotainment system, the words spoken in the vehicle are checked for the activation word. If the Infotainment system detects the activation
word, voice control will begin. A ring memory is automatically overwritten approximately every 15 seconds. There is no transmission of data or words spoken in the
vehicle. The ring memory is inactive when the activation word is switched off.

Switching activation word on and off


If the activation word is switched off, voice control cannot be activated via the activation word.

1. Tap HOME Voice control Activation word.

Speaking and recognizing the activation word

Precondition:
The Activation word is switched on in the settings.

Bonjour Volkswagen. Hola Volkswagen. Hello Volkswagen.

Troubleshooting
Voice control is not responding
Voice control is not available in your language.

Set the correct system language in the Infotainment system.

Start voice control by using the activation word or the Talk button on the multi-function steering wheel.

Voice commands are not recognized due to a system error. Contact suitably qualified professionals for assistance. Volkswagen recommends contacting an
authorized Volkswagen dealer or authorized Volkswagen Service Facility.

Voice control is giving unsuitable responses


Voice control has misinterpreted the question.

Clearly give your voice command again.

Voice control is not performing the function


This function cannot be performed by voice control.

The function is not available in all languages. You can find suggestions for voice commands in the set language in the Infotainment system.

236
Settings within the function are preventing the device from switching on or carrying out the function.

Voice control did not understand the voice command.

There is insufficient data.

237
Transporting
Stowing luggage and cargo
Stowing luggage securely in the vehicle
Distribute luggage as evenly as possible in the vehicle. Do not cover any vent openings.

Always stow luggage and heavy objects in the luggage compartment and place them as far forward in the compartment as possible ⇒ .

Adhere to the Gross Axle Weight Rating and Gross Vehicle Weight Rating ⇒ Technical data.

Secure objects in the luggage compartment using suitable securing cords, fixation belts or tensioning straps on the tie-downs.

Also store small objects securely.

If necessary, fold the rear seat backrest down and lock it securely.

If necessary, adjust the headlight range. Vehicles with dynamic headlight range control will adjust automatically.

Adjust the tire pressure based on the load. Follow the tire pressure label ⇒ Checking the tire pressure .

WARNING

Objects or animals that are not secured or are secured incorrectly can cause serious injuries or death in the event of sudden driving and braking maneuvers or a
collision. This is especially true if the airbags deploy and strike objects, causing them to fly through the vehicle interior.

Store all objects securely in the vehicle. Follow the legal regulations whilst doing so.

Stow objects in the vehicle interior in such a way that they will not enter the airbag deployment zone while you are driving.

Secure animals in the vehicle restraint systems that are appropriate for their weight and size.

Always keep the storage compartments closed while driving.

Do not leave hard, heavy, or sharp objects loose in the open storage compartments in the vehicle, on the surface behind the rear seat backrest, or on the
instrument panel.

Remove hard, heavy, or sharp objects from clothing and bags in the vehicle interior and store them securely.

WARNING

If objects stowed in the vehicle cause people to sit in the wrong position, serious or fatal injuries may occur in the event of sudden driving and braking
maneuvers or accidents.

Never stow objects on a seat if a person is going to use it.

WARNING

When transporting heavy objects, the vehicle’s handling performance may change because of the altered center of gravity and the braking distance may
increase. Heavy loads that have not been stowed or secured properly may change the vehicle handling, e.g. if the load slides around. This can result in a loss of
vehicle control and lead to serious or fatal injuries.

Never overload the vehicle. Both the load and the distribution of the load in the vehicle affect driving behavior and braking efficiency.

Always distribute the load evenly and as low down in the vehicle as possible.

Secure heavy objects in the luggage compartment as far in front of the rear axle as possible.

Secure any loose objects to prevent them from sliding around.

Always adapt your speed and driving style to the visibility, weather, road and traffic conditions.

Accelerate with extra care and caution.

Avoid sudden braking or driving maneuvers.

Brake earlier than usual if the vehicle has a heavy load.

NOTICE

Abrasive objects on the rear windows can cause damage, for example to the heating elements for the rear window defroster.

Do not load the luggage compartment to a height where objects rest against the rear window.

NOTICE

238
Carrying systems fixed to the rear spoiler may damage the vehicle.

Do not attach a luggage rack or any other kind of carrying system, e.g. bicycle rack, to the vehicle's rear spoiler.

Luggage compartment cover


Luggage compartment cover
When opening and closing the trunk lid, the luggage compartment cover is raised or lowered on the attached retaining straps.

The luggage compartment cover is not suitable for use as storage for objects, even lightweight items of clothing ⇒ .

WARNING

Objects or animals on the luggage compartment cover can damage the luggage compartment cover and cause serious injury or death in the event of sudden
driving and braking maneuvers or an accident.

Never transport objects on the luggage compartment cover.

Never allow animals to ride on the luggage compartment cover.

NOTICE

Incorrect handling of the luggage compartment cover can cause damage.

Do not load the luggage compartment so high that the luggage compartment cover presses on the load when the trunk lid is closed.

Never close the trunk lid while the luggage compartment floor is open or locked.

Installing and removing the luggage compartment cover

Fig. 122 In the luggage compartment: Installing and removing the luggage compartment cover.

Removing the luggage compartment cover


1. Unhook the top retaining straps from the trunk lid fig. 122 (upper arrows).

2. Lift the trunk lid.

3. Press the luggage compartment cover out of the lateral brackets in the luggage compartment fig. 122 (lower arrows).

Installing the luggage compartment cover


1. Press the luggage compartment cover into the side holders in the luggage compartment fig. 122 (lower arrows).

2. Hook the retaining straps onto the trunk lid fig. 122 (upper arrows).

Luggage compartment floor


Luggage compartment floor - functions
Opening the luggage compartment floor

239
Fig. 123 In the luggage compartment: Raising the variable luggage compartment floor.

Fig. 124 In the luggage compartment: Folding up the variable luggage compartment floor.

1. To open, grasp the recessed grip in the luggage compartment floor fig. 123 and fold the luggage compartment floor upward in the direction of the arrow until it is
held by the side retainers fig. 124 (arrows).

Closing the luggage compartment floor


1. Hold the recessed grip in the luggage compartment floor.

2. Lower and replace the luggage compartment floor.

Adjusting the height of the luggage compartment floor

Depending on the vehicle equipment, the variable luggage compartment floor is height-adjustable.

240
Fig. 125 In the luggage compartment: Lowering the luggage compartment floor.

1. Lift the luggage compartment floor and pull it backwards, out of the guides on the side of the luggage compartment.

2. Insert the luggage compartment floor into the guides at the preferred height and slide it forward in the direction of the arrow until it locks fig. 125.

NOTICE

Improper use may damage the variable luggage compartment floor or the luggage compartment trim.

When closing the second luggage compartment floor, always carefully guide it downward, and do not drop it.

Always distribute loads as evenly as possible across the entire luggage compartment floor to avoid concentrating the load in a single place.

Depending on the model, the vehicle may be equipped with a removable, flexible floor covering rather than the variable luggage compartment floor.

Luggage compartment features


Tie-downs

Fig. 126 In the luggage compartment: Tie-down (general example).

Tie-down.

Tie-downs are located in the luggage compartment to secure loose objects and luggage with the help of lines, fixation belts or securing straps fig. 126.

WARNING

Unsuitable or damaged tie-down straps or tensioning straps could break during braking maneuvers or an accident. This could result in objects being thrown
through the vehicle interior and causing serious or fatal injuries.

Use only suitable and undamaged tie-downs, fixing and tensioning straps.

Secure cords, fixation belts and tensioning straps diagonally and tightly across the items placed on the luggage compartment floor, and fasten the cords,
241
fixation belts and tensioning straps securely to the tie-downs.

Make sure that the upper edge of the load is above the tie-downs, especially on flat objects.

Follow the signs about storing cargo in the luggage compartment, depending on the vehicle equipment.

Never secure a child restraint to the tie-downs.

WARNING

Elastic tensioning straps must be stretched for securing to the tie-downs and are therefore under tension. If elastic tensioning straps slip off and spring back
toward your body, the hooks attached to them may cause serious injuries.

Protect your eyes and face when securing and releasing the straps.

Always secure elastic tensioning straps to the tie-downs in the front part of the luggage compartment first. Then pull them to the loading edge. Secure the
elastic tensioning straps to the tie-downs so that they will spring away from your body if they come off.

Suitable straps and cargo securing systems are available from an authorized Volkswagen dealer or authorized Volkswagen Service Facility. Volkswagen
recommends contacting an authorized Volkswagen dealer or authorized Volkswagen Service Facility.

Shopping bag hooks

Fig. 127 Shopping bag hooks on the left and right of the luggage compartment.

You may have shopping bag hooks in your luggage compartment for hanging light shopping bags.

WARNING

Luggage or other items tied to the shopping-bag hooks may tear off and be thrown into the vehicle interior during a braking maneuver or accident. This may
cause you to lose control of the vehicle and result in serious or fatal injuries.

Never use the shopping bag hooks to tie down pieces of luggage or objects.

Only hang lightweight items, up to a maximum of 2.5 kg (approximately 5.5 lbs), from the shopping bag hooks in the vehicle.

Load-through hatch

242
Fig. 128 Pass-through in the rear seat backrest (general example).

Fig. 129 Pass-through in the luggage compartment.

Depending on the vehicle equipment, there may be a load-through hatch behind the center armrest in the rear seat backrest for transporting long objects, such as
skis, inside the vehicle.

Opening the pass-through from the vehicle interior


1. Fold the center armrest forward ⇒ Center armrest.

2. Pull the release lever in the direction of the arrow fig. 128 and fold the luggage compartment pass-through cover all the way forward ⇒ .

3. Open the trunk lid.

Opening the pass-through from the luggage compartment


1. Press the release lever down in the direction of the arrow fig. 129 and fold the cover forward.

2. Insert long objects from the luggage compartment side and slide them forward through the load-through hatch.

3. Secure objects with a seat belt if necessary.

4. Close the trunk lid.

Closing the load-through hatch


1. Fold the flap for load-through hatch backward until it clicks into place.

There may be a red mark on the luggage compartment side. This should not be visible ⇒ .

2. Close the trunk lid.

3. If necessary, fold the center armrest backward.

243
WARNING

Folding and unfolding the load-through hatch in an uncontrolled or careless manner may result in serious injury or death.

Never fold the luggage compartment pass-through forward or back while driving.

When folding up the pass-through, make sure that the safety belt does not become trapped or damaged.

Keep hands, fingers, feet and other body parts away from the pivot range of the pass-through when folding it forward or back.

Always check that the red mark on the catch indicator is not visible when the pass-through is in the upright position. A red marking indicates that the
luggage compartment pass-through is not locked into place.

If the luggage compartment pass-through is folded down or is not securely engaged, no passengers, especially children, are to be transported on this
seat.

Trailer towing technically not possible


Trailer towing information
The vehicle is not designed for towing a trailer. No trailer hitch may be retrofitted.

WARNING

Mounting a trailer hitch on the vehicle can result in damage to the vehicle, accidents and serious or fatal injuries when operating the vehicle.

Never mount a trailer hitch on the vehicle.

Roof rack
Introduction
Depending on the model, the vehicle may be designed to have a roof rack installed.

Bulky objects can be transported on the vehicle roof using the roof rack.

If you are not sure if your vehicle is designed to have a roof rack installed, check with an authorized Volkswagen dealer or authorized Volkswagen Service Facility.
Volkswagen recommends contacting an authorized Volkswagen dealer or authorized Volkswagen Service Facility.

Only use roof racks that are approved by Volkswagen for use with your vehicle.

Do not use or retrofit a roof rack if this is not approved for your vehicle.

WARNING

When transporting large, heavy, long, or flat loads on the roof rack, the vehicle's driving characteristics and aerodynamics change because of the different center
of gravity and increased wind resistance. This may cause accidents and serious or fatal injuries.

Always secure cargo correctly with suitable and undamaged cords, fixation belts or tensioning straps.

Avoid abrupt and sudden driving and braking maneuvers.

Always adapt your speed and driving style to the visibility, weather, road and traffic conditions.

WARNING

If the use of a roof rack is not approved for your vehicle or a roof rack that is incompatible with the vehicle is fitted, it may detach and fall from the roof of the
vehicle while you are driving. This may cause accidents and serious or fatal injuries.

Only use roof racks that are approved by Volkswagen for the vehicle.

Do not fit roof racks if they are not approved for your vehicle.

NOTICE

Installing any type of roof rack onto a vehicle that is not approved for use of a roof rack can cause serious damage.

Do not fit roof racks if they are not approved for your vehicle.

Driving with a roof rack fitted increases the air resistance of the vehicle and thus also the fuel consumption. This reduces the potential range of the vehicle. This
applies to all roof racks and any objects transported on them, such as bicycles and skis.

244
Mounting a roof rack
Please read the introductory information and heed the Warnings and Notice ⇒ and Introduction.

Fig. 130 Mounting points for base supports.

For safety reasons, special roof racks are needed to transport luggage, bicycles, surfboards, skis and boats safely.

Only use roof racks that are provided for the vehicle model, model year and vehicle equipment by the corresponding manufacturer.

Volkswagen recommends the use of Volkswagen original parts or Volkswagen original accessories, which you can acquire from an authorized Volkswagen dealer
or authorized Volkswagen Service Facility.

Mounting a roof rack (vehicles without roof rail)

Mount the roof rack in accordance with the instructions supplied.

The holes or markings for securing the roof rack can only be seen when the doors are open. If necessary, unscrew the plastic screw from the hole opening.

The front holes or markings are located on the undersides of the roof pillars near the door seal.

The rear holes or markings are located on the undersides of the roof pillars near the door seal or, depending on the vehicle equipment, at the top of the rear side
windows.

After the roof rack has been mounted, the rack base can now be secured to it ⇒ .

Remove the roof rack in the following scenarios


If the roof rack is no longer needed.

Before driving through an automatic car wash

If the height of the vehicle exceeds the maximum height limit, for example in a garage

NOTICE

The height of the vehicle changes when a roof rack is installed and when there is cargo secured on it. The vehicle may be badly damaged if you drive into
entrances with low heights, e.g. underpasses and garages.

Compare the height of the vehicle with the clearance height.

NOTICE

If parts on the roof of your particular vehicle (depending on the vehicle equipment), e.g. the roof antenna, and the trunk lid's range of movement are impaired by
the roof rack and the luggage, the vehicle may be damaged.

Ensure that the roof rack is positioned correctly on the roof and that it will not affect any components of the vehicle.

WARNING

Securing the roof rack and base incorrectly or using them incorrectly may cause the luggage or the entire assembly to come loose from the vehicle roof. This can
result in accidents and serious injury or death.

Always mount the roof rack and base correctly in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.

245
Secure the roof rack only at the locations intended for this.

Always mount special rack assemblies for bicycles, skis, surfboards, etc. correctly and in accordance with the manufacturer's installation instructions.

Only use the roof rack and base if they are undamaged and secured correctly.

Check the roof rack mounts before starting a journey and, if necessary, retighten them after a short distance.

On long trips, check the threaded connections and fasteners each time you take a break.

Do not make any modifications or repairs to the roof rack or base.

A fitted roof rack increases air resistance and therefore may reduce the vehicle's range.

Loading the roof rack


Please read the introductory information and heed the Warnings and Notice ⇒ and Introduction.

Maximum permissible roof weight

The maximum permissible roof load is 75 kg (165 lbs).

The roof load consists of the weight of the roof rack and the items carried on the roof rack ⇒ .

Always check the weight of the roof rack and the items that will be transported on it. Weigh the items if necessary.

When using a roof rack with a low load limit, do not load the rack with the maximum permissible roof load. In this case, only load the roof rack to the weight limit listed
in the installation guide.

Distributing the load

Distribute the load evenly and secure it correctly ⇒ .

Checking that everything is secure

Once you have fitted the roof rack, drive a short distance and then check all the fasteners. Keep checking them regularly ⇒ .

WARNING

Accidents, vehicle damage and serious or fatal injuries can result if the maximum permissible roof load is exceeded.

Never exceed the specified roof load, the Gross Axle Weight Rating, and the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating of the vehicle.

Do not exceed the load limit of the roof rack, even if the roof load is below the limit.

WARNING

If loose and incorrectly secured luggage falls off the roof rack, accidents and serious or fatal injuries may occur.

Use only suitable and undamaged tie-downs, fixing and tensioning straps.

NOTICE

If the trunk lid hits the roof load, the vehicle may be damaged.

Make sure the trunk lid does not run into the roof load when opening the lid.

246
Fuel and emissions control system
Safety precautions for handling fuel
WARNING

Handling fuel incorrectly can cause explosions, fires, severe burns, and other injuries.

Before refueling, switch off the engine, the ignition and your cell phone, as well as other radio equipment.

To reduce the risk of discharging static electricity, do not enter the vehicle while refueling.

Make sure that the fuel tank cap is sealed correctly and no fuel is leaking out.

Note the applicable safety precautions and local regulations for handling fuel.

WARNING

Refueling incorrectly can cause fires, serious or fatal injuries, and vehicle damage.

Only use fuel that is approved for your vehicle.

Do not use any fuels containing metal and only use service additives approved by Volkswagen in the respective proportion.

Immediately remove any fuel that has spilled on vehicle components.

CAUTION

Fuel may leak out of reserve canisters and ignite. This can cause fires and injuries.

Do transport any reserve canisters in the vehicle.

Fuels can contaminate the environment. Collect any leaking operating fluids and dispose of them according to legal regulations.

The fuel filler flap does not have an emergency release. If necessary, contact an authorized Volkswagen dealer or authorized Volkswagen Service Facility for
assistance.

Fuel types and refueling


Introduction
The fuel filler flap is located on the right rear side of the vehicle.

Designation of fuels and fuel standards


Refer to ⇒ and Safety precautions for handling fuel .

Fig. 131 On the inside of the fuel filler flap: fuel label (general example)

Fuel label

The type of fuel to use depends on the vehicle engine. The factory has placed a fuel information label on the fuel filler flap, which specifies the fuel type to be used
for the vehicle fig. 131.

The name and limits specify which fuels are suitable for the vehicle. This is a minimum requirement. The vehicle must not be refueled with fuels of lower quality or
247
other fuel types ⇒ .

Fuel standards

The fuel used must meet one of the following standards. The vehicle must not be refueled with other fuels ⇒ .

If fuel with the specified standards is not available, contact suitably qualified professionals for information about which fuels are suitable for the vehicle. Volkswagen
recommends contacting an authorized Volkswagen dealer or authorized Volkswagen Service Facility.

Gasoline

Fig. 132 Label for gasoline containing 5% ethanol.

Fig. 133 Label for gasoline containing 10% ethanol.

Fig. 134 Label for gasoline containing 20% ethanol.

E5 stands for gasoline with Ethanol content of maximum 5%.

E10 stands for gasoline with Ethanol content of maximum 10 %.

E20 stands for gasoline with Ethanol content of maximum 20 %.

Fuel standard

EN 228 in the current version.

DIN EN 228 in the current version.

Resolucao ANP N° 40 (Brazil) in the current version.

Resolucion 576/2019 (Argentina) in the current version.

NOM-016-CRE-2016 (Mexico) in the current version.

NOTICE

Refueling with non-standard and non-approved fuels can cause reduced performance and considerable damage to the engine and the fuel system.

Before refueling, check if the fuel specification at the fuel pump meets the vehicle specifications.

Only use fuel that conforms to the specified standard and label.

Gasoline
Refer to ⇒ and Safety precautions for handling fuel .

Gasoline types

Gasoline types are differentiated by the Research Octane Number (RON ). The vehicle may also be refueled with gasoline that has a higher RON than is required by
the engine. However, this will not improve fuel consumption or engine power.

The fuel information label may list multiple gasoline types, for example RON 95 min. 91. The highlighted octane number, RON 95 in this example, is the preferred
gasoline type for which the vehicle is designed and optimized. The listed alternative gasoline type, RON 91 in this example, should only be used if the preferred
type, RON 95 in this example, is not available.
248
If your vehicle has a gasoline engine, only fill it with gasoline that does not contain metal (no lead, manganese, or iron) and that does not have a higher ethanol
content than specified on the fuel information label ⇒ .

The fuel quality affects the performance, output, and life of the engine. Fuel with gasoline that already contains the correct fuel additives ⇒ .

Volkswagen recommends using “TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline”, which is available in some regions, for example North America, Central America and South
America. For more information on “TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline”, visit the official website at:

https://www.toptiergas.com

NOTICE

Using incorrect fuel and unsuitable fuel additives can result in vehicle damage.

Before refueling, check if the fuel standard listed on the fuel pump meets the vehicle specifications.

Only refuel with gasoline that meets or exceeds the specified Research Octane Number (RON).

If necessary, only use service additives approved by Volkswagen in the correct amounts.

NOTICE

If you must fuel your vehicle with gasoline with a lower octane number, this may lead to vehicle damage when driving over a longer period.

Only drive at moderate engine RPM and low engine load.

Avoid high engine speeds and heavy engine load.

Refuel your vehicle with gasoline that meets the required octane rating as soon as possible.

Refueling
Refer to ⇒ and Safety precautions for handling fuel .

Fig. 135 Behind the fuel filler flap: fuel tank cap (general example)

Refueling procedure
1. To unlock the fuel filler flap, unlock the vehicle with the button on the remote control vehicle key ⇒ Vehicle key functions.

Or: to unlock the fuel filler flap, unlock the vehicle with the button in the driver door ⇒ Central locking button.

On vehicles with Keyless Access, the fuel filler flap is automatically unlocked when the vehicle is unlocked.

2. Open the fuel filler flap.

3. Remove the fuel tank cap and insert it into the opening at the fuel filler flap provided for this fig. 135.

4. Hold the fuel pump nozzle handle down to ensure optimum refueling.

The fuel tank is full once the fuel pump nozzle turns off for the first time ⇒ .

5. Screw the fuel tank cap onto the fuel filler neck.

6. Close the fuel filler flap.

Do not continue filling after disconnection. The expansion area in the fuel tank may fill with fuel, e.g. due to heating. This may mean that the fuel overflows or the
automatic ventilation process cannot work ⇒ Troubleshooting.

WARNING

Fuel may spray out and overflow if the fuel tank is overfilled. This can cause explosions, fires, and serious or fatal injuries.

249
Do not continue filling after the pump nozzle switches off for the first time.

NOTICE

If the tank is not emptied up to the reserve level at regular intervals, it might not be possible to maintain the fuel quality and system function required for driving.

At least every six months, only refuel when the warning light turns on.

Fuels can contaminate the environment. Collect any leaking operating fluids and dispose of them according to legal regulations.

Exhaust system
Introduction
The exhaust-relevant components reduce exhaust emissions:

Catalytic converter ⇒ Catalytic converter.

Particulate filter (depending on the vehicle equipment) ⇒ Particulate filter.

WARNING

If the engine runs in enclosed spaces, poisonous gases may enter the vehicle interior. This can cause serious injuries and result in death through suffocation.

Never start the engine in confined spaces.

Do not allow the engine to run in confined spaces.

Do not leave your vehicle unattended while the engine is running.

WARNING

Hot vehicle components and exhaust can ignite nearby flammable or explosive materials. This can lead to a fire and cause accidents and serious or fatal
injuries.

Park the vehicle in such a way so that no exhaust system components come into contact with flammable materials under the vehicle such as dry grass.

Never use additional underbody protection or corrosion protection on exhaust pipes, catalytic converters, particulate filters or heat shields.

Catalytic converter
Please read the introductory information and heed the Warnings and Notice ⇒ and Safety precautions for handling fuel .
To ensure that the exhaust system and the engine catalytic converter can work correctly for a long time, observe the following:

Only refuel with fuel permitted for the vehicle.

Never drive until the fuel tank is completely empty ⇒ Refueling.

Never add too much engine oil ⇒ Checking the engine oil level and adding oil .

Do not tow-start the vehicle; use jump-start assistance instead ⇒ Preparing and Performing a Jump-start .

If there are engine misfires, loss of power, or poor engine operation while driving, reduce the speed immediately and have the vehicle checked by suitably qualified
professionals ⇒ Troubleshooting. Volkswagen recommends contacting an authorized Volkswagen dealer or authorized Volkswagen Service Facility. Otherwise,
uncombusted fuel could be present in the exhaust system and then enter the atmosphere. The catalytic converter may also be damaged from overheating.

The exhaust may smell like sulfur when the emissions control system is running correctly.

Particulate filter
Please read the introductory information and heed the Warnings and Notice ⇒ and Safety precautions for handling fuel .

Function

The particulate filter (depends on how your vehicle is equipped) filters out soot from the exhaust gas.

Regeneration

With normal vehicle usage, the filter cleans itself. If the filter is unable to clean itself, e.g. if you only make short trips for an extended period of time, the filter can
become blocked with soot. The particulate filter needs to be cleaned (regenerated).

Noises, light odors, and increased engine speeds may occur during the regeneration. The radiator fan may continue to run while driving and after turning off the
engine.

250
To assist in particulate filter regeneration, Volkswagen recommends avoiding driving short distances too frequently.

The soot in the particulate filter is burned periodically at high temperatures. The yellow indicator light does not turn on during a periodic regeneration.

Troubleshooting
Please read the introductory information and heed the Warnings and Notice ⇒ and Safety precautions for handling fuel .

If the engine does not run smoothly and malfunctions


If the engine does not run smoothly or malfunctions while driving, it can indicate poor fuel quality.

1. Reduce your speed immediately.

2. Drive with a moderate RPM and low engine load to the nearest suitably qualified professional. Volkswagen recommends contacting an authorized Volkswagen
dealer or authorized Volkswagen Service Facility.

3. If these symptoms occur directly after refueling, stop the engine immediately to prevent subsequent damage.

4. Do not continue driving! Contact an authorized Volkswagen dealer or authorized Volkswagen Service Facility for assistance.

Particulate filter clogged with soot

The yellow indicator light turns on.

The particulate filter is clogged with soot and a regeneration is necessary.

Prerequisite for the regeneration drive: The engine is at operating temperature.

For gasoline engines


1.0 l to 1.8 l
1. Drive at a speed of between 50 km/h and 120 km/h (30 mph and 75 mph).

The resulting temperature increase burns off the soot in the filter.

2. Only end the regeneration drive once the indicator light turns off.

3. If the indicator light is still illuminated after driving for approximately 40 minutes, drive immediately to suitably qualified professionals for assistance. Volkswagen
recommends contacting an authorized Volkswagen dealer or authorized Volkswagen Service Facility.
2.0 l and 3.0 l
1. Drive at a speed of at least 80 km/h (50 mph).

2. Take your foot completely off the accelerator pedal for a few seconds to let the vehicle roll with a gear engaged.

3. Repeat this process of accelerating and letting the vehicle roll until the indicator light turns off.

4. If the indicator light does not turn off after some time, immediately consult an authorized Volkswagen dealer or authorized Volkswagen Service Facility.
Volkswagen recommends contacting an authorized Volkswagen dealer or authorized Volkswagen Service Facility.

Exhaust-related malfunction

The yellow indicator light turns on.

An exhaust-related component is malfunctioning, which could damage the vehicle.

1. Contact a suitably qualified professional and have the engine and the exhaust system checked. Volkswagen recommends contacting an authorized Volkswagen
dealer or authorized Volkswagen Service Facility.

Misfire

The indicator light flashes yellow.

There is misfire which could damage the vehicle.

1. Contact a suitably qualified professional and have the engine and the exhaust system checked. Volkswagen recommends contacting an authorized Volkswagen
dealer or authorized Volkswagen Service Facility.

WARNING

Sudden braking or driving maneuvers, e.g. if an indicator light turns on or the engine does not run smoothly, may cause accidents. This can result in serious
injury or death.

Always adapt your speed and driving style to the visibility, weather, road and traffic conditions.

Follow the road traffic laws and regulations that apply in the country you are driving in.

If the indicator lights are on or flashing, it is likely that there is an engine malfunction and that fuel consumption will increase.

251
Do it yourself
Vehicle tool kit
Introduction
When securing the vehicle in the event of a vehicle breakdown, follow the legal regulations applicable in the respective country.

WARNING

A loose tire mobility set, spare wheel, compact spare wheel or vehicle tool kit can be thrown around the vehicle interior during sudden driving or braking
maneuvers or in a collision. This could result in serious or fatal injuries.

Always make sure the vehicle tool kit, tire mobility set, and spare wheel or compact spare wheel are secured in the luggage compartment.

WARNING

Working with an unsuitable or damaged vehicle tool kit may result in accidents. This could result in serious or fatal injuries.

Never work with an unsuitable or damaged vehicle tool kit.

Seek assistance from an authorized Volkswagen dealer or authorized Volkswagen Service Facility if there is no suitable vehicle tool kit available.

Placement
Please read the introductory information and heed the Warnings and Notice ⇒ Introduction.
There are a number of different storage locations for the tool box in the vehicle, such as under the luggage compartment floor or in a side storage compartment of
the luggage compartment.

Depending on the equipment variant, the vehicle may contain a loose box with the vehicle tool kit in the luggage compartment. This supplemental vehicle tool kit is
designed for a possible winter tire change and does not need to be carried in the vehicle at all times → page , Stowing luggage and cargo .

If used, crank the vehicle jack back down so that it can be securely stowed in the vehicle.

Vehicle tool kit components


Please read the introductory information and heed the Warnings and Notice ⇒ Introduction.
The scope of the tool box depends on the country and equipment. The following information describes the full scope of items that may be included.

252
Fig. 136 Vehicle tool kit components (general example).

Screwdriver with hex socket in the handle for removing or installing loose wheel bolts. The screwdriver blade is reversible. The screwdriver may be located
under the lug wrench.

Crank.

Extraction hook for removing the center wheel covers, wheel hub covers, or wheel bolt covers.

Lug wrench.

Adapter for the anti-theft wheel bolt. Volkswagen recommends always keeping the adapter for the wheel bolts in the vehicle with the vehicle tool kit. The code
number for the wheel bolt lock is stamped on the front of the adapter. A replacement adapter can be ordered based on this number if the adapter is lost. Note
the wheel bolt lock code number and keep it separate from the vehicle.

Towing eye that can be screwed in.

Vehicle jack. Before putting the vehicle jack away, crank the vehicle jack claw all the way down.

Tire Pressure Gage

In some countries, there may also be a tire pressure gauge in the vehicle.

253
Fig. 137 Additional vehicle tool kit component (general example).

Tire pressure gage (depending on the country).

Jack maintenance

If there is a jack included in the vehicle tool kit, the jack generally does not require maintenance.

1. If necessary, apply universal lubricant to the jack.

Windshield wipers
Putting the windshield wipers in the service position
In the service position, the wiper arms can be lifted off of the windshield.

Fig. 138 Windshield wipers in service position (general example).

Activate the service position using the windshield wiper lever


1. Close the hood, driver and front passenger door.

2. Switch the ignition off and on again.

3. Briefly press the windshield wiper lever towards “one-tap wiping” ⇒ Operating the windshield wiper lever .

Activate the service position using the exit menu

The service position of the wiper blades can also be activated in the exit menu for a limited period of time. To do this, the ignition must be switched off.

Lifting the windshield wiper arms

254
1. Move the windshield wiper arms into the service position before lifting ⇒ .

2. Only hold and lift wiper arms in the area where they attach to the wiper blade.

Placing the windshield wiper arms back


1. Before driving, carefully place the wiper arms back against the windshield, holding them only in the area where they attach to the wiper blade.

2. When the ignition is switched on, press the windshield wiper lever briefly towards “one-tap wiping”.

The wiper arms move back to the original position.

NOTICE

Failing to take care when working on the wiper arms can damage the hood, windshield, or wiper arms.

Lift the wiper arms with care, and only in the service position.

Never open the hood when the wiper arms are raised up.

Always place the wiper arms carefully against the windshield before driving.

Cleaning and changing wiper blades


Wiper blades with a graphite coating are installed at the factory. The graphite coating allows the wiper blade to glide easily over the window. A damaged graphite
coating creates an increased noise level when wiping the window.

Check the condition of the wiper blades regularly. If wiper blades are rubbing, replace them if they are damaged or clean them if they are dirty ⇒ .

Damaged wiper blades should be replaced immediately. Wiper blades can be obtained from suitably qualified professionals. Volkswagen recommends contacting
an authorized Volkswagen dealer or authorized Volkswagen Service Facility.

Cleaning the wiper blades

Windshield wiper: Move the windshield wiper arms into the service position before lifting.

1. Lift the wiper arms, making sure to only hold the wiper arms in the area where they attach to the wiper blade.

2. Clean the wiper blades carefully with a damp sponge ⇒ .

3. Place the wiper arms carefully on the windshield.

Changing the windshield wiper blades

Fig. 139 Changing the windshield wiper blades.

Wiper blade release button.

1. Move the windshield wiper arms into the service position before lifting.

2. Lift the wiper arms, making sure to only hold the wiper arms in the area where they attach to the wiper blade.

3. Press and hold the release button and remove the wiper blade at the same time in the direction of the arrow fig. 139 .

4. Insert a new wiper blade of the same length and type on the respective wiper arm until it engages.

5. Place the wiper arms carefully on the windshield.

Changing the rear window wiper blade

255
Fig. 140 Changing the rear window wiper blade.

Wiper blade release button.

1. To lift a windshield wiper arm, hold it only in the area where it attaches to the wiper blade.

2. Lift the wiper arm and fold it out.

3. Press and hold the release button fig. 140 .

4. Tilt the wiper blade toward the wiper arm fig. 140 while removing it in the direction of the arrow . You may need to use more force to do this.

5. Slide a new wiper blade with the same length and design onto the wiper arm in the opposite direction to the arrow until it engages fig. 140 . For this to work,
the wiper blade has to be folded out fig. 140 .

6. Place the wiper arm carefully on the rear window.

WARNING

Worn or dirty wiper blades reduce visibility and increase the risk of accidents and serious injuries.

Always clean dirty wiper blades.

Always replace wiper blades if they are damaged or worn and are no longer cleaning the window glass sufficiently.

NOTICE

Cleaning wiper blades or door windows with unsuitable cleaning agents may cause damage.

Do not clean the wiper blades and windshield and windows with fuel, nail polish remover, paint thinner, or other similar fluids.

Do not clean the wiper blades with rough sponges or other sharp objects.

If there is wax residue on the windshield and rear window from car wash systems and other products, this can cause the windshield wipers to rub. Remove any
wax residue with a special cleaner or cleaning towels.

Exterior lighting
Introduction
Before performing bulb replacement, check if it is an incandescent bulb or an LED light. Generally, light bulbs can be replaced by yourself. If the exterior lighting on
your vehicle is equipped with LED technology, it is not possible to change LED lights or individual LEDs by yourself. The malfunction of individual LEDs may be an
indication that more LEDs will malfunction. If this is the case, have the LEDs checked and/or replaced if necessary by suitably qualified professionals. Volkswagen
recommends contacting an authorized Volkswagen dealer or authorized Volkswagen Service Facility.

Driving with exterior lighting that is inoperative may be against the law.

Additional bulb specifications

Some bulbs may have certain manufacturer specifications that differ from conventional light bulbs. The respective name will be on the bulb socket or glass bulb.

WARNING

If the vehicle lighting is not used appropriately for the weather conditions, the road will not be illuminated sufficiently. The vehicle will not be visible to other road
users or will be difficult to see. This can cause accidents and serious or fatal injuries.

Regularly check the vehicle's lighting system and turn signals.

256
Repair the lighting system and turn signals when necessary.

WARNING

Work in the engine compartment can result in accidents and serious injuries if bulb replacements are carried out incorrectly.

Always follow the tasks described and observe the general safety precautions.

Never perform a bulb replacement if you are not familiar with the required activities.

If you are not sure how to carry out a bulb replacement, have the work required carried out by suitably qualified professionals. Volkswagen recommends
contacting an authorized Volkswagen dealer or authorized Volkswagen Service Facility.

WARNING

During the bulb replacement, the sharp-edged parts of bulb housings and hot or exploding bulbs can cause serious injuries.

Only change bulbs when they have cooled down completely.

Always protect your hands during bulb replacement.

NOTICE

Water entering the headlight housing can damage the electrical system.

After a bulb replacement, always fit the covers on the headlight housing.

After installation, always check that the covers have been secured correctly.

Information on bulb replacement


Please read the introductory information and heed the Warnings and Notice ⇒ and Introduction.
Always perform the following activities for bulb replacement in the specified sequence ⇒ :

1. Park the vehicle a safe distance away from moving traffic on level and solid ground as soon as possible.

2. Set the electronic parking brake.

3. Switch the lights off.

4. Turn off the turn signal if it is activated.

5. Vehicles with an automatic transmission: Engage the parking lock .

6. Switch the ignition off.

7. Vehicles with manual transmission: Select a gear.

8. Allow the orientation lighting to turn off.

9. Allow the affected light bulbs to cool down.

10. Check if you can see that a fuse is burnt out ⇒ Introduction.

11. Change the affected light bulb according to the instructions ⇒ .

A light bulb may only be replaced with the same type of light bulb. The respective name will be on the bulb socket or glass bulb.

Never touch a glass light bulb with bare hands. The fingerprints left behind would vaporize from the heat when the bulb is switched on and condense on the
reflector, which would then reduce the headlight brightness.

12. Check the bulb function after a bulb is changed.

If the bulb does not function, the bulb may not have been inserted correctly, may have fallen out, or the connector may not have been plugged in correctly.

13. After every bulb replacement in the front of the vehicle, have the headlight adjustment checked by an authorized Volkswagen dealer or authorized Volkswagen
Service Facility. Volkswagen recommends contacting an authorized Volkswagen dealer or authorized Volkswagen Service Facility.

WARNING

If the steps described for the bulb replacement are ignored, accidents may occur. Serious injuries may result.

Always follow the tasks described and observe the general safety precautions.

NOTICE

Removing and inserting trim panels and headlights incorrectly can damage the vehicle paint and body.

257
Always be careful when removing and inserting the trim panels and headlights.

Replacing bulbs in LED headlights


Please read the introductory information and heed the Warnings and Notice ⇒ and Introduction.

Preparations
Only perform these activities in the specified order:

1. Refer to the information on bulb replacement and carry out the activities.

2. Open the hood.

The headlight does not need to be removed for bulb replacement.

Replacing a bulb in a turn signal

Fig. 141 In the right-side of the engine compartment: Rear side of the headlights.

Turn signal bulb holder cover.

Turn signal bulb holder.

1. Remove the rubber cover fig. 141 .

2. Pull out the lamp holder by the handle in the direction of the arrow fig. 141 . At the same time, press the handle slightly up and down alternately, in order to
aid removal.

3. Replace the burned out bulb with a new bulb that is identical to the one being replaced.

4. Carefully insert the lamp holder in the headlight and press it forwards until it perceptibly engages fig. 141 .

5. Press around the circumference of the rubber cover.

6. Close the hood.

The figures show the right headlight. The left headlight is structured as its mirror image.

Replacing fuses
Introduction
Due to the constant development of the vehicle, equipment-dependent fuse allocations, and the combined protection of multiple electrical equipment items using
one fuse, a complete overview of the fuse layout is not available at the time of print. Detailed information about fuse allocations can be obtained from suitably
qualified professionals. Volkswagen recommends contacting an authorized Volkswagen dealer or authorized Volkswagen Service Facility.

Generally, multiple electrical equipment items can be protected together through by fuse. On the other hand, some equipment items may use multiple fuses.

Only replace fuses if the cause for the malfunction has been fixed. If a new fuse blows again after a short time, the electrical system must be checked by suitably
qualified professionals. Volkswagen recommends contacting an authorized Volkswagen dealer or authorized Volkswagen Service Facility.

WARNING

The high voltage in the electrical system may cause electric shocks and severe burns. Contact with electric wires in the ignition system may result in serious or

258
fatal injuries.

Never touch the electrical wires in the ignition system.

WARNING

Using unsuitable fuses, repairing fuses, and bridging a power circuit without fuses can cause severe damage or fires within the vehicle. This could result in
serious or fatal injuries.

Replace fuses only with fuses of same rating and size. Make sure that the color and label are identical to the faulty fuse.

Never repair fuses.

Never use metal strips, paper clips or similar objects as substitutes for fuses.

NOTICE

Changing a fuse when the ignition is switched on, the engine is running, the light is switched on, or other electrical equipment is switched on could cause
damage to the electrical system.

Switch off the engine and turn off the light and other electrical equipment.

Make sure that the engine cannot be started while a fuse is being replaced.

NOTICE

If a fuse is replaced by another fuse with a higher amp rating, this could also damage the vehicle's electrical system in another location.

Never replace a fuse with a fuse that has a higher current rating.

NOTICE

Dirt and moisture in the fuse boxes can damage the electrical system.

Protect open fuse boxes from dirt and moisture.

Avoid short circuits in the electrical system.

Check that the fuse box covers are tightly sealed again and are not damaged.

There are more fuses in the vehicle than are specified in this chapter. These should only be replaced by an authorized Volkswagen dealer or authorized
Volkswagen Service Facility qualified in this respect. Volkswagen recommends contacting an authorized Volkswagen dealer or authorized Volkswagen Service
Facility.

Fuses in the engine compartment


Please read the introductory information and heed the Warnings and Notice ⇒ and Introduction.

Opening the fuse box in the engine/motor compartment

259
Fig. 142 In the engine compartment: Fuse box.

Fuse box cover.

The plastic pliers for removing fuses can be found on the inside of the fuse box cover or on the fuse panel.

Removing the cover


1. Open the hood.

2. Press the catches in the direction of the arrow to unlock the fuse box cover fig. 142 .

3. Remove the cover upward.

Fitting the cover


1. Place the cover onto the fuse box.

2. Push the cover downwards until it audibly clicks into place on both sides.

Fuse table for fuses in the engine compartment


Please read the introductory information and heed the Warnings and Notice ⇒ and Introduction.
The list shows the fuse locations for the equipment relevant to the driver. The first column of the table contains the fuse location; the other columns include the rated
current, fuse version and the protected equipment.

Depending on the country and the vehicle equipment, there may be differences from the fuse numbers and fuse locations listed in the table. If necessary, ask for the
exact fuse assignment from suitably qualified professionals. Volkswagen recommends contacting an authorized Volkswagen dealer or authorized Volkswagen
Service Facility.

Fuse assignment

Fig. 143 Fuse locations in the engine compartment.

Fuse location fig. 143:

F9 15 A, ATO®, horn.

F10 30 Amp, ATO®, windshield wipers.

260
F31 7.5 Amp, ATO®, brake light sensor.

Fuses in the instrument panel


Please read the introductory information and heed the Warnings and Notice ⇒ and Introduction.

Opening the fuse box in the instrument panel

Fig. 144 On the instrument panel on the driver's side: Fuse box cover (left-hand drive vehicles).

Removing the cover


1. Reach behind the cover and pull it off in the direction of the arrow fig. 144.

Fitting the cover


1. Position the cover starting with the opposite side and push it closed in the opposite direction to the arrow until you hear it click into place.

Opening the fuse box in the instrument panel

Fig. 145 On the passenger's side on the instrument panel: Fuse box cover in the instrument panel (right-hand drive vehicles).

Damper element.

Stop pin.

Removing the cover


1. Open the glove compartment and empty it if necessary.

2. Push the damper element up and into the opening in the bracket, before pulling it out sideways fig. 145 .

3. Push the catches up in the direction of the arrow while at the same time opening the storage compartment further fig. 145 .

Fitting the cover


261
1. Move the storage compartment into position.

2. Fit the damper element into the opening in the bracket and push it down until you hear it click into place.

3. Push the storage compartment carefully forwards past the resistance of the stop pin fig. 145 .

Fuse table for fuses in the instrument panel


Please read the introductory information and heed the Warnings and Notice ⇒ and Introduction.
The list shows the fuse locations for the equipment relevant to the driver. The first column of the table contains the fuse location; the other columns include the rated
current, fuse version and the protected equipment.

Depending on the country and the vehicle equipment, there may be differences from the fuse numbers and fuse locations listed in the table. If necessary, ask for the
exact fuse assignment from suitably qualified professionals. Volkswagen recommends contacting an authorized Volkswagen dealer or authorized Volkswagen
Service Facility.

Fuse assignment

Fig. 146 Fuse assignment in the instrument panel.

Fuse location fig. 146:

F6 30 Amp, ATO®, interior lighting.

F7 30 Amp, ATO®, seat heating.

F8 20 A, ATO®, electrical tilting and sliding panoramic sunroof.

F12 40 A, MAXI+®, exterior lighting (right-side).

F13 40 A, MAXI+®, central locking.

F20 7.5 Amp, MINI®, telephone.

F30 20 A, ATO®, Infotainment system scope.

F32 25 Amp, ATO®, rear seat heating.

262
F35 40 A, MAXI+®, exterior lighting (left-side).

F36 40 A, MAXI+®, blower regulator.

F40 7.5 Amp, MINI®, anti-theft alarm system.

F42 7.5 Ampere, MINI®, selector mechanism for the automatic gearbox.

F43 10 amp, MINI®, climate control bar, rear window defroster relay.

F44 7.5 Amp, MINI®, light switch (low beam), rain/light sensor, electronic parking brake.

F46 7.5 Amp, MINI®, Display, Infotainment system control panel.

F52 20 A, ATO®, cigarette lighter, socket

F66 15 Amp, ATO®, rear window wiper.

F67 30 A, MAXI+®, rear window heating.

Power windows and seats can be protected by circuit breakers, which switch back on automatically several seconds after correcting the overload, for example
when power windows are frozen shut.

2) Note the installation position. Factory-standard fuse location as shown in the illustration.

Replacing blown fuses


Please read the introductory information and heed the Warnings and Notice ⇒ and Introduction.

Preparations
1. Switch off the ignition, lights and all electrical equipment.

Detecting blown fuses

Fig. 147 Blown fuse (general example).

1. Shine a flashlight on the fuses.

A blown fuse can be recognized from above and from the side through the transparent casing, as its metal strip will be burnt through fig. 147.

Fuse versions
Standard flat connector fuse (ATO ®).

Small flat connector fuse (MINI ®).

Large flat blade fuse (MAXI ® or MAXI+ ®).

Fuse color codes

Fuses (ATO® - MINI® - MAXI® or MAXI+®).

Color Current rating

Black 1A

Purple 3A
263
5A
Orange
Brown 7.5 A

Red 10 A

Blue 15 A

Yellow 20 A

White or clear 25 A

Green 30 A

Light green 40 A

Replacing fuses

Fig. 148 Plastic pliers for removing or installing a fuse (general example).

1. If necessary, remove the plastic tongs from either the fuse box or the cover of the fuse box fig. 148.

2. Depending on the design of the fuse, slide the appropriately sized clamp on the plastic pliers onto the fuse from above or from the side.

3. Remove the fuse.

4. If a fuse is blown, replace with a fuse with the same rating (same color and same label) and the same size ⇒ .

5. After inserting the new fuse, place the plastic pliers back in the cover, if necessary.

6. Reinstall the cover or close the fuse box cover.

NOTICE

If a fuse is replaced by a fuse with a higher current rating, this could damage the electrical system in another location.

Never replace a fuse with a fuse that has a higher current rating.

Jump-starting
Introduction
For technical reasons the vehicle must not be tow-started ⇒ . If the engine cannot start because the 12 V vehicle battery is dead, the 12 V vehicle battery on
another vehicle can be used to start your vehicle.

For vehicles with a 12 V vehicle battery in the vehicle interior or luggage compartment, the jumper cables may only be connected to the jump-start points in the
engine compartment.

WARNING

Using jumper cables incorrectly and performing a jump-start incorrectly could cause the 12 V vehicle battery to explode. Serious injuries may result.

Always read and heed the warnings and safety precautions before working on the 12 V vehicle battery ⇒ Introduction.

Never confuse the positive battery terminal with the negative battery terminal.

264
Never jump-start a vehicle with a frozen or thawed 12 V vehicle battery.

WARNING

During a jump-start, a highly explosive gas mixture builds up at the 12 V vehicle battery. Sparks produced during a jump-start could ignite the flammable gas.
Serious injuries may result.

Always keep fires, sparks, open flames, and lit cigarettes far away from the 12 V vehicle battery.

Avoid discharging static electricity near the 12 V vehicle battery.

NOTICE

Tow-starting can cause severe damage to the vehicle.

Jump-start the vehicle to start the engine.

NOTICE

A drained 12 V vehicle battery can freeze, be damaged and fail at temperatures around approx. 0 °C (approx. +32 °F).

Always replace a frozen or thawed 12 V vehicle battery.

Ground jump-start point


Please read the introductory information and heed the Warnings and Notice ⇒ and Introduction.

Fig. 149 In the engine compartment: Negative terminal jump-start point.

The jump-start point (negative terminal) is for connecting the black jumper cable fig. 149.

The vehicle can give and receive a jump-start using this negative terminal jump-start point.

Preparing and Performing a Jump-start


Please read the introductory information and heed the Warnings and Notice ⇒ and Introduction.

Preparations

Observe the following for jump-starting:

Wear suitable eye protection and safety gloves ⇒ .

Pay attention to the operating instructions provided by the manufacturer of the jump-start cables.

Open the hood.

Always use a jumper cable with fully insulated terminal clamps and without any insulation defects for jump-starting ⇒ .

Ensure that there is sufficient distance between the vehicle providing the jump-start and the vehicle receiving the jump-start, otherwise current could already
flow when connecting the positive battery terminals.

Make sure the terminal clamps have sufficient contact with metal.
265
Jumper cable

So that vehicles can be jump-started and can jump-start others, an appropriate jumper cable is required.

The following jumper cable wire diameters must not be fallen short of by the vehicle providing the jump-start.

Vehicles with electric drivetrain: To jump-start the vehicle with a drained 12 V vehicle battery, the wire diameter of the jumper cable must be at least 25 mm2
(0.038 in2).

Vehicles with hybrid drive: To jump-start the vehicle with a drained 12 V vehicle battery, the wire diameter of the jumper cable must be at least 25 mm2
(0.038 in2).

Vehicles with a gasoline engine: To jump-start the vehicle with a drained 12 V vehicle battery, the wire diameter of the jumper cable must be at least 25 mm2
(0.038 in2).

Vehicles with a diesel engine: To jump-start the vehicle with a drained 12 V vehicle battery, the wire diameter of the jumper cable must be at least 35 mm 2
(0.054 in2).

Vehicle Receiving the Jump-start


1. Check that the discharged 12 V vehicle battery is properly connected to the 12 V vehicle electrical system.

2. If a 12 V vehicle battery with a viewing window has been installed, check the color of the viewing window. If the viewing window is light yellow or has no color,
do not perform a jump-start and contact an authorized Volkswagen dealer or authorized Volkswagen Service Facility.

Vehicle Providing the Jump-start


1. Pay attention to the operating instructions provided by the vehicle manufacturer.

2. Check that the battery providing the jump-start has the same voltage (12 V) and approximately the same battery capacity as the discharged 12 V vehicle
battery. Pay attention to the information printed on the battery of the vehicle providing the jump-start.

Jump-starting

Fig. 150 Diagram for connecting the jumper cables.

Positive battery terminal of the vehicle receiving the jump-start.

Positive battery terminal of the vehicle providing the jump-start.

Suitable negative terminal of the vehicle providing the jump-start: Preferably a jump-start point (negative connection), a large metal part that is bolted securely
to the engine block, or the engine block itself.

Jump-start point (negative terminal) of the vehicle receiving the jump-start.

Only connect the jumper cables in the sequence A – B – C – D fig. 150.

1. Switch the ignition off on both vehicles.

2. In the engine compartment, open the cover on the positive battery terminal (+) of the 12 V vehicle battery, if fitted.

3. Connect one end of the red jumper cable to the positive battery terminal (+) of the 12 V vehicle battery with the discharged 12 V vehicle battery fig. 150 ⇒
.

4. Connect the other end of the red jumper cable to the positive battery terminal (+) on the vehicle providing current fig. 150 .

5. Connect one end of the black jumper cable preferably to the negative terminal (–) jump-start point on the vehicle with the 12 V vehicle battery providing current
fig. 150 .

Or: If there is no negative terminal (–) jump-start point, connect the end of the black jumper cable to a large metal part that is bolted securely to the engine

266
block, or the engine block itself, on the vehicle with the 12 V vehicle battery providing current fig. 150 .

6. Connect the other end of the black jumper cable to the negative terminal (–) jump-start point on the vehicle with the discharged 12 V vehicle battery fig. 150
⇒ .

7. Route the jumper cables so that they cannot become caught in moving parts in the engine compartment.

Start the engine


1. Start the engine in the vehicle that is providing current and allow it to idle.

2. Wait a few minutes and then start the vehicle's engine with the discharged 12 V vehicle battery. If the engine does not start, stop the starting process after ten
seconds, and try again after approximately one minute.

If the engine still will not start, contact an authorized Volkswagen dealer or authorized Volkswagen Service Facility.

Removing the jumper cables


1. Before disconnecting the jumper cables, switch off the low beam headlight if necessary.

2. In the vehicle with the drained 12 V vehicle battery, switch on the blower for the air conditioner and the rear window defroster. This will reduce any voltage
surges that may occur when disconnected.

3. Once the vehicle has been jump-started, always disconnect the jumper cables in the order D – C – B – A fig. 150.

4. Close the cover of the positive terminal (+), if fitted.

After successful jump-starting, have the 12 V vehicle battery checked by an authorized Volkswagen dealer or authorized Volkswagen Service Facility. Volkswagen
recommends contacting an authorized Volkswagen dealer or authorized Volkswagen Service Facility.

WARNING

Performing a jump-start incorrectly can cause the 12 V vehicle battery to explode, which can cause serious injuries.

Always wear suitable eye protection and safety gloves.

Never lean over the 12 V vehicle battery.

Always connect the positive cable first and then the negative cable.

Never connect the negative terminal to parts of the fuel system or to the brake lines.

Ensure that there is no contact between the non-insulated parts of the terminal clamps.

Make sure the cable insulation is free from any defects.

Make sure that the cable that is connected to the positive battery terminal on the 12 V vehicle battery does not come into contact with any vehicle
components that conduct electricity.

NOTICE

A drained 12 V vehicle battery can freeze at temperatures around approx. 0 °C (approx. +32 °F), suffer damage and fail.

Always replace a frozen or thawed 12 V vehicle battery.

Towing
Introduction
Towing requires practice, particularly if a towing cable is used. Both drivers should be familiar with the special considerations when towing. Inexperienced drivers
should not tow.

Follow all applicable laws when towing.

Always make sure the towing force does not exceed the permitted level and there are no shock loading conditions. There is always the risk of the coupling becoming
overloaded when driving off-road.

WARNING

The vehicle handling and braking efficiency will change considerably when it is towed. This may cause you to lose control of the vehicle and result in accidents
and serious or fatal injuries.

Bear in mind that more force is required for steering and braking during towing.

WARNING

If a vehicle that has no electrical power is towed, the electronic steering lock may suddenly engage. If this happens, you will not be able to move the steering
wheel. This can cause accidents and serious or fatal injuries.
267
Never turn off the ignition with the starter button while towing.

If the vehicle loses power while it is being towed, stop towing the vehicle immediately and see an authorized Volkswagen dealer or authorized
Volkswagen Service Facility for assistance.

NOTICE

When pushing the vehicle by hand, the taillights, side spoiler on the rear window and large sections of sheet metal could be damaged and the rear spoiler could
detach.

When pushing the vehicle by hand, do not press on the taillights, side spoiler on the rear window, large sections of sheet metal, or the rear spoiler.

Towing

Towing refers to using a vehicle to pull another vehicle that cannot be driven.

The vehicle can be towed using a tow bar or tow rope:

The maximum permissible speed is 50 km/h (30 mph).

The maximum permissible distance is 50 km/h (30 miles).

The easiest and safest way to tow is using a tow bar. You should use a towing cable only if a tow bar is not available. The towing cable should be elastic to protect
both vehicles. Use a cable made of synthetic rubber or a similar elastic material.

Towing with a tow truck

If your vehicle will be raised by one axle when towing, only the axle listed below may be raised, depending on the transmission and engine combination:

Front-wheel drive

Automatic transmission Front axle

Manual transmission Front axle

All-wheel drive (4MOTION)

Automatic transmission Front axle

Manual transmission Front axle

WARNING

Vehicle components can be badly damaged by incorrectly attached tow ropes or tow bars. This increases the risk of accident and could result in serious or fatal
injuries.

Only ever secure the vehicle to be recovered and towed at the points designed for this purpose.

Never secure the tow rope or the tow bar to axle or suspension components.

Contact an authorized Volkswagen dealer or authorized Volkswagen Service Facility and have the vehicle taken away on a tow truck, if necessary.

For R models, the vehicle must not be towed with a raised axle and, in case of damage, must be transported away with all four wheels on a tow truck ⇒ .

NOTICE

Towing vehicles with all-wheel drive (4MOTION) and sport differential with the axle raised can cause serious damage to the vehicle.

Have the immobilized vehicle towed with all four wheels on a tow truck.

Instructions for towing


Please read the introductory information and heed the Warnings and Notice ⇒ and Introduction.
A vehicle being towed can still signal a turn using the turn signals even if the emergency flashers are switched on. To do this when the ignition is switched on,
activate the turn signal for the desired direction. The emergency flashers will stop while the turn signal is active. The emergency flashers will automatically activate
again once the turn signal and high beam lever returns to the neutral position.

When may this vehicle not be towed?


The vehicle must not be towed in the following situations:

If the 12 V vehicle battery is drained.

The indicator in the instrument cluster display does not function perfectly.

If the towing distance is greater than 50 km/h (30 miles).

With a manual transmission, the clutch cannot be depressed completely and it is not possible to shift into neutral.
268
The selector lever of the automatic transmission cannot be moved to neutral (position N).

The electronic parking brake cannot be released.

The steering lock cannot be released.

If the wheel clearance or the steering function can no longer be secured after an accident.

If the vehicle cannot be towed on its own wheels due to one of the conditions listed, contact professional assistance and have the vehicle transported by a tow truck,
if necessary.

Towing
Please read the introductory information and heed the Warnings and Notice ⇒ and Introduction.
Secure the tow rope or tow bar only at the permitted points:

Towing lug.

WARNING

Vehicle components can be badly damaged by incorrectly attached tow ropes or tow bars. This increases the risk of accident and could result in serious or fatal
injuries.

Only ever secure the vehicle to be recovered and towed at the points designed for this purpose.

Never secure the tow rope or the tow bar to axle or suspension components.

Contact an authorized Volkswagen dealer or authorized Volkswagen Service Facility and have the vehicle taken away on a tow truck, if necessary.

Preparations
Make sure the tow rope is not twisted. Otherwise it could disconnect from the towing eye while towing.

Switch the ignition and emergency flashers on in both vehicles. However, do not do this if it is prohibited by law.

Read and comply with the information and instructions for towing given in the Owner's Manual for the other vehicle.

Towing vehicle (front)


1. Only start to drive when the tow rope is taut.

2. Be especially careful when accelerating.

3. Avoid sudden braking and driving maneuvers.

4. Do not exceed the permitted towing weight of the vehicle.

5. For vehicles with a manual transmission: Engage the clutch very gently when pulling away.

Vehicle being towed (rear)


1. Make sure the ignition is always switched on so that the steering wheel is not locked and so that the turn signal and windshield wiper can be used if needed.
The brake booster and power steering only work when the engine is running. Otherwise, the brake pedal needs to be pressed much harder and more force is
required to steer.

2. Make sure the vehicle key is always in the vehicle during the towing process ⇒ Introduction.

3. For vehicles with an automatic gearbox: Select gear .

For vehicles with a manual transmission: Disengage the gear.

4. Release the electronic parking brake.

5. Make sure the tow rope is always taut.

NOTICE

If the battery charge level of the 12 V vehicle battery is insufficient, you will not be able to release the electronic parking brake and steering lock. The vehicle
may be damaged when towed.

To release the electronic parking brake and steering lock, put the vehicle into drive-ready mode, if necessary by means of a jump-start if there is a loss of
power or malfunctions.

Contact an authorized Volkswagen dealer or authorized Volkswagen Service Facility and have the vehicle taken away on a tow truck, if necessary.

Installing the front towing eye


Please read the introductory information and heed the Warnings and Notice ⇒ and Introduction.
Depending on the country and vehicle equipment, the mount for the towing eye is situated behind the bumper cover.

1. Before having it towed, check that your vehicle has a threaded mount for the towing eye.

2. Read and heed the information about towing.


269
3. Otherwise, contact an authorized Volkswagen dealer or authorized Volkswagen Service Facility and have the vehicle taken away by a tow truck if necessary.

The towing eye must always be kept in the vehicle ⇒ .

NOTICE

Using a towing eye that is not suitable for the vehicle can damage the vehicle.

When towing, always use the towing eye enclosed with your own vehicle in the vehicle tool kit, or another suitable towing eye.

Installing the front towing eye

Fig. 151 In the right front bumper: Remove the cover, variant 1.

Fig. 152 In the right front bumper: Remove the cover, variant 2.

Fig. 153 In the right front bumper: Screw in the towing eye, variant 1.

270
Fig. 154 In the right front bumper: Screw in the towing eye, variant 2.

1. Remove the towing eye from the vehicle tool kit in the luggage compartment.

2. Press on the marked area of the cover in the direction of the arrow to release the catch on the cover fig. 151.

3. Remove the cover, let it hang from the vehicle or place it in the vehicle if necessary ⇒ .

4. Rotate the towing eye in the direction of the arrow as far as possible to install it in the mount fig. 153 , ⇒ . Use a suitable object to tighten the towing eye
completely and securely in the mount.

5. After the vehicle has been towed, unscrew the towing eye with a suitable object in the opposite direction to the arrow.

6. Insert the cap into the respective opening and press in until it engages.

7. If necessary, clean the towing eye and return it to the vehicle tool kit in the luggage compartment.

NOTICE

If the towing eye is not fully and tightly screwed into the mount, it may tear out of the mount when towing the vehicle. Tearing out the towing eye may cause
damage to the vehicle.

Always screw the towing eye completely and securely into the mount.

NOTICE

Removing and fitting the cover and towing eye incorrectly may cause damage to the vehicle's paint and body.

Always remove and fit the cover and towing eye carefully.

Installing the rear towing eye


Please read the introductory information and heed the Warnings and Notice ⇒ and Introduction.
Depending on the country and vehicle equipment, the mount for the towing eye is situated behind the bumper cover.

1. Before having it towed, check that your vehicle has a threaded mount for the towing lug.

2. Read and heed the information about towing.

3. Otherwise, contact an authorized Volkswagen dealer or authorized Volkswagen Service Facility and have the vehicle taken away by a tow truck if necessary.

The towing eye must always be kept in the vehicle ⇒ .

NOTICE

Using a towing eye that is not suitable for the vehicle can damage the vehicle.

When towing, always use the towing eye enclosed with your own vehicle in the vehicle tool kit, or another towing eye suitable for the vehicle.

Installing the rear towing eye

271
Fig. 155 In the right rear bumper: Remove the cover, variant 1.

Fig. 156 In the right rear bumper: Remove the cover, variant 2.

Fig. 157 In the right rear bumper: Screw in towing eye, variant 1.

272
Fig. 158 In the right rear bumper: Screw in towing eye, variant 2.

1. Remove the towing eye from the vehicle tool kit in the luggage compartment.

2. Press on the marked area of the cover in the direction of the arrow to release the catch on the cover fig. 155.

3. Remove the cover, let it hang from the vehicle or place it in the vehicle if necessary ⇒ .

4. Rotate the towing eye in the direction of the arrow as far as possible to install it in the mount fig. 157 , ⇒ . Use a suitable object to tighten the towing eye
completely and securely in the mount.

5. After the vehicle has been towed, unscrew the towing eye with a suitable object in the opposite direction to the arrow.

6. Insert the cap into the respective opening and press in until it engages.

7. If necessary, clean the towing eye and return it to the vehicle tool kit in the luggage compartment.

NOTICE

If the towing eye is not fully and tightly screwed into the mount, it may tear out of the mount when towing the vehicle. Tearing out the towing eye may cause
damage to the vehicle.

Always screw the towing eye completely and securely into the mount.

NOTICE

Removing and fitting the cover and towing eye incorrectly may cause damage to the vehicle's paint and body.

Always remove and fit the cover and towing eye carefully.

273
Checking and filling
In the engine compartment
Safety precautions for working in the engine compartment
The engine compartment is a potentially dangerous area in the vehicle. Only perform work in the engine compartment if you are familiar with the necessary activities
and the general safety precautions, and if the correct operating equipment, fluids and suitable tools are available. Work performed incorrectly can result in serious
injuries ⇒ . Have all work performed by suitably qualified professionals if necessary. Volkswagen recommends contacting an authorized Volkswagen dealer or
authorized Volkswagen Service Facility.

WARNING

The engine compartment is a dangerous area. Any work in the engine compartment could lead to accidents and serious or fatal injuries.

Always work as cautiously and carefully as possible.

Only perform work in the engine compartment if you are familiar with the required activities.

If you are not sure how to do the work in the engine compartment, go to an authorized Volkswagen dealer or authorized Volkswagen Service Facility.
Volkswagen recommends contacting an authorized Volkswagen dealer or authorized Volkswagen Service Facility.

Before working in the engine compartment, apply the electronic parking brake and move the selector lever to the position or move the gearshift lever
into the neutral position.

Switch off the ignition and store the vehicle key securely and far enough away from the vehicle to ensure that the engine cannot be started accidentally.

Never touch hot components in the engine.

Do not leave any items, such as cleaning cloths or tools, in the engine compartment.

Always keep children away from the engine compartment and never leave them unattended.

WARNING

The engine compartment contains moving components. When working in the engine compartment, particularly when starting the vehicle or if the engine is
running, contact with moving parts, e.g. fan blades in the radiator fan, may cause serious or fatal injuries.

Never reach into the radiator fan or into the area near the radiator fan, even if the engine is switched off or the ignition is switched off. The ventilator is
temperature-controlled and may switch on by itself.

To reduce the risk of anything becoming caught in engine components, always remove any jewelry and/or ties, tie back long hair, and avoid wearing
loose-fitting clothing when performing work.

Always press the accelerator pedal extremely carefully and never press it without paying close attention. The vehicle could begin moving, even if the
electronic parking brake is set.

WARNING

Escaping hot steam or hot coolant and hot components may cause serious burns.

Never open or close the hood if steam or engine coolant is escaping.

Always wait until you can no longer see or hear steam or engine coolant escaping from the engine compartment.

WARNING

The engine cooling system is under pressure when the engine is hot. If the cover is opened carelessly, coolant may spray out and cause serious burns or fatal
injuries.

Never open the cap on the coolant expansion tank when the engine is hot.

Always protect your face, hands and arms from hot coolant or steam with a large, thick cloth if you have to open the cover of the coolant tank.

Slowly and very carefully turn the cap on the coolant expansion tank counterclockwise while pressing down lightly on the cap.

WARNING

Additional insulation, such as covers in the engine compartment or discarded items such as cleaning cloths or tools, can cause malfunctions, damage to the
engine, or fires. This could result in serious or fatal injuries.

Never cover the engine with blankets or other insulating materials.

Never leave items in the engine compartment.


274
Always make sure the vehicle is parked on a solid and level surface before performing any work in the engine compartment ⇒ .

WARNING

If the vehicle is not secured against rolling away during maintenance procedures, the vehicle may move unintentionally. This could result in accidents and
serious or fatal injuries.

Manually deactivate the start-stop system.

Never work under the vehicle if it is not correctly secured against rolling away.

If working under the vehicle with the wheels touching the floor, ensure the vehicle is on a level surface and the wheels are secured.

If you are working underneath the vehicle, additionally support the vehicle securely with suitable stands. The vehicle jack is not sufficient for this purpose
and may collapse.

WARNING

The high voltage in the electrical system may cause electric shocks and burns. This could result in serious or fatal injuries.

Never short-circuit the electrical system. The 12 V vehicle battery may explode.

Never touch the electrical wires and connections of the gas discharge lamps.

Preparing the vehicle for work in the engine compartment


Always perform the following activities in the specified sequence before all work in the engine compartment ⇒ :

1. Park the vehicle safely on level and stable ground ⇒ Parking.

2. If necessary, remove the vehicle key from the vehicle and store it outside of the vehicle so that the vehicle does not start accidentally.

3. Let the engine cool down sufficiently.

4. Always keep other people away from the engine compartment.

5. Secure the vehicle against rolling away.

WARNING

If the steps described for working in the engine compartment are ignored, accidents may occur. Serious injuries may result.

Always follow the described tasks and the general safety precautions.

Opening and closing the hood

Fig. 159 In the driver's side footwell: Release lever for the hood (general example).

275
Fig. 160 Above the radiator grille: Opening lever for the hood.

Fig. 161 In the engine compartment: Hood support in the bracket.

Fig. 162 On the engine hood: Hood support bracket (general example).

Opening the hood


1. Open the driver door and pull the release lever in the direction of the arrow fig. 159. The hood will pop open due to spring force from the catch in the lock carrier
⇒ .

2. To open the hood fully, slightly lift the hood while pushing the actuating lever in the direction of the arrow fig. 160.
276
3. Lift the hood support out of the bracket fig. 161 in the direction of the arrow and hook it into the opening fig. 162.

Closing the hood


1. Lift the hood slightly and hold it.

2. Unhook the hood support from the opening fig. 162 and clip it back into the bracket fig. 161.

3. Let the hood fall into the lock carrier catch from a height of approximately 20 cm (8 inches); do not press it down. When the hood is closed correctly, it will be
flush with the surrounding sections of the vehicle body ⇒

If the hood is not closed correctly, lift the hood up and try to close it again.

If the hood is not correctly closed, an indicator will appear in the display of the Volkswagen Digital Cockpit. Once the hood is correctly closed, the indicator will turn
off.

WARNING

If the hood is not closed correctly, it could open suddenly while driving and block the view through the windshield. Accidents and serious or fatal injuries could
result.

After closing the hood, check that the catch is engaged correctly in the lock carrier.

If you realize when driving that the hood is not closed properly, park the vehicle safely and close the hood.

WARNING

Failing to take care when opening and closing the hood can result in serious injuries.

Do not open or close the hood if any persons are in the closing range of the hood.

NOTICE

Opening and closing the hood incorrectly can cause damage to the hood or wiper arms.

Only open the hood when wiper mode is switched off and with the windshield wipers folded in.

Always fold the wiper arms against the windshield before driving.

Display
An image in the instrument cluster display indicates if the hood is open or has not closed correctly ⇒ .

Do not continue driving!

1. Stop the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so.

2. If necessary, lift the hood and close it again.

The image is also displayed when the ignition is switched off, and it disappears several seconds after the doors are closed and the vehicle is locked.

WARNING

Disregarding warning notifications could lead to breakdowns while driving, accidents and serious or fatal injuries.

Never ignore warning notifications.

Stop the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so.

Do not continue driving and seek professional assistance if the warning light does not go out.

Operating fluids and operating equipment


All fluids and operating equipment, such as engine coolant, engine oils and vehicle batteries, are continuously being developed. Have fluids and operating
equipment replaced by suitably qualified professionals. Volkswagen recommends contacting an authorized Volkswagen dealer or authorized Volkswagen Service
Facility.

WARNING

Carrying out work on the fuel system may cause fires and serious or fatal injuries due to electrical discharge and flying sparks.

Always disconnect the 12 V vehicle battery.

Always have a fully-functioning, checked fire extinguisher nearby.

Make sure that the vehicle is unlocked when the 12 V vehicle battery is disconnected. Otherwise, the anti-theft alarm system will be activated.

277
WARNING

Fluids may be poisonous. Improper use and storage may cause serious or fatal injuries.

Only store fluids in their sealed original containers.

Never use empty food cans, bottles, or other containers to store fluids, because someone could drink the fluids by mistake.

Keep children away from all fluids and operating equipment.

Always read and heed the information and warnings on the packaging for the fluids.

When using products that emit harmful vapors, always work outdoors or in a well-ventilated area.

WARNING

Fluids and some materials in the engine compartment are highly flammable and may ignite on contact with hot surfaces, sparks or naked flames. This can lead
to a fire and cause accidents and serious or fatal injuries.

Never smoke near the engine compartment.

Never work near open flames or sparks.

Never perform work near sources of heat, boilers, or other open flames.

Never pour or spill fluids on the engine.

Always have a fully-functioning, checked fire extinguisher nearby.

NOTICE

The use of incorrect fluids can cause serious malfunctions and damage to the engine.

When filling or changing fluids, make sure the correct fluids are added to the corresponding reservoirs.

Fluids leaking from the vehicle can cause environmental damage. Always check the ground under the vehicle for leaking fluids. If you see spots of fluid on the
ground under the vehicle, have the vehicle checked by an authorized Volkswagen dealer or authorized Volkswagen Service Facility. Dispose of leaking fluids
correctly. Volkswagen recommends contacting an authorized Volkswagen dealer or authorized Volkswagen Service Facility.

Washer fluid
General information

Fig. 163 In the engine compartment: Cap on the washer fluid reservoir (general example).

The windshield washer fluid reservoir is located in the engine compartment. The washer fluid reservoir is identified with the symbol on the cap fig. 163.

Check the washer fluid level regularly and fill if necessary.

Preparations
278
1. Prepare the vehicle for work in the engine compartment ⇒ In the engine compartment.

2. Open the hood → page , Opening and closing the hood .

Checking and refilling


1. Check if there is enough washer fluid in the reservoir.

2. To top it up, mix clean water with a suitable alcohol-based windshield cleaner. Follow the mixing instructions on the packaging of the windshield cleaner ⇒
⇒ . There is a screen in the filler tube in the windshield washer fluid reservoir. The screen keeps large particles of contaminants from entering the washer
nozzles when you refill the washer fluid ⇒ .

3. When the outside temperatures are cold, an anti-freeze agent should be added to the water so that it does not freeze. Follow the mixing instructions on the
packaging of the anti-freeze agent.
Do not use distilled water to fill the windshield washer fluid tank.

WARNING

Unsuitable additives in the windshield washer fluid can create an oily film on the vehicle windshield. This may reduce visibility and increase the risk of accidents
and serious or fatal injuries.

Never add coolant additive or similar unsuitable additives to the windshield washer fluid.

NOTICE

Using a cleaning agent that contains acid may result in damage and cause the spray nozzles to malfunction.

Never top up the windshield washer fluid tank using a cleaning agent that contains acid, e.g. vinegar-based cleaners.

NOTICE

Mixing different windshield cleaners can cause the components to flocculate and the spray nozzles to clog.

Only use suitable alcohol-based windshield cleaners.

Never mix different windshield cleaners together.

NOTICE

When you top up the windshield washer fluid, if you use a damaged screen or do not use a screen at all, dirt particles may get into the windshield washer fluid
tank. The spray nozzles may become clogged.

Take the screen out only to clean it.

Replace a damaged or missing screen.

Engine oil
Introduction
The engine oils are determined based on the requirements of the engines, emissions control systems, and the fuel quality. On all combustion engines, the engine oil
comes into contact with combustion residue and fuel, which affects the aging of the engine oil. Using the correct engine oil is essential for the function and service
life of the engine. The vehicle is filled at the factory with a special multi-purpose, low-viscosity oil that can generally be used year-round.

The vehicle can consume engine oil. The engine oil consumption can vary and can change throughout the service life of the vehicle. Depending on the driving style
and the usage conditions, the engine oil consumption can be up to 1 l (1 quart) per 2000 kilometers (1200 miles); it can also be higher within the first
5000 kilometers (3100 miles) on new vehicles. Because of this, the engine oil level must be checked regularly and it is best to check the level before long drives.

WARNING

Engine oil gets extremely hot when the engine is running. Failure to take care when handling hot engine oil can cause serious bodily burns. This could result in
serious or fatal injuries.

Always allow the engine to cool down before starting work with the engine oil.

WARNING

Engine oil is poisonous. Contact with engine oil, especially swallowing engine oil, may result in serious or fatal injuries.

If you swallow engine oil, seek urgent medical help.


279
If you have health problems after working with engine oil, seek medical help.

Always store engine oil out of the reach of children and only in the sealed original container. This also applies to used oil until it is disposed.

Never use empty food cans, bottles, or other containers to store engine oil, because someone could drink the engine oil by mistake.

Avoid regular contact with engine oil to prevent damage to your skin.

Protect your skin, face and particularly your eyes when working with engine oil.

Do not eat, drink or smoke when working with engine oil.

Wash your skin with soap and water after working with engine oil.

Engine oil that has dripped and spilled can pollute the environment. Catch any leaking operating fluids and dispose of them correctly according to
environmental regulations.

Engine oil standards


Please read the introductory information and heed the Warnings and Notice ⇒ Safety precautions for working in the engine compartment .

Vehicles with engine oil label

If you need to top up the engine oil, use an oil with the prescribed engine oil standard and engine oil viscosity fig. 164.

Fig. 164 Engine oil standard and engine oil viscosity label (general example).

Engine oil standard information.

Engine oil viscosity information.

The label with the prescribed standard is located at the front of the engine compartment next to the hood release fig. 165.

Fig. 165 On the side next to the hood release: Label for engine oil standard and engine oil viscosity.

Label.

280
If the prescribed engine oil fig. 164 is used, the engine oil level can be corrected any number of times as needed ⇒ Checking the engine oil level and adding oil .

Vehicles without an engine oil label

Information regarding the prescribed engine oil standard and engine oil viscosity can be obtained from suitably qualified professionals. If engine oil needs to be
topped up, use an engine oil with the prescribed engine oil standard and engine oil viscosity. If the prescribed engine oil is used, the engine oil level can be corrected
any number of times as needed ⇒ Checking the engine oil level and adding oil .

If no engine oil that meets the prescribed standard is available, you may, in an emergency, top up the engine oil no more than once before your next standard oil
change using no more than 0.5 liters (0.5 qt) of engine oil that meets the following deviating standards:

Gasoline engines: VW 504 00 and ACEA C3, ACEA C4, API SP, or ILSAC GF-6A standard. All viscosity classes in these standards are permitted.

Having the oil change carried out by an authorized Volkswagen dealer or authorized Volkswagen Service Facility is recommended.

NOTICE

Using engine oils that have not been approved in accordance with the respective VW standard can cause damage to the engine.

When refilling, only use engine oils that comply with the quality requirements of the respectively applicable VW standard.

Only if you absolutely must, add max. 0.5 l (0.5 qt) of engine oil that does not comply with the specified engine oil standards.

Volkswagen recommends Volkswagen Genuine oil.

Changing the engine oil


Please read the introductory information and heed the Warnings and Notice ⇒ Safety precautions for working in the engine compartment .
The engine oil must be changed regularly and in line with the service intervals ⇒ Information regarding the service schedule .

Additives in the engine oil can make new engine oil appear dark after a brief engine run time. This is normal and is no reason to change the engine oil more
frequently.

WARNING

If care is not taken when changing engine oil, the oil can cause environmental damage, serious burns, or fire. This could result in serious or fatal injuries.

Always allow the engine to cool down completely before changing the engine oil.

Always wear eye protection when changing the engine oil.

Keep your arms horizontal when using your fingers to unscrew the oil drain plug, so that the draining oil does not drip down your arm.

Use a container suitable for collecting used oil that can hold at least the entire quantity of oil in the engine.

WARNING

Engine oil is poisonous. Contact with engine oil, especially swallowing engine oil, may result in serious or fatal injuries.

If you swallow engine oil, seek urgent medical help.

If you have health problems after working with engine oil, seek medical help.

Always store engine oil out of the reach of children and only in the sealed original container. This also applies to used oil until it is disposed.

Never use empty food cans, bottles, or other containers to store engine oil, because someone could drink the engine oil by mistake.

Avoid regular contact with engine oil to prevent damage to your skin.

Protect your skin, face and particularly your eyes when working with engine oil.

Do not eat, drink or smoke when working with engine oil.

Wash your skin with soap and water after working with engine oil.

NOTICE

Engine oil and filter changes require special tools, technical knowledge and the correct disposal of the used oil. Failing to act properly may cause damage to the
vehicle.

For this reason, always have the engine oil and filters changed by an authorized Volkswagen dealer or authorized Volkswagen Service Facility.
Volkswagen recommends contacting an authorized Volkswagen dealer or authorized Volkswagen Service Facility.

Dispose of the engine oil in a way that will not harm the environment and only at a collection point for used oil, e.g. a recycling center or specialist retailer.

281
Checking the engine oil level and adding oil
Please read the introductory information and heed the Warnings and Notice ⇒ Safety precautions for working in the engine compartment .

Preparations

Fig. 166 In the engine compartment: engine oil filler cap (general example).

To avoid an incorrect oil level reading, observe the following steps:

1. Park vehicles with an engine at operating temperature on a level surface.

2. Wait at least five minutes for the engine oil to flow back into the oil pan.

3. Open the hood.

4. Find the engine oil filler and the dipstick.

You can identify these by the fig. 166 symbol on the engine oil filler cap and the colored handle on the oil dipstick.

Checking the engine oil level

Fig. 167 Engine oil level markings on the oil dipstick (versions).

The engine oil level is too high.

Oil level in the normal range.

The engine oil level is too low.

Only perform these activities in the specified order:

1. Remove the dipstick from the guide tube and wipe the dipstick off using a clean cloth.

2. Reinsert the dipstick into the guide tube and push it all the way in. If there is a marking on the engine oil dipstick, make sure it lines up with the notch at the top
282
of the guide tube, and that the oil dipstick goes all the way in.

3. Remove the dipstick again and read the oil level on the dipstick as described below fig. 167:

Engine oil level too high – if necessary follow the messages in the instrument cluster display or contact suitably qualified professionals for assistance.
Volkswagen recommends contacting an authorized Volkswagen dealer or authorized Volkswagen Service Facility.

Oil level in the normal range. Engine oil can be added up to the upper edge of this area, for example if there is heavy engine load.

The engine oil level is too low. Add engine oil immediately and, if necessary, pay attention to the messages in the instrument cluster display.

4. After reading the oil level, reinsert the oil dipstick into the guide tube and push it all the way in. If necessary, continue to add engine oil.

For high vehicle loads, for example when driving long distances on highways in the summer or when driving through high mountains, the engine oil level should be in
the upper section of the permitted area.

Adding engine oil

WARNING

When you top up the engine oil, it could spill or overflow and ignite on contact with hot engine components. This may cause burns or a fire. This could result in
serious or fatal injuries.

Always make sure that the engine oil cap is installed securely on the engine filler opening after adding oil and that the oil dipstick is inserted correctly in
the guide tube.

Always ensure that engine oil does not spill onto cold components in the engine.

Only perform these activities in the specified order ⇒ ⇒ :

1. Remove the cap on the engine oil filler fig. 166.

2. Top up the engine oil gradually in small quantities, not more than 0.5 l (0.5 quart) in total, or follow the recommendation in the display of the Volkswagen Digital
Cockpit.

3. To avoid overfilling, you must wait at least one minute each time you add engine oil so that the engine oil can flow into the oil pan up to the marking on the oil
dipstick.

4. Read the engine oil level again by checking the engine oil level display on the Infotainment system screen before you add another small amount of engine oil.

Or: read the engine oil level on the oil dipstick again before adding a little more.

Never add too much oil. When you are done adding oil, the oil level should be in the center of area fig. 167 . It should not be above fig. 167 , it should
be in the range, and it must not be in the area above fig. 167 .

5. If you accidentally add too much engine oil and the engine oil level is in the area above fig. 167 , do not start the engine ⇒ . Contact an authorized
Volkswagen dealer or authorized Volkswagen Service Facility for assistance.

6. Close the cap on the engine oil filler when you are done adding engine oil fig. 166.

7. Close the hood.

Displaying the service information in the Infotainment system

Vehicles with an Infotainment system:

1. Switch the ignition on.

2. Select and tap the Car function key.

3. Tap the Setup function key.

4. Tap the Service function key.

After a service has been carried out, the service notification is updated after approximately five days or a distance driven of approximately 500 km (311 miles). Until
then, the screen of the Infotainment system will show Inspection --- km / --- days Oil change: in --- km / --- days.

CAUTION

Starting the engine with the engine oil level too high after refilling can cause engine damage.

Do not start the engine, and seek professional assistance.

NOTICE

Using incorrect fluids can result in malfunctions and engine damage.

When topping up fluids, make sure the correct fluids are added to the correct reservoirs.

283
Volkswagen recommends using the approved engine oils in accordance with the respective VW standard.

If you are not sure where the cap and the oil dipstick are located, contact an authorized Volkswagen dealer or authorized Volkswagen Service Facility for
assistance. Volkswagen recommends contacting an authorized Volkswagen dealer or authorized Volkswagen Service Facility.

Troubleshooting
Please read the introductory information and heed the Warnings and Notice ⇒ Safety precautions for working in the engine compartment .

Engine oil pressure too low

The red warning light blinks. A message is shown in the instrument cluster display.

Do not continue driving! Engine damage could result.

1. Stop the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so ⇒ Parking.

2. Stop the engine.

3. Check the engine oil level ⇒ Checking the engine oil level and adding oil .

4. If the warning light flashes, do not continue driving or let the engine run, even if the oil is at the correct level. Engine damage could result. Contact an authorized
Volkswagen dealer or authorized Volkswagen Service Facility for assistance.

Engine oil level very low

The red warning light blinks. A message is shown in the instrument cluster display.

Do not continue driving! Engine damage could result.

1. Stop the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so ⇒ Parking.

2. Stop the engine.

3. Check the engine oil level ⇒ Checking the engine oil level and adding oil .

4. If necessary, top up the engine oil gradually in small quantities (not more than 0.5 l (0.5 qt) in total) or observe the top-up recommendation in the display of the
Volkswagen Digital Cockpit.

5. If the warning light lights up, do not continue driving or let the engine run, even if the oil is at the correct level. Engine damage could result. Contact an
authorized Volkswagen dealer or authorized Volkswagen Service Facility for assistance.

Engine oil level too low

The yellow indicator light turns on. A message is shown in the instrument cluster display.

1. Stop the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so ⇒ Parking.

2. Stop the engine.

3. Check the engine oil level ⇒ Checking the engine oil level and adding oil .

4. If necessary, top up the engine oil gradually in small quantities (not more than 0.5 l (0.5 qt) in total) or observe the top-up recommendation in the display of the
Volkswagen Digital Cockpit.

5. If the indicator light comes on, do not continue driving or let the engine run, even if the oil is at the correct level. Engine damage could result. Contact an
authorized Volkswagen dealer or authorized Volkswagen Service Facility for assistance.

Engine oil level too high

The yellow indicator light turns on. A message is shown in the instrument cluster display.

1. Stop the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so ⇒ Parking.

2. Stop the engine.

3. Check the engine oil level ⇒ Checking the engine oil level and adding oil .

4. If the engine oil level is too high, do not drive any further or leave the engine running. Engine damage could result. Contact an authorized Volkswagen dealer or
authorized Volkswagen Service Facility for assistance.

or Engine oil system malfunction

The indicator light flashes yellow. A message is shown in the instrument cluster display.

1. Contact a suitably qualified professional. Volkswagen recommends contacting an authorized Volkswagen dealer or authorized Volkswagen Service Facility.

Engine coolant
Introduction
Only perform work on the engine cooling system if you are familiar with the necessary activities and the general safety precautions, and if the correct operating

284
equipment, fluids and suitable tools are available. Work performed incorrectly can result in serious injuries ⇒ . Have all work performed by suitably qualified
professionals if necessary. Volkswagen recommends contacting an authorized Volkswagen dealer or authorized Volkswagen Service Facility.

Information about warning and indicator lights can be found in the troubleshooting section at the end of the chapter ⇒ Troubleshooting.

WARNING

Engine coolant is poisonous. Contact with coolant, especially swallowing coolant, may result in serious or fatal injuries.

If you swallow coolant, seek urgent medical help.

If you have health problems after working with coolant, seek medical help.

Always store engine coolant out of the reach of children and only within the sealed original container.

Never use empty food cans, bottles, or other containers to store engine coolant, because someone could drink the engine coolant by mistake.

Avoid regular contact with coolant to prevent damage to your skin.

Protect your skin, face, and particularly your eyes when working with coolant.

Do not eat, drink, or smoke when working with coolant.

Wash your skin with soap and water after working with coolant.

WARNING

In extremely low temperatures, the coolant can freeze and the vehicle could break down. This can cause the heating to stop working in the vehicle. Vehicle
occupants could die of exposure if they do not have sufficient warm clothing.

Make sure the coolant additive is always adjusted according to the ambient temperature.

Only use coolant additive approved by the manufacturer.

Coolant and coolant additives can pollute the environment. Catch any leaking operating fluids and dispose of them correctly according to environmental
regulations.

Engine coolant specifications


Please read the introductory information and heed the Warnings and Notice ⇒ Safety precautions for working in the engine compartment .
The cooling system is filled at the factory with a mixture of specially prepared water and at least 40% coolant additive G12evo (TL 744-L).

To protect the engine cooling system, there must always be at least a 40% proportion of coolant additive. If greater freeze protection is needed due to the climate,
the proportion of coolant additive can be increased. However, the proportion of coolant additive must not exceed 55 %, because otherwise the freeze protection will
be reduced and the cooling effect will be decreased.

The engine coolant additive can be recognized by its violet color. The mixture of water and coolant additive provides freeze protection down to -25 °C (-13 °F),
protects the aluminum alloy parts of the cooling system from corrosion, prevents limescale deposits, and increases the boiling point of the coolant.

If the engine coolant is being topped up, a blend of distilled water and at least 40% of the G12evo engine coolant additive must be used to ensure optimum
corrosion protection ⇒ .

CAUTION

In extremely low temperatures, the coolant can freeze and the vehicle could break down. This can cause the heating to stop working in the vehicle. Vehicle
occupants could die of exposure if they do not have sufficient warm clothing.

Make sure the coolant additive is always adjusted according to the ambient temperature.

Only use coolant additive approved by the manufacturer.

NOTICE

The coloring of the engine coolant results from the mixture of the purple coolant additive and distilled water. If the fluid in the coolant expansion tank is not
purple, but for example brown, the engine coolant has been mixed with another non-suitable coolant. Serious malfunctions or damage to the engine and cooling
system could occur.

Only use coolant additive approved by the manufacturer.

If the coolant turns brown, have it changed immediately by an authorized Volkswagen dealer or authorized Volkswagen Service Facility. Volkswagen
recommends contacting an authorized Volkswagen dealer or authorized Volkswagen Service Facility.

Never mix original Volkswagen coolant additives with coolant additives that are not approved by Volkswagen when topping up.

285
Engine coolant and coolant additives can harm the environment. Catch any leaking operating fluids and dispose of them correctly according to environmental
regulations.

Checking and filling engine coolant


Please read the introductory information and heed the Warnings and Notice ⇒ Safety precautions for working in the engine compartment .

Preparations
1. Parking the vehicle on a level, secure surface.

2. Allow the engine to cool ⇒ .

3. Open the hood.

The coolant expansion tank is identified with the red symbol on the cap fig. 168.

Fig. 168 In the engine compartment: cap on the engine coolant expansion tank.

WARNING

Escaping hot steam or hot coolant and hot components may cause serious burns.

Never open the engine hood if you can see or hear steam or coolant escaping from the engine compartment.

Always wait until you can no longer see or hear steam or engine coolant escaping from the engine compartment.

WARNING

The engine cooling system is under pressure when the engine is hot. If the cover is opened carelessly, coolant may spray out and cause serious burns or fatal
injuries.

Never open the cap on the coolant expansion tank when the engine is hot.

Always protect your face, hands and arms from hot coolant or steam with a large, thick cloth if you need to open the cover of the coolant tank.

Slowly and very carefully turn the cap on the coolant expansion tank counterclockwise while pressing down lightly on the cap.

Checking the coolant level

286
Fig. 169 In the engine compartment: markings on the engine coolant expansion tank.

When new vehicles are delivered or after repairs to the cooling system, the coolant level may be above the marked area. This is normal. The coolant does not need
to be extracted.

The coolant level cannot be checked exactly for every model, because the view of the fluid level in the coolant expansion tank may be obstructed. If you cannot read
off the engine coolant level accurately, contact a suitably qualified professional. Volkswagen recommends contacting an authorized Volkswagen dealer or
authorized Volkswagen Service Facility.

1. When the engine is cold, check the coolant level using the markings on the side of the engine coolant expansion tank fig. 169. The coolant level must be
between the markings.

2. If the fluid level in the coolant expansion tank is below the minimum mark (“min”), have coolant added. When the engine is warm, the engine coolant level may
be slightly above the upper marking.

3. If no coolant is visible in the coolant expansion tank, do not add coolant ⇒ .

Filling the coolant


1. Carefully unscrew the cap ⇒ .

2. Only add new coolant that conforms to the Volkswagen specification ⇒ Engine coolant specifications.

If there is no engine coolant available that conforms to the required specification, initially only top up with distilled water. Then have the correct mixture ratio
using the specified coolant additive restored as soon as possible by an authorized Volkswagen dealer or authorized Volkswagen Service Facility. Volkswagen
recommends contacting an authorized Volkswagen dealer or authorized Volkswagen Service Facility ⇒ .

3. Top up the engine coolant to the upper fill level marker. After topping up the engine coolant, the coolant level must be between the markings on the coolant
expansion tank fig. 169.

4. Install the cap securely.

5. Check the coolant level after one day. If the level of the engine coolant tank drops below the “min” minimum marking again, contact an authorized Volkswagen
dealer or authorized Volkswagen Service Facility and have the cooling system checked. Volkswagen recommends contacting an authorized Volkswagen dealer
or authorized Volkswagen Service Facility.

6. If there is no engine coolant available that conforms to the specification, do not use any other engine coolant additive in an emergency ⇒ .

NOTICE

Coolant expands when it heats up. If coolant is topped up above the marked level, excess coolant may leak out and cause damage to the vehicle.

Do not refill the system with engine coolant above the upper edge of the marked area of the engine coolant tank.

NOTICE

If there is no more engine coolant in the coolant expansion tank, air can get into the cooling system. This could result in damage to the engine.

Do not continue driving.

Do not top up the coolant.

See an authorized Volkswagen dealer or authorized Volkswagen Service Facility for assistance.

287
NOTICE

The chemical components contained in water that is not distilled can cause considerable corrosion damage in the engine. This can cause engine malfunctions.

Only use distilled water for refilling the system!

If you have added water that is not distilled, have the fluid in the cooling system changed completely by an authorized Volkswagen dealer or authorized
Volkswagen Service Facility. Volkswagen recommends contacting an authorized Volkswagen dealer or authorized Volkswagen Service Facility.

NOTICE

The use of incorrect fluids can cause serious malfunctions and damage to the engine.

When filling or changing fluids, make sure the correct fluids are added to the corresponding reservoirs.

Troubleshooting
Please read the introductory information and heed the Warnings and Notice ⇒ Safety precautions for working in the engine compartment .

Engine coolant

The red warning light blinks. The coolant temperature is too high or the coolant level is too low.

Do not continue driving! Engine damage could result.

1. Stop the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so ⇒ Parking.

2. Stop the engine.

3. Allow the engine to cool.

4. Check the engine coolant level on the Coolant expansion tank ⇒ Checking and filling engine coolant .

5. If the warning light does not turn off, do not continue driving or let the engine run, even if the engine coolant is at the correct level.

6. Contact an authorized Volkswagen dealer or authorized Volkswagen Service Facility for assistance.

Brake fluid
Introduction
Brake fluid absorbs moisture from the air over the course of time. Too much water in the brake fluid causes damage to the brake system. Water lowers the boiling
point of the brake fluid. If the water content in the brake fluid is too high, vapor lock may form in the brake system during heavy braking and full braking. Vapor lock
reduces the braking efficiency, increases the braking distance considerably, and can lead to a total failure of the brake system. Your own safety and the safety of
others on the road depends on your brake system functioning correctly at all times.

WARNING

Brake fluid is poisonous. Contact with brake fluid, especially swallowing brake fluid, may result in serious or fatal injuries.

If you swallow brake fluid, seek urgent medical help.

If you have health problems after working with brake fluid, seek medical help.

Always store brake fluid out of the reach of children and only within the sealed original container.

Never use empty food cans, bottles, or other containers to store brake fluid, because someone could drink the brake fluid by mistake.

Avoid regular contact with brake fluid to prevent damage to your skin.

Protect your skin, face, and particularly your eyes when working with brake fluid.

Do not eat, drink, or smoke when working with brake fluid.

Wash your skin with soap and water after working with brake fluid.

NOTICE

Spilled or leaking brake fluid will damage the vehicle's surfaces. The vehicle's paint, plastic parts, and tires may be damaged.

Immediately wipe up any spilled or leaking brake fluid that comes into contact with vehicle components.

Then rinse all vehicle parts with plenty of water.

Brake fluid can pollute the environment. Collect spilled brake fluid and dispose of it correctly.

288
Brake fluid specifications
Please read the introductory information and heed the Warnings and Notice ⇒ Safety precautions for working in the engine compartment .
Volkswagen has developed a special brake fluid that is optimized for the vehicle's brake system. For optimum performance of the brake system, Volkswagen
recommends only using brake fluid that complies with the VW standard 501 14.

Before using brake fluid, check that the brake fluid specification on the bottle matches the vehicle requirements.

Brake fluid that complies with the VW standard 501 14 can be obtained from an authorized Volkswagen dealer or authorized Volkswagen Service Facility.

If brake fluid that meets this specification is not available and another high-quality brake fluid must therefore be used, brake fluid that complies with the specification
DIN ISO 4925 or the US Standard FMVSS 116 DOT 4 CLASS 6 can be used.

Not all brake fluids that comply with the requirements of DIN ISO 4925 or US Standard FMVSS 116 DOT 4 CLASS 6 have the same chemical composition. Some
of these brake fluids can contain chemicals that can destroy or damage components of the vehicle brake system over time.

To help ensure that the brake system functions correctly over the long term, Volkswagen recommends using a brake fluid that expressly conforms to the
VW standard 501 14.

Brake fluid that complies with the VW standard 501 14 meets the requirements of DIN ISO 4925 or the US Standard FMVSS 116 DOT 4 CLASS 6.

Checking the Brake Fluid


Please read the introductory information and heed the Warnings and Notice ⇒ Safety precautions for working in the engine compartment .

Preparations
1. Parking the vehicle on a level, secure surface.

2. Open the hood.

Checking the Brake Fluid Level

Fig. 170 In the engine compartment: cap on the brake fluid reservoir.

The brake fluid reservoir can be recognized by its cap fig. 170.

The brake fluid level cannot be checked precisely on all models because the hood or engine components may obstruct the view of the fluid level in the reservoir. If
you cannot read the brake fluid level clearly, see an authorized Volkswagen dealer or authorized Volkswagen Service Facility for assistance. Volkswagen
recommends contacting an authorized Volkswagen dealer or authorized Volkswagen Service Facility.

The brake fluid level must always be between the MIN and MAX markings on the brake fluid reservoir ⇒ .

The brake fluid level decreases slightly when the vehicle is being used as the brake pads wear and the brakes automatically adjust themselves.

WARNING

A low brake fluid level or unsuitable brake fluid may cause the brakes to fail or may reduce braking efficiency. Accidents and serious or fatal injuries could result.

Have the brake system and brake fluid level checked regularly.

Be sure to use the correct brake fluid.

Only use brake fluid that expressly complies with the VW standard 501 14.

If brake fluid that complies with the VW standard 501 14 is not available, in exceptions only use a high-quality brake fluid that complies with
DIN ISO 4925 CLASS 6 or US standard FMVSS 116 DOT 4.

289
Changing brake fluid

Have the brake fluid changed regularly. An authorized Volkswagen dealer or authorized Volkswagen Service Facility can provide information about the interval for
changing the vehicle brake fluid. Only have brake fluid added that meets the required specifications. Volkswagen recommends contacting an authorized
Volkswagen dealer or authorized Volkswagen Service Facility.

WARNING

Vapor lock may occur in old brake fluid due to absorbed moisture during hard braking, reducing braking efficiency and potentially causing total brake failure.
Accidents and serious or fatal injuries could result.

Have the brake fluid changed regularly.

Only have new brake fluid added.

Troubleshooting
Please read the introductory information and heed the Warnings and Notice ⇒ Safety precautions for working in the engine compartment .

Brake fluid level

The red warning light turns on. The brake fluid level is too low.

Do not continue driving! This could result in the brake failing.

1. Stop the vehicle immediately as soon as it is safe to do so ⇒ Parking.

2. Check the brake fluid level.

3. If the brake fluid level is too low, contact an authorized Volkswagen dealer or authorized Volkswagen Service Facility.

12 V vehicle battery
Introduction
The 12-volt vehicle battery is a component of the electrical system and serves to supply energy to the vehicle. During maintenance procedures, the 12 V vehicle
battery is checked and replaced if necessary.

You may only perform procedures on the electrical system yourself if you are familiar with the necessary activities and the general safety precautions, and if the
correct operating equipment and fluids and suitable tools are available. Work performed incorrectly can result in serious injuries ⇒ . Have all work performed by
suitably qualified professionals. Volkswagen recommends contacting an authorized Volkswagen dealer or authorized Volkswagen Service Facility.

Information about warning and indicator lights can be found in the troubleshooting section at the end of the chapter ⇒ Troubleshooting.

Battery switch-off in an accident with triggering of the airbag

In vehicles with a 12 V vehicle battery in their vehicle interior or luggage compartment, the electrical connection to the 12 V vehicle battery is pyrotechnically
disconnected in an accident with airbag deployment. This prevents a short circuit. For more information on the installation location of the vehicle battery, refer to
section → page , Checking the 12 V vehicle battery acid level .

Detailed warnings for the 12 V vehicle battery


Always wear eye protection. Battery acid is highly corrosive. Always wear protective gloves and eye protection. Fire, sparks, open flame, and smoking
are forbidden. A highly explosive mixture of gases forms when charging the 12 V vehicle battery. Always keep children away from battery acid and the 12
V vehicle battery. Always heed the Owner's Manual.

WARNING

Performing work on the 12 V vehicle battery and the electrical system can cause serious injuries, fires, or electric shocks. This could result in serious injuries.

Always read and follow the warning information on the 12 V vehicle battery.

Before performing any work on the 12 V vehicle battery, switch off the ignition and all electrical equipment and disconnect the 12 V battery negative
cable.

Always keep children away from battery electrolyte and the 12 V vehicle battery.

When handling 12 V vehicle batteries, always protect your hands, arms, and face from spraying battery acid.

Always wear eye protection and safety gloves.

Never short circuit the battery terminals.

WARNING

When work is carried out on the 12 V vehicle battery, a highly explosive, flammable gas mixture builds up. Sparks could form and ignite the flammable gas that
is released by the 12 V vehicle battery. This can result in serious injury or death.

Always keep fires, sparks, open flames, and lit cigarettes far away from the 12 V vehicle battery.
290
Avoid creating sparks when working with wires and electrical equipment or when discharging static electricity.

WARNING

A drained 12 V vehicle battery can freeze at temperatures around 0 °C (+32 °F). Acid may leak out of 12 V vehicle batteries that have frozen and thawed again
and cause damage to the vehicle in the long run.

Never charge a frozen or thawed 12 V vehicle battery.

Always replace the 12 V vehicle battery if it freezes.

WARNING

California Proposition 65 Warning.

This product can expose you to chemicals including lead and lead components, which are known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth
defects or other reproductive harm. For more information go to https://www.P65Warnings.ca.gov.

NOTICE

UV rays can damage the battery housing.

Do not expose the 12 V vehicle battery to direct sunlight for a long period of time.

NOTICE

The 12 V vehicle battery could freeze and be destroyed.

Protect the 12 V vehicle battery against freezing temperatures if the vehicle is parked for long periods of time.

After starting the engine when the 12-volt vehicle battery is severely drained or when it has been replaced or jump-started, the system settings (time, date,
personal convenience settings, and programming) and user profiles may be changed or erased. Check and correct the settings after the 12 V vehicle battery is
sufficiently recharged.

Checking the 12 V vehicle battery acid level


Please read the introductory information and heed the Warnings and Notice ⇒ Safety precautions for working in the engine compartment .
Check the acid level of the 12 V vehicle battery regularly if mileage is high, in countries with warm climates, or if the 12 V vehicle battery is old. Otherwise, the 12 V
vehicle battery is maintenance-free.

12 V vehicle battery location

The 12 V vehicle battery is located in the engine compartment.

Preparations
1. Prepare the vehicle for work in the engine compartment.

2. Wear suitable eye protection and safety gloves.

3. Open the hood.

Checking the battery acid level

WARNING

Battery acid is corrosive. Contact with battery acid, especially swallowing battery acid, can result in serious burns.

Never open a 12 V vehicle battery.

Never tilt the 12 V vehicle battery. Acid can leak out of the vent openings.

Protect your skin, face, and particularly your eyes when working with the 12 V vehicle battery.

Do not eat, drink, or smoke when working on the 12 V vehicle battery.

Wash your skin with soap and water after working on the 12 V vehicle battery.

If acid comes into contact with your skin or hair, remove all soiled or wet clothing and wash your skin and hair with water. Consult a doctor.

If acid comes into contact with your eyes, rinse the affected area carefully with water for several minutes. Then consult a doctor immediately.

If you swallow battery acid, immediately drink plenty of water and swallow activated charcoal. Consult a doctor immediately.

If you have inhaled acid vapors, leave the hazard area and breathe in fresh air. Consult a doctor immediately.

291
WARNING

When work is carried out on the 12 V vehicle battery, a highly explosive, flammable gas mixture builds up. Sparks could form and ignite the flammable gas that
is released by the 12 V vehicle battery. This can result in serious injury or death.

Always keep fires, sparks, open flames, and lit cigarettes far away from the 12 V vehicle battery.

Avoid creating sparks when working with wires and electrical equipment or when discharging static electricity.

Depending on the vehicle equipment, an additional bracket must be removed to see the viewing window. An additional tool that is not available in the vehicle tool kit
is required to do this. Always have the acid level of the 12 V vehicle battery checked by an authorized Volkswagen dealer or authorized Volkswagen Service Facility.
Volkswagen recommends contacting an authorized Volkswagen dealer or authorized Volkswagen Service Facility.

Fig. 171 On the top of the 12 V vehicle battery: Window (general example).

Make sure there is enough lighting to clearly see the color indicator in the circular window on the top of the 12 V vehicle battery fig. 171.

The color indicator in the circular window changes depending on the acid level in the 12 V vehicle battery.

Light yellow or colorless The 12 V vehicle battery acid level is too low. Have the 12 V vehicle battery replaced by an authorized Volkswagen dealer or authorized
Volkswagen Service Facility. Volkswagen recommends contacting an authorized Volkswagen dealer or authorized Volkswagen Service Facility.

Black The 12 V vehicle battery acid level is OK.

The acid level of 12 V vehicle batteries labeled AGM cannot be checked for technical reasons. Suitably qualified professionals can inspect the battery. Volkswagen
recommends contacting an authorized Volkswagen dealer or authorized Volkswagen Service Facility.

Charging, replacing, disconnecting, or connecting the 12 V vehicle battery


Please read the introductory information and heed the Warnings and Notice ⇒ Safety precautions for working in the engine compartment .
If you suspect that the 12 V vehicle battery is damaged or malfunctioning, see suitably qualified professionals to have the 12 V vehicle battery checked. Volkswagen
recommends contacting an authorized Volkswagen dealer or authorized Volkswagen Service Facility.

Charging the 12 V vehicle battery

The 12 V vehicle battery should be charged by suitably qualified professionals because the 12 V vehicle battery that is installed at the factory requires a charging
process where the voltage is limited ⇒ . Volkswagen recommends contacting an authorized Volkswagen dealer or authorized Volkswagen Service Facility.

Replacing the 12 V vehicle battery

The 12 V vehicle battery is designed to fit the location where it is installed and is equipped with safety features. If a 12 V vehicle battery needs to be replaced, have
the replacement part fitted by qualified professionals. Volkswagen recommends contacting an authorized Volkswagen dealer or authorized Volkswagen Service
Facility. Check with qualified professionals to find out the component information regarding size and the required maintenance, performance, and safety features.
They must possess the necessary technical documentation and equipment. Volkswagen recommends contacting an authorized Volkswagen dealer or authorized
Volkswagen Service Facility. The vent opening on the 12 V vehicle battery must always be located on the negative terminal side. The vent opening on the positive
terminal side must always be sealed ⇒ .

Only use a maintenance-free 12 V vehicle battery that conforms to the TL 825 06 and VW 7 50 73 standards. These standards must be from October 2014 or later.

Always have the 12 V vehicle battery replaced by qualified professionals because the vehicle electronics must be adapted as part of the replacement. In addition,
the battery parameters for functional safety can only be determined with the OEM battery. Only qualified professionals have the necessary equipment to perform the

292
adaptation and have access to the correct replacement batteries. Using unsuitable batteries may invalidate the operating license.

Disconnecting the 12 V vehicle battery


If the 12 V vehicle battery must be disconnected from the vehicle electrical system, note the following:

1. Switch off all electrical consumers.

2. Unlock the vehicle before disconnecting the battery. Otherwise, the anti-theft alarm system will be triggered.

3. Disconnect the negative cable first, and then the positive cable ⇒ .

Connecting the 12 V vehicle battery


If the 12 V vehicle battery must be connected to the vehicle electrical system, note the following:

1. Switch off all electrical consumers.

2. Connect the positive cable first, and then the negative cable ⇒ .

Various indicator lights may turn on after connecting the 12 V vehicle battery and switching the ignition on. They will turn off after driving a short distance at a speed
of approximately 15 km/h to 20 km/h (approximately 10 mph to 12 mph). If the indicator lights light up and remain on, contact an authorized Volkswagen dealer or
authorized Volkswagen Service Facility and have the vehicle checked. Volkswagen recommends contacting an authorized Volkswagen dealer or authorized
Volkswagen Service Facility.

If the 12 V vehicle battery was disconnected for a long period of time, the next scheduled maintenance may not display correctly or it may not be calculated correctly
⇒ Service interval display. Follow the maximum permissible maintenance interval ⇒ Maintenance.

Vehicles with a starter button: If the ignition cannot be switched on after connecting the 12 V vehicle battery, carry out the following activities:

1. Lock and unlock the vehicle from the outside.

2. Try to switch the ignition on again.

3. If the ignition will not switch on, see an authorized Volkswagen dealer or authorized Volkswagen Service Facility for assistance.

Automatic equipment deactivation

If the ignition is switched on for a very long time when the engine is off or the parking light is switched on when parking for a very long time, the intelligent power
management cannot always prevent the 12 V vehicle battery from being drained.

If the 12 V vehicle battery is under a heavy load, the intelligent power management will automatically begin certain measures to prevent the 12 V vehicle battery
from draining.

The idle speed will be increased so that the alternator delivers more power.

If necessary, equipment that uses a lot of power will have its performance limited or will be switched off.

The power supply to the 12 V socket will be interrupted temporarily when the engine is started.

12 V Vehicle Battery Draining

If the battery is drained, it may not be possible to start the engine. The 12 V vehicle battery will be drained in the following situations:

If the vehicle is parked for long periods of time without running the engine, especially if the ignition is on.

If electrical equipment is used when the ignition is switched off.

WARNING

Use of a 12 V vehicle battery that does not have identical specifications and dimensions to the 12 V vehicle battery that was installed at the factory may cause
short circuits or fire. This could result in serious or fatal injuries.

Always use a maintenance-free and leak-proof 12 V vehicle battery that has the same specifications and dimensions as the 12 V vehicle battery that was
installed at the factory.

WARNING

Fitting 12 V vehicle batteries incorrectly may cause short circuits or fire. This could result in serious or fatal injuries.

Always attach the 12 V vehicle battery to the attachment points provided in the vehicle.

Replace all covers that are required for the vehicle back on the battery.

WARNING

A highly explosive mixture of hydrogen gas can form when charging the 12 V vehicle battery. Sparks or naked flames could ignite the gas mixture. Serious
burns may result.

Only charge 12 V vehicle batteries in well-ventilated areas.

293
Keep sparks and naked flames away from the 12 V vehicle battery.

WARNING

A drained 12 V vehicle battery can freeze at temperatures around 0 °C (+32 °F). Acid may leak out of 12 V vehicle batteries that have frozen and thawed again
and cause damage to the vehicle in the long run.

Never charge a frozen or thawed 12 V vehicle battery.

Always replace the 12 V vehicle battery if it freezes.

WARNING

If the degassing tube is not attached to the 12 V vehicle battery correctly, the highly explosive gas mixture that builds up when the vehicle is running may enter
the vehicle interior. This oxyhydrogen gas can ignite and cause serious or fatal injuries.

For vehicles with the 12 V vehicle battery in the vehicle interior or luggage compartment, ensure that the degassing hose is connected to the 12 V vehicle
battery correctly. The degassing hose must always be connected to the negative terminal side of the 12-volt vehicle battery.

Always ensure that the opening on the positive terminal side of the 12 V vehicle battery is capped.

CAUTION

Cables that are connected incorrectly can cause a short circuit. This could damage the on-board electronics and result in serious injuries.

Connect the positive cable first and then the negative cable.

NOTICE

If the 12 V vehicle battery is connected or disconnected when the ignition is switched on or the engine is running, this could damage the electrical system or
electronic components, resulting in electrical malfunctions.

Never connect or disconnect the 12 V vehicle battery when the ignition is on or the engine is running.

NOTICE

If accessories that provide power for charging the 12 V vehicle battery are connected to the 12 V socket, this could damage the electrical system or electronic
components, resulting in electrical malfunctions.

Never connect accessories that provide power, such as solar panels or battery chargers, to the 12 V socket in order to charge the 12 V vehicle battery.

12 V vehicle batteries can contain toxic substances such as sulfuric acid and lead. Dispose of 12 V vehicle batteries correctly.

Battery acid can pollute the environment. Collect spilled battery acid and dispose of it correctly.

Troubleshooting
Please read the introductory information and heed the Warnings and Notice ⇒ Safety precautions for working in the engine compartment .

12-volt power supply

The red warning light turns on. A message is shown in the instrument cluster display.

Do not continue driving! Possible failure of the electrical system.

1. Stop the vehicle immediately and park it safely.

2. Turn off electrical equipment that is not needed.

3. Switch the ignition off.

4. Contact an authorized Volkswagen dealer or authorized Volkswagen Service Facility for assistance.

If the red warning light comes on, the start-stop system is switched off. The start-stop system will only be automatically switched on again after the engine is
restarted.

12-volt power supply

The yellow indicator light turns on. A message is shown in the instrument cluster display.
294
Messages about the battery charge level of the 12 V vehicle battery.

1. Let the engine run so that the 12 V vehicle battery can be recharged.

2. If the message about the battery charge level of the 12 V vehicle battery does not turn off after a few minutes despite the measures having been taken, then
contact an authorized Volkswagen dealer or authorized Volkswagen Service Facility.

Messages about the 12 V power supply.

1. Contact an authorized Volkswagen dealer or authorized Volkswagen Service Facility for assistance.

If the yellow indicator light lights up, the start-stop system will not be able to start the engine. If the yellow indicator light has turned off, the 12 V vehicle battery has a
sufficient battery charge level to automatically restart the engine.

295
Wheels and tires
Introduction
Tires are the part of the vehicle that are under the most demand yet are the most underestimated. Tires are extremely important, because the small running surface
on the tires is the only point of contact that the vehicle has with the road.

The tire and rim combinations approved by Volkswagen are specifically designed for each other.

The service life of the tire depends on the tire pressure, the driving style, the way the tires are handled, and correct mounting of the tire.

Rims, tires and wheel bolts

Rims, tires, and wheel bolts are determined based on the vehicle model. Whenever another rim is installed, the wheel bolts to be used must have the correct length
and bolt head shape. This ensures that the brakes can work correctly and that the vehicle drives smoothly and safely. For technical reasons, standard rims from
other vehicles cannot be used. Under certain circumstances, this may even apply to rims for the same vehicle model. You must consult a suitably qualified
professional to replace rim/tire combinations. Volkswagen recommends contacting an authorized Volkswagen dealer or authorized Volkswagen Service Facility.

The correct wheel bolts must always be used for each vehicle model, and these bolts must always be tightened to the correct torque ⇒ Monitoring the tightening
torque.

WARNING

Handling wheels and tires incorrectly can reduce driving safety and cause serious accidents and death.

Regularly check the tire pressure when the tires are cold and always maintain the specified pressure ⇒ Checking the tire pressure . If the tire pressure is
too low, the tire can heat up so much while driving that the tread separates or the tire ruptures.

Check the tires regularly for damage and wear.

Never exceed the maximum permissible speed and tire load specified for the tires fitted to your vehicle.

For all four wheels, use only radial tires of the same design, size (rolling circumference), and tread pattern.

If there are unusual vibrations or if the vehicle pulls to one side while driving, stop immediately and check the wheels and tires for damage.

Never loosen the bolts on rims with a bolted rim ring.

WARNING

New tires or tires that are old, worn, or damaged cannot provide the maximum vehicle control and braking effect.

This can cause accidents and fatal injuries.

Break in new tires because they have reduced traction and braking efficiency when they are new. Therefore drive carefully for the first 600 km
(370 miles).

Never drive with tires that are worn or damaged, e.g. due to being punctured, cut, cracked, or bulging.

If there are unusual vibrations or if the vehicle pulls to one side while driving, stop immediately and check the wheels and tires for damage.

Do not use any wheels or tires if you do not know how they have been used in the past. Used wheels and tires could be damaged, even if there is no
visible damage.

Only use tires that are more than six years old if absolutely necessary and drive with extreme caution if doing so, even if the tires have never been used
before.

Replace worn or damaged tires immediately.

WARNING

If the wheel bolts are not tightened enough to meet the specification, the wheel bolts and consequently the wheel could come loose while driving. Exceeding the
tightening specification could damage the wheel bolts and threads.

Wheel bolts that are tightened incorrectly or missing could cause you to lose control of the vehicle and lead to serious accidents and fatal injuries.

Always tighten the wheel bolts to the correct tightening torque. If you do not have a torque wrench, tighten the wheel bolts with the lug wrench and then
have the tightening torque checked as soon as possible by an authorized Volkswagen dealer or authorized Volkswagen Service Facility. Volkswagen
recommends contacting an authorized Volkswagen dealer or authorized Volkswagen Service Facility.

Never drive with missing or loose wheel bolts.

Always use wheel bolts that are correct for the rim and the vehicle model.

Never grease or oil the wheel bolts and the threads in the wheel hub. Even when tightened to the specification, the wheel bolts could become loose while
driving.

Ensure the wheel bolts and threads in the wheel hubs are clean, easy to move and free of oil and grease.

296
Never loosen the bolts on rims with a bolted rim ring.

WARNING

Improper installation of the tires on the rim can damage the rim and cause tires to suddenly lose air or go flat while driving.

This can cause accidents and fatal injuries.

Always have tires installed on the rim by an authorized Volkswagen dealer or authorized Volkswagen Service Facility. Volkswagen recommends
contacting an authorized Volkswagen dealer or authorized Volkswagen Service Facility.

Taking care of wheels and tires


Handling tires
Preventing damage to the tires
Always drive over curbs and other low obstacles slowly and at a right-angle so that both front wheels come into contact with the obstacle at the same time.

Check the tire pressure regularly.

Check tires regularly for damage, e.g. punctures.

Never exceed the load index and maximum speed of the tire ⇒ Tire labeling and tire classifications .

Have damaged or worn rims replaced immediately ⇒ Troubleshooting.

Protect tires from coming into contact with corrosive materials such as grease, oil, gasoline, and brake fluid ⇒ .

Replace missing dust caps on the valves immediately.

Remove any objects provided they have not punctured the inside of the tire ⇒ Troubleshooting.

Pay attention to all warnings issued by the Tire Pressure Monitoring System ⇒ Troubleshooting the Tire Pressure Monitoring System .

WARNING

Corrosive fluids and materials can cause visible and invisible damage to the tires, which can cause the tires to fail.

This can cause accidents and fatal injuries.

Always keep chemicals, oils, grease, fuel, brake fluid, and other corrosive materials away from the tires.

Storing tires
Only store tires in a cool, dry location that is as dark as possible.

Do not stand tires that are mounted on rims up vertically.

Protect tires that are not mounted on rims from dirt with suitable covers and store them standing on the tread surface.

Tires that are more than six years old

Tires age due to physical and chemical processes that affect their function. Tires that have been stored and unused for long periods of time age more quickly than
tires that are used continuously.

Volkswagen recommends replacing tires that are more than six years old with new tires. This even applies to tires that may appear to be usable and whose tread
depth is still greater than the minimum requirement ⇒ .

Winter and all season tires lose their characteristics to a large extent due to aging, regardless of the remaining tread depth.

The age of the tire can be determined based on the production date ⇒ Tire labeling and tire classifications .

WARNING

Old tires can suddenly lose air or rupture, particularly at high speeds.

This can cause accidents and fatal injuries.

Only use tires that are more than six years old if absolutely necessary and drive with extreme caution if doing so, even if the tires have never been used
before.

New tires
Drive particularly carefully during the first 600 km (370 mi) with new tires because they must be broken in. Tires that have not been broken in yet have reduced
gripping abilities and braking efficiency ⇒ .

Only use tires with the same design and as close to the same construction, size (rolling circumference) and tread pattern as possible on all four wheels.

297
The tread depth of new tires may vary between tire models and manufacturers due to different design features and tread designs.

WARNING

New tires must be broken in because they have reduced traction and braking efficiency when they are new.

This could cause you to lose control of the vehicle and lead to serious accidents and death.

Break in new tires. Drive carefully for the first 600 km (370 miles).

The size specifications for new tires may vary significantly from the actual tire dimensions for different tire brands.

Replacing tires
At the factory, the vehicle can be equipped with reduced rolling resistance tires. The specified fuel consumption values can only be achieved using these tires.
When purchasing new tires, always make sure the tires are optimized for rolling resistance ⇒ Eco tips.

Before buying new reduced rolling resistance tires, seek advice from an authorized Volkswagen dealer or authorized Volkswagen Service Facility. Volkswagen
recommends contacting an authorized Volkswagen dealer or authorized Volkswagen Service Facility.

At a minimum, replace both tires on a single axle.

Only replace old tires with tires that have been approved by Volkswagen for your vehicle model.

Never use tires whose size exceeds the measurement of tires that are approved by Volkswagen ⇒ .

Volkswagen Genuine tires

At the factory, the vehicle can be equipped with Volkswagen Genuine tires. These tires are marked with the symbol and are specially adapted for this vehicle.
Volkswagen Genuine tires fulfill the highest standards of safety and driving characteristics when used appropriately.

Recalibrating the Tire Pressure Monitoring System

The Tire Pressure Monitoring System must be recalibrated each time one or more wheels is replaced. This also applies if the tires are rotated, for example from front
to back ⇒ How the Tire Pressure Monitoring System Works .

WARNING

Tires must have enough clearance from vehicle components. If there is not enough clearance, tires could rub against components of the suspension, the body,
and the brake lines.

This may cause the brake system to fail, the tread to separate, and the tire to rupture, resulting in serious accidents and fatal injuries.

Only use tires with dimensions that do not exceed the dimensions of the tire brands approved by Volkswagen and that do not rub against other
components of the vehicle.

NOTICE

Driving over potholes and curbs can cause the tires to become deformed.

Damage to the tires and rims can result.

Avoid strong impacts and drive around obstacles where possible.

NOTICE

The valves may be damaged by dirt.

Never drive without caps on the valves.

NOTICE

The valves can be damaged when replacing wheels.

Do not let wheels that you have removed fall on the rim.

Always dispose of old tires correctly and according to regulations.

If the spare wheel is different from the regular vehicle wheels, e.g. in the case of winter tires or a temporary spare wheel, only use the spare wheel temporarily
and in the event of a breakdown, and drive especially carefully. Replace the compact spare wheel with a regular wheel as soon as possible.

Using tires approved by Volkswagen ensures that the dimensions will fit correctly on your vehicle. If other tires are used, the seller must provide a certificate

298
from the tire manufacturer stating that the tires are suitable for the vehicle. Keep the certificate stored safely in the vehicle.

Handling rims
Preventing damage to the rims
Missing hubcaps can cause damage to the rims and wheel bolts.

Always install missing hubcaps before driving.

Always drive over curbs and other low obstacles slowly and at a right-angle so that both front wheels come into contact with the obstacle at the same time.

Replace missing dust caps on the valves immediately.

Check the tire pressure regularly.

Rims with bolted rim ring or accent elements

Rims with a bolted rim ring or accent element consist of multiple pieces. These pieces are connected together with special bolts. Damaged rims must be replaced
and may only be repaired by an authorized Volkswagen dealer or authorized Volkswagen Service Facility. Volkswagen recommends contacting an authorized
Volkswagen dealer or authorized Volkswagen Service Facility.

Rim identification

In some countries, new rims must include information about certain properties. The following information may be on the rim:

Seal of conformity

Rim size

Manufacturer or brand name

Production date (month/year)

Country of origin

Serial number

Raw material batch number

Commodity code

WARNING

Using unsuitable or damaged rims can impair driving safety and cause accidents and serious injuries.

Only use rims permitted for the vehicle.

Check the rims regularly for damage and replace them if necessary.

WARNING

Loosening and tightening bolts incorrectly on rims with bolted rim rings can cause severe accidents and death.

Never loosen the bolts on rims with a bolted rim ring.

Have all procedures on rims with bolted rim rings performed by an authorized Volkswagen dealer or authorized Volkswagen Service Facility. Volkswagen
recommends contacting an authorized Volkswagen dealer or authorized Volkswagen Service Facility.

Maintaining wheels and tires


Checking the tire pressure
Check the tire pressure at least once a month.

Check the tire pressure only when tires are cold. The specified tire pressure only applies to a cold tire. The tire pressure on warm tires is higher than on cold
tires. Therefore, never release air from a warm tire to adjust the tire pressure.

Always adjust the tire pressures to the vehicle load ⇒ .

After adjusting tire pressures, always screw the caps on the valves and note the information about the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS).

Always use the tire pressures specified on the label. Never exceed the maximum tire pressure specified on the side of the tire.

299
Fig. 172 On the driver door pillar: Tire inflation pressure label.

The correct tire pressure for the tires fitted at the factory can be found on a label on the B-pillar of the driver door fig. 172. The factory-installed tires can be winter,
summer or all-season tires.

An incorrect tire pressure can cause increased tire wear, negatively affect driving behavior and damage tires. Compliance with the correct tire pressure is very
important, particularly when driving at high speeds.

The specified tire pressure is given for a cold tire. For warm tires, the pressure is higher.

Never reduce the pressure of a warm tire in order to reach the specified value. This will cause the actual pressure when the tire is cold to be too low.

WARNING

A tire pressure that is too low can result in a sudden loss of air, separation of the tire tread or bursting of the tire while driving. An incorrect tire pressure shortens
the service life of the tire and negatively affects driving behavior.

An incorrect tire pressure can cause accidents and fatal injuries.

Check the tire pressures regularly, at least once a month and also before driving long distances.

Always adjust the tire pressure according to your load.

Never reduce the tire pressure when tires are warm.

WARNING

Excessive speeds and vehicle overloading can cause overheating, sudden tire damage (including tire blow-outs) and separation of the tread.

This can cause accidents and fatal injuries.

Never exceed the maximum load for the tires fitted ⇒ Tire labeling and tire classifications .

Never exceed the maximum permitted speed for the tires fitted ⇒ Tire labeling and tire classifications .

NOTICE

Careless handling of the tire pressure gage may damage the valve.

When positioning the tire pressure gauge, make sure it is not tilted at the valve stem.

Tire pressures that are too low increase fuel consumption.

Tire inflation pressure for cold tires


Golf GTI

Tire pressure
Size designation
psi kPA bar

225/45 R17 36 250 2.5

225/40 R18 XL 39 270 2.7

235/35 R19 XL 39 270 2.7

T125/70 R18 99M 61 420 4.2

300
Golf R

Tire pressure
Size designation
psi kPA bar

225/40 R18 XL 42 290 2.9

235/35 R19 XL 42 290 2.9

Details of the correct tire pressure are located on the tire pressure label on the driver's door pillar. If the details on the tire pressure label differ from the details in the
Manual, the details on the tire pressure label apply.

3) This data was not yet available at the time of printing.

Monitoring the tightening torque


The correct wheel bolts must always be used for each vehicle model, and these bolts must always be tightened to the correct torque. The wheel bolt tightening
torque must be checked regularly with a functional torque wrench. In addition, the tightening torque must be checked immediately after each wheel change with a
functional torque wrench. If the wheel bolts are not tightened enough to meet the specification, the wheel bolts and rims could come loose while driving. Exceeding
the tightening specification could damage the wheel bolts and threads.

Wheel bolts that are corroded and difficult to turn must be replaced and the threads in the wheel hub must be cleaned before checking the tightening torque. Never
grease or oil the wheel bolts and the threads in the wheel hub.

Wheel bolt tightening specification

The tightening torque of the wheel bolts is specified in the chapter on replacing wheels → page , Changing a wheel .

WARNING

If the wheel bolts are not tightened enough to meet the specification, the wheel bolts and consequently the wheel could come loose while driving. Exceeding the
tightening specification could damage the wheel bolts and threads.

Wheel bolts that are tightened incorrectly or missing could cause you to lose control of the vehicle and lead to serious accidents and fatal injuries.

Always tighten the wheel bolts to the correct tightening torque. If you do not have a torque wrench, tighten the wheel bolts with the lug wrench and then
have the tightening torque checked as soon as possible by an authorized Volkswagen dealer or authorized Volkswagen Service Facility. Volkswagen
recommends contacting an authorized Volkswagen dealer or authorized Volkswagen Service Facility.

Never drive with missing or loose wheel bolts.

Always use wheel bolts that are correct for the rim and the vehicle model.

Never grease or oil the wheel bolts and the threads in the wheel hub. Even when tightened to the specification, the wheel bolts could become loose while
driving.

Ensure the wheel bolts and threads in the wheel hubs are clean, easy to move and free of oil and grease.

Never loosen the bolts on rims with a bolted rim ring.

Replacing tires

301
Fig. 173 General example: Diagram for rotating the wheels.

To ensure that the tires wear evenly, rotating the tires regularly according to the diagram is recommended fig. 173. This will allow the tires to have approximately the
same length of service life.

Volkswagen recommends having the wheel replacement carried out by an authorized Volkswagen dealer or authorized Volkswagen Service Facility. Volkswagen
recommends contacting an authorized Volkswagen dealer or authorized Volkswagen Service Facility.

Monitoring the tread depth


Tread depth

Most driving situations require a tire tread that is as deep as possible. All tires, or at least tires on the same axle, must have an even tread depth ⇒ . This applies
in particular to wet or wintry road conditions.

In most countries, the legal minimum tread depth is 1.6 mm (1/16 of an inch). This is measured in the tread grooves next to the wear indicators. Observe any legal
regulations specific to the country where you are driving.

Note the legal requirements in the applicable country for minimum tread depths on winter and all-season tires.

Tire wear

Tire wear depends on various factors:

Driving style.

Wheel balancing.

Running gear alignment.

An imbalance can occur while driving, which can be noticed by uneven steering. Tire imbalances also affect tire wear. In these situations, have the wheels balanced
again.

Incorrect wheel alignment impairs driving safety and increases tire wear. If there is high degree of tire wear, have the wheel alignment checked by an authorized
Volkswagen dealer or authorized Volkswagen Service Facility. Volkswagen recommends contacting an authorized Volkswagen dealer or authorized Volkswagen
Service Facility.

Tire Wear when Driving with a Sporty Driving Style

Driving quickly around curves, rapid acceleration, and heavy braking increase tire wear.

If you drive with a sporty driving style, check the tread depth every 5000 to 10,000 km (approx. 3107 to 6214 miles).

Tread wear indicator in tires

Fig. 174 Tire tread: tread wear indicator.

The tread wear indicator is 1.6 mm (1/16 in) above the base of the tread fig. 174. Markings on the sides of the tire indicate the location of the tread wear indicator
fig. 174.

The tread wear indicator indicates if a tire is worn out. At the latest, the tire must be replaced if the tread depth is worn down to the tread wear indicator.

When you check the tread depth, you must check the wear indicators of all tread grooves

WARNING

Worn tires are a safety risk and make it difficult to control the vehicle well. They increase the braking distance and the risk of skidding.

Worn tires have significantly less grip. Particularly on wet roads, the vehicle is more likely to “hydroplane”.

Worn tires could cause loss of vehicle control, serious accidents and death.

Replace tires with new tires when the tires are worn down to the tread wear indicator.

302
Wheels and tires in snow and ice
Winter tires
Summer tires offer very little holding force on icy or snowy roads. Winter or all-season tires improve vehicle handling and braking performance in winter road
conditions. Volkswagen recommends using winter tires on the vehicle at temperatures below +7 °C (+45 °F) or in winter road conditions. This also applies to
vehicles with all-wheel drive (4MOTION).

The effectiveness of winter or all-season tires is greatly reduced when the tire tread is worn down to a depth of 3/16 in (4 mm).

The following applies when using winter tires:


Follow all applicable laws in the country of operation.

Use winter tires on all four wheels at the same time.

Only use in winter road conditions.

Only use the tire sizes permitted for the vehicle.

Only use winter tires that have the same belt construction, size, and tread pattern.

Follow the speed restriction based on the speed rating.

Speed restriction

Winter tires have a speed restriction based on their speed rating ⇒ Tire labeling and tire classifications .

A speed warning can be set in the Vehicle settings menu in the Infotainment System under the Tires menu.

On V winter tires, the speed restriction and required tire pressure depend on the engine. Always ask an authorized Volkswagen dealer or authorized Volkswagen
Service Facility about the permitted speed and required tire pressure. Volkswagen recommends contacting an authorized Volkswagen dealer or authorized
Volkswagen Service Facility.

WARNING

In winter road conditions, do not let the improved driving characteristics of winter tires tempt you to take safety risks, as otherwise you may lose control of the
vehicle, resulting in serious injuries.

Adapt your speed and driving style to the visibility, weather, road and traffic conditions.

When temperatures are above +7 °C (+45 °F), summer tires provide better vehicle handling. There is less road noise, the tires wear more slowly, and economy
is better.

For vehicles with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System, the system must be recalibrated after changing to winter tires ⇒ How the Tire Pressure Monitoring System
Works .

The speed limit and tire load of winter tires may differ from those of summer tires.

You can contact an authorized Volkswagen dealer or authorized Volkswagen Service Facility for permitted winter tire sizes. Volkswagen recommends
contacting an authorized Volkswagen dealer or authorized Volkswagen Service Facility.

Snow chains
Note the legal requirements and the permitted maximum speed when driving with snow chains.

Snow chains improve driving and braking handling when on roads covered with ice or snow.

Snow chains may only be fit on the front wheels .

If possible, use fine-mesh snow chains that include a chain lock no larger than 13.5 mm (approx. 17/32 in).

Volkswagen recommends contacting an authorized Volkswagen dealer or authorized Volkswagen Service Facility for more information about wheel, tire, and snow
chain sizes. Volkswagen recommends contacting an authorized Volkswagen dealer or authorized Volkswagen Service Facility.

Snow chains may only be used on tire/rim combinations that are approved for snow chain operation.

If using snow chains, remove the wheel covers and rim accent rings before mounting the snow chains. However, the wheel bolts must be covered with caps for
safety reasons. Caps can be obtained from an authorized Volkswagen dealer or authorized Volkswagen Service Facility. Volkswagen recommends contacting an
authorized Volkswagen dealer or authorized Volkswagen Service Facility.

Using snow chains on the compact spare tire or collapsible spare tire
Using snow chains on the compact spare tire or collapsible spare tire is not permitted for technical reasons.

1. If a front tire is flat, mount the compact spare tire or collapsible spare tire on the rear axle.

2. Replace the damaged front wheel with the removed rear wheel. Pay attention to the running direction when doing this.

303
Volkswagen recommends attaching the snow chains before mounting the wheel.

WARNING

Using unsuitable snow chains or installing snow chains incorrectly can cause serious accidents and death.

Always use the correct snow chains.

Only use snow chains on the tire/rim combinations approved by Volkswagen.

Follow the installation instructions provided by the snow chain manufacturer.

Never drive faster than intended according to the specifications of the snow chain manufacturer or permitted by law when snow chains are mounted.

NOTICE

If snow chains are used on routes that are not snowy, they will impair the driving characteristics, damage the tires, and be quickly destroyed.

Remove snow chains when driving on roads without snow.

NOTICE

Snow chains that come into contact with the rim directly can scratch or damage the rim.

To prevent damage, use snow chains with integrated rim protection.

On vehicles with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System, the system must be reprogrammed after snow chains are mounted ⇒ How the Tire Pressure Monitoring
System Works.

Troubleshooting
Damage to tires and rims can often occur where it is not visible ⇒ .

If you suspect that a wheel is damaged, slow down and stop as soon as traffic allows and it is safe to do so.

Vehicle pulls to one side or unusual vibrations

The vehicle pulls to the left or right when driving, or there are unusual vibrations. This could indicate tire damage or too low a tire inflation pressure.

Check the tires!

Slow down immediately and stop the vehicle as soon as the traffic situation allows and it is safe to do so.

1. Check the tires and rims for damage.

2. Do not continue driving if there is tire damage.

3. Replace the damaged wheel ⇒ Introduction. If necessary, contact an authorized Volkswagen dealer or authorized Volkswagen Service Facility for
assistance.

Or: seal the damaged tire using the tire mobility set and inflate it with air ⇒ Introduction.

4. If no exterior damage is visible, drive slowly and carefully to the nearest authorized Volkswagen dealer or authorized Volkswagen Service Facility to have the
vehicle checked. Volkswagen recommends contacting an authorized Volkswagen dealer or authorized Volkswagen Service Facility.

Foreign object stuck in the tire

A foreign object is stuck in the tire or between the tread segments.

On vehicles with run-flat tires (AirStop® tires): leave the object in the tire and contact an authorized Volkswagen dealer or authorized Volkswagen Service Facility.
Volkswagen recommends contacting an authorized Volkswagen dealer or authorized Volkswagen Service Facility. Sealant that has been applied to the inside of the
tire running surface will surround the object and seal the tire temporarily.

1. If an object has punctured through to the inside of a tire, leave the object in place. Objects stuck between the tire tread segments can be removed.

2. Replace the damaged wheel ⇒ Introduction. If necessary, contact an authorized Volkswagen dealer or authorized Volkswagen Service Facility for
assistance.

Or: seal the damaged tire using the tire mobility set and inflate it with air ⇒ Introduction.

3. Check and adjust the tire pressure.

4. Contact an authorized Volkswagen dealer or authorized Volkswagen Service Facility. Volkswagen recommends contacting an authorized Volkswagen dealer or
authorized Volkswagen Service Facility.

Tires lose traction

The vehicle loses traction when driving along curved stretches, and swerves. The braking distance is longer and the anti-slip regulation (ASR) and the anti-lock
brake system (ABS) take control earlier.
304
The tire may be too worn down to guarantee sufficient traction ⇒ Monitoring the tread depth .

1. Go slowly and carefully to the nearest suitably qualified professional to have the vehicle checked. Volkswagen recommends contacting an authorized
Volkswagen dealer or authorized Volkswagen Service Facility.

Wheel bolts can only be undone with difficulty

Wheel bolts can corrode over time. This means that the wheel bolts can only be undone with difficulty.

1. Contact professional assistance, or drive slowly and carefully to the nearest qualified professional to have the vehicle checked. Volkswagen recommends
contacting an authorized Volkswagen dealer or authorized Volkswagen Service Facility.

WARNING

Unusual vibrations or the vehicle pulling to one side while driving may indicate tire damage.

Tire damage could cause loss of vehicle control, accidents and serious or fatal injuries.

Slow down immediately and stop the vehicle as soon as the traffic situation allows and it is safe to do so.

Check the tires and rims for damage.

Never continue driving with damaged tires or rims. Instead, seek professional assistance.

If no exterior damage is visible, drive slowly and carefully to the nearest authorized Volkswagen dealer or authorized Volkswagen Service Facility to have
the vehicle checked. Volkswagen recommends contacting an authorized Volkswagen dealer or authorized Volkswagen Service Facility.

Tire Pressure Monitoring System


How the Tire Pressure Monitoring System Works
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System
warns the driver if tire pressures are too
low.

The Tire Pressure Monitoring System uses the ABS sensors to monitor the RPM and therefore the rolling circumference of the individual wheels during travel.

If a tire loses air or the tire pressure is too low, the rolling circumference is reduced and the RPM increases.

The Tire Pressure Monitoring System shows a change in the rolling circumference of the tires via the indicator light in the instrument cluster.

However, the following situations can also cause changes in the RPM

The tire pressure has changed

The tire has structural damage

One side of the vehicle has a heavier load than the other

Snow chains are installed on the tires

A compact spare wheel has been installed

Only one wheel was replaced on each axle


The Tire Pressure Monitoring System will not work if the ESC or ABS is malfunctioning ⇒ Troubleshooting.

Reference Pressure

The reference pressure for the Tire Pressure Monitoring System is the recommended tire pressure for the tires installed at the factory when the tires are cold at
maximum load. The reference pressure corresponds to the details on the tire pressure label ⇒ Checking the tire pressure .

If the tire pressure has been correctly adjusted on all four tires, the Tire Pressure Monitoring System must be re-calibrated ⇒ Calibrating the Tire Pressure
Monitoring System. This adapts the reference pressure to the current tire pressure.

The Tire Pressure Monitoring System may not react at first or may not react at all when you are driving in a sporty manner, or on snow-covered or unpaved
roads, when you are driving with snow chains, or in certain other situations. A change in the tread circumference of a tire is signaled by the Tire Pressure Monitoring
System indicator in the instrument cluster (telltale).

The tire pressure recommended for the tires originally installed on the vehicle is on a sticker on the driver door jamb.

Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer
on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure
label, you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires).

As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or
more of your tires is significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as
possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation
also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle's handling and stopping ability.

Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver's responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation
305
has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale.

Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is
combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously
illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists.

When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a
variety of reasons, including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly. Always
check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the
TPMS to continue to function properly.

WARNING

The Tire Pressure Monitoring System is not a replacement for the driver's attention and works only within the system limitations. The Tire Pressure Monitoring
System cannot detect all driving situations and may not react, or may react with a delay, or may react in a way that is not desired. If you are careless, there is a
risk of accidents, serious injuries and death.

Always stay attentive and do not rely solely on the Tire Pressure Monitoring System. The driver is always responsible for adhering to the correct tire
inflation pressure.

Observe the system limitations ⇒ Limitations of the Tire Pressure Monitoring System .

Regularly check the tire pressure when the tires are cold and always maintain the specified pressures as stated on the tire inflation pressure label for the
tires fitted on the vehicle ⇒ Checking the tire pressure .

Check the tires regularly for signs of wear or damage and replace worn or damaged tires immediately.

Never exceed the maximum permissible speed and tire load specified for the tires fitted to your vehicle.

WARNING

Driving with too low a tire inflation pressure could cause the tire to become so hot that the tread could separate, the tire could rupture, and you could lose control
of the vehicle.

Tire pressure that is too high or too low shortens the service life of the tire and affects driving behavior.

Different tire pressures or low tire pressures can increase tire wear, decrease vehicle stability, increase braking distance, and result in tire damage, tire failure
and loss of vehicle control.

This can cause serious accidents and fatal injuries.

Always pay attention to the warnings given by the Tire Pressure Monitoring System. If the indicator light turns on, stop the vehicle immediately where
it is safe to do so and check all tires ⇒ Checking the tire pressure .

The driver is responsible for maintaining the correct tire pressure. Regularly check the tire pressure when the tires are cold and always maintain the
specified pressures as stated on the tire inflation pressure label for the tires fitted on the vehicle ⇒ Checking the tire pressure . The Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (TPMS) can only function correctly when all tires are inflated to the correct pressure when they are cold.

If the tire is not “flat” and the tire does not need to be replaced immediately, drive slowly to the nearest authorized Volkswagen dealer or authorized
Volkswagen Service Facility to have the tire pressure checked and corrected ⇒ Checking the tire pressure . Volkswagen recommends contacting an
authorized Volkswagen dealer or authorized Volkswagen Service Facility.

Always set up the Tire Pressure Monitoring System correctly .

WARNING

Excessive speeds and vehicle overloading can cause overheating, sudden tire damage (including tire blow-outs) and separation of the tread.

This can cause accidents and fatal injuries.

Never exceed the maximum load for the tires fitted ⇒ Tire labeling and tire classifications .

Never exceed the maximum permitted speed for the tires fitted ⇒ Tire labeling and tire classifications .

Low tire pressure increases fuel consumption and tire wear.

New tires may expand slightly the first time they are driven at high speeds, which can trigger a tire pressure warning.

Only replace old tires with tires that have been approved by Volkswagen for the vehicle model.

Do not rely on the Tire Pressure Monitoring System alone. Inspect the tires regularly to make sure the tire pressure is correct and check the tires for any signs of
damage, such as punctures. Remove any objects stuck in the tire tread as long as they have not punctured the inside of the tire.

Limitations of the Tire Pressure Monitoring System


306
Regular Maintenance

The Tire Pressure Monitoring System is not intended to replace regular inspection and maintenance of the tires. The driver is responsible for ensuring that the
correct tire pressure is used at all times, even if the Tire Pressure Monitoring System is not showing a warning that the tire pressure is too low.

The tire pressure of all tires must be checked once a month when the tires are cold and must correspond to the vehicle manufacturer's specifications on the tire
inflation pressure label.

This also applies to the tire pressure of the spare wheel or compact spare wheel.

The recommended tire pressure for the tires installed at the factory is specified on the tire inflation pressure label ⇒ Checking the tire pressure .

Unresolved Malfunctions

If the Tire Pressure Monitoring System displays a malfunction, the tire pressure cannot be monitored correctly. A malfunction in the Tire Pressure Monitoring System
can have a number of causes, e.g. a wheel or a tire being replaced. After replacing a wheel or tire, you must check whether the indicator light displays a system
malfunction to make sure that the Tire Pressure Monitoring System is working properly ⇒ Troubleshooting the Tire Pressure Monitoring System .

Sporty driving

The Tire Pressure Monitoring System may be delayed or not be displayed at all when driving with a sporty style, on winter or unpaved roads, or when driving with
snow chains.

Calibrating the Tire Pressure Monitoring System


The Tire Pressure Monitoring System must be recalibrated under the following conditions:

If the tire pressures were adjusted.

If one or more wheels were changed.

If one or more wheels were repaired.

If the wheels were rotated, for example from front to rear.

The Tire Pressure Monitoring System must only be recalibrated if all tires are inflated to the correct pressure when they are cold. In order to measure the tire
pressure on cold tires, the vehicle must be left to stand for 3 hours or only be driven slowly over short distances during this time.
After being warned about a low tire pressure, switch the ignition off and back on. The Tire Pressure Monitoring System can only be recalibrated after this is
done.

1. Switch the ignition on.

2. Switch the Infotainment system on.

3. Tap Vehicle in the Infotainment system.

4. Tap Vehicle (left-hand side).

5. Tap Tires .

6. Tap SET .

7. If all four tires meet the required tire pressure values, tap OK .

After travel times of at least 20 minutes and at different vehicle speeds, the system adapts to the new values and monitors them.

WARNING

If the Tire Pressure Monitoring System has been calibrated with a tire pressure that is too high or low, the Tire Pressure Monitoring System may give false
warnings or fail to give a warning when the tire pressure is dangerously low.

Ensure that the tire pressure is correct on all wheels before calibrating the Tire Pressure Monitoring System.

Troubleshooting the Tire Pressure Monitoring System


Tire pressure low

The yellow indicator light turns on.

The tire pressure of one or more tires has decreased or the tire is structurally damaged.

1. Stop the vehicle immediately where it is safe to do so.

2. Check the tires for visible damage.

3. If there is no visible damage on the tires, drive at reduced speed to the nearest gas station and check the tire pressure. Adjust it if necessary.

4. If one of the tires is damaged, change the damaged wheel ⇒ Wheel change. If necessary, contact an authorized Volkswagen dealer or authorized Volkswagen
Service Facility for assistance.

Or: seal the damaged tire using the tire mobility set and inflate it with air ⇒ Tire mobility set.

5. Recalibrate the Tire Pressure Monitoring System ⇒ How the Tire Pressure Monitoring System Works .
307
6. If the malfunction persists, contact a suitably qualified professional. Volkswagen recommends contacting an authorized Volkswagen dealer or authorized
Volkswagen Service Facility.

Tire Pressure Monitoring System malfunction

The yellow indicator light flashes for approximately one minute and then stays on.

There is a system malfunction.

1. Do not continue driving!

2. Switch the ignition off and back on again.

3. Recalibrate the Tire Pressure Monitoring System ⇒ How the Tire Pressure Monitoring System Works .

4. If the malfunction persists, contact a suitably qualified professional. Volkswagen recommends contacting an authorized Volkswagen dealer or authorized
Volkswagen Service Facility.

Driving on unpaved roads for a long period of time or sporty driving can deactivate the Tire Pressure Monitoring System temporarily. If there is a malfunction,
the indicator light flashes for approximately one minute and then stays on. However, the indicator light will turn off if the road conditions or driving style
changes.

Wheel change
Introduction
Only change the wheel yourself if the vehicle is parked securely, you are familiar with the safety precautions and the necessary procedures and you have the
necessary tools. Some vehicles are delivered from the factory without a vehicle jack and lug wrench. In such cases, have the wheel changed by an authorized
Volkswagen dealer or authorized Volkswagen Service Facility. Volkswagen recommends contacting an authorized Volkswagen dealer or authorized Volkswagen
Service Facility.

The vehicle jack supplied by the factory is only designed for changing one wheel that has a damaged tire and must be replaced. If both tires on one side of the
vehicle, both tires on one axle, or all tires are damaged, contact an authorized Volkswagen dealer or authorized Volkswagen Service Facility for assistance.
Volkswagen recommends contacting an authorized Volkswagen dealer or authorized Volkswagen Service Facility.

You must carry out the following steps to change a wheel.

1. Prepare the vehicle for the wheel change ⇒ Preparing Your Vehicle.

2. Depending on the vehicle and vehicle equipment, remove the subwoofer ⇒ Removing and Installing the Subwoofer .

3. Take out the spare wheel ⇒ Removing the spare wheel or compact spare wheel .

4. Remove the wheel hub cover or wheel bolt caps ⇒ Removing and Fitting Wheel Hub Covers , ⇒ Removing and Fitting Hubcaps, ⇒ Removing and Fitting the
Wheel Bolt Caps.

5. Loosen the wheel bolts ⇒ Loosening wheel bolts.

6. Jack up the car ⇒ Raising the vehicle with the vehicle jack .

7. Remove the damaged wheel and fit the spare wheel or compact spare wheel ⇒ Changing a wheel .

WARNING

It can be dangerous to change a wheel at the roadside.

If the vehicle and work area are not secured properly, serious accidents and fatal injuries may occur.

Only carry out the wheel change yourself if you are familiar with the necessary steps. Instead, seek assistance from an authorized Volkswagen dealer or
authorized Volkswagen Service Facility. Volkswagen recommends contacting an authorized Volkswagen dealer or authorized Volkswagen Service
Facility.

Stop the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so.

Park the vehicle a safe distance from moving traffic.

Always switch off the engine and move the selector lever to the P position to reduce the risk of the vehicle moving unintentionally.

With a manual transmission, leave the vehicle in gear to reduce the risk of the vehicle moving unintentionally.

Set the electronic parking brake.

Move all passengers, particularly children, to a safe distance away from the working area on the side facing away from moving traffic.

Switch on the emergency flashers to warn other road users and set up the warning triangle.

Only jack up the vehicle on level, firm ground. Sloped or soft ground can cause the vehicle to slip off the jack. If necessary, place a large, stable surface
under the jack.

If you are on a slippery surface such as tile, place a non-slippery object such as a rubber mat on the ground to prevent the jack from slipping.

Only use suitable and undamaged tools for wheel changes.

After changing a wheel, immediately check the tightening torque of the wheel bolts with an undamaged torque wrench that is functioning correctly.
308
If your vehicle is equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System, you must recalibrate the system immediately after a wheel is changed ⇒ How the
Tire Pressure Monitoring System Works.

Preparing Your Vehicle


Please read the introductory information and heed the Warnings and Notice ⇒ Introduction.

Checklist
Always perform the following steps in the specified order to prepare for a wheel change ⇒ :

1. Park the vehicle a safe distance from moving traffic. Observe all important information on parking when doing so ⇒ Parking. The ground must be level and firm.
Sloped or soft ground can cause the vehicle to slip off the jack. If necessary, place a large, stable surface under the vehicle jack.

2. Switch on the emergency flashers ⇒ Bottom section of the center console .

3. Have all vehicle occupants exit the vehicle on the side facing away from traffic and move to a safe area, such as behind a guard rail. Follow the local regulations
regarding wearing a reflective vest.

4. Set up the warning triangle to warn others on the road about the vehicle.

5. Adjust the steering wheel so that the wheels are not pointing straight forward.

6. Block the tire that is diagonal from the one you will be changing with a stone, chocks, or another suitable object.

7. If the luggage compartment is full: remove the contents from the luggage compartment.

8. Depending on the vehicle and vehicle equipment, remove the subwoofer ⇒ Removing and Installing the Subwoofer .

9. Remove the collapsible spare wheel, full-size spare wheel or compact spare wheel and the vehicle tool kit from the luggage compartment.

WARNING

Failing to heed this checklist that is provided for your own safety can cause accidents and serious injuries.

Always follow the tasks in the checklist.

Observe the general safety precautions.

Removing and Installing the Subwoofer


Please read the introductory information and heed the Warnings and Notice ⇒ Introduction.
The subwoofer must be removed before the spare wheel can be removed.

Removing the subwoofer (version 1)

Fig. 175 In the luggage compartment: removing the subwoofer (version 1).

1. Open the trunk lid.

2. Lift up or remove the luggage compartment floor.

3. To release the connector, press the fig. 175 lugs together (arrows ).

4. Remove the connector fig. 175 in the direction of the arrow and set the removed wire to the side.

5. Unscrew the handwheel fig. 175 in the direction of the arrow.


309
6. Lift the subwoofer out carefully.

Installing the subwoofer (version 1)


1. Place the subwoofer carefully in the rim well. The point of the “FRONT” arrow symbol on the subwoofer must face forward.

2. Push the connector fig. 175 in until you hear it click into place.

3. Turn the handwheel fig. 175 on the threaded pin in the opposite direction to the arrow until the subwoofer is securely fastened.

4. Reinsert the luggage compartment floor or fold back down.

5. Close the trunk lid.

Removing the subwoofer (version 2)

Fig. 176 In the luggage compartment: removing the subwoofer (version 2).

1. Open the trunk lid.

2. Lift the variable luggage compartment floor until it can be held by the side retainers.

3. Unscrew the handwheel fig. 176 in the direction of the arrow.

4. To release the connector, press the locking mechanism on the end of the connector fig. 176.

5. Remove the connector in the direction of the arrow and set the removed wire to the side.

6. Lift the subwoofer out carefully.

Installing the subwoofer (version 2)


1. Place the subwoofer carefully in the rim well. The point of the “FRONT” fig. 176 arrow symbol on the subwoofer must face forward

2. Connect the connector until the lock fig. 176 latches into place.

3. Turn the handwheel fig. 176 on the threaded pin in the opposite direction to the arrow until the subwoofer is securely fastened.

4. Place the variable luggage compartment floor on the floor cover.

5. Close the trunk lid.

Removing the spare wheel or compact spare wheel


Please read the introductory information and heed the Warnings and Notice ⇒ Introduction.

310
Fig. 177 In the luggage compartment: Handle to secure the spare wheel or compact spare wheel.

Removing the spare wheel or compact spare wheel


1. Open the trunk lid.

2. Lift up or remove the luggage compartment floor.

3. If present, lift up and remove the carpet.

4. Remove the vehicle tool kit with the container.

5. Depending on the vehicle equipment: remove the subwoofer ⇒ Removing and Installing the Subwoofer .

6. Turn the handwheel in the center of the spare wheel or compact spare wheel fig. 177 all the way counterclockwise.

7. Remove the spare wheel or compact spare wheel.

Stowing the removed tire


1. If the removed wheel fits in the spare wheel well: place the removed wheel into the spare wheel well with front side of the rim facing down so that the center hole
on the rim is directly above the hole or the threaded pin.

If the removed wheel does not fit in the spare wheel well, the wheel must be securely stowed in the luggage compartment on the luggage compartment floor.

2. Turn the handwheel clockwise on the threaded pin until the removed wheel is securely fastened.

3. Place the vehicle tool kit back in the container and store it securely.

4. Place the carpet (if there is one) in the luggage compartment.

5. Reinsert the luggage compartment floor.

6. Close the trunk lid.

If the spare wheel is different from the regular tires

If the spare wheel is different from the regular wheels, then the spare wheel must only be used in the event of a vehicle breakdown and only for a short period of
time ⇒ .

Note the driver information:

Do not drive faster than 80 km/h (50 mph).

Avoid hard acceleration, heavy braking, and fast cornering.

Do not use snow chains on the compact spare wheel ⇒ Snow chains.

After installing the spare wheel or compact spare wheel, check the tire pressure as soon as possible ⇒ Checking the tire pressure .

The tire pressure of the spare wheel or compact spare wheel must be checked every time the tire pressure of the regular wheels is taken, or at least once a month.
The tire pressure of the spare wheel or compact spare wheel when the tires are cold must correspond to the details on the tire pressure label ⇒ Checking the tire
pressure

Installation of the compact spare wheel for R-models

The installation of the spare wheel on the front axle is not permitted for technical reasons. For a front-wheel tire:

1. Remove the rear wheel on the side of the damaged front wheel.

2. Install the compact spare wheel on the rear axle.

3. Replace the damaged front wheel with the removed rear wheel.
311
WARNING

Incorrect handling of the spare wheel or compact spare wheel can result in loss of vehicle control and serious accidents or fatal injuries.

Never use the spare wheel or compact spare wheel if it is damaged or if it is worn down to the wear indicator.

If the spare wheel is different from the regular wheels or you are using a compact spare wheel, never drive faster than 80 km/h (50 mph).

Some vehicles may be equipped with a compact spare wheel instead of a spare wheel. The compact spare wheel can be identified by a label stating
“80 km/h” or “50 mph”. This label indicates the permitted maximum speed at which the tire may be driven. Do not cover the sticker while the wheel is in
use.

Never drive more than 200 km (125 miles) with a temporary compact spare wheel fitted to the drive axle.

Avoid hard acceleration, hard braking, and driving fast around curves.

Replace the compact spare wheel as soon as possible with a regular wheel. The spare wheel is only intended for short-term use.

Always secure the compact spare wheel with the wheel bolts supplied by the factory.

Never drive with more than one compact spare wheel.

Never drive with more than one spare wheel that differs from the regular tires.

After mounting the spare wheel or compact spare wheel, check the tire pressure as soon as possible ⇒ Checking the tire pressure .

Do not use snow chains on the compact spare wheel.

Removing and Fitting Hubcaps


Please read the introductory information and heed the Warnings and Notice ⇒ Introduction.

Removing Hubcaps

Fig. 178 Remove the hubcap.

The wheel center trim is for protecting the wheel bolts and must be reattached after a wheel change.

1. Take the extraction hook out of the vehicle toolkit ⇒ Vehicle tool kit components and insert it into a hole (alloy wheel) or hook it onto the edge (steel wheel) of
the hubcap fig. 178.

2. Remove the trim in the direction of the arrow fig. 178.

Fitting Hubcaps
1. Press the hubcap centrally onto the rim and press it against the rim until it you feel it engage.

WARNING

Unsuitable wheel covers and assembling wheel covers incorrectly can cause accidents and serious injuries.

Wheel covers that are installed incorrectly can loosen while driving and endanger other road users.

Do not use damaged hubcaps.

Check whether the hubcap is securely engaged all the way around.

312
WARNING

Hubcaps that are installed incorrectly can cause the air supply for cooling the brakes to be interrupted or reduced. This also applies when wheel covers are
retrofitted. An insufficient air supply can cause the braking distance to increase significantly.

This can cause accidents and fatal injuries.

Check whether the hubcap is securely engaged all the way around.

Removing and Fitting Wheel Hub Covers


Please read the introductory information and heed the Warnings and Notice ⇒ Introduction.

Removing wheel hub covers

Fig. 179 Remove the wheel hub cover.

The full wheel covers protect the wheel bolts and must be reattached after a wheel change.

1. Take the extraction hook out of the vehicle tool kit ⇒ Vehicle tool kit components.

2. Engage the extraction hook in one of the openings on the wheel hub cover.

3. Remove the wheel hub cover with extraction hook in the direction of the arrow. If necessary, use a lug wrench for removal fig. 179.

Installing the full wheel cover


1. Make sure the anti-theft wheel bolts are positioned correctly ⇒ Changing a wheel .

2. Press the full wheel cover onto the rim so that the opening for the valve aligns with the tire valve. Make sure that the entire outer edge of the cover is secured.

WARNING

Unsuitable wheel covers and assembling wheel covers incorrectly can cause accidents and serious injuries.

Wheel covers that are installed incorrectly can loosen while driving and endanger other road users.

Do not use damaged hubcaps.

Check whether the wheel hub cover is securely engaged all the way around.

WARNING

Hubcaps that are installed incorrectly can cause the air supply for cooling the brakes to be interrupted or reduced. This also applies when wheel covers are
retrofitted. An insufficient air supply can cause the braking distance to increase significantly.

This can cause accidents and fatal injuries.

Check whether the cut-out for the tire valve in the wheel hub cover is in the right position.

Check whether the wheel hub cover is securely engaged all the way around.

NOTICE

313
The wheel hub cover might be screwed on tightly and may be damaged if it is pulled off.

Do not use force to remove tightly screwed wheel hub covers.

Removing and Fitting the Wheel Bolt Caps


Please read the introductory information and heed the Warnings and Notice ⇒ Introduction.

Removing the Caps

Fig. 180 Remove the caps from the wheel bolts.

The caps are for protecting the wheel bolts and must be completely reattached after a wheel change.

1. Take the extraction hook out of the vehicle tool kit ⇒ Vehicle tool kit components.

2. Insert the extraction hook into the opening in the cap.

3. Remove the cap with extraction hook in the direction of the arrow fig. 180.

Putting on Caps
1. Push the cap all the way onto the wheel bolts.

The anti-theft wheel bolt has a separate cap. This cap only fits on the anti-theft wheel bolt and not on conventional wheel bolts.

Loosening wheel bolts


Please read the introductory information and heed the Warnings and Notice ⇒ Introduction.

Fig. 181 Changing a tire: loosening the wheel bolts.

314
Use a suitable lug wrench to loosen the wheel bolts.

Only loosen the wheel bolts a few turns while the vehicle is not raised with the vehicle jack.

1. Slide the lug wrench all the way onto the wheel bolt.

2. Hold the end of the lug wrench and turn the wheel bolt about one turn counterclockwise ⇒ .
If a wheel bolt cannot be loosened, carefully press on the end of the lug wrench using your foot. Hold onto the vehicle firmly while doing this and make sure
you have secure footing.

Loosening anti-theft wheel bolts


1. Remove the adapter for anti-theft wheel bolts from the vehicle tool kit.

2. Slide the adapter all the way onto the anti-theft wheel bolt.

3. Slide the lug wrench all the way onto the adapter.

4. Hold the end of the lug wrench and turn the wheel bolt about one turn counterclockwise ⇒ .
If a wheel bolt cannot be loosened, carefully press on the end of the lug wrench using your foot. Hold onto the vehicle firmly while doing this and make sure
you have secure footing.

WARNING

If the wheel bolts are removed or loosened by more than one rotation before the vehicle is jacked up, the wheel could fall off and the vehicle might tip.

This can result in serious injuries.

Only loosen the wheel bolts about one turn while the vehicle is not lifted with the jack.

Never place any part of your body, such as your arm, under the vehicle while you loosen the wheel bolts.

Raising the vehicle with the vehicle jack


Please read the introductory information and heed the Warnings and Notice ⇒ Introduction.

Lift points

Fig. 182 Mounting points for the vehicle jack.

Fig. 183 Lift points for the jack: embossed marking, protruding marking.

315
The vehicle jack must only be positioned at the reinforced areas on the underbody that are located behind the markings on the vehicle body fig. 182. The marking
may be embossed fig. 183 or protruding . Do not mistake lift points for the jack for other components, e.g. fastening clips. Always use the lift point that is
nearest to the wheel you are changing ⇒ .

Positioning the vehicle jack

Fig. 184 Correct jack setup.

Fig. 185 Jack is positioned on the left side of the vehicle at the rear.

Checklist
For your own safety, follow the points below in the order they are given ⇒ :

1. Position the hand crank in the mount on the jack.

2. Find the vehicle lift point fig. 182 under the vehicle that is closest to the wheel you will be changing.

3. Crank the jack upward so that it is still positioned under the vehicle lift point.

4. Make sure the entire base of the jack is seated securely on the ground and that the base of the jack is located exactly directly below the lift point fig. 184 and
fig. 185.

5. Straighten the jack and continue cranking the claw on the top of the jack upward until the claw is positioned on the jacking point under the vehicle fig. 185.

6. Continue raising the vehicle jack until the wheel is lifted off the ground.

WARNING

Failing to heed this checklist that is provided for your own safety can cause accidents and serious injuries.

Always follow the tasks in the checklist.

316
Observe the general safety precautions.

WARNING

Using the vehicle jack incorrectly can result in the vehicle slipping from the jack and cause serious or fatal injuries.

Never raise the vehicle if more than one tire is damaged.

Never jack up the vehicle when the engine is running.

Never allow the engine to be started if the vehicle is raised. Engine vibrations could cause the vehicle to fall off the jack.

Only place the vehicle jack at the lift points described. The bracket on the vehicle jack must firmly grip the sill fig. 185.

Only use jacks that are approved by Volkswagen for the vehicle. Other vehicle jacks, including those approved for other Volkswagen models, could slip.

Only jack up the vehicle on level, firm ground. Sloped or soft ground can cause the vehicle to slip off the jack. If necessary, place a large, stable surface
under the jack.

If you are on a slippery surface such as tile, place a non-slippery object such as a rubber mat on the ground to prevent the jack from slipping.

Never place any part of your body, such as your arm, under the vehicle when it is supported only by the jack. If you must work underneath the vehicle,
additionally support the vehicle securely with suitable stands.

Changing a wheel
Please read the introductory information and heed the Warnings and Notice ⇒ Introduction.

Removing a wheel

Fig. 186 Wheel change: removing wheel bolts with the lug wrench.

1. Follow the checklist ⇒ Preparing Your Vehicle.

2. Loosen the wheel bolts ⇒ Loosening wheel bolts.

3. Raise the vehicle ⇒ Raising the vehicle with the vehicle jack .

4. Remove loose wheel bolts completely using the lug wrench fig. 186 and place the bolts on a clean surface.

5. Remove the wheel.

Installing a spare wheel or compact spare wheel

317
Fig. 187 Changing a tire: tire valve and locations of the anti-theft wheel bolt or .

1. Note the running direction of the tire ⇒ Tire labeling and tire classifications .

2. For R-models: Only install the spare wheel on the rear axle ⇒ Removing the spare wheel or compact spare wheel .

3. Position the wheel.

4. Install the anti-theft wheel bolt clockwise using the adapter in the correct position and lightly tighten.

On wheels with full wheel covers, the anti-theft wheel bolt must be fitted in position fig. 187 or , based on the position of the tire valve . Otherwise, it
will not be possible to install the full wheel cover.

5. Screw in the other wheel bolts clockwise, tightening them slightly.

6. Lower the vehicle with the vehicle jack.

7. Tighten all wheel bolts securely clockwise using the lug wrench ⇒ . Do not go in order around the wheel while doing this, but rather always switch to a
wheel bolt on the opposite side.

8. Fit the caps or hubcap ⇒ Removing and Fitting Wheel Hub Covers , ⇒ Removing and Fitting Hubcaps, ⇒ Removing and Fitting the Wheel Bolt Caps .

After a wheel change


1. Clean the vehicle tool kit and place it back in the foam piece in the luggage compartment.

2. Stow the old wheel securely in the luggage compartment.

3. Get the tightening torque of the wheel bolts checked as soon as possible at the nearest authorized Volkswagen dealer or authorized Volkswagen Service
Facility. Volkswagen recommends contacting an authorized Volkswagen dealer or authorized Volkswagen Service Facility.

4. Get the damaged tires replaced as soon as possible.

Wheel bolt tightening specification


Tightening specification for wheel bolts in steel and aluminum alloy rims:

140 Nm (103 ft-lbs) .

Wheel bolts that are corroded and difficult to turn must be replaced and the threads in the wheel hub must be cleaned before checking the tightening torque.

Never grease or oil the wheel bolts and the threads in the wheel hub.

Check the tightening torque using a functioning torque wrench immediately after changing a wheel.

WARNING

If the wheel bolts are not tightened enough to meet the specification, the wheel bolts and the wheel could come loose while driving. Exceeding the tightening
specification could damage the wheel bolts and threads.

Wheel bolts that are tightened incorrectly or missing could cause you to lose control of the vehicle and lead to serious accidents and fatal injuries.

Always tighten the wheel bolts to the correct tightening torque. If you do not have a torque wrench, tighten the wheel bolts with the lug wrench and then
have the tightening torque checked as soon as possible by suitably qualified professionals. Volkswagen recommends contacting an authorized
Volkswagen dealer or authorized Volkswagen Service Facility.

Never drive with missing or loose wheel bolts.

Always use wheel bolts that are correct for the rim and the vehicle model.

Never grease or oil the wheel bolts and the threads in the wheel hub. Even when tightened to the specification, they could become loose while driving.

Ensure the wheel bolts and threads in the wheel hubs are clean, easy to move and free of oil and grease.

Never loosen the bolts on rims with a bolted rim ring.

318
WARNING

Incorrect wheel bolts can loosen while driving and cause loss of vehicle control, serious accidents, and fatal injuries.

Always use wheel bolts that are correct for the rim and the vehicle model.

Never use different wheel bolts.

The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) indicator light may indicate a system malfunction after a wheel is changed ⇒ Troubleshooting the Tire Pressure
Monitoring System .

Tire mobility set


Introduction
The tire mobility set allows you to temporarily and reliably seal tire damage caused by foreign bodies or punctures of up to around 4 mm in diameter. Do not remove
the foreign body, such as a screw, from the tire!

After the sealant has filled the tire, check and adjust the tire pressure again after a drive of approximately 10 minutes.

If more than one vehicle tired is damaged, seek advice from an authorized Volkswagen dealer or authorized Volkswagen Service Facility. The tire mobility set is
only designed to fill one tire.

Only use the tire mobility set when the vehicle is safely parked and you are confident of the necessaries skills and safety precautions! Otherwise, contact an
authorized Volkswagen dealer or authorized Volkswagen Service Facility for assistance.

Do not use the tire sealant:


When the wheel rim is damaged.

In outside temperatures of below -20 °C (-4 °F).

When cuts or punctures to the tire are larger than 4 mm.

If you have driven with a very low tire pressure or an empty tire.

If the tire filler bottle is past its use-by date.

If a foreign body has been removed from the tire.

In combination with an AirStop® tire. You can tell if your vehicle is equipped with AirStop® tires by the lettering “Seal” on the outside of the tire.

WARNING

It can be dangerous to use the tire mobility set at the roadside.

If the vehicle and work area are not secured properly, serious accidents and fatal injuries may occur.

Only use the tire mobility set yourself if you are familiar with the necessary steps. Instead, seek assistance from an authorized Volkswagen dealer or
authorized Volkswagen Service Facility. Volkswagen recommends contacting an authorized Volkswagen dealer or authorized Volkswagen Service
Facility.

Stop the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so.

Park the vehicle a safe distance from moving traffic ⇒ Securing yourself and the vehicle , ⇒ Parking.

Make sure the vehicle is on level and solid ground.

All passengers, especially children, must keep a safe distance and be clear of the work area.

Switch on the emergency flashers to warn other road users and set up the warning triangle.

When using the tire mobility set, never raise the vehicle using a jack, even if the jack is approved for the vehicle.

WARNING

A tire filled with sealant does not have the same driving characteristics as an undamaged tire.

Over-stressing a sealed tire may result in serious accidents and fatal injuries.

Never drive faster than 80 km/h (50 mph).

Avoid hard acceleration, hard braking, and driving fast around curves.

Drive at a maximum of 80 km/h (50 mph) for no more than 10 minutes and then check the tire.

Tires sealed with the tire mobility set should be replaced immediately. The tire mobility set is only intended for emergency use in order to reach the
nearest authorized Volkswagen dealer or authorized Volkswagen Service Facility. Volkswagen recommends contacting an authorized Volkswagen dealer
or authorized Volkswagen Service Facility.

319
CAUTION

The sealing agent can be harmful if it comes into contact with your skin.

If the sealing agent comes into contact with your skin, clean it off immediately with a cloth or other suitable item.

Store the tire mobility set out of the reach of children.

Dispose of used or out-of-date sealant in accordance with statutory requirements.

Your authorized Volkswagen dealer or authorized Volkswagen Service Facility can provide you with a new tire inflation bottle. Volkswagen recommends
contacting an authorized Volkswagen dealer or authorized Volkswagen Service Facility.

Read the separate operating instructions provided by the tire mobility set manufacturer.

Preparing Your Vehicle


Please read the introductory information and heed the Warnings and Notice ⇒ and Introduction.

Checklist
Always carry out the following tasks in the specified order → .

1. Park your vehicle a safe distance from traffic and on level and firm ground. Observe all important information on parking when doing so ⇒ Parking.

2. Switch on the emergency flashers ⇒ Bottom section of the center console .

3. Have all vehicle occupants exit the vehicle on the side facing away from traffic and move to a safe area, such as behind a guard rail. Follow the local regulations
regarding wearing a reflective vest.

4. Set up the warning triangle to warn others on the road about the vehicle.

5. Check whether a repair with the tire mobility set is possible ⇒ Introduction.

6. If the luggage compartment is full: remove the contents from the luggage compartment.

7. Remove the tire mobility set from the luggage compartment.

8. Do not remove the foreign body, e.g. screw, from the tire.

WARNING

Failing to heed this checklist that is provided for your own safety can cause accidents and serious injuries.

Always follow the tasks in the checklist.

Observe the general safety precautions.

Sealing and pumping up tires


Please read the introductory information and heed the Warnings and Notice ⇒ and Introduction.

Sealing tires

The tire mobility set is located in the luggage compartment under the luggage compartment floor.

320
Fig. 188 Tire mobility set components (general example).

Tire inflation bottle with tire filler hose and sealant.

Label with the speed specification “max. 80 km/h” or “max. 50 mph”.

Compressor.

Air drain plug

Tire inflation hose

Tire pressure gauge

ON and OFF switch (may also be located on the side of the compressor).

12 V cable connector
The compressor from the tire mobility set may be operated at the 12 V socket, even if the power specification on the compressor label exceeds the maximum
power draw of the socket.

Instead of the air drain plug, there may also be a button on the compressor.

1. Stick the label from the tire mobility set fig. 188 in the field of vision of the driver on the instrument panel.

2. Unscrew the valve cap from the tire valve.

3. Shake the tire inflation bottle fig. 188 vigorously back and forth a few times.

4. Screw the compressor tire inflation hose fig. 188 securely onto the tire inflation bottle fig. 188 valve.

5. Screw the tire inflation hose of the tire inflation bottle fig. 188 securely onto the tire valve.

6. Hold the bottle upside down and fit the top of the tire inflation bottle into the notch on the compressor fig. 188 .

7. Place the compressor fig. 188 together with the tire inflation bottle fig. 188 on an even surface.

8. Start the vehicle's engine and let it run.

9. Insert the 12-volt plug fig. 188 into a 12-volt-socket in the vehicle ⇒ Sockets in the vehicle .

10. Switch the compressor on with the ON and OFF switch fig. 188 .

11. Leave the compressor running until 2.0 – 2.5 bar (29 – 36 psi/200 – 250 kPa) is reached. Maximum run time: 8 minutes ⇒ .

12. Switch off the compressor.

If a tire pressure of 2.0 – 2.5 bar (29 – 36 psi/200 – 250 kPa) cannot be reached
1. Unscrew the tire inflation hose of the tire inflation bottle from the tire valve.

2. Drive the vehicle around 10 m (approx. 33 ft) forward or backward so that the sealing agent is distributed in the tire.

3. Screw the compressor tire inflation hose directly onto the tire valve and repeat the inflation process.

4. If the required tire pressure still cannot be achieved, the tire is too badly damaged. The tire cannot be sealed with the tire mobility set. Do not continue driving
. Contact an authorized Volkswagen dealer or authorized Volkswagen Service Facility for assistance.

Continuing Your Journey


1. Disconnect the compressor and unscrew the tire inflation hose from the tire valve.

2. Immediately drive at a maximum of 80 km/h (50 mph), if a tire pressure of 2.0 – 2.5 bar (29 – 36 psi/200 – 250 kPa) has been reached.

321
3. After driving for ten minutes, check the tire pressure.

Check after 10 minutes of driving


1. Park the vehicle on level and solid ground at the next safe opportunity, in a parking lot for example.

2. Connect the tire filler hose fig. 188 again and read the tire pressure off the tire pressure gauge fig. 188 .

1.3 bar (19 psi/130 kPa) and less:


1. Do not continue driving! The tire cannot be adequately sealed with the tire mobility set ⇒ . Contact an authorized Volkswagen dealer or authorized
Volkswagen Service Facility for assistance.

20 psi/140 kPa (1.4 bar) and above:


1. Readjust the tire pressure to the correct value.

2. Carefully drive to the nearest authorized Volkswagen dealer or authorized Volkswagen Service Facility at a maximum of 80 km/h (50 mph). Volkswagen
recommends contacting an authorized Volkswagen dealer or authorized Volkswagen Service Facility.

3. Have the damaged tire replaced at an authorized Volkswagen dealer or authorized Volkswagen Service Facility. Volkswagen recommends contacting an
authorized Volkswagen dealer or authorized Volkswagen Service Facility.

WARNING

The tire inflation hose and the compressor may become hot during pumping and can cause burns if touched.

Protect your hands and skin from hot parts.

Do not place the hot tire inflation hose or compressor on flammable materials.

Allow the tire inflation hose and compressor to cool before you put them away.

WARNING

If the damaged tire cannot be adequately sealed with the tire mobility set, the tire will lose air while driving.

This could cause tire failure, loss of vehicle control, accidents, and serious injuries and death.

If the tire cannot be pumped to at least 2.0 bar (29 psi/200 kPa), the damage is too great. The sealing agent cannot seal the tire. Do not continue driving
and instead seek professional assistance.

Do not continue driving if the tire pressure is 1.3 bar (19 psi/130 kPa) or less after 10 minutes of driving. Instead, seek professional assistance.

NOTICE

The compressor can overheat and become damaged if it is used for too long.

Switch the compressor off after it has been running for eight minutes at the most.

Allow the compressor to cool down for several minutes before switching it on again.

Tire characteristics
Tire labeling and tire classifications

322
Fig. 189 International tire labeling.

fig. 189Tire labeling (example), meaning

Product name Individual manufacturer tire designation.

The tire conforms to the legal requirements of the Department of


DOT
Transportation in the USA, which is responsible for tire safety standards.

Tire identification number (TIN – may only be on the inner side of the tire) and
production date:

Code for the factory that produced the tire and


JHCO CHWS 2213
JHCO CHWS specifications from the tire manufacturer for the tire
size and tire characteristics.

2213 Production date: 22nd week in the year 2013.

Information for the end consumer about comparative values for specified base tires (standardized test procedures) ⇒ Customer information:

Relative service life expectancy for the tire, based on a US-specific standard
test. A tire with the specification 280 will wear 2.8 times more slowly than a
standard tire with a tread wear value of 100. The tire performance depends on
TREADWEAR 280
the usage conditions and may differ significantly from the standard values
depending on the driving behavior, maintenance, different road conditions, and
climate conditions.

Wet braking capability of the tire ( AA, A, B or C). The wet braking capability is
measured under controlled conditions on certified test courses. Tires marked
TRACTION AA with C have low traction performance. The traction value assigned to tires is
based on straight-line traction test and includes neither acceleration and
cornering, nor hydroplaning and traction under maximum load.

Temperature stability of the tire at high speeds on the test stand ( A, B or C).
Tires marked with A and B exceed the legal requirements. The temperature
TEMPERATURE A rating is based on the tires being inflated to the correct pressure and not
overinflated. Excess speed, incorrect tire pressure, and overinflation either
alone or in combination can cause heat to build up and cause tire damage.

323
fig. 189Tire labeling (example), meaning

88 H Load index and speed rating .

Rotation and arrow Tire running direction code .

Or: Outside Code on the outside of the tire .

MAX INFLATION 350 KPA (51 psi/3.51 bar) US limit for the maximum inflation pressure.

Code for tires that can be used in the winter (mud and snow tires) ⇒ Winter
M+S or M/S or
tires. Studded tires are marked with an E after the S.

TWI Indicates the location of the tread wear indicator ⇒ Monitoring the tread depth .

Brand name, logo Manufacturer.

Made in Germany Country of manufacture.

Country-specific code for China (China Compulsory Certification).

023 Country-specific code for Brazil.

Identification according to international regulations with the number of the


country that issued the approval. Approved tires in accordance with ECE
E4 e4 0200477-b
regulations are marked with an E. Tires in accordance with EU regulations are
marked with an e. The multi-digit approval number follows that.

RADIAL TUBELESS Tubeless radial tires.

Size designation:

P Code for passenger vehicles.

195 Tire width from one sidewall to the other in mm.

P 195 / 65 R 15 XL 65 Height and width ratio in %.

R Belt construction code for radial.

15 Rim diameter in inches.

XL Reinforced tires (“Extra Load”).

MAX LOAD 615 KG (1235 LBS) US load capacity for the maximum load per tire.

Specification for the components of the tire body.


SIDEWALL 1 PLY RAYON
1 layer rayon.

TREAD 4 PLIES Specification for the components of the running surface.

In the example, there are the following 4 layers under the running surface: 1
1 RAYON + 2 STEEL + 1 NYLON
rayon layer, 2 steel belts, and 1 nylon layer.

The labeling is on both sides of the tire. In some cases, certain codes may only be on one side of the tire, such as the tire ID number and the production date.

Other digits that may be present are part of the internal labeling from the tire manufacturer or country-specific labeling.

Low-profile tires

Compared to other tire-rim combinations, low-profile tires offer a wider tread surface and a larger rim diameter with shorter tire sidewalls. Low-profile tires improve
handling performance and precision. However, they may reduce the level of comfort when driving on roads in poor condition.

Unidirectional tires

The sidewalls on unidirectional tires are marked with arrows. The specified running direction must be followed. This ensures the optimum running characteristics.

If a tire is mounted opposite from the specified running direction, drive more carefully because the tire is not being used the way it was designed to be used. The tire
must be replaced or mounted in the correct running direction as soon as possible.

Asymmetrical tires

Asymmetrical tires factor in the behavior of the inner and outer areas of the tread pattern. The sidewalls on asymmetrical tires are marked as the inner and outer
side. Maintain the correct position of the tire on the rim.

324
Tire load

The tire load index indicates the maximum load of an individual tires in kilograms.

Some examples:

78 425 kg (936 lbs)

81 462 kg (1018 lbs)

83 487 kg (1073 lbs)

85 515 kg (1135 lbs)

87 545 kg (1201 lbs)

88 560 kg (1234 lbs)

91 615 kg (1355 lbs)

92 630 kg (1388 lbs)

93 650 kg (1433 lbs)

95 690 kg (1521 lbs)

97 730 kg (1609 lbs)

99 775 kg (1708 lbs)

100 800 kg (1763 lbs)

101 825 kg (1818 lbs)

102 850 kg (1873 lbs)

103 875 kg (1929 lbs)

104 900 kg (1984 lbs)

Speed rating

The speed rating indicates the maximum speed that may be driven with the tire.

P max. 150 km/h (93 mph)

Q max. 160 km/h (99 mph)

R max. 170 km/h (106 mph)

S max. 180 km/h (112 mph)

T max. 190 km/h (118 mph)

U max. 200 km/h (125 mph)

H max. 210 km/h (130 mph)

V max. 240 km/h (149 mph)

W max. 270 km/h (168 mph)

Y max. 300 km/h (186 mph)

Z above 240 km/h (149 mph), depending on manufacturer also ZR.

4) The TIN is the tire serial number.

UTQG tire classification


Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG): Quality grades can be found where applicable on the tire sidewall between the tread shoulder and maximum section width.
Example:

Treadwear (number)

Traction AA, A, B or C

Temperature A, B or C

For example: Treadwear 200, Traction AA, Temperature A.

All passenger car tires must conform to Federal Safety Requirements in addition to these grades.

Treadwear

325
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course.

For example, a tire graded 150 (Treadwear-value 150) would wear one-and-one-half (1 1/2) times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100.

The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving
habits, service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate.

Traction

The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. Those grades represent the tire's ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled
conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction performance.

Temperature

The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C representing the tire's resistance to the generation of heat, and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under
controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel.

Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure.

The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B
and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law.

WARNING

The traction class assigned to this tire is based on traction tests when braking straight ahead and does not take account of the properties when accelerating,
driving around curves, hydroplaning or at maximum traction.

WARNING

The temperature class for this tire is based on a tire being inflated to the correct pressure and not being overinflated. Excess speeds, insufficient tire pressure,
and overinflation either alone or in combination can cause heat to build up and cause potential tire failure.

Tire load and vehicle load, determining the correct load


Vehicles and tires have a limited load capacity. An overloaded vehicle is difficult to steer and brakes less effectively. Overloading your vehicle can also cause
damage to the vehicle and tires, such as tire blowouts and sudden pressure losses.

To ensure your safety and the safety of your passengers, never exceed the maximum vehicle weight. This is specified as the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
(GVWR).

The GVWR includes the weight of your vehicle including all additional equipment, a full fuel tank, all fluids and its maximum load. The maximum load includes the
number of people that can travel in the vehicle (number of seats) with an average weight of 150 lbs (68 kg) per person, and also luggage. In trailer mode, the weight
of the trailer and the trailer tongue weight rating must be included in calculations.

The Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) is the maximum axle load per axle. The GVWR and GAWR are listed on the safety certificate on the B-pillar on the
driver's side.

Your vehicle has either 4 (2 front, 2 rear), 5 (2 front, 3 rear), 6 (2 front, 2 center, 2 rear) or 7 (2 front, 3 center, 2 rear) seats, depending on the type of vehicle. Each
seat has a safety belt. As there is an upper limit to the GVWR, the maximum load also has an upper limit. Traveling with a full vehicle or with passengers heavier
than 150 lbs (68 kg) per person will reduce the remaining possible load.

The tire inflation pressure label for your vehicle also specifies the maximum weight.

Determining the correct tire load

Never overload tires. The followingexample illustrates how to determinethe combined weight of all vehicleoccupants and luggage or othervehicle payloads. Never
overload thevehicle!

Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit:

1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs.” on your vehicle's placard.

2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.

3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs.

The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if the “XXX” amount equals 1400 lbs. and there
4.
will be five 150 lb passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs. (1400–750 (5 × 150) = 650 lbs.)

Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and
5.
luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4.

If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how this reduces the
6.
available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.

326
Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit:

Check the tire sidewall to determine the load index specified for thetire.

WARNING

Exceeding the maximum vehicle weight can cause you to lose control of the vehicle and cause accidents resulting in severe and/or fatal injuries.

Never exceed the maximum load or the maximum vehicle weight as per the GVWR.

Glossary of tire and load terminology


Accessory weight: The combined weight (in excess of those standard items which may be replaced) of automatic transmission, electro-mechanical power
steering, power brakes, power windows, power seats, radio, and heater, to the extent that these items are available as factory-installed equipment (whether installed
or not).

Aspect ratio: The ratio of sidewall height to tire width, expressed as a percentage. A number of 50 (0.5:1 or 50%) means that the cross-sectional height is 50% of
the tread width. A shorter sidewall can improve steering response and provide better overall handling, for example, on dry pavement.

Bead: The part of a tire made of steel wires, wrapped or reinforced by ply cords, with the shape and structure to ensure proper fit to the wheel rim.

Bead separation: A breakdown of the bond between components in the bead.

Carcass: The tire structure, except tread and sidewall rubber which, when inflated, bears the load.

Chunking: The breaking away of pieces of the tread or sidewall.

Cord: The strands of material forming the plies in the tire.

Cord separation: The parting of cords from adjacent rubber compounds.

Cracking: Any parting within the tread, sidewall, or inner liner of the tire extending to cord material.

Cold tire inflation pressure: The tire pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer for a tire of a specified size that has not been driven for more than a
couple of miles (kilometers) at low speeds in the 3 hour period before the tire pressure is measured or adjusted.

Curb weight: The weight of a motor vehicle with standard equipment including the maximum capacity of fuel, oil, and coolant, air conditioner, and additional weight
of optional equipment.

Extra load tire: A tire designed to operate at higher loads and at higher inflation pressures than the corresponding standard tire.

Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR): The load-carrying capacity of a single axle system, measured where the tire contacts the ground.

Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR): The maximum loaded weight of the vehicle.

Groove: The space between 2 adjacent tread ribs.

Load rating code: The maximum load that a tire is rated to carry for a given inflation pressure. You may not find this information on all tires because it is not
required by law.

Maximum loaded vehicle weight: The total of:

Curb weight.

Accessory weight.

Vehicle capacity weight.

Production options weight.

Maximum (permissible) inflation pressure: The maximum cold inflation pressure to which a tire may be inflated. Also called “maximum inflation pressure.”

Normal occupant weight: Means 150 lbs (68 kilograms) times the number of occupants seated in the vehicle up to the total seating capacity of your vehicle.

Occupant distribution: The placement of passengers in a vehicle.

Outer diameter: The diameter of a new, properly inflated tire.

Overall width: Total width measured at the exterior sidewalls of an inflated tire, including the additional width of labeling, decorations, or protective bands or ribs.

Passenger car tire: A tire intended for use on passenger cars, multipurpose passenger vehicles, and trucks, that have a gross vehicle weight rating (GVWR) of
10,000 pounds or less.

Ply: A layer of rubber-coated parallel cords.

Ply separation: A parting of rubber compound between adjacent plies.

Pneumatic tire: A mechanical device made of rubber, chemicals, fabric, and steel or other materials, that, when mounted on an automotive wheel, provides the
traction and contains the gas or fluid that sustains the load.

Production options weight: The combined weight of installed regular production options weighing over 5 lbs (2.3 kg) more than the standard items they replace,
and not previously considered as curb weight or accessory weight. These include, for example, heavy-duty brakes, ride levelers, roof rack, heavy-duty battery, and
special trim.

Radial ply tires: A pneumatic tire in which the ply cords that extend to the beads are laid at substantially 90 degrees to the centerline of the tread.
327
Recommended inflation pressure: The tire pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer for a tire of a specified size that has not been driven for more than
a couple of miles (kilometers) at low speeds in the 3 hour period before the tire pressure is measured or adjusted.

Reinforced tire: A tire designed to operate at higher loads and at higher inflation pressures than the corresponding standard tire.

Rim: The outer edge of a wheel upon which the tire beads are seated.

Rim diameter: The nominal diameter of the wheel's tire bead seating surface. If you change your wheel size, to wheels of a different diameter, you will have to
purchase new tires to match the new wheels.

Rim size: Designation means rim diameter and width.

Rim type designation: The industry or manufacturer's designation for a rim by style or code.

Rim width: The nominal distance between wheel rim flanges.

Section width: The linear distance between the exteriors of the sidewalls of an inflated tire, excluding elevations due to labeling decoration, or protective bands.

Sidewall: The portion of a tire between the bead and the tread.

Sidewall separation: The parting of the rubber compound from the cord material in the sidewall.

Speed rating (letter code): A standardized letter code indicating the maximum speed at which a tire is designed to be driven for extended periods of time. The
ratings range from 93 mph (150 km/h) “P” to 186 mph (300 km/h) “Y”. The speed rating letter code, where applicable, is molded on the tire sidewall. You may not
find this information on all tires because it is not required by law.

Tire Pressure Monitoring System: A system that detects when at least one of a vehicle's tires is underinflated and illuminates a low tire-pressure warning light.

Tread: The portion of a tire that normally touches the road.

Tread rib: A tread section running circumferentially around a tire.

Tread separation: Tire failure caused by the tread pulling away from the tire carcass.

Tread wear indicators (TWI): Raised areas within the main tread grooves that show, visually, when tires are worn and near the end of their useful life.

Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG): A tire information system developed by the U.S. National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) that is designed
to help buyers compare tires. UTQG is not a safety rating, nor is it a guarantee that a tire will last for a certain number of miles or perform a certain way. It gives tire
buyers more information to compare with factors such as price, brand loyalty and dealer recommendations. Under UTQG, tires are graded by the tire manufacturers
in 3 areas: tread wear, traction and temperature resistance. UTQG information is molded into the tire sidewalls.

U.S. DOT Tire Identification Number (TIN): A tire's serial number. It begins with the letters “DOT” (“Department of Transportation”) and indicates that the tire meets
all federal standards. The next 2 numbers or letters indicate the plant where the tire was manufactured. The last 4 numbers represent the week and year of
manufacture. For example, the numbers 1709 mean that the tire was produced in the 17th week of 2009. Any other numbers are marketing codes used by the tire
manufacturer. This information is used to help identify affected consumers if a tire defect requires a recall.

Vehicle capacity weight: The total rated cargo, luggage and passenger load. Passenger load is 150 lbs (68 kilograms) times the vehicle's total seating capacity (as
listed on the label inside the driver door).

Vehicle maximum load on the tire: The load on an individual tire that is determined by taking each axle's share of the maximum loaded vehicle weight (GAWR)
and dividing by 2.

Vehicle normal load on the tire: The load on an individual tire that is determined by taking each axle's share of the curb weight, accessory weight, and normal
occupant weight (distributed according to the table below) and dividing by 2.

Wheel size designation: Wheel rim diameter and width.

Occupant loading and distribution for vehicle normal load for various designated seating capacities:

Designated seating capacity, number of occupants Vehicle normal load, number of occupants Occupant distribution in a normally loaded vehicle

2, 3, or 4 2 2 in front

5, 6, or 7 3 2 in front, 1 in back

328
Maintenance
Service
Information regarding the service schedule
Information regarding maintenance of your vehicle and the type and scope of service work can be found in your service schedule. The service schedule is included
with your manual Service schedule.

Vehicle care
Vehicle care information
Regular, proper care helps to maintain your vehicle.

The longer dirt remains on the surfaces of vehicle components, the more difficult it may be to clean and care for them. Long-term exposure can make it impossible
for dirt to be removed.

For questions regarding care products or for vehicle components that are not listed, consult a suitably qualified professional. Volkswagen recommends contacting
an authorized Volkswagen dealer or authorized Volkswagen Service Facility.

Suitably qualified professionals can provide you with suitable accessories. Volkswagen recommends the use of Genuine Volkswagen Accessories, which you can
acquire from an authorized Volkswagen dealer or authorized Volkswagen Service Facility. Read and follow the usage instructions on the packaging.

WARNING

Cleaning and caring for vehicle components incorrectly can irreparably damage and impair the vehicle's safety equipment, such as the airbag modules. This
may cause serious injuries in the event of an accident.

Clean and maintain vehicle components only according to the manufacturer’s instructions.

Always use approved or recommended cleaning solution.

Never use cleaning solutions that contain solvents.

WARNING

Cleaning the vehicle incorrectly may result in serious injuries.

Protect your hands and arms against components with sharp edges, for example when cleaning the inside of the wheel housings.

Always follow the manufacturer's instructions when using cleaning agents.

WARNING

Dirty, foggy, or icy door windows reduce visibility and can impair the vehicle's safety equipment. This can cause accidents and serious or fatal injuries.

Only drive when there is clear visibility through all windows.

Do not use water-repellent window solutions on the windshield. This can cause intense glare under poor visual conditions.

WARNING

Care products can be poisonous, highly flammable and dangerous. Using care products incorrectly or using unsuitable care products can cause burns and
poisoning and may lead to accidents and serious or fatal injuries.

Note the package insert.

Only store care products in their sealed original containers.

Keep children away from all care products.

Only use care products outside or in well-ventilated areas so that no harmful vapors are inhaled.

Never use turpentine, engine oil, fuel, nail polish remover, or other highly volatile fluids for vehicle care.

NOTICE

Cleaning dirt with aggressive and solvent-based products can cause permanent damage to vehicle equipment, for example even with only brief exposure on
seat cushions or decorative parts.

Do not allow dirt to dry.

Have stubborn spots removed by a suitably qualified, authorized Volkswagen dealer or authorized Volkswagen Service Facility.
329
Washing the vehicle
Please read the introductory information and heed the Warnings and Notice ⇒ and Vehicle care information .
Washing your vehicle regularly prevents exposure to contamination, which may damage the paint.

Matte-finish vehicles require special care due to the particular properties of the paint.

To ensure that your vehicle is washed correctly and appropriately, note the following information ⇒ ,⇒ .

WARNING

After the vehicle has been washed, the braking efficiency may be delayed due to damp or (in the winter) icy brake discs and brake pads. This will increase the
braking distance. This can cause a loss of vehicle control, accidents, and serious or fatal injuries.

Press the brake pedal carefully several times to dry the brakes and clear the ice from them, as long as the visibility, weather, road, and traffic conditions
permit.

NOTICE

Improper car washes can increase the risk of severe vehicle damage.

Always follow the steps described for vehicle care and cleaning.

Always follow the manufacturer's instructions.

Do not wash the vehicle in direct sunlight.

NOTICE

Wet vehicle components may freeze in cold weather, which will stop them from working properly.

In cold weather, never direct a jet of water at locks, doors, or the trunk lid.

Removing stubborn dirt on matte paint


Soak insects or bird excrement that have adhered to the surface immediately with water and spray with a special cleaner for matte paint.

Remove tar splashes on the paint surface with commercially available tar removers. Residue must not be removed by intensive rubbing.

Remove tree resin and rust particles with special cleaner for matte paint and a cleaning clay bar. Slide the cleaning clay bar over the affected areas without
pressing down on it.

Spray grease and fingerprints with matte paint finish spray and rub with a soft microfiber cloth.

Rinse gasoline residue immediately with plenty of water.

Automatic car washes


If your vehicle has matte paint, never select a wash program with wax or drying aids.

If your vehicle has matte paint, only use textile car washes, never brush car washes.

For vehicle with decorative and protective decals, never use a wash package with hot wax.

Choose car washes without brushes.

Also ensure that the underside of the vehicle is washed regularly and thoroughly to remove any residue.

Observe the information provided by the car wash operator, particularly with regard to attachments on the vehicle, e.g. spoilers ⇒ .

The windows are closed and the outside mirrors are folded in.

The vehicle must be in roll mode.

The electronic parking brake is switched off.

Vehicles with steering lock: If the vehicle is mechanically towed in the car wash, the steering must not be locked ⇒ Steering information.

The windshield wiper ⇒ Window wipers and the rain/light sensor ⇒ Rain/light sensor are switched off.

If applicable: the roof antenna has been removed.

NOTICE

Car washes which mechanically scan contours may damage the vehicle and attachments, e.g. spoiler.

Follow the information provided by the car wash operator, especially if there are attachments on the vehicle.

330
Pressure washers

Fig. 190 Warning sign: Do not use pressure washers in the marked area.

Never use rotating nozzles. Observe the manufacturer's instructions.

Only use water up to maximum +60 °C (+140 °F).

Move the water jet evenly with a distance of at least 50 cm (20 inches) between the spray nozzle and all parts of the vehicle.

Do not direct the water at the same spot for a long period of time.

If possible, do not direct the water straight at sensitive vehicle components, e.g. rubber seals, side windows, glossy trims, tires, sensors, camera lenses,
decorative and protective decals.

Never clean icy or snow-covered door windows with a pressure washer.

Hand washing

Individual contaminations on the paint can be removed with a cleaning clay bar.

1. Clean dust and large dirt deposits from the vehicle with plenty of water.

2. If your vehicle has matte paint, remove insects, grease spots and fingerprints with a special cleaner for matte paint. Apply the product using a microfiber cloth
with gentle pressure.

3. Clean the vehicle with a soft sponge, a washing glove, or a washing brush with light pressure. Start at the roof, and continue to work from the top down. Only
use a cleansing shampoo on stubborn dirt.

If your vehicle has matte paint, clean from top to bottom with a neutral cleansing shampoo and a microfiber cloth. Wash the microfiber cloth thoroughly at
frequent intervals.

4. Clean the wheels and side members with a clean sponge.

5. Rinse with plenty of water.

6. Let the vehicle air dry. Remove water residue with a leather cloth.

NOTICE

Washing the vehicle incorrectly can damage the paint surface and destroy the matte paint finish.

Never use washing programs with wax treatment.

Only use cleaning agents free of solids and abrasives, such as cleansing shampoos or insect removers, for cleaning purposes.

Do not use insect sponges or rough sponges.

NOTICE

The plenum chamber drain can be blocked by leaves and dirt. Water that cannot drain may leak into the vehicle interior and cause damage.

Remove leaves and other loose objects with a vacuum or by hand.

Have the area under the perforated cover cleaned at regular intervals by an authorized Volkswagen dealer or authorized Volkswagen Service Facility.

Ensure that large amounts of water do not collect in the plenum chamber, for example if you use a pressure washer.

Only wash the vehicle in facilities specifically designed for that purpose. This will reduce the risk of water contaminated with oil from entering the sewer system.

331
Exterior care and cleaning
Please read the introductory information and heed the Warnings and Notice ⇒ and Vehicle care information .
The following overview gives recommendations for cleaning and caring for individual vehicle components.

NOTICE

Incorrect cleaning and care can cause vehicle damage.

Always follow the manufacturer's instructions.

Never use cleaning objects that are too hard or abrasive.

Door windows, glass surfaces


Remove wax residue, for example from care products, with a suitable glass cleaner or the Volkswagen Genuine cleaning cloth.

Remove snow with a hand brush.

Remove ice with a plastic scraper. When doing so, scrape in one direction only.

Defrost the ice with a suitable deicer or Volkswagen Genuine deicer.

Clean wiper blades or change them if necessary.

Paint
Always treat surfaces with extreme care to prevent paint damage.

Treat light contaminants, for example deposits, insects, and cosmetics, immediately with a clean soft towel and a mild soap solution of maximum
two tablespoons of neutral soap in a liter of water, or with a cleaning clay bar.

Clean spilled fuel or operating materials immediately.

Dampen rust spots with soap solution. Then remove with a cleaning clay bar.

Have corrosion removed by suitably qualified professionals. Volkswagen recommends contacting an authorized Volkswagen dealer or authorized Volkswagen
Service Facility.

In the event of paint damage, consult suitably qualified professionals and have the paint damage repaired. Volkswagen recommends contacting an authorized
Volkswagen dealer or authorized Volkswagen Service Facility.

A preservation treatment protects the vehicle paint. When water no longer clearly beads up and drips off clean vehicle paint, the vehicle should be retreated with a
wax protectant if not earlier.

For matte paint, use a soft sponge to apply a special wax for matte paint to the cleaned vehicle. Remove excess wax with a microfiber cloth.

Even if a wax protectant is applied regularly in an automatic car wash, Volkswagen recommends protecting the vehicle paint at least twice a year with a
suitable hard wax or Volkswagen Genuine hard wax.

Polishing is only needed if the appearance of the vehicle paint is poor and a shiny finish can no longer be achieved using protectants.

Never polish matte-finish surfaces. The surface will be permanently damaged by the paint shining.

Plenum chamber, engine compartment

332
Fig. 191 Between the engine compartment and windshield: plenum chamber (general example).

WARNING

Working on the engine or in the engine compartment carries a risk of accidents and fire. Serious injuries may occur.

Always note the necessary actions and the safety precautions every time before working in the engine compartment → page , Safety precautions for
working in the engine compartment.

If you are not familiar with this type of work, arrange for it to be done by an authorized Volkswagen dealer or authorized Volkswagen Service Facility.
Volkswagen recommends contacting an authorized Volkswagen dealer or authorized Volkswagen Service Facility.

NOTICE

The plenum chamber drain can be blocked by leaves and dirt. Water that cannot drain may leak into the vehicle interior and cause damage.

Have the area under the perforated cover regularly cleaned by an authorized Volkswagen dealer or authorized Volkswagen Service Facility qualified in
this respect. Volkswagen recommends contacting an authorized Volkswagen dealer or authorized Volkswagen Service Facility.

Remove leaves or other loose objects with a vacuum or by hand fig. 191 , ⇒ .

Always have the engine compartment cleaned by an authorized Volkswagen dealer or authorized Volkswagen Service Facility qualified in this respect.
Volkswagen recommends contacting an authorized Volkswagen dealer or authorized Volkswagen Service Facility.

Water introduced manually into the plenum chamber, for example with a pressure washer, can cause considerable vehicle damage.

Sensors, camera lenses

333
Fig. 192 In the rear of the vehicle: Rear View Camera system in the Volkswagen emblem (general example).

Clean the area in front of the sensors or the camera with a soft cloth and solvent-free cleaning solution.

Clean sensitive surfaces of the rain/light sensor and the camera window on the windshield as you would windows and glass surfaces (depending on the
equipment).

Remove snow with a hand brush.

Never use warm or hot water.

Defrost the ice with a suitable deicer or Volkswagen Genuine deicer.

Cleaning the Rear View Camera system


1. Switch the ignition on.

2. Engage the R selector lever position.

3. Set the electronic parking brake.

4. Clean the camera lens.

Decorative and protective decals


Remove contaminants as described for paint. For matte decorative decals, use a suitable plastic cleaner or a Volkswagen Genuine plastic cleaner.

Treat the vehicle every three months with liquid hard wax. The vehicle must be free of dirt and dust before treating. Apply using only clean, soft microfiber
cloths. Do not use hot wax , even in a car wash.

Hard contaminants: remove gently with ethyl alcohol and then wash with warm water.
The durability and coloring on decorative and protective decals can be affected by environment conditions, such as sunlight, moisture, air pollution, stone chips,
etc. Decorative decals may show signs of wear and aging after approximately one to three years, and protective decals after approximately two to three years.
In very hot climates, the decorative decals may fade slightly within one year and the protective decals within two years.

Trims made out of chrome-plated plastic, aluminum or stainless steel


Clean surfaces with a suitable chrome and aluminum product or Volkswagen Genuine chrome and aluminum products.

Chrome-plated trims can be protected with a suitable hard wax or Volkswagen Genuine hard wax.

Headlights, taillights
Use a soft sponge saturated with a mild soap solution of maximum two tablespoons of neutral soap in a liter of water to remove dirt. Do not use cleaning
solutions containing alcohol and/or solvents.

Remove stubborn dirt with a suitable chrome and aluminum product or Volkswagen Genuine chrome and aluminum products.

Wheels
Remove contaminants and road salt with plenty of water.

Clean dirty alloy wheels with a suitable rim cleaner or with Volkswagen Genuine rim cleaner. Volkswagen recommends applying a suitable hard wax or
Volkswagen Genuine hard wax to the rims every three months.

Repair damaged protective paint layers immediately with a paint pen. If necessary, contact an authorized Volkswagen dealer or authorized Volkswagen Service
Facility. Volkswagen recommends contacting an authorized Volkswagen dealer or authorized Volkswagen Service Facility.

Remove brake dust with a suitable rim cleaner or Volkswagen Genuine rim cleaner.

334
Door lock cylinder
1. Defrost the door lock cylinder with a suitable door lock deicer or Volkswagen Genuine deicer.

Do not use any door lock deicers with degreasing substances.

Care and cleaning of the vehicle interior


Please read the introductory information and heed the Warnings and Notice ⇒ and Vehicle care information .
The following overview gives recommendations for cleaning and caring for individual vehicle components.

NOTICE

Incorrect cleaning and care can cause vehicle damage.

Always follow the steps described for vehicle care and cleaning.

Do not use steam cleaners, brushes, hard sponges, etc.

Have tough spots removed by an authorized Volkswagen dealer or authorized Volkswagen Service Facility.

Door windows
Clean the door window with a glass cleaner.

Wipe the door windows dry with a clean chamois or a lint-free cloth.

Textiles, microfiber, leatherette


Regularly remove dirt particles that adhere to the surface with a vacuum cleaner so that the material is not permanently damaged by scrubbing.

Remove contaminants with a suitable interior cleaner or Volkswagen Genuine interior cleaner.

For grease-based contaminants such as oil, use a suitable interior cleaner or Volkswagen Genuine interior cleaner. Blot away the dissolved grease or dye with
an absorbent towel. If necessary, treat afterwards with water.

For contaminants, for example from pens or nail polish, use a suitable interior cleaner or Volkswagen Genuine interior cleaner. If necessary, treat afterward with
a mild soap solution of maximum two tablespoons of neutral soap in a liter of water.

Never use leather cleaners, solvents, floor polish, shoe polish, paint remover, or other similar substances.

Never use pressure washers, steam cleaners or cooling sprays.

Natural leather
Remove fresh dirt with a cotton cloth and a mild soap solution of maximum two tablespoons of neutral soap in a liter of water. Do not let any fluids seep into the
cracks.

For contaminants, for example from pens or nail polish, use a suitable leather cleaner or Volkswagen Genuine leather cleaner.

Treat dried spots with a suitable leather cleaner or with Volkswagen Genuine leather cleaner.

Remove any fresh spots of grease such as oil with an absorbent cloth.

Apply leather care to seats regularly and each time you clean. If leaving the vehicle parked for long periods of time, you should cover the leather to protect it
from direct sunlight.

Never treat leather with solvents, floor polish, shoe polish, paint remover, or other similar substances.

Plastic parts
Clean with a soft, damp cloth.

If a mild soap solution of maximum two tablespoons of neutral soap in a liter of water cannot remove stubborn stains, use a solvent-free plastic cleaner or
Volkswagen Genuine plastic cleaner, if necessary.

Trims, decorative trims made out of chrome, aluminum or stainless steel


Clean using a clean, soft towel and mild soap solution of maximum two tablespoons of neutral soap in a liter of water, in a dust-free area.

Treat anodized surfaces with a suitable chrome and aluminum product or Volkswagen Genuine chrome and aluminum products.

Controls
1. Use a soft brush to remove large dirt deposits as well as any dirt that is difficult to reach.

2. Use a clean, soft cloth and a fairly mild soap solution of maximum two tablespoons of neutral soap in a liter of water. Fluids must not enter into the controls.

Displays and screens

Do not clean the instrument cluster display and the Infotainment system screen when they are dry.

1. Turn off the Infotainment system temporarily to clean it.

2. Use a suitable cleaning cloth or Volkswagen Genuine cleaning cloth with some water, suitable glass cleaner, or an LCD cleaner.

335
NOTICE

The head-up display may be dislodged from the guide rails during cleaning or be damaged by cleaning agents.

Never apply too much pressure when cleaning the head-up display.

Clean the head-up display only using a mild cleaning agent and a soft, clean cloth.

Rubber seals
Clean with a soft, lint-free cloth and plenty of water.

Treat regularly with a suitable rubber care product or Volkswagen Genuine rubber care product.

Safety belts
1. Unreel the safety belt completely and leave the belt unreeled.

2. Remove large spots of dirt with a soft brush.

3. Clean the safety belt with a mild soap solution of maximum two tablespoons of neutral soap in a liter of water.

4. Let the belt webbing dry completely, then allow the belt to retract.

WARNING

Improper cleaning of safety belts, anchorages and automatic safety belt retractors can cause damage and impair their function. This may result in serious
injuries or death in the event of an accident.

Never alter the safety belts for cleaning purposes.

Never use chemical products to clean the safety belts and their components.

Do no use any corrosive fluids, solvents, or sharp objects.

Do not allow fluids and objects to enter the safety belt buckle.

Let the safety belt dry after cleaning before allowing it to retract completely.

Wood trims

Clean with a soft cloth and fairly mild soap solution of maximum two tablespoons of neutral soap in a liter of water.

Cleaning the seat covers

If dye from clothing such as denim stains the seat covers, this is not considered a defect in the vehicle upholstery. If you want to clean the seat covers yourself, be
aware that airbag system components and electrical connectors are installed in the seat covers. Incorrect cleaning or moisture may damage these components or
cause them to malfunction. This may then cause damage elsewhere in the vehicle's electrical system ⇒ .

Depending on the equipment, electrical components and connectors may be installed in the seat surface with seat heating, which can be damaged by incorrect
cleaning or handling. This can also result in damage to other areas of the vehicle electrical system.

Never use pressure washers, steam cleaners or cooling sprays.

Never soak seat covers.

Never switch on seat heating to dry the seats.

Do not use detergent pastes or mild detergent solutions.

If there is uncertainty, contact suitably qualified professionals for assistance. Volkswagen recommends contacting an authorized Volkswagen dealer or
authorized Volkswagen Service Facility.

WARNING

Cleaning and caring for vehicle components incorrectly can irreparably damage and impair the vehicle's safety equipment, such as the airbag modules. This
may cause serious injuries in the event of an accident.

Always use approved or recommended cleaning solution.

Never use cleaning solutions that contain solvents.

Clean and maintain vehicle components only according to the manufacturer’s instructions.

Needless to say, it is easier to see signs of wear and dirt caused by normal usage on bright materials in the vehicle interior. These signs of use are unavoidable
and also indicate the unavoidable deterioration caused by normal usage. Please follow the corresponding care instructions.

Accessories, replacement parts, repairs, and modifications

336
Accessories and replacement parts
Consult an authorized Volkswagen dealer or authorized Volkswagen Service Facility before purchasing Genuine Volkswagen Accessories, replacement parts, or
operating equipment, for example if you would like to retrofit the vehicle with Genuine Volkswagen Accessories or if parts need to be replaced. The authorized
Volkswagen dealer or authorized Volkswagen Service Facility is aware of legal regulations and factory recommendations for Genuine Volkswagen Accessories,
replacement parts, and operating equipment. Volkswagen recommends contacting an authorized Volkswagen dealer or authorized Volkswagen Service Facility.

Volkswagen recommends the use of Volkswagen original parts or Volkswagen original accessories, which you can acquire from an authorized Volkswagen dealer
or authorized Volkswagen Service Facility. Volkswagen has verified their reliability, safety, and suitability. A suitably qualified authorized Volkswagen dealer or
authorized Volkswagen Service Facility also specializes in correct installation. Volkswagen recommends contacting an authorized Volkswagen dealer or authorized
Volkswagen Service Facility.

Products that are not approved by Volkswagen may not have been evaluated by Volkswagen regarding the reliability, safety, and suitability for the vehicle, despite
ongoing market observation. Therefore, Volkswagen can also not be responsible in individual cases if approval is given by an officially-recognized technical
inspection and control authority or clearance is given by a government agency.

You must consult a suitably qualified authorized Volkswagen dealer or authorized Volkswagen Service Facility to replace rim/tire combinations. Volkswagen
recommends contacting an authorized Volkswagen dealer or authorized Volkswagen Service Facility.

Retrofitted devices that have a direct effect on vehicle control, must have an e symbol (the approval symbol for the European Union) and be approved by
Volkswagen for the vehicle. Such devices could include a cruise control system or an electronically-controlled damping system.

Additional electrical devices that do not have a direct effect on vehicle control must have a symbol (manufacturer's Declaration of Compliance for the European
Union). Such devices could include refrigerators, computers, or ventilators.

WARNING

Using unsuitable replacement parts and accessories may lead to malfunctions in the vehicle. These problems may also occur if work, modifications and repairs
are done incorrectly. This could lead to damage to the vehicle and accidents resulting in serious or fatal injuries.

Only have suitably qualified professionals make repairs or modifications to a vehicle. Authorized Volkswagen dealers and authorized Volkswagen Service
Facilities have the required tools, diagnostic devices, repair information, and qualified personnel. Volkswagen recommends contacting an authorized
Volkswagen dealer or authorized Volkswagen Service Facility.

Only install parts on the vehicle whose design and function are identical to the parts installed at the factory.

Only use rim/tire combinations that are approved by Volkswagen for your vehicle model.

WARNING

Objects in the airbag deployment zone may be thrown around the vehicle interior if the airbags deploy. This can cause serious or fatal injuries.

Never attach or position objects in the airbag deployment zone.

NOTICE

Retrofitting an engine preheating system may cause malfunctions and vehicle damage with certain engines.

Consult an authorized Volkswagen dealer or authorized Volkswagen Service Facility about retrofitting an engine preheating system. Volkswagen
recommends contacting an authorized Volkswagen dealer or authorized Volkswagen Service Facility.

Sensors and Cameras


The sensors or cameras could shift or become damaged as a result of incorrect repairs, structural changes to the vehicle (such as “lowering”), installation of after-
market equipment, or changes to the trim panels. This may impair important functions in the driver assistance systems ⇒ .

Note the positions of sensors and cameras on your vehicle in the vehicle overviews.

Attachments or Modifications around Sensors and Cameras

WARNING

If the area in front of and around sensors and cameras is covered, for example by license plates, decorative frames for license plate holders, additional films
that have been attached, or paint on the sensors, etc., this can impair the functions of the driver assistance systems. Failure of the driver assistance systems
may result in accidents and serious or fatal injuries.

Do not stick additional films over or around sensors.

Only install a license plate or decorative frame for license plate holders in the position specified. Always consult an authorized Volkswagen dealer or
authorized Volkswagen Service Facility if you want to install a license plate or decorative frame for a license plate holder on the vehicle. Volkswagen
recommends contacting an authorized Volkswagen dealer or authorized Volkswagen Service Facility.

337
NOTICE

Incorrectly installing license plates or decorative frames for license plate holders may damage vehicle components, such as wires or sensors.

Only install a license plate or decorative frame for license plate holders in the position specified. Always consult an authorized Volkswagen dealer or
authorized Volkswagen Service Facility if you want to install a license plate or decorative frame for a license plate holder on the vehicle. Volkswagen
recommends contacting an authorized Volkswagen dealer or authorized Volkswagen Service Facility.

Decorative frames for license plate holders are designed for holding the license plate.

The Volkswagen emblem can impede the view of the radar sensors to the front on some vehicle versions. Therefore only operate the vehicle with the original
Volkswagen emblem or an emblem approved by Volkswagen.

Damage around Sensors and Cameras

WARNING

If the area around sensors and cameras is damaged, for example due to stone chips or collisions when parking, this may impair the functions of the driver
assistance systems. Failure of the driver assistance systems may result in accidents and serious or fatal injuries.

If there is damage in the area of the sensors and cameras, have the component replaced by a suitably qualified professional. Volkswagen recommends
contacting an authorized Volkswagen dealer or authorized Volkswagen Service Facility.

After components have been replaced, it may be necessary for sensors and cameras to be set and calibrated by an authorized Volkswagen dealer or authorized
Volkswagen Service Facility. Volkswagen recommends contacting an authorized Volkswagen dealer or authorized Volkswagen Service Facility.

If the windshield is damaged within the sensors' and camera's range, for example by a stone chip, then the windshield must be replaced. Stone chip repairs can
cause malfunctions in the driver assistance system. After the windshield has been replaced, it may be necessary for the camera and sensors to be set and
calibrated by an authorized Volkswagen dealer or authorized Volkswagen Service Facility. Volkswagen recommends contacting an authorized Volkswagen dealer or
authorized Volkswagen Service Facility.

Repairs and technical modifications


Volkswagen guidelines must be followed when performing repairs and technical modifications ⇒ .

Interference with electronic components and their software can cause malfunctions. Because of the way electronic components are interconnected, such
malfunctions can also impair systems that are not directly involved. This means that you risk both a substantial reduction in the operational safety of your vehicle
and increased wear of vehicle components.

An authorized Volkswagen dealer or authorized Volkswagen Service Facility cannot assume any liability for damage resulting from repairs and technical
modifications that were performed incorrectly.

An authorized Volkswagen dealer or authorized Volkswagen Service Facility is not responsible for damage resulting from repairs and technical modifications that
were performed incorrectly. Such damages are also not covered by the Volkswagen warranty.

Have all repairs and technical modifications performed by suitably qualified professionals. Volkswagen recommends contacting your authorized Volkswagen dealer
or authorized Volkswagen Service Facility for Volkswagen Genuine Parts®.

Volkswagen repair information

Volkswagen service information and official Volkswagen repair information can be purchased.

Customers in Europe, Asia, Australia, Africa, Central and South America:

Contact suitably qualified professionals for assistance. Volkswagen recommends contacting an authorized Volkswagen dealer or authorized Volkswagen Service
Facility. Or register with the erWin (electronic repair and service information) web portal:
https://erwin.volkswagen.de
Customers in North America and Canada:

If you wish to order the printed service information, please contact:


Volkswagen Technical Literature Ordering Centerliterature.vw.com
You can also register for the erWin web portal:
https://erwin.vw.com

Diagnostic connection (on-board diagnosis)

In the vehicle interior, there is a diagnostic connection (OBD ) to read event memories. Event memories document faults that have occurred and deviations from
specified values from the control module ⇒ .

The diagnostic connection (OBD) is located in the footwell on the driver's side on the underside of the instrument panel or next to the hood release lever behind a
cover.

Only have the event memory read out and reset by suitably qualified professionals. Additional information about the saved data can be obtained from suitably
qualified professionals. Volkswagen recommends contacting an authorized Volkswagen dealer or authorized Volkswagen Service Facility.

338
After a malfunction is fixed, the information about it will be deleted from the event memory. Other memory content is overwritten continuously.

Vehicles with special modifications and mountings

The attachment and mounting manufacturer should make sure that the applicable environmental laws and regulations are met for the attachments and mountings,
especially the EU directive 2000/53/EG about old vehicle and EU directive 2003/11/EG about market introduction restrictions and the use of certain hazardous
materials and compounds.

The installation instructions for any retrofitted equipment should be saved by the vehicle owner and provided to the removal facility if the vehicle is scrapped. This
ensures that even vehicles with retrofitted equipment will be disposed of in a way that will not harm the environment.

Engine/motor protection

Engine/motor protection can reduce the risk of damage to the vehicle underbody and the oil pan, for example if driving over curbs, entering driveways, or on
unpaved roads.

Have the retrofitting work performed by suitable qualified professionals. Volkswagen recommends contacting an authorized Volkswagen dealer or authorized
Volkswagen Service Facility.

Engine/motor protection may not be available in all countries.

WARNING

Repairs and modifications to the vehicle that are performed incorrectly can impair the effectiveness of the driver assistance systems and deploying airbags.
This can cause malfunctions and accidents and serious injuries or death.

Only have suitably qualified professionals make repairs or modifications to a vehicle. Volkswagen recommends contacting an authorized Volkswagen
dealer or authorized Volkswagen Service Facility.

WARNING

Repairs and modifications to the vehicle that are performed incorrectly, for example due to the use of unsuitable parts, may cause vehicle damage, accidents,
and serious or fatal injuries.

Only install parts on the vehicle whose design and function are identical to the parts installed at the factory.

Only use rim/tire combinations that are approved by Volkswagen for your vehicle model.

Only have suitably qualified professionals make repairs or modifications to a vehicle. Volkswagen recommends contacting an authorized Volkswagen
dealer or authorized Volkswagen Service Facility.

Volkswagen recommends the use of Volkswagen original parts or Volkswagen original accessories. Volkswagen has verified their reliability, safety, and
suitability.

WARNING

Incorrect use of the diagnostic connection may cause malfunctions, resulting in accidents and serious or fatal injuries.

Never read out the event memory yourself using the diagnostic connection.

Never load data yourself using the diagnostic connection in the vehicle.

Only have the event memory read out with the diagnostic connection by suitably qualified professionals. Volkswagen recommends contacting an
authorized Volkswagen dealer or authorized Volkswagen Service Facility.

Airbag system repairs and situations that can affect the system function
Volkswagen guidelines must be followed when performing repairs and technical modifications ⇒ .

Only have modifications and repairs on the front bumper, doors, front seats, headliner, or vehicle body performed by an authorized Volkswagen dealer or authorized
Volkswagen Service Facility. Volkswagen recommends contacting an authorized Volkswagen dealer or authorized Volkswagen Service Facility. Airbag system
components and sensors may be located on these vehicle components.

Airbag system components can be damaged during all procedures on the airbag system and when removing and installing system components while performing
other repair procedures. This may prevent the airbags from deploying or cause them to deploy incorrectly in the event of an accident.

The instructions must be followed so that the effectiveness of the airbags is not impaired and removed components do not cause injuries and environmental
pollution. An authorized Volkswagen dealer or authorized Volkswagen Service Facility will be familiar with these provisions. Volkswagen recommends contacting an
authorized Volkswagen dealer or authorized Volkswagen Service Facility.

A modification to the vehicle suspension can impair the functionality of the airbag system during a collision. For example, using a rim/tire combination that is not
approved by Volkswagen, lowering the vehicle, or changing the suspension stiffness including the springs, suspensions struts, shock absorbers, etc., can change
the force that is measured by the airbag sensors and transmitted to the electronic control module. For example, some changes to the suspension can increase the
force measured by the systems and trigger the airbag system in accidents where the airbags would normally not be deployed if the modifications had not been
made. Other modifications can reduce the force measured by the sensors and prevent the airbag from deploying when it should have deployed.

339
WARNING

Using unsuitable replacement parts and accessories may cause damage and malfunctions in the vehicle and impair the effectiveness of the airbag system.
These problems may also occur if work, modifications and repairs are done incorrectly. This could lead to damage to the vehicle and accidents resulting in
serious or fatal injuries.

Only have suitably qualified professionals make repairs or modifications to a vehicle. Authorized Volkswagen dealers and authorized Volkswagen Service
Facilities have the required tools, diagnostic devices, repair information, and qualified personnel. Volkswagen recommends contacting an authorized
Volkswagen dealer or authorized Volkswagen Service Facility.

Note that the airbag module cannot be repaired but must instead be replaced.

Never install airbag components removed from old vehicles or from recycling.

Only install parts on the vehicle whose design and function are identical to the parts installed at the factory.

WARNING

Modifications to the vehicle suspension including using a rim/tire combination that is not permitted may change the system function of the airbag. This can cause
serious or fatal injuries in the event of an accident.

Never install suspension components that do not have the same properties as the original parts installed in the vehicle.

Never use rim/tire combinations that are not approved by Volkswagen.

Mobile phone usage in the vehicle


Electromagnetic waves

When using a mobile phone or radio equipment without connecting to the exterior antenna, the electromagnetic waves will not be deflected outward in an optimum
way. Increased waves in the vehicle interior can occur, especially when reception is poor, for example in rural areas. This could be a potential health risk ⇒ .

Depending on the equipment, it may be possible to use a suitable telephone interface to connect the mobile phone to the exterior antenna. This will improve the
connection quality and increase the range.

Using a phone

In many countries, using a phone in the vehicle is only permitted if there is a hands-free connection, for example using a Bluetooth ® connection. Before using the
phone, secure it in a suitable holder ⇒ or store it in a storage compartment, such as in the center console, to prevent it from sliding around.

Radio

If operating radio devices, follow the legal regulations and the user guide from the manufacturer. The aftermarket installation of radio devices is subject to approval.

Contact qualified professionals for more information about installing radio equipment. Volkswagen recommends contacting an authorized Volkswagen dealer or
authorized Volkswagen Service Facility.

WARNING

Mobile devices that are loose or not secured correctly can be thrown through the vehicle interior during sudden driving or braking maneuvers or in the event of a
collision and cause severe injuries.

Secure or store the mobile phone and accessories safely and outside of the deployment range of the airbags.

WARNING

Using a cell phone or radio equipment without a connection to an external aerial may create electromagnetic energy inside the vehicle that exceeds permissible
limits. This also applies if the exterior antenna is not installed correctly. This may be dangerous to your health and that of the other vehicle occupants.

Maintain a minimum distance of approx. 20 cm (approx. 8 inches) between the device antennae and any active medical implants, such as pacemakers.

Do not carry a mobile device that is turned on directly above or in the immediate vicinity of any active medical implants, for example by keeping a phone
in a shirt pocket.

Switch off the mobile device immediately if you suspect there is interference with an active medical implant or other medical device.

340
Customer information
Warranty
Warranty
Garantie

Your vehicle is covered by various warranties:


New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

Limited Warranty Against Corrosion Perforation.

Emissions Control System Warranties: Federal Emissions Control System Defect Warranty, Federal Emissions Performance Warranty.

US battery electric vehicles: High-Voltage System Limited Warranty.

US models: Kansas Safety Belt Limited Warranty.

US models: California Emissions Control System Warranties: Short-term Emissions Defects Warranty, Long-term Emissions Defect Warranty, California
Emissions Performance Warranty.

You can find the detailed information in your Warranty & Maintenance Booklet and California Emissions Booklet or on the website:

maintenance.vw.com

Event data recorder (crash data recorder)


This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air
bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist in understanding how a vehicle's systems performed. The EDR is designed to record data related to
vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such data as:

How various systems in your vehicle were operating;

Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts were buckled/fastened;

How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,

How fast the vehicle was traveling.

These data can help provide a better understanding of the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur.

In addition, data from the driver assistance systems is also collected. In addition to information about whether these systems were switched on or off, had limited
availability, or were inactive, it can also be understood if these functions steered, accelerated, or braked the vehicle in the situations listed above. Depending on the
vehicle equipment, systems may include:

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC).

Lane Assist

Park Assist

Parking systems

Autonomous Emergency Braking Function (Front Assist)

NOTE: EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are recorded by the EDR under normal driving conditions and no
personal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location) are recorded. However, other parties, such as law enforcement, could combine the EDR data with the
type of personally identifying data routinely acquired during a crash investigation.

To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other
parties, such as law enforcement, that have the special equipment, can read the information if they have access to the vehicle or the EDR.

Volkswagen will not access, read or process the Event Data Recorder (EDR) data unless the vehicle owner gives permission. This excludes contractual or legal
regulations.

Due to the legal obligation to monitor products, Volkswagen is allowed to use data for field observation as well as for research purposes and quality improvement of
vehicle safety systems. For research purposes, Volkswagen provides the data to third parties in an anonymous format. This means the data does not reference the
individual vehicle or the vehicle owner.

Labels and signs


Factory labels and signs with important information regarding vehicle operation are located in the engine compartment and on several vehicle components.

Never remove these labels and signs or make them illegible.

If vehicle components equipped with labels and signs are replaced, suitably qualified professionals must place identical labels and signs correctly in the same
locations on the new components. Volkswagen recommends contacting an authorized Volkswagen dealer or authorized Volkswagen Service Facility.

Safety certificate
341
A safety certificate on the driver's door jamb specifies all necessary safety standards and guidelines of the traffic safety authorities in the applicable country at the
time of manufacture. The month and year of production as well as the VIN may also be listed. Read the information in the Owner's Manual ⇒ Safety certificate.

WARNING

Incorrect vehicle handling increases the risk of accidents, serious injuries and death.

Follow the legal regulations.

Follow the Owner's Manual instructions.

NOTICE

Incorrect vehicle handling can cause vehicle damage.

Follow the legal regulations.

Perform service according to the specifications.

Fluids in the air conditioning system


Refrigerant in the air conditioning system

The label in the engine compartment provides information about the type and amount of refrigerant used in the vehicle air conditioning system. The label is in the
front section of the engine compartment near the refrigerant filler tubes ⇒ .

Warning: the air conditioning system must only be serviced by qualified technicians. Refrigerant type. Type of refrigerant oil. See service information
(only available for authorized Volkswagen dealers and authorized Volkswagen Service Facilities). The air conditioning system must only be serviced by
qualified technicians. Flammable refrigerant. Make sure all components are disposed of correctly and never install components removed from old vehicles or
from recycling in the vehicle.

Refrigerant oil in the air conditioner

The air conditioner is filled with refrigerant oil. The label on the air conditioner compressor provides information on the type and quantity of refrigerant oil used
⇒ Repairs and technical modifications.

WARNING

Air conditioner maintenance by unqualified professionals may pose a danger to safe operation and result in serious injuries.

Only have the air conditioner serviced by qualified professionals.

NOTICE

Repairing or replacing the evaporator with replacement parts from scrap vehicles or recycled parts may damage the air conditioner.

Never have repairs to the evaporator carried out with replacement parts from scrap vehicles or recycled parts.

Only have replacement parts for the air conditioner evaporator fitted that are certified and marked in accordance with SAE standards J2842 HFO-1234y
and R744.

Have the air conditioner serviced only by qualified technicians who are trained according to SAE standard J2845 and certified according to SAE standard
J2911. SAE standard J639 must be complied with while working on the air conditioner.

Have damaged or missing refrigerant labels, e.g. in the engine compartment, replaced.

Infotainment system and aerials


The aerials for the Infotainment system are fitted in various places in the vehicle:

On the inside of the rear window.

On the inside of the rear side windows

On the inside of the windshield

On the roof of the vehicle

Antennas on the inside of the window glass can be detected as thin wires.

NOTICE

Antennas that are located on the inside of the window glass can be damaged by abrasive objects or by corrosive and acidic materials.

Never apply stickers over metal wires, for example on the rear window.

342
Never clean the antennas with corrosive or acidic materials.

NOTICE

A retrofitted Infotainment system that is incompatible with the antenna amplifier installed in the vehicle by the manufacturer may damage the antenna amplifier.

Before retrofitting an Infotainment system, contact an authorized Volkswagen dealer or authorized Volkswagen Service Facility. Volkswagen
recommends contacting an authorized Volkswagen dealer or authorized Volkswagen Service Facility.

Component protection
Some electronic components and control
modules, such as the Infotainment
system, are equipped with component
protection at the factory.

The component protection allows suitably qualified professionals to legitimately install or replace components and control modules. Volkswagen recommends
contacting your Volkswagen dealership.

In the following situations, component protection reduces the risk of components supplied by the factory being operated without restrictions outside the vehicle.

Installation in other vehicles, for example the components have been stolen

Operating components outside of the vehicle

If a message about component protection appears in the instrument cluster display or on the Infotainment system screen, contact a suitably qualified professional for
assistance. Volkswagen recommends contacting your Volkswagen dealership.

Disposal of old batteries and electronic devices


Old batteries

As with electronic devices, old batteries must be collected and recycled separately by the end user. These batteries are indicated by the crossed-out wheeled
garbage can symbol . You, as the end user, are legally obliged to return old batteries ⇒ .

In many federal states, old batteries can be handed in to an authorized Volkswagen dealer or authorized Volkswagen Service Facility.

You can obtain more information on return and recycling from your authorized Volkswagen dealer or authorized Volkswagen Service Facility.

Old electrical or electronic devices

Your vehicle contains old electrical/electronic devices, such as the navigation system SD card or remote controls. You can recognize these from the symbol of the
crossed-out wheeled garbage can .

Old devices with this marking must be collected separately from normal household garbage and disposed of in accordance with legal requirements.

Batteries within devices that are not permanently installed must be removed beforehand and disposed of separately as batteries.

Any saved personal data must be erased before disposal of old devices.

You can obtain more information on return and recycling from your authorized Volkswagen dealer or authorized Volkswagen Service Facility.

WARNING

If batteries containing lithium are damaged, gaseous or liquid substances may escape, posing a significant risk to health and the environment. A short circuit at
the battery terminal may result in a fire or explosion. This could result in serious or fatal injuries.

Take extreme care when handling batteries containing lithium.

Never heat up lithium-containing batteries.

Never damage lithium-containing batteries.

Never short circuit the battery terminals.

Batteries containing heavy metals are marked with the chemical symbols Hg (mercury), Cd (cadmium) and/or Pb (lead). Heavy metals can be harmful to the
health of humans and animals and accumulate in the environment.

In order to avoid these consequences, it is imperative to ensure you collect batteries separately and return them properly.

Batteries for the remote control vehicle key and remote controls may contain perchlorate. For information on how to handle these materials correctly, see the
following website: www.dtsc.ca.gov/perchlorate. Follow all the legal specifications for dealing with and disposing of these batteries. Volkswagen recommends
having these batteries replaced and disposed of by suitably qualified professionals. Volkswagen recommends contacting an authorized Volkswagen dealer or
authorized Volkswagen Service Facility.

343
Product recycling

Fig. 193

Fig. 194

Fig. 195

The Triman logo and the Infotri symbol contain important sorting information for the end consumer.

Declaration of conformity (Declaration of Compliance, Telecommunications and Electronic


Systems)
Radio Frequency Devices and Radiocommunication Equipment User Manual Notice.

These devices comply with:

FCC Part 15.19

These devices comply with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following 2 conditions:

(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and

(2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

FCC Part 15.21

CAUTION:

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.

Radio equipment
Provision for mobile telephone.

Electronic immobilizer

Remote start relay function.

Vehicle key
344
Keyless locking and starting system Keyless Access.

USA: VW Car-Net®.

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)

Autonomous Emergency Braking (Front Assist).

Rear Traffic Alert.

Third Party Copyright Information


https://www.volkswagen.com/softwareinfo
Some products installed in this vehicle contain software components that are covered under Open Source licenses.

A list of the Open Source software components being used, including copyright information, the relevant Open Source license conditions, and those applicable
license texts, are available at the website given above. The source code of specific Open Source software components can be requested from the vehicle
manufacturer. The manufacturer will provide the source code in accordance with the relevant license conditions, whereby you will only be charged for the provision
costs, e.g. delivery costs. The required information can be obtained at the website given above.

Old vehicle return and scrap disposal


Old vehicle return

At the end of its life cycle, your vehicle should be recycled or disposed of in an environmentally friendly manner. This is why the last owners of vehicles in many
states are legally obliged to hand their vehicles over to an authorized treatment facility.

Volkswagen has already made provision for this point: Recycling centers where you can hand over your vehicle are available throughout many federal states.

Find out more information about recycling centers from your authorized Volkswagen dealer or authorized Volkswagen Service Facility.

Scrap disposal

If scrapping the vehicle or its individual parts such as the airbag system and the safety belt pretensioners, the applicable safety regulations must always be followed.
Suitably qualified professionals will be familiar with these provisions. Volkswagen recommends contacting your authorized Volkswagen dealer or authorized
Volkswagen Service Facility.

Radar Sensors
Depending on the vehicle equipment, assistance systems, e.g. Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC), that use radar sensors may be installed in your vehicle.

Observe the legal regulations for restricted access to certain zones that prohibit entry for vehicles with radar sensors. Observe relevant traffic signs where
applicable. If you wish to enter one of these areas, first consult with an authorized Volkswagen dealer or authorized Volkswagen Service Facility to determine
whether there are radar sensors installed in your vehicle.

WARNING

Sensors are subject to physical system limitations. External sources of interference, e.g. from other vehicles, can affect the functions of the sensors and impair
the functions of the supporting systems. If the system does not work as expected, this may result in accidents and serious or fatal injuries.

Always pay attention to the traffic situation and vehicle environment.

Always adapt your speed and driving style to the visibility, weather, road and traffic conditions.

Reporting Safety Defects


If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic
Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying Volkswagen of America, Inc.

If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy
campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer, or Volkswagen of America, Inc.

To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at:
Tel.: 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153)
go to:
http://www.nhtsa.gov
or write to:
Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE. Washington, D.C. 20590
You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from
http://www.safercar.gov

345
Notes on radio regulations
Declaration of conformity for radio equipment for the USA
Approval mark for radio systems in the USA.
With this document, the manufacturer declares that the radio equipment listed in the following is in compliance with the basic requirements and other relevant
regulations and laws at the time of production:

The radio systems listed below are not available in every vehicle.

Connection to the exterior antenna

Antenna

Antenna amplifier

Bluetooth®.

Remote control key (vehicle)

Garage door opener

ID. Cockpit.

Infotainment system

Keyless Access.

Instrument cluster, electronic immobilizer

Radar sensors for assistance systems

Tire pressure sensors

Mobile phone interface

Volkswagen Car-Net control module

Wi-Fi hotspot.

Central control module

Radio systems with this marking must be collected separately from normal household garbage and disposed of in accordance with legal requirements
⇒ Disposal of old batteries and electronic devices . Symbol for limited use of certain hazardous substances in electrical and electronic devices in accordance
with the RoHS directive.

Approval numbers
FCC ID: 2AAJCBR20, FCC ID: 2AAJCBR21, FCC ID: 2AA98, FCC ID: 2AA98-COLOUR5C, FCC ID: 2AA98-MEDIUM5C, FCC ID: 2AA98-MEDIUM5C21,
FCC ID: 2AA98A, FCC ID: 2AHPN-WLC, FCC ID: 2AOUZ17101001, FCC ID: 2AOUZ17101002, FCC ID: 2AOUZ17101010, FCC ID: 2AOUZ17101022,
FCC ID: 2AOUZ17101023, FCC ID: 2AOUZ17101031, FCC ID: 2AOUZ17101032, FCC ID: 2AOUZ17101033, FCC ID: 2AOUZ17101034,
FCC ID: 2AOUZ17101041, FCC ID: 2AOUZ17101042, FCC ID: 2AOUZ17101043, FCC ID: 2AOUZ17101051, FCC ID: 2AOUZ17101052,
FCC ID: 2AOUZ17101053, FCC ID: 2AOUZ17101054, FCC ID: 2AOUZ17101055, FCC ID: 2AOUZ17101056, FCC ID: 2AOUZ17101057,
FCC ID: 2AOUZ17101071, FCC ID: 2AOUZ17101072, FCC ID: 2AOUZ18020531, FCC ID: 2AOUZ18020532, FCC ID: 2AOUZ18020533,
FCC ID: 2AOUZ18020534, FCC ID: 2AOUZ18100931, FCC ID: 2APOM-MQBA0, FCC ID: 2AVXWWSBRC001, FCC ID: 2AXPS-WPC003-1, FCC ID: 772C-
LB1FD, FCC ID: BEJLCW05-VWE5, FCC ID: BEJMIB2, FCC ID: BEJMIB2PQ, FCC ID: BEJ-MEBICAS3, FCC ID: BEJ-MIBPQMIN, FCC ID: BEJ-MIB3OI,
FCC ID: BEJTLAHW3IU-E, FCC ID: BEJTLAHW3IU-N, FCC ID: BEJTLVHE4IU-E, FCC ID: BEJTLVHE4IU-N, FCC ID: BEJTLVHM3IU-E, FCC ID: BEJTLVHW3IU-
E, FCC ID: BEJTLVHM3IU-N, FCC ID: BEJTLVM3IU-N, FCC ID: BEJTUVM01IU, FCC ID: CWTUGZZF1, FCC ID: CWTUGZZF2, FCC ID: IYZVK2, FCC ID: KR5-
BCMEVOC, FCC ID: KR5FS14T, FCC ID: KR5FS14TK, FCC ID: KR55NA920791A, FCC ID: LTQR3TR, FCC ID: NBG010180T, FCC ID: NBG010905A,
FCC ID: NBG011719A, FCC ID: NBG013854, FCC ID: NBG01RS4, FCC ID: NBG011719A, FCC ID: NBG10176, FCC ID: NBG9068, FCC ID: NBG92596263,
FCC ID: NBGBCMEVO, FCC ID: NBGBCMEVO5, FCC ID: NBGBCM2R, FCC ID: NBGFS09P03, FCC ID: NBGFS12A, FCC ID: NBGFS12A01,
FCC ID: NBGFS12P, FCC ID: NBGFS12P01, FCC ID: NBGFS12PM, FCC ID: NBGFS12P01M, FCC ID: NBGFS125C, FCC ID: NBGFS125C1,
FCC ID: NBGFS125C5, FCC ID: NBGFS173NP, FCC ID: NBGFS173NPM, FCC ID: NBGFS173NR, FCC ID: NBGFS1744M, FCC ID: NBGFS19,
FCC ID: NBGFS191, FCC ID: NBGFS93N, FCC ID: NBGMQBBB, FCC ID: NBGMQBBH, FCC ID: NBGPQ12P01, FCC ID: NBGRSB19, FCC ID: NF3-FR5CPEC,
FCC ID: NF3-LRR3SCU, FCC ID: NF3-LRR4, FCC ID: NF3-MRR1PLUS, FCC ID: NF3-MRR1REAR, FCC ID: NF3-MRREVO14F, FCC ID: NF3-LRR3SCU,
FCC ID: NT8-FPK8IMMO5D, FCC ID: NT8-VWMIBREGIO, FCC ID: NZLADHL5D, FCC ID: NZLJCIBUSHL4, FCC ID: OAYARS4B, FCC ID: OAYARS5B,
FCC ID: OYGTSSRE4UD, FCC ID: OYGTSSRE4UF, FCC ID: OYGTSSSG4G5, FCC ID: QIPALAS6A-US, FCC ID: QISME919BS-567BN, FCC ID: QISME919BS-
567BNB, FCC ID: QZ9-KA3, FCC ID: RK7MBC-NAR, FCC ID: RK7MBC-NAR2, FCC ID: RK7185-00, FCC ID: RK7186-00, FCC ID: RX2BNFHL,
FCC ID: RX2BNFLL, FCC ID: T8GA270, FCC ID: T8GA475, FCC ID: T8GA476, FCC ID: T8GP114, FCC ID: VPYLB1KD, FCC ID: WJLHT-5, FCC ID: NF3-
FR5CUEC, FCC ID: NBG01RS55, FCC ID: NF3-F5CP42, FCC ID: NBG01RS53,FCC ID: NBGFS125C1.

Interference statement

This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and

(2) This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

CAUTION TO USERS: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user`s authority to operate the

346
equipment.

FCC RF Exposure Statement

FCC ID: RK7MBC-NAR

This equipment complies with FCC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment. End users must follow the specific operating instruction for
satisfying RF exposure compliance. This transmitter must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter.

This is a CONSUMER device.

BEFORE USE, you MUST REGISTER THIS DEVICE with your wireless provider and have provider's consent. Most wireless providers consent to the use of signal
boosters. Some providers may not consent to the use of this device on their network. If you are unsure, contact your provider.

You MUST operate this device with approved antennas and cables as specified by the manufacturer. Antennas MUST be installed at least 20 cm (8 inches) from
any person.

You MUST cease operating this device immediately if requested by FCC or a licensed wireless service provider.

WARNING: E911 location information may not be provided or may be inaccurate for calls served by using this device.

Wireless notice

This device complies with FCC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment and meets the FCC radio frequency (RF) Exposure Guidelines.
This transmitter must not be colocated or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. The antenna should be installed and operated with
minimum distance of 20 cm between the radiator and your body.

FCC Class A digital device notice

NOTE: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are
designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates,
uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio
communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the
interference at his own expense.

FCC Class B digital device notice

NOTE: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are
designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency
energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee
that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined
by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

- Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.

- Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.

- Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.

- Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.

347
Technical data
Information on technical data
General information about specifications
As long as nothing else is specified or listed, the technical data applies to the base model. Different values may result due to optional equipment, different model
versions, special equipment, and country-specific equipment. The specifications in the legal vehicle documents always take precedence.

The drive and power of the vehicle are listed in the official vehicle registration.

Weight

The values for the curb weight in the following tables apply to a vehicle ready for operation with standard equipment, without a driver, with fluids including 100% full
fuel tank. Optional equipment and retrofitted equipment will increase the specified curb weight and reduce the possible load.

The load consists of the following weight:

Passengers.

All luggage inside and outside the vehicle.

Attachments.

The permitted total vehicle weight and the gross axle weight rating must never be exceeded. The permissible values are indicated on the safety compliance label or
on the identification label on the B-pillar on the driver's side ⇒ Safety certificate ⇒ Identification label.

Performance

The performance was determined without equipment that limits performance, such as add-on parts.

Due to technical or legal reasons, the performance specifications and mileage may vary.

On some engines with heavy duty suspension, the speed maximum speed may be limited and lower.

Incline angle

The incline angle is the specification up to which the vehicle is able to drive uphill on an angle with its own power. This can depend on the road conditions, the
weather conditions, and the engine power, among other things. The values apply to a vehicle that is in motion and not to a vehicle that starts to drive form a
stationary position.

A rising difference in altitude (incline) on a 100 m (300 ft) stretch is given in percentage or degrees (100% = 45 degrees).

Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)


Structure of the vehicle identification number (VIN)

The vehicle identification number (VIN, VIN ) consists of 17 characters. These characters can be sorted into seven groups.

The structure is explained using the following examples of vehicle identification numbers.

Group

1
Position 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
7

W V W Z Z Z C B Z M E 4 0 0 9 5 3
Example
W V W A F 2 9 N 4 8 Y 0 0 0 0 0 1

Vehicle manufacturer identification:

WVW Volkswagen Passenger Vehicles

WVG Volkswagen Passenger Vehicles

1VW Volkswagen Group of America Inc., Volkswagen de México, S.A. de C.V

3VW Volkswagen de México, S.A. de C.V

XW8 LLC Volkswagen Group Rus (Volkswagen/Skoda Kaluga)

MFB Garuda Matraman Motor (Indonesia)

Filler characters: The filler characters may vary depending on manufacturer, or contain information on the body shape and transmission type.

Vehicle class, depending on model:

3H Arteon

348
5T Touran

6R Polo

AC T-Roc convertible

BV Golf

CB Passat

CA Atlas

CR Touareg

Depending on the manufacturer, digits 7 to 9 can also contain information on the fuel type (7) and vehicle class (8 and 9).

Filler characters or check digits: The filler characters or check digits may vary depending on the manufacturer.

VIN index, depending on model year:

M 2021

N 2022

P 2023

R 2024

Production location, plant where the vehicle was manufactured:

C Volkswagen plant in Chattanooga

D Volkswagen plant in Bratislava

E Volkswagen plant in Emden

K Volkswagen plant in Osnabrück


Or: Volkswagen plant in Kaluga

M Volkswagen plant in Puebla

P Volkswagen plant in Zwickau

T Volkswagen plant in Pune

U Volkswagen plant in Uitenhage

V Volkswagen plant in Palmela

W Volkswagen plant in Wolfsburg

Y Volkswagen plant in Pamplona

The letter assignment for the production site may vary depending on the vehicle or be assigned twice.

Sequential production number for each model year.

Position of the vehicle identification number

349
Fig. 196 In the windshield: vehicle identification number (VIN)

The VIN can be read from the outside through the viewing window in the windshield. The viewing window is at the side of the lower section of the windshield.

In some models, it may be possible to display the VIN in the Service menu or in the vehicle settings, depending on the Infotainment system. The vehicle
identification number may also be located on the identification label.

The VIN may also be stamped in the following locations, depending on the model, country and engine:

In the right water drain channel in the engine/motor compartment

On the right suspension strut tower in the engine/motor compartment

In the engine compartment near the hinge for the hood on the right side of the vehicle.

Under the carpet behind the right front seat

Identification label

350
Fig. 197 Identification label (general example): version 1.

Depending on the country, the type approval number, such as the EU operating license, may be specified.

Manufacturer code.

Type approval.

Vehicle Identification number.

Gross Vehicle Weight Rating.


Gross combination weight rating (towing vehicle and trailer).

Front Gross Axle Weight Rating.

Rear Gross Axle Weight Rating.

Type approval number, differs according to country.

Vehicle model

Manufacturer's address.

Engine code.

Fig. 198 Identification label (general example): version 2.

Depending on the country, the type approval number, such as the EU operating license, may be specified.

Manufacturer code.

Type approval.

Vehicle Identification number.

351
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating.

Gross combination weight rating (towing vehicle and trailer).

Front Gross Axle Weight Rating.

Rear Gross Axle Weight Rating.

Depending on the country and model, the model plate may be visible in the lower section of the door pillar when the driver’s for front passenger door is open.
Vehicles exported to some countries do not have a model plate.

Safety certificate

Fig. 199 Safety certificate (general example).

Fig. 200 Safety certificate (general example).

A safety certificate on the driver door pillar displays the following information:

Manufacturer.

Country of manufacture.

Date of manufacture.

Gross vehicle weight rating.

Gross axle weight ratings.

Tire size.

Rim size

Tire pressure.

Vehicle Identification number.

Type designation.

352
Dimensions

Fig. 201 Vehicle dimensions.

The information in the table applies for the standard model with standard equipment.

For other wheel rims, tire sizes, options, differing model designs and retrofitted accessories, as well as special vehicles and vehicles in other countries, these values
can differ.

Information about how the weight specifications are compiled can be found in section ⇒ General information about specifications.

Golf GTI

Key for fig. 201:

1
5
3
5


1
5
4
5
(
mm
Front track 6
(in)
0
,
4
)

(
6
0
,
8
)

353
Key for fig. 201:

1
5
1
3


1
5
2
3
(
mm
Rear track 5
(in)
9
,
5
)

(
5
9
,
9
)

1
7
8
9
mm (
Width
(in) 7
0
.
4
)

2
0
7
3
mm (
Width from outside mirror to outside mirror
(in) 8
1
.
6
)

354
Key for fig. 201:

1
4
4
4


1
4
4
5
(
mm
Height at curb weight to top of the roof 5
(in)
6
,
8
)

(
5
6
,
9
)

1
4
6
3


1
4
6
5
(
mm 5
Height with curb weight with navigation antenna
(in) 7
,
6
)

(
5
7
,
7
)

355
Key for fig. 201:

1
7
3
4


1
7
3
5
(
mm
Height with open hood and at curb weight 6
(in)
8
,
2
)

(
6
8
,
3
)

1
9
9
9


2
0
0
1
(
mm
Height with open trunk lid and at curb weight 7
(in)
8
,
7
)

(
7
8
,
8
)

356
Key for fig. 201:

1
3
5


1
3
6
(
mm
Ground clearance at curb weight between the axles 5
(in)
,
3
)

(
5
,
4
)

2
6
3
1
(
mm
Wheelbase with curb weight 1
(in)
0
3
.
6
)

1
0
.
9
m (
Minimum turning circle diameter
(ft) 3
5
.
8
)

357
Key for fig. 201:

4
2
8
7


4
2
9
5
(
1
mm 6
Length from bumper to bumper
(in) 8
,
7
8
)

(
1
6
9
,
1
)

Golf R

Key for fig. 201:

1
5
3
9


1
5
4
1
(
mm
Front track 6
(in)
0
,
6
)

(
6
0
,
7
)

358
Key for fig. 201:

1
5
1
4


1
5
1
6
(
mm
Rear track 5
(in)
9
,
6
)

(
5
9
,
7
)

1
7
8
9
mm (
Width
(in) 7
0
.
4
)

2
0
7
3
mm (
Width from outside mirror to outside mirror
(in) 8
1
.
6
)

1
4
3
9
mm (
Height at curb weight to top of the roof
(in) 5
6
.
7
)

359
Key for fig. 201:

1
4
5
8
mm (
Height with curb weight with navigation antenna
(in) 5
7
.
4
)

1
7
2
9
mm (
Height with open hood and at curb weight
(in) 6
8
.
1
)

1
9
9
3
mm (
Height with open trunk lid and at curb weight
(in) 7
8
.
5
)

1
2
2
mm (
Ground clearance at curb weight between the axles
(in) 4
.
8
)

2
6
3
0
(
mm 1
Wheelbase with curb weight
(in) 0
3
.
5
4
)

360
Key for fig. 201:

1
1
.
9
4
m
Minimum turning circle diameter (
(ft)
3
9
.
2
)

4
2
9
0
(
mm
Length from bumper to bumper 1
(in)
6
8
.
9
)

Tank capacities
The fuel tank has the following volume:

approximately 45 l (12 gallons) for electric motors up to 140 kW and R-models

approximately 50 l (13.2 gallons) for electric motors from 140 kW

The capacity of the fuel tank includes an indeterminate reserve quantity that remains in the fuel tank when the fuel gauge shows that the fuel tank is empty. The
reserve quantity is variable and cannot reliably serve to increase the remaining range.

Gasoline engines
2.0 l, 4 cylinder, TFSI®, 180 kW (240 hp), gasoline engine
Engine overview

kW 180 at 5000 – 6500 rpm


Output
hp 240 at 5000 – 6500 rpm

Engine code DRNA

Nm 370 at 1600 – 4300 rpm


Maximum torque
lb-ft 273 at 1600 – 4300 rpm

D
S
Transmission SG6
G
®
7

km/h – –
Maximum speed
mph – –

Weight specifications and axle loads

D
S
Transmission SG6
G
®
7

361
1
kg 1421 4
5
Curb weight ⇒ General information about 4
specifications
3
2
lbs 3133
0
6

1
9
kg 1930
7
0
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
4
3
lbs 4255
4
3

1
0
kg 1030
7
0
Front Gross Axle Weight Rating
2
3
lbs 2271
5
9

9
kg 950 5
0

Rear Gross Axle Weight Rating


2
0
lbs 2094
9
4

5) This data was not available at the time of printing.

2.0 l, 4 cylinder, TFSI®, 235 kW (315 hp), gasoline engine


Engine overview

kW 235 at 5600 – 6500 rpm


Output
hp 315 at 5600 – 6500 rpm

Engine code DSFE

Nm 400 at 2000 – 5600 rpm


Maximum torque
lb-ft 295 at 2000 – 5600 rpm

Transmission DSG ®7 4MOTION

km/h –
Maximum speed
mph –

Weight specifications and axle loads

Curb weight ⇒ General information about kg 1579

specifications
lbs 3481

kg 2050

Gross Vehicle Weight Rating lbs 4519

362
kg 1100
Front Gross Axle Weight Rating
lbs 2425

kg 1000
Rear Gross Axle Weight Rating
lbs 2205

6) This data was not available at the time of printing.

2.0 l, 4 cylinder, TFSI®, 235 kW (315 hp), gasoline engine


Engine overview

kW 235 at 5900 – 6500 rpm


Output
hp 315 at 5900 – 6500 rpm

Engine code DSFF

Nm 380 at 2000 – 5900 rpm


Maximum torque
lb-ft 280 at 2000 – 5900 rpm

Transmission SG6 4MOTION

km/h –
Maximum speed
mph –

Weight specifications and axle loads

Curb weight ⇒ General information about kg 1544

specifications
lbs 3404

kg 2020
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
lbs 4453

kg 1060
Front Gross Axle Weight Rating
lbs 2337

kg 1010
Rear Gross Axle Weight Rating
lbs 2227

7) This data was not available at the time of printing.

363
Abbreviations used
AbbreviationMeaning

364

You might also like